Home

DL205 User Manual Volume 1 of 2

1. Outputs per module 12 Max inrush current Output 3A for 10 ms Common 10A for 10ms Outputs Consumed 16 4 unused see chart below Minimum load 5mA O 5VDC Commons per module 2 6pts per common Base power required 450mA max Operating voltage 5 30VDC 5 240VAC OFF to ON response 10 ms Output type Relay form A SPST ON to OFF response 10 ms Peak voltage 30VDC 264VAC Terminal type Removable AC frequency 47 to 60 Hz a a Status indicators Logic Side ON volt d N A eee Weight 4 6 oz 130 9 Max current resistive 1 5A point Fuses gt SAL common 4A slow blow replaceable Max leakage current 0 1mA 265 VAC Order D2 FUSE 4 5 per pack Typical Relay Life Operations Derating Chart Voltage Load Current Closures Points 24VDC Resistive 1A 500K 12 7 24VDC Solenoid 1A 100K O 5A Pt 110VAC Resistive 1A 500K Fe N 8 gt 110VAC Solenoid 1A 200K OUT RELAY J 0 75A Pt Tala 220VAC Resistive 1A 350K A 4 ON 220VAC Solenoid 1A 100K i i o fq fl E 1 5A Pt B 3 Co 01 sobe D2 12TR AN 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 5 240 VAC GA 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F Y T amp 5 240VAC Amb
2. instruction DirectSOFT Display x1 V1401 V1400 fi ree e 7lo 5 3 1fo 1 1 V1400 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator ROTL 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O K2 Acc 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the left OUTD V1500 Copy the value in the 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15141312 11109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 accumulator to V1500 Acc 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 O 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 and V1501 9 C 1 4 C 4 0 5 V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D B E A A 0 SHFT anosT 3 a 1 4 o o ENT as O Cc R T L PBS SHFT orn insta mur anost gt 2 sil 05 g5 Zur TPs gt Ea Es Eo Ao e 02 SE 09 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Rotate Right Rotate Right is a 32 bit instruction that ROTR rotates the bits in the accumulator a specified number Aaaa of places to the XxX x Y Y right ROTR 230 240 250 1 260 A aa
3. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 1 10 Getting Started Step 2 Install the Insert the CPU and I O into the base The CPU must go into the first slot of the base CPU and I O adjacent to the power supply Modules Each unit has a plastic retaining clip at the top and bottom Slide the retainer clips to the out position before installing the module e With the unit square to the base NE slide it in using the upper and o nm lower guides e Gently push the unit back until it is firmly seated in the backplane e Secure the unit to the base by pushing in the retainer clips o o ooo 0000 Lo D S a 09 D E Beo E Retaining Clips CPU must reside in first slot Placement of discrete analog and relay modules are not critical and may go in any slot in any base however for this example install the output module in the slot next to the CPU and the input module in the next Limiting factors for other types of modules are discussed in Chapter 4 System Design and Configuration You must also make sure you do not exceed the power budget for each base in your system configuration Power budgeting is also discussed in Chapter 4 Step 3 Remove Terminal Strip Access Cover
4. o Location Constant cialc12lcr1 cto ry LDF C10 C10 K4 OFF ON ON OFF I K4 Load the status of 4 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero e consecutive bits C10 C13 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1514131211109 8 76543210 XORF Y20 0 0 0 OJ Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of 1 1 0 K4 Accumulator mal deleted Acc 0 0 00000000000000 0000000000000110 pattern with the value in the accumulator Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 XORF Y20 Y23 ON OFF OFF OFF 1000 OUTF C20 K4 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 0 Of Of oO Of Of of 14 1 1 0 A Copy the specified number ra of bits from the accumulator 109 to C20 C23 50 Pp ns Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Location Constan C23 c22 c21 c20 Fo B c20 K4 ON ON ON OFF STR gt 1 ENT 23 e L D F B A E Dv SHFT inpst 3 5 gt gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT i i gt 7 ENT a E x Q F C A E SHFT Poe og SHFT gt NEXT 2 o gt 4 ENT GX F Cc A E Our SHFT s gt PREV PREV 2 o gt P ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions Exclusive Or with The Exclusive Or with Stack instruction is Stack a 3
5. MSB DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Additional Timer T and Counter CT Contacts LSB Timer Counter 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Address Address 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V41104 V41144 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V41105 V41145 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V41106 V41146 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V41107 V41147 EL This portion of the table shows additional Timer contacts available with the DL250 1 and DL260 Er MSB DL250 1 DL260 Additional Timer T Contacts LSB Timer ER iy 36 16 344 38 32 alres 4 3 2 1 0 Address po 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41110 oa 3 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41111 S 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41112 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41113 317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 3
6. Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non real number was encountered Math Function Range of Argument SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with Sine Real The Sine Real instruction takes the sine of SINR the real number stored in the accumulator SINR xixixi The result resides in the accumulator Both A the original number and the result are in IEEE 32 bit format Cosine Real The Cosine Real instruction takes the COSR cosine of the real number stored in the COSR xixi xis accumulator The result resides in the a aan a ee accumulator Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32 bit format Tangent Real The Tangent Real instruction takes the TANR tangent of the real number stored in the SINR Paar ar accumulator The result resides in the 230 240 250 1 260 accumulator Both the original number and N the result are in IEEE 32 bit format a2 cf Arc Sine Real The Arc Sine Real instruction tak
7. CPU Intelligent Module X1 LD The constant value K0102 specifies the base number Data K0102 01 and the base slot 12 Add 0 number 02 v1400 13141112 ress 34 visor 7 la 5 l6 e Address 1 The constant value K6 Address 2 LD specifies the number of vi4o2 0 1 9 0 78 Add K6 ress 3 bytes to be read V1403 X X X X 90 Address 4 X X X X wade 01 Address 5 The constant value KO JI LD v specifies the starting address Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E in the intelligent module B F STR 2 1 ENT l L D A B A c AS RD V1400 is the starting location SHFT ANDST 3 gt PREV 0 1 0 2 ENT Q v1400 no data oil be aad as specified data will be store L D G SHFT llanpsTi 3 gt PREV 6 ENT Se L D A a n SHFT llanpstTi 3 gt PREV ENT R D B E A A SHFT orn a gt 1 4 o o ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Intelligent I O Instructions Write to Intelligent The Write to Intelligent Module instruction Module writes a block of data 1 128 bytes WT maximum to an intelligent I O module from Zis dig a block of V memory in the CPU The AT function parameters are loaded into the first vaga 230 240 250 1 260 and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three
8. XORD the value in the accumulator with the constant value Acc 909 1010310008131 41 14100017 0300000808181 101 0 36476A38 XORD 36476A388 0 0 11011001000111 0110101000111000 OUTD Acc 0 1 1 oJoJo 1 o o o 1 1 1 oJo 1 o 1 o o oJo 1 oJo 1 o o o o 1 o v2010 Copy the value in the Pazza A La accumulator to V2010 and V2011 6 2 3 9 4 2 4 2 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v2011 v2010 B STR gt 1 a J L D D A A A In SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 0 0 0 ENT as x Q D K Rs SHFT SET or SHFT 3 gt SHFT JMP g5 Pa Mes WE WE Wee a o a O A E co Sc GX D c A B A DN our SHFT 3 2 gt 2 o 1 o EN DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Logical Instructions Exclusive Or The Exclusive Or Formatted instruction Formatted performs an exclusive OR of the binary ___ XORF Aaaa XORF value in the accumulator and a specified K bbb ZVIAVIT IZ range of discrete memory bits 1 32 230 240 250 1 260 The instruction requires a starting location Aaaa and the number of bits
9. MSB DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Control Relays C LSB 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 als 017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V40600 037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V40601 057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V40602 077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V40603 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V40604 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V40605 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V40606 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V40607 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V40610 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V40611 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V40612 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V40613 317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305
10. DirectSOFT v2001 v2000 xt LDD 6 7 o s 3 1J 0 1 11 V2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SHFL Acc 0 1 4 0 0 1 4 1 oJoJo oJo 1 o 1 oJo 1 1 o o o 1 o o o o o o o 1 KA The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted 10 bit positions to the left Shifted out of the accumulator OUTD v2010 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15141312 11109 876543210 Copy the value in the Acc 0 0 Of 1 Of 1 0 OF 1 1 0 OF OF 1 OF Of 0 070 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 OF O OJ OJO JO accumulator to V2010 and 2011 tl4 cla4 ol4 o o v2011 v2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 PNF L D D c A A A SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 0 0 o ENT s H F L A SHFT pgr SHFT 5 se TANDET gt SHFT a ENT GX D c A B A our SHFT 3 gt 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Shift Right SHFR Viv Viv 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT lost Shift Right is a 32 bit instruction that shifts the bits in the accumulator a specified number Aaaa of places to the right The vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits shifted out of the accumulator are Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions
11. Add Add is a 16 bit instruction that adds a ADD BCD value in the accumulator with a ran ar ae BCD value in a V memory location Aaaa The result resides in the ADD 230 240 250 1 260 accumulator Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are added to the value in V2006 using the Add instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 V2000 4 9 3 5 LD
12. Instruction Page Instruction Page ACON ASCII Constant 5 199 BIN Binary 5 130 ACOSR Arc Cosine Real 5 122 BCALL Block Call Stage 7 27 ACRB ASCII Clear Buffer 5 228 BEND Block End Stage 7 27 ADD Add BCD 5 88 BLK Block Stage 7 27 ADDB Add Binary 5 101 BTOR Binary to Real 5 134 ADDBD Add Binary Double 5 102 CMP Compare 5 83 ADDBS Add Binary Top of Stack 5 117 CMPD Compare Double 5 84 ADDD Add Double BCD 5 89 CMPF Compare Formatted 5 85 ADDE poe Form tted nie CMPR Compare Real Number 5 87 ADDR Add Real 5 90 CMPS Compare Stack 5 86 ADDS Add Top of Stack 5 113 CMPV see Compare 5 220 AEX ASCII Extract 5 219 CNT Counter 5 46 ARIND ASON Find 32216 COSR Cosine Real 5 121 AN ASCIEIN Sele CV Converge Stage 7 25 AND And for contacts or boxes 5 14 5 32 5 71 CVJMP Canverdedumia Saas 725 AND STR And Store 5 16 ANDB And Bit of Word 5 15 mah mee Poe DEC Decrement 5 100 ANDD And Double 5 72 ANDE And if Equal 5 29 DECB Decrement Binary 5 108 ANDF And Formatted 5 73 palin ae pay ANDI And imm diate 535 DEGR Degree Real Conversion 5 136 ANDMOV And Move 5171 DISI Disable Interrupts 5 188 ANDN And Not 5 14 5 32 DW Divide oa ANDNB And Not Bit of Word 5 15 DNB Divide Binary Pale ANDND And Negative Differential 5 23 DIVBS Divide Binary Top of Stack 37120 ANDNE And if Not Equal 5 29 DWD Divide Double 5 98 ANDNI And Not Immediate 5 35 DIVF Divide Formatted 5 112 7 AN
13. DirectSOFT32 Ki LDF c10 Location Constant_ Torslor2 on c1o 1 K4 C10 K4 ON ON ON OFF Load the status of 4 consecutive bits C10 C13 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero SS into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2019 18 17 16 1514131211109 8 76543210 ANDE Y20 0 0 0 0 of of of of of of of of of of of off of of of of of of of of of of of of 1 1 1 0 K4 Accumulator And the binary bit pattern Y20 Y23 with the value in Acc 0 0 00000000000000 0000000000001110 the accumulator Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 AND Y20 Y23 LON OFF OFF OFF 1000 OUTF C20 Ka Acc o o o o o o o o o o o o 1 o o o LA Copy the value in the lower ES 4 bits in accumulator to ep C20 C23 gt Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Location Constant c23 c22 c21 c20 22 B C20 K4 ON OFF OFF OFF Com STR gt 1 ENT 20 e L D F B A E I SHFT inpst 3 gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT y a gt 4 ENT am v F C A E Ano SHFT 7 gt NEXT 7 o gt 4 ENT GX F G A E Our SHFT 5 gt PREV PREV 7 Fi gt 3 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 74 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions And with Stack The And with Stack instruction is a 32 bit ANDS instruction that logically ands the value in the accumulator with the first level of
14. v2010 Gray Code BCD Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 0000000000 0000 B 0000000001 0001 sra gt 1 ENT z 7 z 0000000011 0002 SHFT lanbsT 3 5 gt 1 0 gt 1 e ENT 0000000010 0003 0000000110 0004 0 sHT S om lo mes ENT 5 0000000111 0005 as GX v c A B A sa X gt SHFT o E a y o ENT 0000000101 0006 co 0000000100 0007 O e 5 y or TE 1000000001 1022 1000000000 1023 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze a 25 o5 ope oD SE 47 Shuffle Digits SFLDGT X V iV iv 230 240 250 1 260 Shuffle Digits Block Diagram Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions The Shuffle Digits instruction shuffles a maximum of 8 digits rearranging them in a specified order This function requires parameters to be loaded into the first level SFLDGT of the accumulator stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to use the shuffle digit function The example on the following page shows a program for the Shuffle Digits function Step 1 Load the value digits to be shuffled into the first level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the order that the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator Note If the number used to specify the order contains a O or 9 F the corresponding posi
15. Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in V2006 and V2007 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 v2001 v2000 O0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4 LDD I v2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 010 6 3 2 7 4 Accumulator SUBD 6 7
16. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications In This Chapter Safety Guidelines Mounting Guidelines Installing DL205 Bases Installing Components in the Base Base Wiring Guidelines O Wiring Strategies I O Modules Position Wiring and Specifications Glossary of Specification Terms 22 Installation Wiring and Specifications Safety Guidelines 5A ale 5 9 TZ O IS A So 50 wa bald ve EU Plan for Safety Safety Techniques Class 1 Division 2 Approval Sk WARNING Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation Automation systems can fail and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment Do not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment You should use external electromechanical devices such as relays or limit switches that are independent of the PLC application to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage Every automation application is different so there may be special requirements for your particular application Make sure you follow all national state and local government requirements for the proper installa
17. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes y x1 Y3 STR x 1 ENT OUT T 2 OR SHFT N D e RS x2 Xx 2 ENT 3 i OUT Ye 5 ENT oO Se 09 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions And Positive The And Positive Differential instruction Differential logically ands a normally open contact in ANDPD parallel with another contact in a rung The a TE a status of the contact will be open until the Y cL associated image register point makes an J 230 240 250 1 260 Off to On transition closing it for one CPU scan Thereafter it remains open until another Off to On transition And Negative The And Negative Differential instruction Differential logically ands a normally open contact in ANDND parallel with another contact in a rung The AE TFTF status of the contact will be open until the m associated image register point makes an 1 Lt 230 240 250 1 260 On to Off transition closing it for one CPU scan Thereafter it remains open until another On to Off transition Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Inputs X 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 177 0 377 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following example Y5 will energize
18. ANDS e Acc 0 10 1010001111110 001010000111101 0 AND the value in the 36476438 accumulator with AND top of stack 0 0 110 110010001114 0110101000111000 the first level of the accumulator stack Acc 0 0 op 1po 1 ojojof1popojyo 1 1 o popo 1 o 1jojofojoyo 1 1 1 ofojo V1500 Copy the value in the UA Fa ee e 8198 accumulator to V1500 and V1501 vV1500 V150 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Sm al WE ENT SHFT asta la gt Us fa o o En YND SHFT PRST ENT ur SHFT P 3 gt Pa Es o o e l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 75 Accumulator Logical Instructions Or OR The Or instruction is a 16 bit instruction that logically ors the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a specified V Y Viv 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT32 Y memory location Aaaa The result OR resides in the accumulator The discrete waaa status flag indicates if the result of the Or is zero Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V me
19. Load the value 3245 into the Acc 0 0 o 0 p3 2 4 5 accumulator Level1 X X X X X X X X Previ Acc val revious Acc value eves X KOM RX D aco x x x x x x x x N Ie Rie oe RC KO Level4 X X X X X X X X gt Level5 X X X X X X X X gt Level6 X X X X X X X X E LD Constant 5 1 5 1 Level X X X X X X X X S K5151 Current Acc value E 2 AA AAA N a Load the value 5151 into the Acc 0 0 o oJis ika l hi h lue 1234 E ee ing the value 123 Previous Acc value Accumulator Stack RGA S ea aga CE IDO A Level2 X X X X X X X X Level3 X X X X X X X X gt Level4 X X X X X X X X gt Level5 X X X X X X X X gt Level6 X X X X X X X X S LD Constant 6 3 6 13 Level7 X X X X X X X X iS Level8 X X X X X X X X K6363 Current Acc value N ace 0 o o o J s 3 6 3 Load the value 6363 into the Bucket accumulator pushing the value 5151 Previous Acc value Accumulator Stack to the 1st stack location and the value 3245 to the 2nd stack location Acc 0 0 o 0l5 1 5 1 Levelt 0 0 0 0 5 1 5 1 gt Level2 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5 Level3 X X X X X X X X gt Level4 X X X X X X X X gt Level5 X X X X X X X X gt Level6 X X X X X X X X gt Level7 X X X X X X X X gt Level8 X X X X X X X X R T Bucket The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator When a POP is executed the value which was in the accumulator is cleared and th
20. Scan Solve Solve Solve Solve 10 Scan Program Program Program Program U 5C N Read Write e Sm Inputs Outputs og jo DS Field Input go 33 CPU Reads CPU Writes 5 nout Modil Inputs L lt Outputs e nput Module Off On Delay Output Module Off On Delay O Response Time e In this case you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items Input Delay Scan Time Output Delay Response Time Normal Maximum The l O response time is longest when the module senses the input change after the I O Response Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle In this case the new input status does not get read until the following scan The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation In this case you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items Input Delay 2 x Scan Time Output Delay Response Time DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc no 5 Os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt as 0 Scan Solve Solve Solve Solve Scan Program Program Program Program read Write Inputs Outputs Field Input CPU Reads CPU Writes Inputs Outputs Input Module ag gt Off On Delay Output Module Off On Delay m ja 1 0 Response Time g
21. The example table to the right contains V3000 V3000 BCD data as shown for demonstration purposes Suppose we want to do a table 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 1 shift right by 3 BCD digits 12 bits Converting to octal 12 bits is 14 octal 5 6 7 8 112125 Using the Table Shift Right instruction and specifying a shift by octal 14 we have the 1 1 2 2 E 3 4 4 1 resulting table shown at the far right Notice that the 2 3 4 sequence has been 3131414 516163 discarded and the 0 0 0 sequence has been shifted in at the bottom 5151616 ololols The following ladder example assumes the data at V3000 to V3004 already exists as shown above We will use input XO to trigger the Table Shift Right operation First we will load the table length 5 words into the accumulator stack Next we load the starting address into the accumulator Since V3000 is an octal number we have to convert it to hex by using the LDA command Finally we use the Table Shift Right instruction and specify the number of bits to be shifted 12 decimal which is 14 octal DirectSOFT32 Display X0 LD Load the constant value 5 j Hex into the lower 16 bits II K5 of the accumulator LDA Convert octal 3000 to HEX and load the value into the O 3000 accumulator This is the table beginning Do a table shift right by 12 TSHFER bits which is 14 octal
22. 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 o DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Decrement Binary The Decrement Binary instruction DECB decrements a binary value in a specified V memory ion 1 h time th I dL Lid memory locatio by each time the instruction is executed DECB 230 240 250 1 260 A aaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when C5 is on the value in V2000 is decreased by 1 DirectSOFT32 V2000 4 A 3 C c5 DECB v2000 Decrement the binary value in the accumulator by 1 v2000 4 A 3 B Handheld Programmer Keystrokes c F sta gt SHFT gt ENT D E Cc B Cc A A A SHFT Ji 3 4 2 l gt 2 0 0 o e
23. on if the current value is equal to or The timer discrete status bit and the greater than the preset value For current value are not specified in the example the discrete status bit for timer 2 timer Instruction would be T2 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Timers T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 preset values Y 2000 2877 2000 8777 10000 17777 10000 87777 i 1400 7377 1400 7377 file ae p gt 2000S 70 gt 10000 17777 10000 37777 07 eseon K 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 m iad TV 0 77 or V41100 41103 0 177 or V41100 41107 0 377 or V41100 V41117 0 377 or V41100 41117 Ti k halos il V T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 There are two methods of programming timers You can perform functions when the ae timer reaches the specified preset using the the discrete status bit or use the as comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on one 33 timer The following examples show each method of using timers BE 9 y s S ina NOTE The current value of a timer can be accessed by using the TA data type i e o TA2 Current values may also be accessed by the V memory location DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register In the following example a t
24. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 71 Accumulator Logical Instructions Accumulator Logical Instructions And The And instruction is a 16 bit instruction AND that logically ands the value in the lower Farar 16 bits of the accumulator with a specified V memory location Aaaa The AND 290 2m 2001 260 result resides in the accumulator The Aaaa discrete status flag indicates if the result of the And is zero Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the accumulator is anded with the value in V2006 using the And instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32
25. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Add Binary Double Add Binary Double is a 32 bit instruction ADDBD that adds the unsigned 2 s complement xl Mix Iw binary value in the accumulator with the value Aaaa which is either two ADDBD 230 240 250 1 2 ee ae eee ee consecutive V memory locations or 32 bit Aaaa unsigned 2 s complement binary constant The result resides in the accumulator Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa Vmemory V All See 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 53 Constant K O0 FFFFFFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The binary value in the accumulator is added with the binary value in V1420 and V1421 using the Add Binary Double instruction The value in
26. en gt 1 ENT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHEL ANDST j 3 gt ser Se 1 ENT SHET ANDST g 3 SRST Ser gt e 2 ENT SHFT E ae p p ENT sHFT gt 3 ANDST g ANDST ail 2 END SHET mr 2 insta ta Ja Po ls ls Jen SHFT Nun 2 Isra ur gt a IP 3 S a 3 ENT SHFT Miur 2 Isra ma gt a WF 5 Fa ll 9 ENT Sur gt SH Yano gt o Wo Mo EN Load Real Number The Load Real Number instruction loads a LDR real number contained in two consecutive LDR V memory locations or an 8 digit constant A aaa ol CA LA into the accumulator 230 240 250 1 260 Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory V All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Real Constant R 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 3 402823E 038 DirectSOFT32 allows you to enter real numbers directly by using the leading R to indicate a real number entry You can enter a constant such as ex LR Pi shown in the example to the right To enter dll negative numbers use a minus after the R For very large numbers or very small numbers LDR you can use exponential notation The number to R5 3E6 the right is 5 3 million The OUTD instruction stores it in V1400 and V1401 OUTD V140
27. system Module Unit Local CPU Base Local Expansion Remote l O Base Base CPUs CPU Slot Only DC Input Modules Y Y Y AC Input Modules Y Y Y DC Output Modules Y Y Y AC Output Modules Y Y Y Relay Output Modules Y Y Y Analog Input and Output Modules Y Y Y Local Expansion Base Expansion Unit Y Y Base Controller Module CPU Slot Only Serial Remote I O Remote Master Y Remote Slave Unit CPU Slot Only Ethernet Remote Master Y CPU Interface Ethernet Base Controller CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only WinPLC CPU Slot Only DeviceNet CPU Slot Only Profibus CPU Slot Only SDS CPU Slot Only Specialty Modules Counter Interface Slot 0 Only Counter I O Y nt Data Communications Y Ethernet Communications Y BASIC CoProcessor Y Simulator Y Y Y Filler Y Y Y When used in H2 ERM Ethernet Remote l O systems DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 S aL n Os 33 ou co 42 Vs oe 44 System Design and Configuration Automatic I O Configuration SILIL Y 230 240 250 1 260 Manual I O Configuration The DL205 CPUs automatically detect any installed I O modules including specialty modules at powerup and establish the correct I O configuration and addresses This applies to modules located in local and local expansion I O bases For most applications you will never have to change the configuration I O addresses use octal numbering starting at XO and YO in the slot next t
28. Handheld Programmer Keysi gt B 1 ENT GX OUT D 3 ENT rokes cont STR gt gt SHFT SHFT MLR gt ENT GX OUT VAIN ENT 5 as so Ey 23 O 5 0 mn E DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 52 Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Shift Register The Shift Register instruction shifts data SR through a predefined number of control relays The control ranges in the shift 44 Y Y register block must start at the beginning 230 240 250 1 260 of an 8 bit boundary and end at the end of an 8 bit boundary DATA _ SR The Shift Register has three contacts Fom Adaa e Data determines the value 1 or CLOCK 0 that will enter the register e Clock shifts the bits one position RESET on each low to high transition e Reset resets the Shift Register to all zeros To B bbb With each off to on transition of the clock input the bits which make up the shift register block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed into the starting bit position in the shift register The direction of the shift depends on the entry in the From and To fields From CO to C17 would define a block of sixteen bits to be shifted from left to right From C17 to CO would define a block of sixtee
29. T T T T T T T T T T 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 50 68 86 104 122 131 F 50 68 86 104 122 131 F Ambient Temperature C F Ambient Temperature C F 12 24VDC Internally Internally 1 connected connected it 12 24VDC l Sipe Y go Internal module circuitry Internal module circuitry o Optical OUTPUT isolator 12 24VDC v Optical Isolator D2 08TD1 D2 08TD2 T 12 24VDC Gp E o COM OUTPUT YO O YO 5A CQM DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 D2 16TD1 2 DC Output Installation Wiring and 2 37 Specifications D2 16TD2 2 DC Output Outputs per module 16 current sinking Outputs per module 16 current sourcing Commons per module 1 2 I O terminal points Commons per module 2 Operating voltage 10 2 26 4 VDC Operating voltage 10 2 26 4 VDC Output type NPN open collector Output
30. 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Immediate Instructions Load Immediate The Load Immediate Formatted instruction Formatted loads a 1 32 bit binary value into the LDIF accumulator The value reflects the current status of the input module s at the time the ___ LDIF X aaa Xxx v instruction is executed Accumulator bits K bbb 230 240 250 1 260 that are not used by the instruction are set to l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DirectSOFT32 zero Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa bbb Inputs 0 1777 Constant 1 32 In the following example when CO is on the binary pattern of X10 X17 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction The Out Immediate Formatted instruction could be used to copy the specified number of bits in the accumulator to the specified outputs on the output module such as Y30 Y37 This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs without waiting on the CPU scan LDIF K8 X10 Load the value of 8 consecutive location into the accumulator starting with X10 Unused accumulator bits are se Location Constant X10 K8 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 ON
31. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Real to Binary The Real to Binary instruction converts the Conversion real number in the accumulator to a binary RTOB value The result resides in the RTOB accumulator Both the binary and the real xX X v v number may use all 32 bits of the 230 240 250 1 260 accumulator Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit SP75 On when a number cannot be converted to binary In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The RTOB instruction converts the real value in the accumulator the equivalent binary number format The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction The handheld programmer would display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value DirectSOFT32 Display x LDD 4 8 ASE 4 8 1210 Real Number Format II V1400 V1401 V1400 Load the value in V1400 and i i
32. value in the stack up one level In the example when CO is on the value 4545 that was on top of the stack is moved into the accumulator using the Pop instruction The value is output to V2000 using the Out instruction The next Pop moves the value 3792 into the accumulator and outputs the value to V2001 The last Pop moves the value 7930 into the accumulator and outputs the value to V2002 Please note if the value in the stack were greater than 16 bits 4 digits the Out Double instruction would be used and 2 V memory locations for each Out Double need to be allocated Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero co POP Previous Acc value Ld aco Xxx x x x x Pop the 1st value on the stack into the Current Acc value Accumulator Stack accumulator and move stack values 7 2 up one location Acc 0 o o 0 pp4 5 4 5 Levelt 0 0 0 0 3 9 5 OUT A pied EEES X X X XX X X X v2000 Level 3 IS li A
33. DirectSOFT32 V1401 V1400 X1 LDD Load the value in V1400 and elsjojo 3 5 4 4 j V1401 into the accumulator ol V1400 Load the value in V1410 and 6 5 0j0 3 5 4 4 oe V1411 into the accumulator Ace V1410 Compare the value in the vi4t V1410 CMPS accumulator with the value in the first level of the 515 0 3 5 4 4 accumulator stack SP60 C30 5 5 0 0 3 5 4 4 ouT Acc Compared with Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Top of B Stack sra gt 1 ENT L D D B E A A SHFT AnpsTt 3 3 gt 1 4 0 o ENT L D D B E B A SHFT Anpst 3 3 zd 1 4 1 0 ENT Cc M P S a T c SHFT 2 SHFT ORST cv RST ENT e So E PREV a A M ent p GX c D A S V OUT gt NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT 2 3 0 ENT gt S 09 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Logical Instructions 9 87 Compare Real The Compare Real Number instruction Number compares a real number value in the CMPR accumulator with two consecutive V xT xI Tv memory locations containing a real ____ CMPR number The corresponding status flag will Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 be turned on indicating the result of the comparison Both numbers being compared are 32 bits long Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All See p 3 52 All See p
34. DIN Rail slot Use rail conforming to Al DIN EN 50022 a El S A Base Total Width B Mounting Hole C Component Width D Width with Exp Unit Base Inches Millime Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters ters 3 slot 6 77 172mm 6 41 163mm 5 8 148mm 7 24 184mm 4 slot 7 99 203mm 7 63 194mm 7 04 179mm 8 46 215mm 6 slot 10 43 265mm 10 07 256mm 9 48 241mm 10 90 277mm 9 slot 14 09 358mm 13 74 349mm 13 14 334mm 14 56 370mm DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications EM Panel Mounting It is important to design your panel properly to help ensure the DL205 products and Layout operate within their environmental and electrical limits The system installation should comply with all appropriate electrical codes and standards It is important the system also conforms to the operating standards for the application to insure proper performance The diagrams below reference the items in the following list lle OK ly Airflow Ta 1 Mount the bases horizontally to provide proper ventilation 2 If you place more than one base in a cabinet there should be a minimum of 7 2 183mm between bases 3 Provide a minimum clearance of 2 50mm between the base and all sides of the cabinet There should also be at least 1 2 30mm of clearance between the base and any wiring ducts 4 There mu
35. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Accumulator X1 LDD Load the hex equivalent of 12345678 decimal into Kbc614e the accumulator BCD Convert the value to 1401 11400 BCD format It will 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 occupy eight BCD digits 32 bits OUTD Output the number to x 2 Accumulator V1400 and V1401 using V1400 the OUTD instruction acc 2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6 LD Load the constant K2 into the accumulator K2 2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6 MULD Multiply the accumulator contents 2 by the V1400 8 digit number in V1400 mies 1500 and V1401 Pe accumulator V1402 accumulator to wie and V1403 using the OUTD instruction Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 END FL D D B Cc G B E E SHF ANDST 3 3 gt PREV SHFT 4 2 SHFT 6 4 4 SHFT 4 ENT 109 5g sHFT B c p ENT as il 2 3 cS GX D B E A A our SHFT 3 gt 1 4 0 0 ENT 23 je gt ll D c 30 SHFT llanpsTi 3 gt PREV El ENT am m M U L D B E A A SHFT orst isa anost 3 gt 1 4 0 o ET GX D B E A Cc our SUT 3 gt 1 4 0 2 Ri DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Multiply Real The Multiply Real instruction multiplies a MULR real number in the accumulator with either TH TF a real constant or a real number occupying MULR two consecutive V memory locations The Aaaa
36. Connect PC to either Port DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation Auxiliary Functions Many CPU setup tasks involve the use of Auxiliary AUX Functions The AUX Functions perform many different operations ranging from clearing ladder memory displaying the scan time copying programs to EEPROM in the handheld programmer etc They are divided into categories that affect different system parameters Appendix A provides a description of the AUX functions You can access the AUX Functions from DirectSOFT32 or from the DL205 Handheld Programmer The manuals for those products provide step by step procedures for accessing the AUX Functions Some of these AUX Functions are designed specifically for the Handheld Programmer setup so they will not be needed or available with the DirectSOFT32 package The following table shows a list of the Auxiliary functions for the different CPUs and the Handheld Programmer Note the Handheld Programmer may have additional AUX functions that are not supported with the DL205 CPUs AUX Function and Descrip 230 240 250 1 260 AUX Function and Description 230 240 250 1 260 HPP ton AUX 6 Handheld Programmer Configuration AUX e BEE Spotetlons 61 Show Revision Numbers Y Y Y Y Cl nack
37. Remove the terminal strip cover It is a e small strip of clear plastic that is located on l e 0 the base power supply Lift off Step 4 Add I O To finish this quick start exercise or study other examples in this manual you will Simulation need to install an input simulator module or wire an input switch as shown below and add an output module Using an input simulator is the quickest way to get physical inputs for checking out the system or a new program To monitor output status any discrete output module will work ef Y Y LI LI LI 55 5 oo O ela e 2 ag El 57 ee el ele g E A gme 37 e D g P C C C Toggle switch N A N Output o C Module gaue X Y Wire the switches or other field devices prior to applying power to the system to ensure a point is not accidentally turned on during the wiring operation Wire the input module X0 to the toggle switch and 24VDC auxiliary power supply on the CPU terminal strip as shown Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Specifications provides a list of I O wiring guidelines DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Getting Started 111 Step 5 Conne
38. 338 Y Inductive load devices devices with a coil generate transient voltages when de energized with a relay contact When a relay contact is closed it bounces which energizes and de energizes the coil until the bouncing stops The transient voltages generated are much larger in amplitude than the supply voltage especially with a DC supply voltage When switching a DC supplied inductive load the full supply voltage is always present when the relay contact opens or bounces When switching an AC supplied inductive load there is one chance in 60 60 Hz or 50 50 Hz that the relay contact will open or bounce when the AC sine wave is zero crossing If the voltage is not zero when the relay contact opens there is energy stored in the inductor that is released when the voltage to the inductor is suddenly removed This release of energy is the cause of the transient voltages When inductive load devices motors motor starters interposing relays solenoids valves etc are controlled with relay contacts it is recommended that a surge suppression device be connected directly across the coil of the field device If the inductive device has plug type connectors the suppression device can be installed on the terminal block of the relay output DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications Transient Voltage Suppressors TVS or
39. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes gt 2 1 ENE SHFT nos s WPa gt We o Meo Ieo En SET i 8 mur aN ENT ur SHFT gt 3 gt i 2 0 i 1 A 0 ENT l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Ten s Complement The Ten s Complement instruction takes BCDCPL the 10 s complement BCD of the 8 digit accumulator The result resides in the oi EEES accumulator The calculation for this BCDCPL 290 240 2001 200 instruction is 100000000 accumulator value 10 s complement value In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator The 10 s complement is taken for the 8 digit accumulator using the Ten s Complement instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 V2001 v2000 ofolofolfolo s 7 x LDD I 2000 Load the value in V2000 and Ace 9 0 o 0jo 8 7 V2001 into the accumulator BCDCPL acc 9 o o o 9 9 3 Takes a 10 s complement of the value in the accumulator One 9 9 9 9 9 911 T3 V2010 v2011 v2
40. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes n a 0 ENT SHFT ree D A gt prev F A ENT senos a Io gt Ia fo lo fo E SHFT UE SHFT a H AF E EN gt next B E F ENT l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 1 71 Table Instructions AND Move The AND Move instruction copies data from ANDMOV a table to the specified memory location _ ANDMOV ac arars ANDing each word with the accumulator A aaa data as it is written 230 240 250 1 260 OR Move The Or Move instruction copies data from a ORMOV table to the specified memory location ___ LDR xT XIX IS ORing each word with the accumulator A aaa contents as it is written 230 240 250 1 260 Exclusive OR Move The Exclusive OR Move instruction copies XORMOV data from a table to the specified memory XORMOV xila xiz location XORing each word with the A aaa accululator value as it is written 230 240 250 1 260 The following description applies to the AND Move OR Move and Exclusive OR Move instructions A table is just a range of V memory locations These instructions copy the data of a table to another specified location preforming a logical operation on each word with the accumulator contents as the new t
41. v1419 s 7 3 o s o 2 6 Copy data from the accumulator to V1410 and V1411 visi v1410 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 nh e DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Changing the Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator The result of the Accumulator Data manipulated data resides in the accumulator The data that was being manipulated is cleared from the accumulator The following example loads the constant BCD value 4935 into the accumulator shifts the data right 4 bits and outputs the result to V1410 xi LD Constant 4 9 3 5 I K4935 ae a ee Load the value 4935 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 161 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 5 4 3 210 Ace 0 0 0 0 of of 0 of of OJ of Of of of of of of 1 of of 1 of of 4 of of 4 14 of 1 of 4 The upper 16 bits of the accumulator por Peas will be set to 0 N ee Shifted out of accumulator SHFR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15141312 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 10 K4 Acc 0 0 0 0 of of 0 of of OJ of Of of Of Of Of of of of oO of 1 of of 1 of of 1 of of 4 4 Sh
42. Operand Data DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type A aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Inputs X 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Constant K 1 32 1 32 1 32 In the following example when CO is on the binary pattern of C10 C16 7 bits will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The lower 7 bits of the accumulator are output to Y20 Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction LDF C10 K7 Load the status of 7 consecutive bits C10 C16 into the accumulator OUTF Y20 K7 Copy the value of the specified number of bits Location Constant C10 K7 The unused accumu ator bits are set to zero C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF N 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 18 15 14131211109 8765 43 210 rom the accumulator to Y20 Y26 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes O gt suet C Pad eg A ENT SHFT asta s gt shet C 18 1 gt en ur SHFT 5 gt Cato gt P enr 0 0 Of Of Of Of Of Of Of OJ Of OF Of Of OF OF
43. The The Decrement instruction decrements a BCD value in a specified V memory location by 1 each time the instruction is executed Increment instruction BCD value in a specified V memory location by 1 each time the instruction is executed increments a INC A aaa DEC A aaa Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa Vmemory All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP75 on when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following increment example the value in V1400 increases by one each time that C5 is closed true DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 8j9 3 5 c5 INC m V1400 Increment the value in V1400 by 1 V1400 8 9 3 6 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes F STR gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT EN l N Cc B E A A SHFT a twa 2 gt 1 o o ENT In the following decrement example the value in V1400 is decreased by one each time
44. 0 00 cece cece eee 5 47 Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts 000 cece eee cece e eens 5 47 Table of Contents ix Stage Counter SGC NW sos E SI EIA ep Sami aver 548 Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits 0 cece 5 49 Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts seess serrr eee eee 549 Up Down Counter A AO 5 50 Up Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits 0 0 cee eee eee 5 51 Up Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts ssas aeaea eee ee eee 5 51 Shift Register SR Seats a ec ae eo a 5 52 Accumulator Stack Load and Output Data Instructions 0 e eee eee eee 5 53 Using the Accumulat r a a E E Age Wes E EE ulate oman aes 5 53 Copying Data to the Accumulator ooccocccccccccco nc 5 53 Changing the Accumulator Data dai a A caine ted Aa 5 54 Using the Accumulator Stack se es ra iras 5 55 USING Potes rarene e a het lo na Rub A A Sea ee 5 57 Load ED A dag tneeke pales den Bassas oooh eee de were aa URRATS E EERENS eae ed 5 58 sado DD a att as A A E RA A edt eae S E ee 5 59 Load Formatted LDF odas la ri A A AA 5 60 Load Address LDA a cenas AAAA EAEE EA AA a beeies 5 61 Load Accumulator Indexed LDX oooooocooocornrcrr eee eens 5 62 Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants LDSX 0 cece eee 5 63 Load Real N mber LDR scans citas oran 5 64 SWIK OUI REE E E EE EE E E
45. a fF U N O O 1400 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator lt lt lt E lt E lt lt lt xfxjofjo ojojuo x x fo u ojoj m xfxjpojfojojoja X x o0o u0 o oj o ED Handheld Programmer Keystrokes K2 B ENT Load the constant value STR gt 1 2 into the lower 16 bits fth l L D G of the accumulator SHFT anost 3 gt PREV ENT L D A B E A FIND SHFT anost 3 o gt K8989 E D Cc SHFT PREV ENT Find the location in the table ANDST 3 2 where the value 8989 resides F N D J J SHFT gt 5 an 4 gt Next ENT Find Greater Than The Find Greater Than instruction is used to FDGT search for the first occurrence of a value in a XT KIX TY V memory table that is greater than the specified value Aaaa which can be either FDGT 290 240 250 1 280 a V memory location or a 4 digit constant waaa The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Find Greater Than function NOTE This instruction does not have an offset such as the one required for the FIND instruction Step 1 Load the l
46. _ bits octal address from the start of the V3001 table so 17 14 34 octal The following MSB LSB program shows how to set the bit as L shown to a 1 1111111176543210 76543210 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions In this ladder example we will use input XO to trigger the Set Bit operation First we will load the table length 2 words into the accumulator stack Next we load the starting address into the accumulator Since V3000 is an octal number we have to convert it to hex by using the LDA command Finally we use the Set Bit or Reset Bit instruction and specify the octal adress of the bit bit 34 referenced from the table beginning DirectSOFT Display X0 Load the constant value 2 fal a Hex into the lower 16 bits I K2 of the accumulator LDA Convert octal 3000 to HEX and load the value into the O 3000 accumulator This is the table beginning SETBIT Set bit 34 octal in the table to a 1 034 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes A STR Z 0 ENT L D Cc SHFT anost 3 gt PREV 3 ENT L D A D A A A SHFT anpsT 3 o gt 3 0 o EEN X B T D E SET SHFT 1 8 MLR NEXT 3 4 ENT 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn e DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02
47. Port 2 15 Pin Timeout amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging an error RTS On Delay Time The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data RTS Off Delay Time The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data e Station Number For making the CPU port a DirectNET master choose 1 The allowable range for DirectNET slaves is from 1 to 90 each slave must have a unique number At powerup the port is automatically a slave unless and until the DL250 1 or DL260 executes ladder logic instructions which attempt to use the port as a master Thereafter the port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again Baud Rate The available baud rates include 300 600 900 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 baud Choose a higher baud rate initially reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network Important You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value e Stop Bits Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol e Parity Choose none even or odd parity for error checking e Format Choose hex or ASCII formats o el O oO Q feb e uBIseq TES Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU and click Close DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EZS System
48. Step 1 Load the number of words to be copied into the second level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the offset for the data label area in the program ladder memory and the beginning of the V memory block into the first level of the accumulator stack Step 3 Load the source data label LDLBL Kaaa into the accumulator when copying data from ladder memory to V memory Load the source address into the accumulator when copying data from V memory to ladder memory This is where the value will be copied from If the source address is a V memory location the value must be entered in HEX Step 4 Insert the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination Aaaa This is where the value will be copied to Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 WARNING The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0 but may be any number that does not result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table When an offset is outside of the source information boundaries then unknown data values will be transferred into the destination table 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Copy Data From a In the following example data is copied from a Data Label Area to V memory Wh
49. three additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Find function Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the second level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Load the offset from the starting location to begin the search This parameter must be a HEX value Step 4 Insert the Find instruction which specifies the first value to be found in the table Results The offset from the starting address to the first Vmemory location which contains the search value is returned to the accumulator SP53 will be set on if an address outside the table is specified in the offset or the value is not found If the value is not found 0 will be returned in the accumulator Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa V memory V All See p 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 ON if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value NOTE Status flags are only valid until another instruction that u
50. 0oooocccoccccccnoncr eens 4 39 MRX Master Memory Addresses 000 c eee eee eee 4 39 MRX Number of Elements ETA un iin Re Sen OR when Bm eae emcee ee ake 4 39 MAX Exception Response Buffer ss esc ean ac dvetuweg barked ai Pee eee aes eae dee 4 39 MODBUS Write to Network MWX 060 c eee eens 4 40 MWX Slave Memory Address oocccocccccccccrn eee eens 4 41 MWX Master Memory Addresses oococcccccccc t ete t nent eee 4 41 MWX Number of Elements tia A A Ai ee 4 41 MWX Exception Response Buffer oooococccccccconcncon ra 4 41 MRX MWX Example in DirectSOFT32 o ooooccccccccccccc eee ees 4 42 Multiple Read and Write InterlockS oooooooocoooroooonorne co 4 42 DL260 Non Sequence Protocol ASCII In Out and PRINT 00eceee eee eee oo 4 44 MODBUS Por COMmiqurallons at maya RR A ee iS 4 44 RSA ti A A he E ee hee heh A RA 4 45 Neo tata cias aria a 4 45 RSR lt tc A NE E AE E E E EAE E A 4 45 NOMO a A O ode 4 45 DL250 1 Non Sequence Protocol PRINT oooooccococccr eee eee eee 4 46 MODBUS Port Configuration se A 4 46 RS A A A aea aa e ANO a ata A E Ae ence cand 4 47 NEDOK ze et hier tet cd A a a a a NN A Ra 4 47 Paes Nee ll rd E A A ds E A A E o e S road 4 47 NEIWorkKvsiiuicaida a rt A A A A we A 4 47 Chapter 5 Standard RLL Instructions Introduction isie a As ee ean a 5 2 Using Boolean Instructions anta a a E 5 5 END Statement a a a e A
51. NCON K 2031 NCON K 3436 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes sHET E a a ENT sr Pa anost a lanos gt Ea Ee SHET o 2 insta rma gt Srsr anon ENT SHET i Nua 2 Minste twa gt Io 2 o a fea Jen SHET i Nua 2 liste twa gt fos Ea a Se e al ze ES 25 OS po fut oD Sc 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 201 Message Instructions Print Message The Print Message instruction prints the PRINT embedded text or textdata variable message to the specified communications ERIN ee x X v port 2 on the DL250 1 260 CPU which Hello this is a PLC message 230 240 250 1 260 must have the communications port configured SAA A aaa aaa Constant K 2 2 You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL250 1 and DL260 ports are capable of several protocols To configure a port using the Handheld Programmer use AUX 56 and follow the prompts making the same choices as indicated below on this page To configure a port in DirectSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Setup Secondary Comm Port e Port From the port number list box at the top choose Port 2 e Protocol Click the check box to the left of Non sequence and then you
52. contents by the real number 8421 8 4 2 1Jg 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Acc o 1 0 0 opoj1 o 1 1 Sign Bit Exponent 8 its 128 4 1 133 133 127 6 Implies 2 exp 6 8421 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 opipojo 1 ojpojojojojojojojojojo ojo ojojoJjo OUTD V1400 Copy the result in the accumulator to V1400 and V1401 Mantissa 23 bits 1 101001 x 2 exp 6 1101001 binary 105 decimal n Cc Oo S wn i am 5 w O Z oO a 10 NOTE The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32 bit IEEE format You must use DirectSOFT32 for this feature DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 97 Math Instructions Divide Divide is a 16 bit instruction that divides DIV the BCD value in the accumulator by a BCD value Aaaa which is either a V Y Y4 Y Y memory location or a 4 digit max DIV 230 240 250 1 260 constant The first part of the quotient Aaaa resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3
53. x1 B1400 3 our B1401 6 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes OUT STR gt 1 ENT OUT SHFT B gt Vv 1 4 0 0 gt K 3 ENT OUT SHFT B gt V 1 4 0 1 gt K 6 ENT The following Out Bit of Word example contains two Out Bit of Word instructions using the same bit in the same memory word The final state bit 3 of V1400 is ultimately controlled by the last rung of logic referencing it X1 will override the logic state controlled by X0 To avoid this situation multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming l ae La 25 C5 TH oD SE ap DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Or Out OR OUT SILS Y 230 240 250 1 260 Not NOT Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions The Or Out instruction has been designed to used more than 1 rung of discrete logic to control a single output Multiple Or Out instructions referencing the same output coil may be used since all contacts controlling the output are ored together If the status of any rung is Aaaa R OUT on the output will also be on x x Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777
54. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EH CPU Setup Installing the CPU The CPU must be installed in the first slot in the base closest to the power supply HPI F You cannot install the CPU in any other slot When inserting the CPU into the base align the PC board with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base Push the CPU 230 240 250 1 260 straight into the base until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector Use the retaining clips to secure the CPU to the base Retaining Clips CPU must reside in first slot WARNING To minimize the risk of electrical shock personal injury or equipment YZ damage always disconnect the system power before installing or removing any a on system component Connecting the The Handheld programmer is connected to the CPU with a handheld programmer Programming cable You can connect the Handheld to either port on a DL240 CPU The handheld Devices programmer is shipped with a cable The cable is approximately 6 5 feet 200 cm eN J a e Lol D o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo Connect Handheld to either Port If you are using a Personal Computer with the DirectSOFT32 programming package you can use either the top or bottom port
55. YY Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Timer instruction is a 0 1 second single input timer that times to a maximum of 999 9 seconds The Timer Fast instruction is a 0 01 second single input TMR T aaa and timer that times up to a maximum of 99 99 Si Timer Fast seconds These timers will be enabled if TMRF the input logic is true on and will be reset Preset Timer to 0 if the input logic is false off X XIJ Y y ce Instruction Specifications ee AA Timer Reference Taaa Specifies the timer number _ bag m Taaa Preset Value Bbbb Constant value K or a V memory location Pointer P for DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 only Preset Timer Current Value Timer current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory location For example the timer current value for T3 physically resides in V memory location V3 Discrete Status Bit The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory location It will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value For example the discrete status bit for timer 2 would be T2 The timer discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the timer instruction Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Timers T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377
56. l T2 a 25 o5 ope oD SE 47 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Add Formatted Add Formatted is a 32 bit instruction that Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions ADDF adds the BCD value in the accumulator 1M lo with the BCD value Aaaa which is a ADDF Aasa range of discrete bits The specified range K bbb 230 240 250 1 260 Kbbb can be 1 to 32 consecutive bits The result resides in the accumulator Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa bbb Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 137 320 717 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Constant K 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP67 when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X6 is on the value formed by discrete locations X0 X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The value
57. U 3 Sw 5 0 ae el0 No as 0 CPU Specifications and Operation DL250 1 System V memory applies to DL250 System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V3630 V3707 The default location for multiple preset values for UP DWN and UP counter 1 N A or pulse output function V3710 V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP DWN and UP counter 2 N A V3770 V3777 Not used N A V7620 V7627 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters V7620 Sets the V memory location that contains the value VO V3760 V7621 Sets the V memory location that contains the message VO V3760 V7622 Sets the total number 1 32 of V memory locations to be displayed 1 32 V7623 Sets the V memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed VO V3760 V7624 Sets the V memory location that contains the character code to be displayed VO V3760 V7625 Contains the function number that can be assigned to each key V memory for X Y or C V7626 Sets the power up mode 0 1 2 3 12 V7627 Change Preset Value password Default 0000 V7630 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 1 Since there are 24 Default V3630 presets available the default range is V3630 V3707 You can change the Range VO V3710 starting point if necessary V7631 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 2 Since there are 24 Default
58. V3710 starting point if necessary V7632 Reserved V7633 Sets the desired function code for the high speed counter interrupt pulse Default 0060 catch pulse train and input filter Location is also used for setting the Lower Byte Range with without battery option enable disable CPU mode change Range 0 None 10 Up 20 Up Dwn 30 Pulse Out 40 Interrupt 50 Pulse Catch 60 Filtered Dis Upper Byte Range Bits 8 11 13 15 Unused Bit 12 With Batt installed 0 disable BATT LED 1 enable BATT LED V7634 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter for XO when D2 CTRINT is installed V7635 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter for X1 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7636 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter for X2 when D2 CTRINT is installed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 v a e Lol D o e suoneooadS NdI 47 Ss os OG 50 ae el0 No D gt as 0 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V7637 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Defa
59. You can use AUX 57 to set the retentive ranges You can also use DirectSOFT32 menus to select the retentive ranges WARNING The DL205 CPUs do not come with a battery The super capacitor will retain the values in the event of a power loss but only for a short period of time depending on conditions If the retentive ranges are important for your application make sure you obtain the optional battery The DL205 CPUs allow you to use a password to help minimize the risk of unauthorized program and or data changes The DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 offer multi level passwords for even more security Once you enter a password you can lock the CPU against access Once the CPU is locked you must enter the password before you can use a programming device to change any system parameters You can select an 8 digit numeric password The CPUs are shipped from the factory with a password of 00000000 All zeros removes the password protection If a password has been entered into the CPU you cannot enter all zeros to remove it Once you enter the correct password you can change the password to all zeros to remove the password protection For more information on passwords see the appropriate appendix on auxiliary functions WARNING Make sure you remember your password If you forget your password you will not be able to access the CPU The CPU must be returned to the factory to have the password removed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Setti
60. C 484 mode Exception Response Buffer W2500 Port Number must be DL260 Port 2 K2 e Slave Address specify a slave station address 0 247 e Function Code The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the MWX instruction 05 Force Single coil 06 Preset Single Register 15 Force Multiple Coils 16 Preset Multiple Registers Start Slave Memory Address specifies the starting slave memory address where the data will be written e Start Master Memory Address specifies the starting address of the data in the master that is to written to the slave Number of Elements specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to This field is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected MODBUS Data Format specifies MODBUS 584 984 or 484 data format to be used e Exception Response Buffer specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be placed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration MWX Slave Memory Address Function Code MODBUS Data Format Slave Address Range s 05 Force Single Coil 484 Mode 1 999 05 Force Single Coil 584 984 Mode 1 65535 06 Preset Single Register 484 Mode 4001 4999 06 Preset Single Register 584 984 Mode 40001 49999 5 digit or 400001 465535 6 digit 15 Force Multiple Coils
61. ES CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc no 5 Os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt as 0 Stages S Data type Special Relays SP Data Type Remote I O Points GX Data Type Stages are used in RLL 4YS programs to create a structured program similar to a flowchart Each program stage denotes a program segment When the program segment or stage is active the logic within that segment is executed If the stage is off or inactive the logic is not executed and the CPU skips to the next active stage See Chapter 6 for a more detailed description of RLLPLUS programming Each stage also has a discrete status bit that can be used as an input to indicate whether the stage is active or inactive If the stage is active then the status bit is on If the stage is inactive then the status bit is off This status bit can also be turned on or off by other instructions such as the SET or RESET instructions This allows you to easily control stages throughout the program Special relays are discrete memory locations with pre defined functionality There are many different types of special relays For example some aid in program development others provide system operating status information etc Appendix D provides a complete listing of the special relays In this example control relay C10 will energize for 50 ms and de energize for 50 ms because SP5 is a pre defined relay that will be on for 50 ms
62. For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Helpful Hint The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on If you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan a one shot PD should be used in the input logic Helpful Hint The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the operation Also it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table For example if the table is 6 words long then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter should be between 1 and 6 If the value is outside of this range or zero the data will not be moved into the table Also a one shot PD should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP56 on when the table counter is equal to the table size NOTE Status flags SPs are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or the end of the scan The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table It is not set automatically You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program l ze ES 25 C5 po
63. OUTD v2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2 Copy the value in the v2011 v2010 accumulator to V2010 and dp v2011 5o Handheld Programmer Keystrokes gt a Cc B jab str gt y EAT 23 je L D D Cc A A A 5 I SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 0 o g ENT ar m A D D D Cc A A G SHET 0 3 3 3 gt 2 0 0 6 ENT GX D Vv Cc A B A our SHFT 3 gt SHFT AND x i ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Add Real The Add Real instruction adds a real ADDR number in the accumulator with either a ab rar real constant or a real number occupying ADDR two consecutive V memory locations The Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 result resides in the accumulator Both numbers must conform to the IEEE floating point format Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant R 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 3 402823E 038 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP71 On anytime the V memory specified by a pointer P is not valid SP72 On anytime the value in the a
64. Outputs Com ve i 1 i y _ Y Y a Loads 12 24VDC powered DL205 bases are designed for application environments in which low voltage DC power is more readily available than AC These include a wide range of battery powered applications such as remotely located control in vehicles portable machines etc For this application type all input devices and output loads typically use the same DC power source Typical wiring for DC powered applications is shown in the following diagram DC Power 4 i i DL205 PLC Power Input Input Module Output Module Inputs Com Outputs Com I A y y ia Loads hd DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Powering I O Circuits Using Installation Wiring and Specifications 2 15 In most applications it will be necessary to power the input devices from one power source and to power output loads from another source Loads often require high energy AC power while input sensors use low energy DC If a machine operator is likely to come in close contact with input wiring then safety reasons also require isolation from high energy output circuits It is most convenient if the loads can use the same power source as the PLC and the input sensors can use the auxiliary supply as shown to the left in the figure below If the loads cannot be powered from the PLC supply the
65. The operating voltage range of the input circuit The operating voltage range of the output circuit Maximum voltage allowed for the input circuit AC modules are designed to operate within a specific frequency range The voltage level at which the input point will turn ON The voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular operating voltage Typical operating current for an active ON input The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state The minimum load current for the output circuit to operate properly Some output modules require external power for the output circuitry Sometimes called saturation voltage it is the voltage measured from an output point to its common terminal when the output is ON at max load The maximum current a connected maximum load will receive when the output point is OFF The maximum current used by a load for a short duration upon an OFF to ON transition of a output point It is greater than the normal ON state current and is characteristic of inductive loads in AC circuits Power from the base power supply is used by the DL205 input modules and varies between different modules The guidelines for using module power is explained in the power budget configuration section in Chapter 4 7 DL205 User Manua
66. V memory for 1400 7377 1400 7377 preset values v 200072877 COE 10000 17777 10000 37777 Pointers 1400 7377 1400 7377 preset only E 2000 3777 a 10000 17777 10000 37777 Constants reset oni K 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 e oad TV 0 77 or V41100 41103 0 177 or V41100 41107 0 377 or V41100 V41117 0 377 or V41100 V41117 Timer current ia V T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 There are two methods of programming timers You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the the discrete status bit or use the comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on one timer The following examples show each method of using timers NOTE The current value of a timer can be accessed by using the TA data type i e TA2 Current values may also be accessed by the V memory location al Ze mate 23 C5 po fut oD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register In the following example a single input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds The timer discrete status bit T2 will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds The timer is reset when X1 turns off turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0 DirectSOFT x1 TMR T2 K30 x1
67. 2 S8 O pes ake ve cw Relay Output Guidelines Surge Suppresion For Inductive Loads Several output modules in the DL205 I O family feature relay outputs D2 04TRS D2 08TR D2 12TR D2 08CDR F2 08TR and F2 08TRS Relays are best for the following applications e Loads that require higher currents than the solid state outputs can deliver e Cost sensitive applications e Some output channels need isolation from other outputs such as when some loads require different voltages than other loads Some applications in which NOT to use relays e Loads that require currents under 10 mA e Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle Relay outputs in the DL205 output Relay with Form A contacts modules are available in two contact arrangements shown to the right The Form A type or SPST single pole single INE throw type is normally open and is the eA simplest to use The Form C type or SPDT single pole double throw type has a center contact which moves and a stationary contact on either side This provides a normally closed contact and a normally open contact Relay with Form C contacts Some relay output module s relays share common terminals which connect to the NE wiper contact in each relay of the bank 4 Other relay modules have relays which AR are completely isolated from each other In oy all cases the module drives the relay coil Os when the corresponding output point is on
68. 2 stop executing So it is helpful to visos 3 o 7 a s AA understand how the system uses this vosle o efo a LALA I 1 1500 counter to control the execution v1405 1 0 1 0 5 i vi406 2 0 4 6 6 For example if the table counter was set vuolla T to 2 and the table length was 6 words then there could only be 4 additions of e g 6 2 4 data before the execution was stopped This can easily be calculated by Table length table counter number of executions Also our example uses a normal input DirectSOFT32 Display optional one shot method contact X1 to control the execution xi c Since the CPU scan is extremely fast and PD the table counter increments co 5 automatically the data would be moved K6 52 i i mn fad into the table very quickly If this is a ie 22 problem for your applicaton you have an joe R co option of using a one shot PD to add one mt i value each time the input contact dado 22 Eb E E transitions from low to high MER 300 and load the value into the accumulator This is the starting table location DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The following diagram shows the scan by scan results of the execution for our example program The table counter is set to 2 initially and it will automatically increment from 2 6 as the instruction is executed Notice how
69. 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760 V40737 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation MSB DL260 Additional Control Relays C cont d LSB Address 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012 3011 3010 3007 3006 3005 3004 3003 3002 3001 3000 V40740 3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025 3024 3023 3022 3021 3020 V40741 3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045 3044 3043 3042 3041 3040 V40742 3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065 3064 3063 3062 3061 3060 V40743 3117 3116 3115 3114 3113 3112 3111 3110 3107 3106 3105 3104 3103 3102 3101 3100 V40744 3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125 3124 3123 3122 3121 3120 V40745 3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145 3144 3143 3142 3141 3140 V40746 3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165 3164 3163 3162 3161 3160 V40747 3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212 3211 3210 3207 3206 3205 3204 3203 3202 3201 3200 V40750 3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225 3224 32
70. 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V41030 637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V41031 657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V41032 677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V41033 717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V41034 737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V41035 757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V41036 777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V41037 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation MSB DL250 1 DL260 Additional Stage S Control Bits continued LSB Address i 16 Ws Wt Ws 18 Ww 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V41040 1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V41041 1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V41042 1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V41043 1117 1116 1
71. A V1401 into the accumulator Sign Bit Exponent 8 bits Mantissa 23 bits Acc 0 1 o jo 1 ojojo RTOB AA Convert the real number in the accumulator to binary 128 16 1 145 format 127 18 145 Binary Value 2 exp 18 __ 8421 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 842 1 Acc opojojofojojojojojojofojo 1foj1 poj1 1 1fojo 1fojojo 1fojojoJjoj 1 lt MS ee Copy the real value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 v1501 V1500 The binary number copied to opopofs 7 2 4 1 v1400 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Sr gt a Es 5 SHFT sra IPs gt Pa ls Wo Wo e 22 c SHET Forn mr eta a EN Sa ur seer Ps gt Ea Es Wo Mo E aE DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Radian Real Conversion RADR X Xx x Y 230 240 250 1 260 Degree Real Conversion DEGR X Xx x v 230 240 250 1 260 The Radian Real Conversion instruction converts the real degr
72. DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 412 System Design and Configuration D2 EM Local Expansion Module P The D2 EM expansion unit is attached to the right side of each base in the expansion system including the local CPU base All bases in the local expansion system must be the new 1 bases The D2 EMs on each end of the expansion system should have the TERM termination switch placed in the ON position The expansion units between the endmost bases should have the TERM switch placed in the OFF position The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system The bases are connected in a daisy chain fashion using the D2 EXCBL 1 category 5 straight through cable with RJ45 connectors Either of the RJ45 ports labelled A and B can be used to connect one expansion base to another D2 EM ACTIVE a Bil ie Expansion Mo due The status indicator LEDs on the D2 EM front panels have specific functions which can help in programming and troubleshooting D2 EM Indicator Status Meaning ACTIVE ON D2 EM is communicating with other D2 EM Green OFF D2 EM is not communicating with other D2 EM D2 EXCBL 1 The category 5 straight through D2 EXCBL 1 1m is used to connect the D2 EM Local Expansion expansion modules together If longer cable lengths are required we recommend Cable that you purchase a commercially manu
73. Dollar sign 2 Double quotation 3 L or I Line feed LF 4 N or n Carriage return line feed CRLF 5 P or p Form feed 6 R or r Carriage return CR 7 T or t Tab The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the printer Example 2 Length 0 without character A Length 1 with character A ca Length 1 with blank gyn Length 1 with double quotation mark S R L Length 2 with one CR and one LF 0D 0A Length 2 with one CR and one LF Length 1 with one mark In printing an ordinary line of text you will need to include double quotation marks before and after the text string Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction contains invalid text or no quotations It is important to test your VPRINT instruction data during the application development l T2 ES 25 o5 ope oD SE ap DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions VPRINT Example Combined with PRINTV Instruction The VPRINT instruction is used to create a string in V memory The PRINTV is used to print the string out of port 2 Create string permissive PRINT 012 Byte Swap All Printto Address Y4000 ST 43000 B 50D Delay permissive for WPRINT C13 SET Delay permissive for MR WPRINT Delay for print to C13 complete T1 Delay for print to PRINTY complete Port Number T1 Start
74. ISA aras IN NS A UNES eed seas Ea 5 132 Tens Complement BU DCR 2 ts ch ob A a celo io alan 5 133 Binary to Real Conversion BIOR co iorociai aa e da 5 134 Real to Binary Conversion RTOB commit rap E AO e 5 135 Radian Real Conversion RADR 0 E A deaauddae kes 5 136 Degree Real Conversi n DEGR 30400 E a See eet Pe a E 5 136 POC MOSHE AE AR A NE RA 5 137 HEX to AS GUADA 22 36 a UTE As aise 5 138 Segment SEG eds in ie A A A nd 5 140 Gray Code GRAY s o5 e2 2c0chsnsleates baa a t E a E S a sehen EE E eae e eds 5 141 Shuffle Digits S FEDERER DE AS eee 5 142 Shuffle Digits Block Diari A A di 5 142 Table Instructions ei e AA A TER A ea ee 5 144 MOVE MOVY 2 2 acts aatretaan acme EEEE D aaa o Sa Mee 5 144 Move Memory Cartridge Load Label MOVMC LDLBL 0 00 cee eee 5 145 Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V Memory 000 00 cece eee eens 5 146 Copy Data From V Memory to a Data Label Area o oooocccccoccoccnr 5 147 Set Bit SETBIT rr a ri kd el A E EE nee eee eis 5 148 Reset Bit CAST Dis rr es dead eased Beaded Piae es dee Se ehe eu eas dans Wadena ee 5 148 Ella rc edo ota dither Bee 5 150 Find ANDE do ea td le AOS 5 151 Find Greater Than RDG rreri sia o Ad AE Cl Das acta a Eco te 5 152 Table to Destination TTD e rd An ES A samen EA AN weed E cas 5 154 Remove trom Bottom RFB 2 000 amp eke tira Hil a a a as 5 157 Source to TablS STR a edad e oa td A a athena 5 160 Remove fr
75. L D A B E A A SHFT f anpst 3 o gt 1 4 o ORENT SHFT Sher SHFT I wun Um gt ea E s o fo En It is important to understand how the table apt Tans Panis locations are numbered If you examine viaor XTxTX x10 6 lololo To lv1400 the example table you ll notice that the viao2 x x x x 1 first data storage location V1401 will be viaos x xxx 2 ES used when the pointer is equal to zero visos x x x x a LLLP LPL seo and again when the pointer is equal to six dlrs X x x x 4 Why Because the pointer is only equal to NTAS XA AS zero before the very first execution From NAOT RRS then on it increments from one to six and then resets to one Also our example uses a normal input DirectSOFT32 Display optional one shot method contact X1 to control the execution xt Since the CPU scan is extremely fast and PD the pointer increments automatically the co i source data would be moved into all the K6 e table locations very quickly If this is a Load the constant value 6 aS problem for your applicaton you have an ee re cp option of using a one shot PD to move a 32 one value each time the input contact ad 22 transitions from low to high IRENE E 300 and load the value into the accumulator This is the starting table location DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The following diagr
76. Map into Map into V memory V memory V memory Ethernet Remote l O channels limited by power limited by power budget budget Max Number of Ethernet slaves N A 1 16 per channel I O points per Remote channel N A 16 384 limited to 16 384 16 fully 16 384 16 fully 896 by CPU expanded H4 EBC expanded H4 EBC slaves using slaves using V memory and V memory and bit of word bit of word instructions instructions VO Module Point Density 4 8 12 16 32 4 8 12 16 32 4 8 12 16 32 4 8 12 16 32 Slots per Base 3 4 6 9 3 4 6 9 3 4 6 9 3 4 6 9 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation DL240 Number of instructions available see Chapter 5 for details Control relays al ol po a sls a Z S x XS FS el wl S EIN v wn wn DN Mn WM CO CO P AI oO Oo ee on Integer Integer Floating Integer Floating Point Point Trigonometric es OoT KO ves Loops Yes To Loops w f anme e e e e e ves pe pe e Passwords pe pe e Sten eros eooo pe e e User eror Teg e p pe e CT IC 0 IC EIN CPU Base Electrical Specifications Part Numbers D2 03B 1 D2 04B 1 D2 03BDC1 1 D2 06BDC2 1 D2 06B 1 D2 09B 1 D2 04BDC1 1 D2 09BDC2 1 D2 06BDC1 1 D2 09BDC1 1 Input Voltage Range 100 240 VAC 10 2 28 8VDC 24VDC 104 240 VDC 10 15 with less than 10 ripple 10 15 Voltage Withstand dielectric 1 minute 1500 VAC between primary secondary field ground and run relay Insulati
77. SHFR Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Constant K 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted 10 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction LDD v2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator SHFR KA The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted 10 bit positions to the right OUTD v2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and v2011 Acc Acc v2001 V2000 6 7 0 5 Constant La 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1j1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 Shifted out of the accumulator 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 OF 1
78. Timeout amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging an error RTS On Delay Time The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data RTS Off Delay Time The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data Station Number For making the CPU port a MODBUS master choose 1 The possible range for MODBUS slave numbers is from 1 to 247 Each slave must have a unique number At powerup the port is automatically a slave unless and until the DL260 executes ladder logic MWX MRX network instructions which use the port as a master Thereafter the port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again Baud Rate The available baud rates include 300 600 900 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 baud Choose a higher baud rate initially reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network Important You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value Refer to the appropriate product manual for details e Stop Bits Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol e Parity Choose none even or odd parity for error checking e Echo Suppression Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on port 2 5s Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the
79. 1 0 0 O07 1 1 1 1 1 14 O OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF 1 1 14 1 OF 170 ANDD K36476A38 Acc 909 1010310008181 4141 10 001 0300000808184 1 01 0 AND the value in the OE accumulator with AND 36476438 0 0 1101100 10001110110101000111000 the constant value 1 0 1 0 36476A38 Acc 0 0 Of 1 0 1 O O O 1 O OF OF 1 OUTD On ie 416 2 8 3 8 Copy the value in the v2011 v2010 V2010 1 4 accumulator to V2010 and v2011 1 0 0 0 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D c A A A SHFT anpst 3 a gt En Vv AND SHFT 3 gt SHFT JMP 3 6 4 7 6 SHFT 0 SHFT 3 8 ENT GX D G A B A our SHFT 3 EA 2 0 1 0 ENT n Cc Oo S wn i am 5 w O Z oO a 10 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 73 Accumulator Logical Instructions And The And Formatted instruction logically Formatted ANDs the binary value in the accumulator ANDF and a specified range of discrete memory xT XIS To bits 1 32 The instruction requires a ___ ANDF Aaaa starting
80. 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V40057 V40257 1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V40060 V40260 1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V40061 V40261 Cc Q 5 w _ D Q O xe Cc S 1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V40062 V40262 1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V40063 V40263 1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V40064 V40264 0 i O w 2 O o Os ep gt oO 1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V40065 V40265 1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V40066 V40266 1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V40067 V40267 1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V40070 V40270 1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V40071 V40271 1657 1656 16
81. 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V41074 1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V41075 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V41076 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V41077 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps This table provides a listing of the individual timer and counter contacts associated with each V memory address bit MSB DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Timer T and Counter CT Contacts LSB Timer Counter AE o Address Address 017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 ooe 005 004 003 002 001 ooo v41100 Vv41140 037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V41101 V41141 057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V41102 V41142 077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 oso v41103 V41143 This portion of the table shows additional Timer and Counter contacts available with the DL240 250 1 260
82. 2 10 4 6 5 SP56 visos 2lofale 5 SP56 op vaoz SCT SK SP56 OFF a FEE SP56 OFF DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 163 Table Instructions Remove from Table The Remove From Table instruction pops a RFT value off of a table and stores it ina XT XTX ITY V memory location When a value is removed from the table all other values are RFT 230 240 250 1 260 shifted up 1 location The first V memory vaaa location in the table contains the table length counter The table counter decrements by 1 each time the instruction is executed If the length counter is zero or greater than the maximum table length specified in the first level of the accumulator stack the instruction will not execute and SP56 will be on The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Remove From Table function Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator Remember the starting location of the table is used as the table length counter T
83. 2 sp ENT cn GX xX B F A A ivi out S4FT ser gt 17 5 0 o e 09 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Out Least OUTL XXIX Y 230 240 250 1 260 Out Most OUTM A X X Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Out Least instruction copies the value in the lower eight bits of the accumulator to the lower eight bits of the specified V memory location i e it copies the low byte of the low word of the accumulator In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the lower 8 bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Least instruction DirectSOFT32 LD V1400 OUTL V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load OUTL A aaa Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the value in the lower 8 bits of the accumulator to V1500 B str gt 1 ENT L D B E A A SHFT anost a gt 1 4 0 o ENT GX L B F A A our S4FT l anost gt 1 5 0 o ENT The Out Most instruction copies the value in the upper eight bits of the lower sixteen bits of the accumulator to the upper eight bits of the specified V memory location i e it copies
84. 3 53 Constant R 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 3 402823E 038 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value SP71 On anytime the V memory specified by a pointer P is not valid SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non real number was encountered 9998 NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the LDR instruction loads the real number representation for 7 decimal into the accumulator The CMPR instruction compares the accumulator contents with the real representation for decimal 6 Since 7 gt 6 the corresponding discrete status flag is turned on special relay SP60 DirectSOFT32 X1 Load the real number LDR h A representation for decimal 7 into the accumulator acc 4 To JEJo lo To Jo To CMPR Compare the value with the Bao real number representation for decimal 6 cmpr 4 o oJo o Tofo To SP60 C1 our 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 H DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 88 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Math Instructions
85. 3000001 365535 6 digit 07 Read Exception Status 484 and 584 984 Mode n a Operand Data Type DL260 Range Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays C 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 777 V memory V all see page 3 53 Global Inputs GX 0 3777 Global Outputs GY 0 3777 Operand Data Type DL260 Range V memory V all see page 3 53 Constant K Bits 1 2000 Registers 1 125 Operand Data Type DL260 Range V memory V all see page 3 53 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uBIseq TES v 5 Os 0 O Co ome j o e 5 EZ System Design and Configuration gn e Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 MODBUS Write to Network MWX KI AE AE 230 240 250 1 260 The MODBUS Write to Network MWX instruction is used to write a block of data from the network masters s DL260 memory to MODBUS memory addresses within a slave device on the network The instruction allows the user to specify the MODBUS Function Code slave station address starting master and slave memory addresses number of elements to transfer MODBUS data format and the Exception Response Buffer O MX Port Number K2 gt Slave Address K1 gt Domin jis Force Multiple Coils Start Slave Memory Address K1 Start Master Memory Address C10 d Number of Elements K16 E Data a
86. 3526 3525 3524 3523 3522 3521 3520 V40765 3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545 3544 3543 3542 3541 3540 V40766 3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565 3564 3563 3562 3561 3560 V40767 3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612 3611 3610 3607 3606 3605 3604 3603 3602 3601 3600 V40770 3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625 3624 3623 3622 3621 3620 V40771 3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645 3644 3643 3642 3641 3640 V40772 3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665 3664 3663 3662 3661 3660 V40773 3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712 3711 3710 3707 3706 3705 3704 3703 3702 3701 3700 40774 3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725 3724 3723 3722 3721 3720 40775 3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740 40776 3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760 V40777 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 47 Cc Ss Os OG 50 ab lok el0 No e a 0 CPU Specifications and Operation Stage Control Sta
87. 5 240VAC OFF to ON response 10 ms Output type Relay form A SPST ON to OFF response 10 ms Peak voltage 30VDC 264VAC Terminal type Removable AC frequency 47 63 Hz Status indicators Logic Side ON voltage drop 0 72 VDC maximum Weight 2 8 oz 80 9 et Max load current resistive 4A point x D iati Fuses 1 per point n 3A modula resistive 6 3A slow blow replaceable oH Max leakage current 0 1mA O 264VAC Order D2 FUSE 3 5 per pack es n Typical Relay Life Operations Derating Chart oz Points nO Voltage amp Load Current 3 2A Pt Type of Load 1A 2A 3A 4A 24 VDC Resistive 500K 200K 100K 50K 3 3A Pt 24 VDC Solenoid 100K 40K 110 VAC Resistive 500K 250K 150K 100K 27 4ALPL 110 VAC Solenoid 200K 100K 50K 220 VAC Resistive 350K 150K 100K 50K l 220 VAC Solenoid 100K 50K o i i i I At 24 VDC solenoid inductive loads over 2A cannot be used 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C At 110 VAC solenoid inductive loads over 3A cannot be used OUT RELAY 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F At 220 VAC solenoid inductive loads over 2A cannot be used Ambient Temperature C F NC amp NC Internal module circuitry 5 30 VDC D ae VAC co an 3 ad amp
88. 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40031 V40231 657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V40032 V40232 677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40033 V40233 717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40034 V40234 737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40035 V40235 757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40036 V40236 777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40037 V40237 v J a e Lol D E o e e suoyeoosds Ndo DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation MSB DL260 Remote I O GX and GY Points LSB GX GY A A i igus AECA a ds 1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V40040 V40240 1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V40041 V40241 1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V40042 V40242 1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067
89. 7 3 O JO JO TIME v2000 Set the time in the CPU using the value in V2000 and V2001 N Hour Min Seconds Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ot ou utes A Used 5 SIR gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT a ENT lt L D D H D A A A oe SHFT fl anost 3 a gt pare 3 0 0 o e LL 9 A D A B ENT 5g 0 3 0 1 cow GX D c A A A gE our SHFT 3 gt 2 0 0 0 ENT T l M E e A A A T SHFT mr I SHT 8 ornsh a gt 2 0 0 o ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Insturctions 5 1 77 CPU Control Instructions CPU Control Instructions No Operation The No Operation is an empty not NOP programmed memory location Y YY Y 230 240 250 1 260 NOP DirectSOFT32 ro Handheld Programmer Keystrokes N O P TMR INST Cv SHFT ENT End The End instruction marks the termination END point of the normal program scan An End Jid diS instruction is required at the end of the main program body If the End instruction PAU AE is omitted an error will occur and the CPU ae will not enter the Run Mode Data labels subroutines and interrupt routines are placed after the End instruction The End instruction is not
90. 8 data bits one start one stop Asynchronous Half duplex DTE Remote l O Odd even none parity Port 2 on the DL250 and DL260 CPUs is located on the 15 pin D shell connector It is configurable using AUX functions on a programming device This applies to the Port 2 Pin Descriptions DL250 1 DL260 1 5V TXD2 5 VDC Transmit Data RS232C RXD2 RTS2 Receive Data RS232C Ready to Send RS 232C CTS2 RXD2 Clear to Send RS 232C Receive Data RS 422 RS 485 DL260 OV OV Logic Ground Logic Ground 2 3 4 5 6 Y 8 9 11 13 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS 485 DL260 TXD2 RTS2 Transmit Data RS 422 RS 485 DL260 j RS 485 Request to Send RS 422 RS 485 DL260 Send RS 422 RS 485 DL260 14 CTS2 Clear to Send RS422 RS 485 DL260 15 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 422 RS 485 DL 260 CPU Specifications and Operation ES Using Battery Backup An optional lithium battery is available to maintain the system RAM retentive memory when the DL205 system is without external power Typical CPU battery life is five years which includes PLC runtime and normal shutdown periods However consider installing a fresh battery if your battery has not been changed recently and the system will be shutdown for a period of more than ten days 299999 NOTE Before installing or replacing your CPU battery back up your V memory and system paramete
91. 9 9 9 9 v2032 MOV Copy the specified table locations to a table 3 0 7 4 V2003 _____ 3 0 7 4 v2033 vo rake ag 030 beginning at location V2030 slo ls l9 lv200 8 9 8 9 lvzo34 Cc 1j0 1 0 v2005 1 0 1 0 V2035 ac e Handheld Programmer Keystrokes opm X X X X v2006 X X X X V2036 ve B ENT g5 sta gt 1 X x x X v2007 X x x x v2037 co L D K G as SHFT evost 3 gt SHFT IMP 6 ENT L D A 0 A A A SHFT anpsT 3 ol gt 2 o 0 o ENT M O Vv Cc A D A SHFT orst inste ano gt 2 0 3 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ESTOS Table Instructions Move Memory The Move Memory Cartridge instruction is Cartridge used to copy data between V memory and Load Label program ladder memory The Load Label MOVMC MOVMC instruction is only used with the MOVMC V aaa LDLBL instruction when copying data from Va Al a 2 program ladder memory to V memory To copy data between V memory and program ladder memory the function parameters are loaded into the first two levels of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional LDLBL instructions Listed below are the steps _ Kaaa necessary to program the Move Memory Cartridge and Load Label functions 230 240 250 1 260
92. Bbbb to be exclusive ORed Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or Formatted is zero or negative the most significant bit 1 Operand Data DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type A B aaa bbb aaa bbb Inputs X 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer Bits Te 0 377 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 177 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 137 0 777 320 717 320 717 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Constant K 1 32 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the binary pattern of C10 C13 4 bits will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The value in the accumulator will be logically Exclusive Ored with the bit pattern from Y20 Y23 using the Exclusive Or Formatted instruction The value in the lower 4 bits of the accumulator are output to C20 C23 using the Out Formatted instruction DirectSOFT32
93. Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 In the following example every time X1 is makes energize for one scan DirectSOFT32 X1 co PD co LD v2000 OUT V3000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT SHFT P SHFT D gt 0 ENT an off to on transition CO will NOTE To generate a one shot pulse on an on to off transition place a NOT instruction immediately before the PD instruction The DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs support the STRND instruction DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Store Positive Differential STRPD X XIJ Y 230 240 250 1 260 Store Negative Differential STRND X XIJ Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Store Positive Differential instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact The contact closes for one CPU scan when the state of the associated image register point makes an Off to On transition Thereafter the contact remains open until the next Off to On transition the symbol inside the contact represents the transition This function is sometimes called a one shot The Store Negative Differential instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact The contact closes for one CPU scan when the state of the associated i
94. FALSE for an OFF state 3 ONOFF Print ON for an ON state and OFF for an OFF state Example V2000 15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in 1 0 format C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1 0 format C100 BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE FALSE format C100 ON OFF Prints the status of COO in ON OFF format V2000 15 BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE FALSE format The maximum numbers of characters you can VPRINT is 128 The number of characters required for each element regardless of whether the S CO or 0 modifiers are used is listed in the table below Element type Maximum Characters Text 1 character 1 16 bit binary 6 32 bit binary 11 4 digit BCD 8 digit BCD Floating point real number 13 Floating point real with exponent 13 Fa V memory text 2 2d Bit 1 0 format 1 a 5 Bit TRUE FALSE format 5 Bit ON OFF format 3 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 224 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions Text element the following is used for printing to V memory character strings The character strings are defined as the character more than 0 ranged by the double quotation marks Two hex numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an 8 bit ASCII character code Also two characters preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table Character code Description 1
95. In this mode the CPU will maintain the data in C S T CT and V memory when power is removed from the CPU provided the battery is good The use of a battery can also determine which operating mode is entered when the system power is connected See CPU Setup which is discussed later in this chapter Even if you have installed a battery the battery circuit can be disabled by turning off bit 12 in V7633 However if you have a battery installed and select No Battery operation the battery LED will not turn on if the battery voltage is low DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES CPU Specifications and Operation Selecting the Program Storage Media 47 Cc ne E os OG 50 ab Q el0 No gt as 0 Built in EEPROM v v xX X 230 240 250 1 260 A maD JEI EEPROM Sizes EEPROM Operations The DL230 and DL240 CPUs provide built in EEPROM storage This type of memory is non volatile and is not dependent on battery backup to retain the program The EEPROM can be electrically reprogrammed without being removed from the CPU You can also set Jumper 3 which will write protect the EEPROM The jumper is set at the factory to allow changes to EEPROM If you select write protection by changing the jumper position you cannot make changes to the program WARNING Do NOT change Jumper 2 This is for factory test operations If you change Jumper 2 the CPU will not o
96. Multiply Binary is a 16 bit instruction that multiplies the unsigned 2 s complement binary value Aaaa which is either a V memory location or a 16 bit unsigned 2 s complement binary constant by the16 bit binary value in the accumulator The result can be up to 32 bits and resides in the MULB Aaaa accumulator Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 O A 0O 1 x LD t V1400 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The
97. O 2 5S O pes ake ve cw Using Mounting Rails The DL205 bases can also be secured to the cabinet by using mounting rails You should use rails that conform to DIN EN standard 50 022 Refer to our catalog for a complete line of DIN rail DINnectors and DIN rail mounted apparatus These rails are approximately 35mm high with a depth of 7 5mm If you mount the base on a rail you should also consider using end brackets on each end of the rail The end brackets help keep the base from sliding horizontally along the rail This helps minimize the possibility of accidentally pulling the wiring loose If you examine the bottom of the base you ll notice small retaining clips To secure the base to a DIN rail place the base onto the rail and gently push up on the retaining clips The clips lock the base onto the rail To remove the base pull down on the retaining clips lift up on the base slightly and pull it away from the rail DIN Rail Dimensions 7 5mm Retaining Clips DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications 21 Installing Components in the Base To insert components into the base first slide the module retaining clips to the out position and align the PC board s of the module with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base Push the module straight into the base until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector On
98. O m SUONPOIIO9AdS NdI 47 ne 5 os OG 50 ab ok el0 No gt a 0 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V7633 Sets the desired function code for the high speed counter interrupt pulse Default 0000 catch pulse train and input filter Location is also used for setting the Lower Byte Range with without battery option enable disable CPU mode change 0 None 10 Up 20 Up Dwn 30 Pulse Out 40 Interrupt 50 Pulse Catch 60 Filtered Dis Upper Byte Range Bits 8 11 13 15 Unused Bit 12 With Batt installed 0 disable BATT LED 1 enable BATT LED Bit 14 Mode chg enable K sequence only V7634 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for XO when D2 CTRINT is installed V7635 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for X1 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7636 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for X2 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7637 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for X3 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7640 V7641 Location for
99. Optical Isolator Configuration shown is current sinking gt 3 3 o a 4 ese Bry 278 g 2 S 3 ZO QVSSVSsVyg y l a E 8 w zZ O o 000000000 W N o N 0 lO ITI LH T 5 Internal module circuitry V INPUT WN Optical 1 COM 1 24 VDC m Configuration shown is current sinking 5 t 1 GO Isolator uN N vOSONS ANY D2 16ND3 1 gt y When the AB switch is in the A position the LEDs display the input status of the module s first 8 input points Positon B displays the input status of the module s second group of 8 input points DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 D2 32ND3 DC Input Inputs per module 32 sink source Commons per module 4 8 I O terminal points Input voltage range 20 28 VDC Peak voltage 30 VDC AC frequency n a ON voltage level 19 VDC minimum OFF voltage level 7 VDC maximum Input impedance 4 8K Input current 8 0 mA O 24 VDC Minimum ON current 3 5 mA Maximum OFF current 1 5 mA Base power required 25 mA max OFF to ON respons
100. Parallel Elements al ae Es 25 G5 TH SD Sc 0 are STR XO AND X1 followed by OUT YO DirectSOFT32 Example YO ou Gs Handheld Mnemonics STR X0 AND X1 OUT YO END Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are conditional on other contacts The following example shows how you can use the AND instruction to continue a rung with more conditional outputs DirectSOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics STR X0 AND X1 OUT YO AND X2 OUT Y1 AND X3 OUT Y2 END You may also have to join contacts in parallel The OR instruction allows you to do this The following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil The instructions would be STR XO OR X1 followed by OUT YO DirectSOFT32 Example DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 X0 YO E out x1 list afl r END Handheld Mnemonics STR X0 OR X1 OUT YO END Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Joining Series Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel The Branches in Or Store ORSTR instruction allows this operation The following example shows a Parallel simple network consisting of series elements joined in parallel xo Xi DirectSOFT32 Example an Handheld Mnemonics STR XO OUT AND xa STR X2 x2 Ai AND X3 ORSTR OUT YO END END Joining Parallel You can also join
101. Sr i instel 2 3 o op ENT WwW x V Cc A A A SHFT AnDN SET gt SHET AND 2 0 0 0 ENI DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Message Instructions Fault FAULT X V Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Fault instruction is used to display a message on the handheld programmer or DirectSOFT32 The message has a maximum of 23 characters and can be either V memory data numerical constant data or ASCII text To display the value in a V memory location specify the V memory location in the instruction To display the data in ACON ASCII constant or NCON Numerical constant instructions specify the constant K value for the corresponding data label area Standard RLL Instructions Message Instructions FAULT Aaaa A aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Constant K 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 1 FFFF NOTE The FAULT instruction takes a considerable amount of time to execute This is because the FAULT parameters are stored in EEPROM Make sure you consider the instructions execution times shown in Appendix C if you are attempting to use the FAULT instructions in applications that require faster than normal execution cycles 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 198 Standard RLL Instructions Message
102. Standard RLL Instructions 5 1 73 Table Instructions Find Block The Find Blockinstruction searches for an FINDB occurrance of a specified block of values in x XIX Ilo a V memory table The function parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of ___ FINDB 290 290 2501 200 the accumulator stack and the accumulator Aaaa by three additional instructions If the block is found its starting address will be stored in the accumulator If the block is not found flag SP53 will be set Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 53 Vmemory P All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 on when the Find Block instruction was executed but did not find the block of data in table specified The steps listed below are the steps necessary to program the Find Block function Step 1 Load the number of bytes in the block to be located This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step 2 Load the length of a table number of words to be searched The Find Block will search multiple tables that are adjacent in V memory This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step 3 Load the ending location for all the tables into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Step 4 Load the table starting location for all the tables into the ac
103. Step 3 Insert the TTD instruction which specifies destination V memory location Vaaa Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Helpful Hint The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on If you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan a one shot PD should be used in the input logic Helpful Hint The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will begin The special relay SPO or a one shot PD should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP56 ON when the table pointer equals the table length NOTE Status flags SPs are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or the end of the scan l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets when the table length is reached At first glance it may appear that the pointer should reset to 0 However it resets to 1 not 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions In the following example when X1 is on the con
104. V3710 presets available the default range is V3710 3767 You can change the Range VO V3710 starting point if necessary V7632 Reserved V7633 Sets the desired function code for the high speed counter interrupt pulse Default 0060 catch pulse train and input filter Location is also used for setting the Lower Byte Range with without battery option enable disable CPU mode change Range 0 None 10 Up 20 Up Dwn 30 Pulse Out 40 Interrupt 50 Pulse Catch 60 Filtered Dis Upper Byte Range Bits 8 11 13 15 Unused Bit 12 With Batt installed 0 disable BATT LED 1 enable BATT LED V7634 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter for XO when D2 CTRINT is installed V7635 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter for X1 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7636 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter for X2 when D2 CTRINT is installed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V7637 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 1006 pulse train output and input filter
105. X X X X V1407 X X X xX Scan N 1 Before RFT Execution After RFT Execution bs able Counter Table Table Counter Table Automatically Decremented vi4o1 9 9 9 9 1 O O O 3 V1400 vi401 40 7 9 1 D 9 9 0 0 0 2 V1400 viao2 4 o 7 9 2 viao2 e o e 9 2 gt ES A visos ls o ls fol 3 Destination Start here v1403 8 lola l9 3 Destination 9 9 9119 viso4 s ols ol 4 ee 41500 visos e ole 9 4 030 vi405 1 0 1 0 5 v1i405 1 0 1f0 5 SP56 SP56 v1406 2 0 4 6 6 vi406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 OFF P56 OFF V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X Scan N 2 Before RFT Execution After RFT Execution Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Automatically Decremented v1401 4 0 7 9 1 O O O 2 V1400 vi401 g8 9 8 9 1 5 4 7 0 01 0 1 V1400 vi4o2 8 9 8 9 2 Start here V1402 8 9 8 9 2 ae viaoa a Jo se 9 3 Destination vs lalala a Destination 4 7 vido4 8 9 8 9 4 SRA 3 v00 visoa a ofe ola 0 7 9 v1500 v1405 1 0 1 0 5 v1i405 1 0 1 0 5 vi406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 vi406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 yao eee TK SP56 OFF mora SP56 OFF Scan N 3 Before RFT Execution After RFT Execution _ able Counter Table Table Counter Table Automatically Decremented vi401 8 9 8 9 1 0 JOJO 1 V1400 Start here v1401 8 918 9 1 8 9 0 JOJO 0 V1400 vi40o2 8 9 8 9 2 vi4s02 8 9 8 9 2 Sh viaoa a o e T9 3 Destination vas talleres Destination 9 8 visos Fa lola lol 4 4 0 7 9 v1500 visos le lalalala 8 9 V1500 v1405 1 0
106. l ze ES 25 C5 po fut oD SE ap Fill FILL X Xx x v 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT32 Display Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The Fill instruction fills a table of up to 255 V memory locations with a value Aaaa which is either a V memory location or a 4 digit constant The function parameters FILL are loaded into the first level of the Aaaa accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Fill function Step 1 Load the number of V memory locations to be filled into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value O FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the Fill instructions which specifies the value to fill the table with Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 53 Constant K 0 FF In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K4 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is pl
107. o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo Eu CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc no 5 Os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt as 0 Program Mode Operation Run Mode Operation VA OZD TRR In Program Mode the CPU does not execute the application program or update the output modules The primary use for Program Mode is to enter or change an application program You also use the program mode to set up CPU parameters such as the network address retentive memory areas etc Download Program You can use the mode switch on the DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs to select Program Mode operation Or with the switch in TERM position you can use a programming device such as the Handheld Programmer to place the CPU in Program Mode In Run Mode the CPU executes the application program does PID Read calculations for configured PID loops A DL250 only and updates the VO system Head nanan Spear You can perform many operations during Run Mode Some of these include Y Service Peripherals Force I O Y CPU Bus Communication e Monitor and change l O point status Update timer counter preset values e Update Variable memory locations Y Update Clock Special Relays Run Mode operation can be divided into Y several key areas It is very important you Solve the Application Program understand how each of these areas of execution can affect the results of
108. placed by the VPRINT instruction Starting V memory Address the first V memory register of the series of registers specified will contain the ASCII string s length in bytes Starting V memory Address 1 the 2nd and subsequent registers will contain the ASCII string printed to V memory o WPRINT Byte Swap gososeossoseey C All but null Print to starting memory address V3000 Message Reactor temperature 3500 degrees Print to Starting V memory All V memory Address See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid VPRINT Time Date Stamping the codes in the table below can be used in the VPRINT ASCII string message to print to V memory the current time and or date Character code Date Time Stamp Options e 1 _Date us American standard month day 2 digit year Fa 2 _Date e European standard day month 2 digit year 2d 3 _Date a Asian standard 2 digit year month day a 5 4 _Time 12 standard 12 hour clock 0 12 hour min am pm 5 _Time 24 standard 24 hour clock 0 12 hour min am pm DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 222 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions VPRINT V memory element the following modifiers can be used in the VPRINT ASCII string message to print to V memory register conte
109. r OUTPUT A y a ct amp t Q Sy 1 H 8 11 e Y ToLeD Ed _ Com a 8 Dz 9 1 5 30 VDC Y Es 3 5 240 VAC bg E D2 04TRS Y DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 08TR Relay Output Outputs per module 8 Minimum load 5mA O 5VDC Commons per module 1 2 I O terminal points Base power required 250mA max Operating voltage 5 30VDC 5 240VAC OFF to ON response 12 ms Output type Relay form A SPST ON to OFF response 10 ms Peak voltage 30VDC 264VAC Terminal type Removable AC frequency 47 to 60 Hz Status indicators Logic Side ON voltage drop N A Weight 3 9 oz 110 g Dm Max current resistive 1A point Fuses 1 E S 4A common 6 3A slow blow replaceable 2 FUSE k S Max leakage current 0 1mA 265 VAC Order D2 FUSE S 5 per pack ES Max inrush current Output 3A for 10 ms o 3 Common 10A for 10ms wa ZH Lo N 7 7 A Cu Typical Relay Life Operations Derating Chart Voltage Load Current Closures Points 24VDC_ Resistive 1A 500K 8 7 24VDC Soleno
110. the first routine This is because each port K0003 can only handle one transaction at a time In the example to the right after the RX OET instruction is executed CO is set When the port has finished the communication ae task the second routine is executed and Interlocking YO CO is reset Relay ae If youre using RLLPYS Stage a Programing you can put each routine in a SET separate program stage to ensure proper SP116 C100 iS execution and switch from stage to stage VA KF101 allowing only one of them to be active at a time LD K0003 LDA 040400 WX YO C100 RST DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 4 35 Network MODBUS RTU Master Operation DL260 only xIxlxlY This section describes how the DL260 can communicate on a MODBUS RTU network 230 240 250 1 269 Samaster using the MRX and MWX read write instructions These instructions allow you to enter native MODBUS addressing in your ladder logic program with no need to perform octal to decimal conversions MODBUS is a single master multiple slave network The master is the only member of the network that can initiate requests on the network This section teaches you how to design the required ladder logic for network master operation Master MODBUS RTU Protocol MODBUS Function The MODBUS function code determines whether the access is a read or a write and Codes Supported w
111. 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following example when X1 or X4 is on Y2 will energize JirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes X1 y2 ee STR gt 1 ENT INST 3 5 ENT ENT gt 2 ENT STR gt 4 ENT INST 3 5 ENT ENT gt 2 ENT x4 j Yo OR OUT The Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at the point of the instruction gt In the following example when X1 is off Y2 will energize This is because the Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Xi Y2 STR gt 1 ENT gt gt oyr SHFT N O T ENT OUT 2 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn l ae Ea 23 C5 po fut CD SE ap Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Positive Differential PD Y Y Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Positive Differential instruction is typically known as a one shot When the input logic produces an off to on transition the output will energize for one CPU scan Aaaa PD Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777
112. 0 A A a a 1 4 Programming Methods 4 DA A A A AA RA AAA AA 1 4 DirectSOFT32 Programming for WindoWS 00 cece teens 1 4 Handheld Programmer o 1 4 DL205 System Diagrams sa A A A ad ge et a 1 5 DirectLOGICE Part Numbering System 00 0c cece eee eee eee eee 1 7 Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming 0 e cece scene eee eee eee 1 9 Step 1 Unpack the DL205 Equipment occcocccccccccc eee 1 9 Step 2 Install the CPU and I O Modules 0 0 cece eee 1 10 Step 3 Remove Terminal Strip Access Cover 000s cece cece eee eee 1 10 Step 4 Add O SIMUIaON 22d ri a a 1 10 Step 5 Connect the Power Wiring 00000 00 crap a ca cd 1 11 Step 6 Connect the HandheldProgrammer occcocccccccccco teen eee 1 11 Steps to Designing a Successful System 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 1 12 Step 1 Review the Installation Guidelines 0 00 eee 1 12 Step 2 Understand the CPU Setup Procedures 0 eee e cece eee 1 12 Step 3 Understand the I O System Configurations 006 ccc cece eee tenes 1 12 Step 4 Determine the I O Module Specifications and Wiring Characteristics 1 12 Step 5 Understand the System Operation 00 c cece eee 1 12 Step 6 Review the Programming Concepts cee cece eee eee eee 1 13 Step 7 Choose the Instructions curras A Sede wakes meen eae gales 1 13 Step 8 Understand the Maintenance an
113. 0000 pulse train output and input filter for X1 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7636 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for X2 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7637 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for X3 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7640 V7647 Not used N A V7751 Fault Message Error Code stores the 4 digit code used with the FAULT N A instruction when the instruction is executed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 o m ol O O 0 ped O SUONPOIIO9AdS e 47 ne 5 os OG 50 ab ok el0 No gt as 0 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V7752 I O Configuration Error stores the module ID code for the module that does N A not match the current configuration V7753 1 O Configuration Error stores the correct module ID code V7754 1 O Configuration Error identifies the base and slot number V7755 Error code stores the fatal error code N A V7756 Error code stores the major error code N A V7757 Error code stores the minor error code V7760 V7764 Module Error stores the slot number and error code where an I O error occurs V7765 Scan stores
114. 02 System Design and Configuration 4 19 The next step is to make the connections between all devices on the Remote I O link The location of the Port 2 on the DL250 1 aldo and DL260 is on the 15 pin connector as sar ES E cr pictured to the right e Pin7 Signal GND e Pin 10 TXD e Pin13 RXD e Pin6 RXD Now we are ready to discuss wiring the DL250 1 or DL260 to the remote slaves on the remote base s The remote l O link is a 3 wire half duplex type Since Port 2 of the DL250 1 and DL260 CPU is a 5 wire full duplex capable port we must jumper its transmit and receive lines together as shown below converts it to 3 wire half duplex Me e DL250 1 DL260 CPU Port 2 Remote l O Master Remote l O Slave Remote l O Slave Ov end of chain Cable Use Belden O 9841 or equivalent T Jumper T Oo O Termination do O Rxp Resistor e TXD RXD LEN S Jf A S mijo a gt NM TXD RXD IxDH O e 5 ES IF Internal Ka eee Signal GND 3 0 3 dea igna resistor Guy e D Connect shield to signal ground The twisted shielded pair connects to the DL250 1 or DL260 Port 2 as shown Be sure to connect the cable shield wire to the signal ground connection A termination resistor must be added externally to the CPU as close as possible to the connector pins Its purpose is to minimize electrical reflecti
115. 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Load Accumulator Load Accumulator Indexed is a 16 bit Indexed instruction that specifies a source address LDX V memory which will be offset by the value AEIAFAF in the first stack location This instruction LDX interprets the value in the first stack location A aaa 230 240 250 1 260 as HEX The value in the offset address source address offset is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0 Helpful Hint The Load Address instruction can be used to convert an octal address to a HEX address and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 NOTE Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack In the following example when X1 is on the HEX equivalent for octal 25 will be loaded into the accumulator this value will be placed on the stack when the Load Accumulator Indexed instruction is executed V memory location V1410 will be added to the value in the 1st level of the stack and the value in this location V1435 2345 is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load Accumulator Indexed ins
116. 1 D2 06B 1 D2 06BDC1 1 D2 09B 1 D2 09BDC1 1 Input Voltage Range 100 240 VAC 10 2 28 8VDC 24VDC 104 240 VDC 10 15 with less than 10 ripple 10 15 20A Maximum Inrush Maximum Inrush Current 30A A A Voltage Withstand dielectric 1 minute 1500 VAC between primary secondary field ground and run relay Insulation Resistance Resistance gt 10 Me at 500 VDC Auxiliary 24 VDC Sl 20 28 VDC less than 1V p p A 20 28 VDC less than 1V p p 300mA max A 7 max Fusing internal to base non replaceable 2A 250V non replaceable 3 15A O non replaceable 2A 250V power supply slow blow fuse external fus 250V slow blow fuse exter slow blow fuse external fus ing recommended nal fusing recommended ing recommended Agency Approvals Some applications require agency approvals Typical agency approvals which your application may require are e UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc e CSA Canadian Standards Association e FM Factory Mutual Research Corporation e CUL Canadian Underwriters Laboratories Inc DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications Component Dimensions 5A ale 5 9 TZ O IS A So 50 wa bald ve EU Before installing your PLC system you will need to know the dimensions for the components in your system The diagrams on the following pages provide the component dimensions and should be used to define your enclosu
117. 1 OF 17 OF OF 171 14 1 OF 170 Copy the value in the lower 6 jA 7 A 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D C A A A dp SHFT Hl anpst a gt 2 o 0 o ENE sa aS Q Vv Cc A A G on SH T f ano 2 o 0 e ENT eo Da GX Vv Cc A B A O OUT gt SHFT AND 2 0 1 0 ENT O 53D 7 m DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 76 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions Or Double The Or Double is a 32 bit instruction that ORD ors the value in the accumulator with the rar arar value Aaaa or an 8 digit max constant value The result resides in the ORD 230 240 250 1 260 accumulator Discrete status flags K aaa indicate if the result of the Or Double is zero or a negative number the most significant bit is on Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the v
118. 1 5 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Divide Real The Divide Real instruction divides a real DIVR number in the accumulator by either a real a ar ars constant or a real number occupying two DIVR a aap Sat ae consecutive V memory locations The Rasa result resides in the accumulator Both numbers must conform to the IEEE floating point format Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant R 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 3 402823E 038 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP71 On anytime the V memory specified by a pointer P is not valid SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit SP74 On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non real number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruc
119. 1261 1260 V40453 V40553 1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V40454 V40554 1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V40455 V40555 1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V40456 V40556 1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V40457 V40557 1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V40460 V40560 1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V40461 V40561 1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V40462 V40562 1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V40463 V40563 v J a Lol D E o e e 1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V40464 V40564 1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V40465 V40565 1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V40466 V40566 1577 1
120. 16 bits in the accumulator to output points such as Y40 Y57 This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to output points without waiting on a full CPU scan to occur DirectSOFT32 eo LDI Location x17 x16 x15 x14 x13 x12 x11 x10 x7 xe x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 xo I 40400 V40400 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Load the inputs from XO to X1 it into the accumulator vii immediately Unused accumulator bits are set to zero 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15141312 11109 8 76543 210 Acc op 0 0 0 0 O O O OJ OJ OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF 1 1 OF 17 OF OF 17 0 1 1 OF 1 OF 1 v40502 ra Output the value in the accumu lator to output points Y40 to Y57 OUTI Location 57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 150 Y47 va6 va5 Yaa Yaa Y42 141 Y40 40502 ON oFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF on ON OFF ON OFF ON Handheld Programmer Keystrokes vn gt gt next Next Next Next 4 5 ENT senos a Ls gt Ea fo Ea No eo e er SHFT 4 gt next E j A 6 E e A c a ENT
121. 1720 V40675 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40676 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V40677 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL260 MSB DL260 Additional Control Relays C LSB 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address 2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 2011 2010 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000 V40700 2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025 2024 2023 2022 2021 2020 V40701 2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 2042 2041 2040 V40702 2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065 2064 2063 2062 2061 2060 V40703 2117 2116 2115 2114 2113 2112 2111 2110 2107 2106 2105 2104 2103 2102 2101 2100 V40704 2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125 2124 2123 2122 2121 2120 40705 2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145 2144 2143 2142 2141 2140 40706 2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2
122. 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 777 V memory V all see page 3 53 Global Inputs GX 0 3777 Global Outputs GY 0 3777 Operand Data Type DL260 Range V memory V all see page 3 53 Constant K Bits 1 2000 Registers 1 125 Operand Data Type DL260 Range V memory V all see page 3 53 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so co 20 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions MODBUS Instructions MWX DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it see Appendix D for Example comm port special relays One indicates Port busy SP116 and the other indicates Port Communication Error SP117 The Port Busy bit is on while the PLC communicates with the slave When the bit is off the program can initiate the next network request The Port Communication Error bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error Use of this bit is optional When used it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed Typically network communications will last longer than 1 CPU scan The program must wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction This rung does a MODBUS write to the first holding register 40001 of slave address number one It will writes the values over that reside in 2000 This particular Function code only writes to 1 register Use F
123. 230 240 250 1 260 result resides in the accumulator Both numbers must conform to the IEEE floating point format Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Real Constant R 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 3 402823E 038 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP71 On anytime the V memory specified by a pointer P is not valid SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit SP74 On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non real number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag DirectSOFT32 Display fe LDR 1 R7 0 Load the real number 7 0 into the accumulator 7 decimal 4 0 E O 0 0 0 O Accumulator x 1 5 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 MULR 10 5 Acc 4 2 D 2 oo jojo MULR R 15 0 v1401 V1400 Multiply the accumulator 4 2 D 2 0 0 0 0 Hex number
124. 2462 2461 2460 40723 2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512 2511 2510 2507 2506 2505 2504 2503 2502 2501 2500 40724 47 Cc Ss 5 2 OT 50 g2 el0 No D as 0 2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525 2524 2523 2522 2521 2520 V40725 2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545 2544 2543 2542 2541 2540 V40726 2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565 2564 2563 2562 2561 2560 V40727 2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612 2611 2610 2607 2606 2605 2604 2603 2602 2601 2600 V40730 2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625 2624 2623 2622 2621 2620 V40731 2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645 2644 2643 2642 2641 2640 V40732 2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665 2664 2663 2662 2661 2660 V40733 2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712 2711 2710 2707 2706 2705 2704 2703 2702 2701 2700 V40734 2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725 2724 2723 2722 2721 2720 V40735 2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745 2744 2743 2742 2741 2740 V40736 2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766
125. 2665 2664 2663 2662 2661 2660 V40133 V40333 2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712 2711 2710 2707 2706 2705 2704 2703 2702 2701 2700 V40134 V40334 2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725 2724 2723 2722 2721 2720 V40135 V40335 2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745 2744 2743 2742 2741 2740 V40136 V40336 2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760 V40137 V40337 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 v J a e Lol D E o e e suonyeoosds Ndo CPU Specifications and Operation MSB DL260 Remote I O GX and GY Points LSB GX GY 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Address Address 3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012 3011 3010 3007 3006 3005 3004 3003 3002 3001 3000 V40140 V40340 3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025 3024 3023 3022 3021 3020 V40141 V40341 3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045 3044 3043 3042 3041 3040 V40142 V40342 3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065 3064 3063 3062 3061 3060 V40143 V40343 3117 3116 3115 3114 3113 3112 3111 3110 3107 3106 3105 3104 310
126. 28 BL205 MOGUICS 4 ic ia ERRR AAA CRAMER ERE Dee REPS ARERR ARE ERE 2 30 Table of Contents Te Chapter 3 CPU Specifications and Operations OVERVIEW ia dE ced ion oy are KAE AA iaa aaa 3 2 General CPU Features tarada as elas scada e 3 2 DL230 CPU Peatunes ra SEN E A ee ea da adn a 3 2 DEEZ 40 CRU Features ia A EA A da 3 2 DE250 1 GPU Features cuisine see eed Hil ao a da ede ee eta add e 3 3 DE260 CPU Features s o bestial il a ea ba 3 3 CPU General Specifications orar ds A AA 3 4 CPU Base Electrical Specifications 2 00 cece eee eee eee eee eee 3 5 CPU Hardware Features cif outtake rete E a 3 6 Mode Switch Functions a A As A a a a Oe tes 3 7 Siatus Indicators si ren tel dete a dese 3 7 Adjusting the Analog Potentiometers oocooococnrconrr eee 3 8 COMMUNICAIONR OASIS tot ai E tien E E RE A ERE O RE E ie 3 8 Port Specifications ed aid a A E A Ue ee 3 9 Port 2 Specifications sis anos ai UA O Ente ae 3 10 Using Battery Backup 00 A IR AA AS AA 3 11 Enabling the Battery Backup 000 ral a a a po 3 11 Selecting the Program Storage Media ooooooooocconnncnnr eee eee ene 3 12 B ilt itEEPROM ice Ei a int aid Cle de a dd 3 12 EERROM SIZ GS ti a A cee avast A E eat et ae eta A eee keys 3 12 EEPROM Operations ooo a a da ae 3 12 CPU Sell acne Ds ie iaa 3 13 Installing the CPU or iotatands pupa ratita Ben oe tad 3 13 Connecting the Programming Devices 00 cece eect eens 3 13 Auxiliary
127. 32 bit IEEE format You must use DirectSOFT32 for this feature DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Subtract Subtract is a 16 bit instruction that SUB subtracts the BCD value Aaaa in a V IVITITVY memory location from the BCD value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The SUB 230 240 250 1 260 result resides in the accumulator Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value
128. 484 1 999 15 Force Multiple Coils 585 984 Mode 1 65535 16 Preset Multiple Registers 484 Mode 4001 4999 16 Preset Multiple Registers 584 984 Mode 40001 49999 5 digit or 4000001 465535 6 digit MWX Master Memory Addresses Operand Data Type DL260 Range Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays C 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 777 V memory V all see page 3 53 Global Inputs GX 0 3777 S Global Outputs GY 0 3777 as o2 MWX 3 o Number of eo Elements a D Operand Data Type DL260 Range 10 V memory V all see page 3 53 3 Constant K Bits 1 2000 Registers 1 125 MWX Exception Response Buffer DL260 Range all see page 3 53 Operand Data Type V memory V DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration MRX MWX DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it see Appendix D for Example in comm port special relays One indicates Port busy SP116 and the other DirectSOFT32 indicates Port Communication Error SP117 The Port Busy bit is on while the PLC communicates with the slave When the bit is off the program can initiate the next network request The Port Communication Error bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error and use of this bit is optional When used it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction
129. 5 7 OJOJOO 4 v1400 vi40o2 0 5 0 0 2 vi4o2 1 2 3 4 2 7 viaos lo Tolo Tala Data Source visos lo Js Tolo 3 D NG Data Source ao oai 5 Je 7 8 v1500 mala ala 1o 5 Je 7 8 v1500 vi405 8 9 8 9 5 Vi405 3 0 7 4 5 2 visos 1 oli fo 6 To a viaos s 9 8 9 6 Pi eee V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X Discard Bucket 1010 Scan N 2 Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution Table O Table Table Counter Table Automatically ee vi401 5 6 7 8 1 0 O O 4 v1400 v1i401 4 3 4 3 1 3 4 3 0 O0 0 5 V1400 v1402 1 2 3 4 2 v1i402 5 6 7 8 2 4 visos Los lolols Data Source visos liTealalalo d te Data Source vi4o4 9 9 919 4 sacd E p00 visos o 5 o Jo 4 3 4 3 v1500 v1405 3 0 7 4 5 Vi405 9 9 9 9 5 2 vi406 8 9 8 9 6 SP56 V1406 3 0 7 4 6 2 SP56 v1407 x x x x SP56 OFF viao7 x x x x A SP56 OFF Discard Bucket 8989 Scan N 3 Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution Table Table Table Counter Table Al Tr oemenied V1401 4 3 4 3 1 0O OJO 5 V1400 V1401 7 7 7 7 1 gt 7 7 0 0 0 6 V1400 v1402 5 6 7 8 2 v1i402 4 3 4 3 2 7 visos ile lalala Data Source visos sTeI7 8 3 me a Data Source 7 loto dada 7 7 7 7 vi500 vaa a E 7 7 7 7 v1500 T 2 visos o 9 9 9 5 vi405 0 5 o o 5 e os v1406 3 0 7 4 6 SP56 vi406 9 9 9 9 6 SP56 we v1407 x x Xx x SP56 OFF viao7 x x x x i l unt ondol scai CS A Discard Bucket or next instruction cw 3074 that uses SP56 LE 09 DL205 User
130. 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the accumulator will be divided by the value in V2006 using the Divide instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 V2000 5 0 00 x LD I I 2000 Load the value in V2000 into The unused accumulator the lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero accumulator 0 00 O 5 0 0 O Accumulator DIY 5 o V2006 V2006 Acc 1 0 0 ojojojojpo jojojo The value in the accumulator is divided by First stack location contains the value in V2006 the remainder OUT 1joj 0 vente v2010 Cop
131. A 12 RIS2 Request to Send RS 422 RS 485 RTS 13 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS 485 OR ERA 14 CTS2 Clear to Send RS422 RS 485 Loop 5 15 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 422 RS 485 Back CTS DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES System Design and Configuration MODBUS The MODBUS Read from Network MRX instruction is used by the DL260 network master to Read from Network read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V memory MRX addresses within the master The instruction allows the user to specify the MODBUS Function Code slave station address starting master and slave memory addresses number X XIX Y of elements to transfer MODBUS data format and the Exception Response Buffer 230 240 250 1 260 MAX Port Number K2 7 Slave Address K1 A Function 01 Read Coil Status Start Slave Memory Address K1 i Start Master Memory Address O200 Number of Elements K32 z Modbus Data Format 584 984 mode l C 484 mode Exception Response Buffer V4010 Port Number must be DL260 Port 2 K2 e Slave Address specify a slave station address 0 247 e Function Code The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the MRX instruction 01 Read a group of coils 02 Read a group of inputs 03 Read holding registers 04 Read input registers 07 Read Exception status Start Slave Memory Address specifies the st
132. Ada Real ADDR sapos taa eri vi RN A ai tee BREE 5 90 SUIT a E A a A a AN ea 5 91 subtract Double SUBD persipios iia td e tae ba bid eaten ad 5 92 Subtraci Real SUBA 2000003900 seten i ennn pls AS 5 93 MOI MTI a E ES A 5 94 Multiply Double MYLD cocoa A a A ca ed dre ada ao 5 95 MulipleRSal MUERTA ad 5 96 Divide DIV a a a a a a ie BS BA tae 5 97 Divide Double DIN Bye 1c ven enc ete late a A sa toon ae Sith Bat ieee oan 5 98 Divide Real DIVA Sons ad OS A 5 99 NCrSMENE ING Sr a A A os 5 100 Decrement DECI once 8 ahora E il PA A AI EN e 5 100 Add Binay ADDBy er esien rt oh Gian a ta hot d Nit a 5 101 Add Binary Double ADDBD ii E A tao ae aloe 5 102 subtract Binary SUBB 20 vrs abi iaa ii ota ito tai 5 103 Subtract Binary Double SUBBDE cususo israel a See 5104 Multiply Binary MUDA A a 5 105 Divide Binaty DIVE cack ie il vend eee ae Bi aa IA 5 106 Increment Binary NCB 5 cad ae wae ales ane sata os eee tw de cat wane cs 5 107 Decrement Binary DECB tae e Aue Beat hee oe Ae ee Le oie eee debida e 5 108 Add Formatted ADDF currar da de da diesen es 5109 Subtract Formatted SUBF scort dida 5 110 Multiply Formatted MULE sate cit E A A kee aatade fan 5 111 Divide Formatied DIME cocoa chee See eee Ee ba eee ot aa 5 112 Add Top Ot Stack ADDS of wide nates SETE Ss ia vate te 5 113 Subtract Top of Slack SUBS AlN cede A ad A tn a dd a tted 5 114 Multiply Top of Stack MULS evzostiriadr dit bad bed ii A AA be bid B
133. Address Number of Bytes Append Byte Swap Busy Complete Delay permissive for WPRINT C13 RST 5 as so aa 20 O 5 0 mn e DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 226 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions ASCII Print from The ASCII Print from V memory instruction will send an ASCII string out of the V memory designated communications port from a specified series of V memory registers for PRINTV a specified length in number of bytes Other features include user specified dla iF Append Characters to be placed after the desired data string for devices that require specific termination character s Byte Swap options and user specified 200 EAO Et S80 flags for Busy and Complete Port Number must be DL260 port 2 K2 Start Address specifies the begining of series of V memory registers that contain the ASCII string to print Number of Bytes specifies the length of the string to print Append Characters specifies ASCII characters to be added to the end of the string for devices that require specific termination characters Byte Swap swaps the high byte and low byte within each V memory register of the string while printing See the SWAPB instruction for details Busy Bit will be ON while the instruction is printing ASCII data Complete Bit will be set once the ASCII data has been printed and reset when the PRINTV _ instruction permissive bits are disab
134. B S P SHFT orst isa anosT 4 ast ENT GX D B F A A our SHET 3 gt 1 5 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Divide Binary by Divide Binary Top of Stack is a 32 bit Top instruction that divides the 32 bit binary OF Stack value in the accumulator by the 16 bit DIVBS binary value in the first level of the __ PINES ab a6 ar accumulator stack The result resides in the accumulator and the remainder 230 240 250 1 2 A q Pa ee eee eee resides in the first level of the accumulator stack Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction also pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value in the first level of the accumulator sta
135. Co Since the CPU scan is extremely fast and PD the pointer decrements automatically the co ES table would cycle through the locations K6 very quickly If this is a problem for your Load the constant value 6 A M S HEX into the lower 16 bits applicaton you have an option of using a of the accumulator one shot PD to remove one value each aR time the input contact transitions from low Sule to high Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator This is the table pointer location DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The following diagram shows the scan by scan results of the execution for our example program Notice how the pointer automatically decrements from 6 0 Also notice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan Example of Execution Scan N Before RFB Execution After RFB Execution Table Table Pointer Table Ta
136. Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of Level5 X X X X X X X X 5 the accumulator to V2000 v2000 4 5 4 5 ee EAS POP ao AA Level8 X X X X X X X X Pop the 1st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location Previous Acc value Acc o o o o J 5 45 OUT Ci t A Accumulator Stack v2001 urrent Acc value acc o o Jo o s 7 e 2 lt tver o o o o7 9 3 0 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of Levl2 X X X X X X X X gt the accumulator to V2001 gt i ee eS POP eS A EA Alice ER le v2001 3 7 9 2 Li XX XxX XX XX X Pop the 1st value on the stack into the vey gt accumulator and move stack values Level7 X X X X X X X X 5 up one cation Level8 X X X X X X X X OUT v2002 Previous Acc value Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of Acc 0 o Jo 0113 7912 he accumulator to V2002 Current Acc value Accumulator Stack Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Acc 0 o o o p7 9 3 0 lt Leeli X X X X X X X X gt c A Level2 X X X X X X X X S gt sHFT ENT 2 STR 2 0 A A aE SHFT a SHFT sd my ENT Level4 X X X X X X X X S J A aaa AR I GX TITY c A A A T v2002 7 9 3 0 re our gt SHET I ann A o A r EN Level 6 EERSEL 2 P 5 P Level7 X X XXXXXX PS SHFT SHFT ENT gt os cv NST cv Level8 X X X X X X X X o GX rv Cc A A B G2 out gt S4FT ano 2 0 0 1 EN nS P O P 09 SHF cy SHF nst cov EN GX rV Cc A A Cc T OUT gt SHF AND 2 0 0 2 EN
137. D D B S SHFT 0 3 3 4 RST ENT GX D B F A A our S4FT 3 gt ln 5 0 o J ET DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Subtract Binary Subtract Binary Top of Stack is a 32 bit Top of Stack instruction that subtracts the binary value SUBBS in the first level of the accumulator stack xix from the binary value in the accumulator ___ SUBBS The result resides in the accumulator The 230 240 250 1 260 value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed and all stack locations are moved up one level Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack
138. D2 16NA 110 VAC y 6 La ey 80 132VAC a La soo pE E 5 foe ZE E n Lay a 0 CA O D po 8 14 bS 2 P 1108 110 VAC ON og X 65 b D D 8 a Pg re a 7 bX o gt PS NCr LO y COE 9 5 0 CB p D T La EN 4b S D 6 Mani Zg 542g i es a gt 2 Z g BANIK 7 Internal module circuitry y Ve D2 16NA INPUT El 3 ToLED J I T a E Optical When the AB switch is in the A position COM Isolator the LEDs display the input status of the k Y module s first 8 input points Positon B 110 VAC mm displays the input status of the module s second group of 8 input points DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 04TD1 DC Output Outputs per module 4 current sinking Max inrush current 6A for 100ms 15A for 10 ms Output Points Consumed 8 points only 1st 4 pts used Minimum load 50mA Commons per module 1 4 1 O terminal points Base power required 5v 60mA Max Operating voltage 10 2 26 4 VDC OFF to ON response 1 ms Output type NMOS FET open drain ON to OFF response 1 ms Peak voltage 40 VDC Terminal type Removable AC frequency n a Status indicators Logic Side ON voltage drop 0 72 VDC maximum Weight 2 8 oz 80 9 v 3 Max load current resistive A Paa Fuses 4 1 per point a 6 3A slow blow Sw Max leaka
139. DL240 running the program shown would be calculated as follows Instruction Time STR XO 1 4us OR CO 1 0us ANDN X1 1 2us OUT YO 7 95us STRN C100 1 6us LD K10 62us STRN C101 1 6us OUT V2002 21 0us STRN C102 1 6us LD K50 62us STRN C103 1 6us OUT V2006 21 0us STR X5 1 4us ANDN X10 1 2us OUT Y3 7 95us END 16us TOTAL 210 5us Appendix C provides a complete list of instruction execution times for DL205 CPUs Program Control Instructions the DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs offer additional instructions that can change the way the program executes These instructions include FOR NEXT loops Subroutines and Interrupt Routines These instructions can interrupt the normal program flow and effect the program execution time Chapter 5 provides detailed information on how these different types of instructions operate DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 XO x1 NO Vf our CO C100 LD K10 ap OUT v2002 C102 LD Vf K50 C103 OUT V2006 X5 X10 Y3 OUT END CPU Specifications and Operation ES PLC Numbering Systems If you are a new PLC user or are using octal 49 832 binary DirectLOGIC PLCs for the first time BCD please take a moment to study how our 1482 gt 3 Q PLCs use numbers You ll find that each 3A9 0402 PLC manufacturer has their own 7 4 ASCII conventions on the use of numbers in their PLCs Take a moment to familiarize 10010110
140. E eee ae peak eae ade ke 2 13 Powering I O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply 0 00 00 cece eee 2 14 Powering I O Circuits Using Separate Supplies 0 0 cece 2 15 Sinking Sourcing Concepts micci n a eas Creda whan ae ba ee aed eel ea wet ke Rad eee 2 16 I O Common Terminal Concepts s 226siwe ens Move Bide withers bend Geen Benes 2 17 Connecting DC I O to Solid State Field Devices 0 0 cece eee ee 2 18 Solid State Input Sensors c nirmivdsr apra seabed Re la ae a bane we 2 18 Sold Stale OuUInUt Loads a ec dors oes Gach ag Uy o eae ao Se wae cae 2 18 Relay Output Guidelines ideas atea tae sn so ada the ad Wea tae ew aac eee E 2 20 Surge Suppresion For Inductive Loads oooococoocccccocccr 2 20 Prolonging Relay Contact Lie coi dd AA A o la id tora 2 22 1O Modules Position Wiring and Specification cece cece eee eee eee 2 24 Slot Numbering uote ene ee orth he oe ARRON oe e fdlh Bots Bh cea ae 2k 2 24 Module Placement Restrictions 00 cece eens 2 24 Special Placement Considerations for Analog Modules 00 c eee eee eee eens 2 25 Discrete Input Module Status Indicators 0 cece ees 2 25 Color Coding of I O Modules 00s irc a a as 2 25 Wiring the Different Module Connectors 0 0 cece eee eee 2 26 I O Wiring Checklist ts che EN NE nrnna 2 27 Glossary of Specification TerMS 00 0 cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eens 2
141. FUNCHONS bsos id A a Ae Rees 3 14 Clearing an Existing Program ia a A A E st 3 15 Setting the Clock and Calendar 0 cc cece eect t ee tteeee ee eaee 3 15 Initializing System Memory orina cabo ee dads bees nia hordes a ria eae ifen eel eds 3 15 Setting the CPU Network Address 03 00000 rra e e a 3 16 Setting Retentive Memory RangesS oooccccccccccnccc eee eeaee 3 16 Password Protection 4 04 2 aussi ria a id E 3 16 Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges 0 0 c ec cece cnet e ete eee neeee 3 17 CPU Operation sita E a ware pulses eee a re te 3 19 CPU Operating Sy sit A a 3 19 Program Mode Operations Isi nd e 3 20 Run Mode Operatif spas da das E deeds BG ae ew ew Re 3 20 Reading a a A A lodo 3 21 Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I O 0 ccc ccc nets 3 21 Service Peripherals and Force W O votos raras e e a 3 21 CPU Bus CONTI aia 3 22 Update Clock Special Relays and Special Registers 000 c cece eee eens 3 22 Solve Application Program oro meds sue EN AAA A Blas 3 23 Solve PID Loop Equations taco os da acta de auna AeA Ale a 3 23 Write QUIPUTS scada Sena pe 3 23 IV Table of Contents Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I O occcoocccccccccncc tees 3 24 DIAGROSUES evi a A AS AA ds 3 24 O Resp nse Time 20200 2 a A E A A ee 3 25 Is Timing Important for Your Application oooccccccccoccccc eet 3 25 Normal Minimum I O Response o ocoooccccccccc eee nee eee e
142. HIT Line 220 VAG th COM DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 16NA AC Input F2 08SIM Input Simulator Inputs per module 16 Inputs per module 8 Commons per module 2 isolated Base power required 50 mA Max Input voltage range 80 132 VAC Terminal type None Peak voltage 132 VAC Status indicator Switch side AC frequency 47 63 Hz Weight 2 65 oz 75 9 ON voltage level 70 VAC minimum OFF voltage level 20 VAC maximum Input impedance 12K 60 Hz Input current 11mA 100VAC 50Hz DN 13mA 100VAC 60Hz 6 15mA 132VAC 60Hz IN sim y Minimum ON current 5 mA 0 Ga E 4 l So Maximum OFF current 2 mA f 0 l O wa Base power required 100 mA Max 3 I I 7 0 F2 08SIM Bo OFF to ON response 5 to 30 ms NC 8 ON to OFF response 10 to 50 ms 0 oN Terminal type Removable 10 Status indicator Logic side O Weight 2 4 oz 68 9 A Points Derating Chart hi E IN 110 oS VAC 0 T T T T T A o0 a T 111 Les 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 32 50 68 86 104 122131 F 2 0 Ele Ambient Temperature C F B 3 J a C p
143. Input current 9mA 220VAC 50Hz oA 11mA 100VAC 50Hz 11mA 265VAC 60Hz 2 2 10mA 220VAC 60Hz oa poll ON current 5 mA 12mA 265VAC 60Hz oe Maximum OFF current 2 mA Minimum ON current 10 mA o z OO Base power required 50 mA Max Maximum OFF current 2 mA 343 O OFF to ON response 5 to 30 ms Base power required 100 mA Max oS O ON to OFF response 10 to 50 ms OFF to ON response 5 to 30 ms 22 Terminal type Removable ON to OFF response 10 to 50 ms Status indicator Logic side Terminal type Removable Weight 2 5 oz 70 g Status indicator Logic side Weight 2 5 oz 70 g Points Derating Chart 8 Points Derating Chart 4 8 6 i Ec 6 A 44 7 S IN 110 47 2 VAC a IN 220 gt 0 o I 4 oe 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 1 me pe 5 0 T T T T T oz Ll 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F 2 O 01 6 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 1 5 Ambient Temperature C F 3 17 32 50 68 86 104 1221319 2H Ee D2 08NA 1 Ambient Temperature C F 3 Cal 1 110 VAC c internally 4 D2 08NA 2 OTs ensue SRO VAS c connected 5 D 50 60Hz V 1 amp Cc 40 20mA eo o 1 0 E 50 60Hz 4 Es ae ig eer HS a 5 t 22 7 PST l 3 Ls we roo D 5 6 q D A Loy 58 T pg 2 E b Pe Hao e 2 s ue t re z E t s T E m a R gt ED Ke Internal module circuitry T TS 38 V 58 Internal module circuitry Ve 162 m INPUT ES D2 08NA 1 En 1 ER INPUT C ES ws LY Tia B 5 Ga K W Y y Fi To LED o gaisa ed A tical Line 440 VAG COM Isolator COM
144. Instructions In the following example when X1 is on Subroutine K3 will be called The CPU will jump to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed If X35 is on the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction If X35 is not on YO Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program DirectSOFT32 Display x1 K3 crs me K10 co END SBR K3 caro cee dc iT X20 Y5 sli OUT ZN x21 Y10 I OUTI X35 alk RTC X35 Yo Y17 asn RSTI zi RS Po m Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt x 1 ENT SHFT G T Ss gt K 3 ENT SHFT E N D ENT SHFT S SHFT B R gt K 3 ENT STR SHFT gt x 2 0 ENT out sHFT gt Y 5 ENT STR SHFT gt x 2 1 ENT _ 5 OUT SHFT gt Y 1 0 ENT n STR SHFT gt x 3 5 EAT SS JoN SHFT R c ENT e 5 STRN SHFT gt X 3 5 ENT 2 E RST SHF gt Y 0 Y 1 7 ENT SHFT R ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Instruction Set Program Control Instructions In the following example when X1 is on Subroutine K3 will be called The CPU will jump
145. Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Load Accumulator The Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Indexed from Constants is a 16 bit instruction The Data Constants instruction specifies a Data Label Area LDSX DLBL where numerical or ASCII ___ LDSx 7 7 constants are stored This value will be K aaa x Y loaded into the lower 16 bits a BES The LDSX instruction uses the value in the first level of the accumulator stack as an offset to determine which numerical or ASCII constant within the Data Label Area will be loaded into the accumulator The LDSX instruction interprets the value in the first level of the accumulator stack as a HEX value Helpful Hint The Load Address instruction can be used to convert octal to HEX and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa Constant K 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 299000 NOTE Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack In the following example when X1 is on the offset of 1 is loaded into the accumulator This value will be placed into the first level of the accumulator stack when the LDSX instruction is executed The LDSX instruction specifies the Data Label DLBL K2 where the numerical constant s are located in the program and loads the constant value indicated by the offset i
146. Interchar Timeout Error First Char Timeout Error Scan code Data Read 2100 bY cu DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so co 20 O 5 0 H 5 216 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions ASCII Find The ASCII Find instruction locates a specific ASCII string or portion of an ASCII AFIND string within a range of V memory registers and places the string s Found Index Tx X number byte number where desired string is found in Hex into a specified V memory register Other features include Search Starting Index number for skipping over unnecessary bytes before beginning the FIND operation Forward or Reverse direction search and From Begining and From End selections to reference the Found Index Value 230 240 250 1 260 Base Address specifies the begining V memory register where the entire ASCII string is stored in AFIND memory Base Address Total Number of Bytes specifies the total number of bytes to search for the desired ASCII string Search Starting Index specifies Total Number of Bytes K12 Search Starting Index which byte to skip to with respect to the Base Address before begining rm Direction Found Index Value Forward From Beginning C Reverse From End the search Found Index vzro id Direction Forward begins the see om Search for String search from lower numbered z d AutomationDirect V memor
147. It will interface with DirectSOFT32 version 4 0 or later operator interfaces and provides DirectNet MODBUS RTU Master Slave connections Port 2 is also support ASCII IN OUT instructions a e Lol D o on e SUONPDIJIO9AdS NdI DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation CPU General Specifications Total Program memony fe fe fra ros Ladder memory verd f 60 reo ashy T5872 ashy Vemos word e pea pe we Novoti V Memory words e ROR Boolean exec e esms Oeste rw ALL and R Programming ves vs ws Handrel programmer ve ws ws es requires version DirectSOFT32 programming for Yes Yes Y Windows 4 0 or higher Built in communication ports One RS 232C Two RS 232C One RS 232C One RS 232C One RS 232C or One RS 232C RS 422 RS 422 or RS 485 EEPROM Standard on CPU Standard on CPU Total CPU memory I O points 256 X Y CR 896 X Y CR 2048 X Y CR available 56 Local Expansion I O points N A N A 768 including local I O and expansion 2 exp bases max 4 exp bases max I O points Serial Remote l O points N A 896 2048 8192 including local I O and expansion I O points 2 ee Max Number of Serial Remote N A 7 Remote 31 Slice 7 Remote 31 Slice 7 Remote 31 Slice Slaves Ethernet Remote I O Discrete N A 896 2048 points Ethernet Remote I O Analog I O channels 47 Cc Ss os OG 50 ab ok 18 No D aS 0
148. LEER APA J DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications ESA 1 0 Common In order for a PLC I O circuit to operate PLC Terminal Concepts current must enter at one terminal and exit Field Main Path 7 E at another Therefore at least two Device 1 0 Point vo terminals are associated with every I O Circuit point In the figure to the right the Input or P y Output terminal is the main path for the current One additional terminal must Return Path provide the return path to the power he supply If there was unlimited space and budget PLC for I O terminals every I O point could have two dedicated terminals as the figure above shows However providing this oo ett o level of flexibility is not practical or even necessary for most applications So most J 5o itea Y Input or Output points on PLCs are in noits groups which share the return path called oo Mta commons The figure to the right shows a gt ipi group or bank of 4 input points which o o O share a common return path In this way ale the four inputs require only five terminals y instead of eight Common 4 Input Sensing uonejesul fad gt ox 09 jo 49 e p O fad e ULIM suo 6 NOTE In the c
149. Map CPU Specifications and Operation Memory Type Discrete Memory Word Memory Qty Symbol Reference Reference Decimal octal octal Input Points X0 X1777 V40400 V40477 1024 xo Output Points YO Y1777 V40500 V40577 1024 YO Control Relays CO C3777 V40600 V40777 2048 CO CO gt No Special Relays SPO SP777 V41200 V41237 512 a Timers TO T377 V41100 V41117 256 WE T K100 Timer Current None VO V377 256 Vo K100 Values gt Timer Status Bits TO T377 V41100 V41117 256 TO Counters CTO CT377 V41140 V41157 256 CNT CTO K10 Counter None V1000 V1377 256 V1000 K100 Current Values gt Counter Status CTO CT377 V41140 V41157 256 CTO Bits Data Words None V400 V777 14 6K None specific used with many V1400 V7377 instructions V10000 V35777 Stages S0 S1777 V41000 V41077 1024 SG so som Remote Input GX0 GX3777 V40000 V40177 2048 GXO GYO and Output PON Points GY0 GY3777 V40200 V40377 2048 eed System None V7600 V7777 1 2K None specific used for various parameters V36000 V37777 purposes DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 o m Qa O O 0 o O suoneaoads Add 47 Cc Ss 5 2 OT 50 g2 el0 No D as 0 CPU Specifications and Operation X Input Y Output Bit Map This
150. NCON Numeric Constant 5 199 RSTI Reset Immediate 5 38 NEXT Next For Next 5 180 RSTWT Reset Watch Dog Timer 5 178 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Instruction Page Instruction Page RT Subroutine Return 5 182 STT Source to Table 5 160 RTC Subroutine Return Conditional 5 182 SUB Subtract 5 91 RTOB Real to Binary 5 135 SUBB Subtract Binary 5 103 RX Read from Network 5 193 SUBBD Subtract Binary Double 5 104 SBR Subroutine Goto Subroutine 5 182 SUBBS Subtract Binary Top of Stack 5 118 SEG Segment 5 140 SUBD Subtract Double 5 92 SET Set 5 24 SUBF Subtract Formatted 5 110 SETB Set Bit ot Word 5 25 SUBS Subtract Top of Stack 5 114 SETBIT Set Bit 5 148 SUBR Subtract Real Number 5 93 SETI Set Immediate 5 38 SUM Sum 5 123 SFLDGT Shuffle Digits 5 142 SWAP Swap Table Data 5 174 SG Stage 7 23 SWAPB ASCII Swap Bytes 5 227 SGCNT Stage Counter 5 48 TANR Tangent Real 5 121 SHFL Shift Left 5 124 TIME Time 5 176 SHFR Shift Right 5 125 TMR Timer 5 42 SINR Sine Real 5 121 TMRF Fast Timer 5 42 SQRTR Square Root Real 5 122 TMRA Accumulating Timer 5 44 SR Shift Register 5 52 TMRAF Fast Accumulating Timer 5 44 STOP Stop 5 178 TSHFL Table Shift Left 5 169 STR Store 5 10 5 30 TSHFR Table Shift Right 5 169 STRB Stor
151. Not Immediate STRNI esi aareu nls EE a Seep ew a a a 5 33 Or Immediate ORI consta sis a Cea ook eee a a es ea eS 5 34 Or Not Immediate ORNJ e 0023 certe cadet Rie e dad ieee dae AE E deta eaten 5 34 And Immediate ANDI oso pesos sas ie e e 5 35 And Not Immediate ANDNI 0 A A As 5 35 O tiImmediate CUT hies renneri a ooi us E Lea acta diane octet ta 5 36 Or Out Immediate OROUTI gi ia dos a ean Vee eles da as 5 36 Out Immediate Formatted QUTIP cocos ca a ea E dee 5 37 setimm diate SETI gt si tada id iii et A 5 38 Reset Immediate RSTI v4 2 canst sine ia Ts a Nae board 5 38 Load Immediate EDI oo a ee ee eee 5 39 Load Immediate Formatted LDIF co coo eee eed ues Shaw ee ee eee Se eee eee Ses 5 40 Timer Counter and Shift Register Instructions 0oococoorcoronrr eee eee 5 41 SIM IMSS RS E eye Dee ac act O E actos as 5 41 Timer IMR usada Ad ATR 5 42 and Timer Fast IMRF aa e oaa ea on E E E ee ah A eee ee ee ey ee 5 4 Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits ooooccccoocccrocc eee 5 43 Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts 00 0 0 cece teens 5 43 Accumulating Timer TMRA and Accumulating Fast Timer TMRAP o oooo ooooooo 5 44 Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits 00 cece eee eee 5 45 Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts ooooccccoccccoccc 5 45 Counter CNT a In ds a id cda E 5 46 Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
152. OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110987654 3 2 1 0 Acc 0 0 opofo o o o o ojoj ojo 0 Oo ojo 1 0 1 1 0 1 of 4 OUTIF Y30 eS K8 Location Constant Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30 S EiS olhe accumulator I Y30 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Y30 Y37 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes A STR gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ENT L D l F B A SHFT anpst 3 8 5 gt 1 o g ENT GX l F D A Our SHFT A 5 gt 3 gt ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions EZE Timer Counter and Shift Register Timer Counter and Shift Register Instructions Using Timers Timers are used to time an event for a desired length of time There are those applications that need an accumulating timer meaning it has the ability to time stop and then resume from where it previously stopped The single input timer will time as long as the input is on When the input changes from on to off the timer current value is reset to 0 There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of 999 9 and 99 99 seconds respectively
153. P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 In the following example when X1 is on the 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 V2001 V2000 X1 i LDD e z7l3 o l s o 2 6 V2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator an 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 v2010 Copy the value in the v2011 v2010 accumulator to V2010 and v2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT G D D SHFT anpst 3 3 gt Cc A A A 2 0 0 0 ENT GX D Our SHFT 3 gt Cc A B A 2 o 1 al l ze ES 25 o5 ope oD SE ap DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 The Out Formatted instruction outputs 1 32 bits from the accumulator to the specified discrete memory locations The Out Formatted OUTF XIS IL Y 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT32 instruction requires a starting location Aaaa for the destination and the number of bits Kbbb to be output Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load 5 67 OUTF K bbb A aaa
154. RTU Instructions DL260 MODBUS The MODBUS Read from Network MRX instruction is used by the DL260 network master to Read from Network read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V memory MRX addresses within the master The instruction allows the user to specify the MODBUS Function Code slave station address starting master and slave memory addresses number x x x Y of elements to transfer MODBUS data format and the Exception Response Buffer 230 240 250 1 260 MRX Port Number Slave Address K1 E Function 01 Read Coil Status Start Slave Memory Address K1 Start Master Memory Address 4200 Number of Elements K32 Modbus Data Format 584 984 mode C 484 mode Exception Response Buffer V4010 Port Number must be DL260 Port 2 K2 e Slave Address specify a slave station address 0 247 e Function Code The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the MRX instruction 01 Read a group of coils 02 Read a group of inputs 03 Read holding registers 04 Read input registers 07 Read Exception status Start Slave Memory Address specifies the starting slave memory address of the data to be read See the table on the following page e Start Master Memory Address specifies the starting memory address in the master where the data will be placed See the table on the following page Number of Elements specif
155. SP56 comes on when the table counter is 6 which is equal to the table length Plus although our example does not show it we are assuming that there is another part of the program that changes the value in V1500 data source prior to the execution of the ATT instruction Example of Execution Scan N Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution _ Table Table Counter Table e Sen vi4o1 0 5 0 0 1 0 O O 2 V1400 vi4o1 1 2 3 4 1 gt 1 0 0 0 3 V1400 v1i402 9 9 9 9 2 vi4o2 0 5 0 0 2 3 viaos 3lol7la 3 Data Source visos lolo lalola gt PE Data Source voa o o Jo foJa L L2 Le L viso vias 3 o 7 fal 42 11213 4 vso v1405 1 j0 1 0 5 V1i405 8 9 8 9 5 2 visos 2 o 4 616 Aa E visos 1 o 1 o 6 ion ee V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X Discard Bucket A 2046 Scan N 1 Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Automatically Incremented vi4o1 1 2 3 4 1 0 O O 3 V1400 V1401 5 6 7 8 1 gt
156. The DL230 systems are limited to 256 discrete I O points total with the present system hardware available These can be mixed between input and output points as necessary DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 DL240 Memory Map CPU Specifications and Operation Memory Type Discrete Memory Word Memory Qty Symbol Reference Reference Decimal octal octal Input Points XO X477 V40400 V40423 3201 Xo Output Points YO Y477 V40500 V40523 3201 YO Control Relays CO C377 V40600 V40617 256 CO CO No Special Relays SPO SP137 V41200 V41205 144 SPO SP540 SP617 V41226 V41230 e Timers TO T177 128 WA z EN K100 Timer Current None VO V177 128 Vo K100 Values gt Timer Status Bits TO T177 V41100 V41107 128 TO Counters CTO CT177 128 __ICNT CTO K10 Counter None V1000 V1177 128 v1000 K100 Current Values gt Counter Status CTO CT177 V41140 V41147 128 CTO Bits Data Words None V2000 V3777 1024 None specific used with many instructions Data Words None V4000 V4377 256 None specific used with many Non volatile instructions Stages S0 S777 V41000 V41037 512 we SO S 001 System None V7620 V7737 106 None specific used for various parameters V7746 V7777 purposes 1 The DL240 systems are limited to 256 discrete I O points total wi
157. There is discrete bit associated with each timer to indicate the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input associated discrete bit current value and timer preset Seconds 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 o TMR T x1 K30 Timer preset T1 a m YO Current O 10 2 30 40 50 60 o OUT Value 1 10 Seconds The accumulating timer works similarly to the regular timer but two inputs are required The start stop input starts and stops the timer When the timer stops the elapsed time is maintained When the timer starts again the timing continues from the elapsed time When the reset input is turned on the elapsed time is cleared and the timer will start at O when it is restarted There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of 9999999 9 and 999999 99 seconds respectively The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input timer reset associated discrete bit current value and timer preset Seconds 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 XI TMRA 70 K30 x1 3 Start Stop X2 xa Reset Input TO Ll Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0 Value 1 10 Seconds 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Timer TMR Y
158. V1403 3 0 7 4 2 visos ls 98 l9 3 0 5 0 0 V1500 visos ls lols l9 3 9 9 9 9 v1500 vi405 1 o 1 0 4 vi405 1 0 1 0 4 visos 2 o 4 6 5 sree Sees visos 2 o 4 6 5 SP56 ee V1407 X X X X l 7 V1407 X X X X l i Scan N 5 Before TTD Execution After TTD Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Incremented vV1401 0 5 0 0 0 0O O JO 5 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 O O 6 V1400 vi402 9 9 9 9 1 v1402 9 9 9 9 1 visos 13 lo 74 2 Destination visos 3 lo l7 l4 2 Destination visos 8 lola lo 3 1 0 1 0 V1500 vias04 8 lo lso 3 2 014 6 V1500 vi405 1 0 1 0 4 vi405 1 0 1 0 4 vi406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 vi406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 El Es di Vador AAA z aye cl end of scan or next instruction E that uses SP56 Scan N 6 Before TTD Execution After TTD Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Resets to 1 not 0 vi401 0 5 0 0 0 O O O 6 v1400 v1401 O0O 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 v1400 v1i402 9 9 9 9 1 v1402 9 9 9 9 1 Sa visos 13 lo 74 2 Destination visos 3 o7 l4 2 Destination v1404 8 lo ls 9 3 2 0 4 6 v1500 viaoalalolelo 3 0 5 0 0 vi1500 vi405 1 o 1 0 4 v1405 1 0 1 0 4 vi406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 vi406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 vigor XTX Tx Tx SP56 OFF vias x oe spss OFF DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 1 57 Table Instructions Remove from The Remove From Bottom instruction Bottom moves a value fr
159. X X X v2004 Load the value 1 into the accumulator specifying the x Data Label Area K1 as the starting address of the data to be copied MOVMC v2000 V2000 is the destination starting address for the data o be copied Handheld Programmer Keystrokes orn gt F 1 ENT sHFT A 3 gt ser K mp E ENT SHFT D a gt sHFT are A ENT SHET ANDST i 3 ANDST a 1 ANDST gt F 1 ENE sHFT rsr srel ano lors 2 gt o gt 1 0 Meo eo ENT WARNING The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0 but may be any number that does not result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table When an offset is outside of the source information boundaries then unknown data values will be transferred into the destination table DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Copy Data From V In the following example data is copied from V memory to a data label area When Memory to a Data X1 is on the constant value K4 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Label Area instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second Zid ae stack location after the next Load and Load Address instructions are executed The constant value K2 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load in
160. X X X XX X X X 3 1X X X X X X X X LDD Load the value in V1420 and V1421 v1420 4 X X X X X X X X vi4e0 V1421 into the accumulator olol3lollslolele 5 Ix xx xx xx x 6 X X X X X X X X 7 1X X X XX X X X acc 21 319 1216 8 X XX XX X X X SUBS Subtract the value in the first level of the accumulator stack from the value in the accumulator acc OJo 2 2 2 9 7 0 Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD Copy the value in the TD ou accumulator to V1500 Leveli O 0 1 7 2 0 5 6 V150 and V1501 Level2 X X X X X X X X ojpoj2 2 2 9 7 0 J Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level3 X X X X X X X X Io v1501 V1500 Level4 X X X X X X X X as TA gt y ENT Level 5 X X X X X X X X or 39 suet L D D 5 B E A A ENT Level6 X X X X X X X X 22 ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0 Level7 X X X XX XX X cD L D D B E c A Level8 X X X X X X X X gE SHFT anost 3 3 1 4 2 0 EN S U B S SHFT RST SHFT ISG 4 RST ENT GX D B F A A out ST gt 1 5 0 o ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Multiply Top Multiply Top of Stack is a 16 bit instruction of Stack that multiplies a 4 digit BCD value in the MULS first level of the accumulator stack by a an ab ars 4 digit BCD value in the accumulator The ____ MULS result resides in the accumulator The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is is removed and all stack values
161. XxX Xx x Y 230 240 250 1 260 Port Number must be DL260 port 2 K2 o CRB K2 ij ACRB Example The AIN Complete bit or the AIN diagnostic bits are used to clear the ASCII buffer AIN Complete C1 33 Intercharacter timeout C2 Firstcharacter timeout C3 AIN overflow error C4 al ae xs 25 Os po fut SD Sc 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Informagoes sobre programac o www soliton com br e mail soliton soliton com br SOLITON CONTROLES INDUSTRIAIS LTDA Rua Alfredo Pujol 1010 Santana S o Paulo SP Tel 11 6950 1834 Fax 11 6979 8980 e mail vendas soliton com br
162. a LD gt race A I V2000 Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator ae 4 se the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0 accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc 0 0 0 Oj O 0 Of OJ OF O OJ Of O OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF 1 1 1 1 OF 1 0 AND v2006 Ac 0000000000000000001010000d081d81d841 01 0 AND the value in the 6A38 accumulator with AND V20068 0 00000000000000001 1101 101000d08141 1 000 the value in V2006 Acc 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 O OJ OJ OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF OF 1 1 1 OF OF O am A oe Copy the lower 16 bits of the O accumulator to V2010 v2010 O PESI Handheld Programmer Keystrokes nN a Q B o STR 2 1 mu 20 je L D Cc A A A SHFT ll anost 3 gt 2 0 0 a EN a a m Vv V Cc A A G ano 2 S4FT ano 2 o 0 6 EN GX V Cc A B A OUT gt SHFT AND 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 72 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions And Double The And Double is a 32 bit instruction
163. additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Read from Intelligent module function Step 1 Load the base number 0 3 into the first byte and the slot number 0 7 into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack maximum of 128 bytes Step 3 Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 4 Insert the WT instruction which specifies the starting V memory location Vaaa where the data will be written from in the CPU Helpful Hint Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 50 All See p 3 51 All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP54 on when RX WX RD WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the WT instruction will write six bytes of data to an intelligent module in base 1 slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy the information f
164. an orifice flow meter measurement as the PV to a PID loop note that the PID loop already has the square root extract function built in The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees Since these transcendental functions operate only on real numbers we do a LDR load real 45 The trig functions operate only in radians so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command After using the SINR Sine Real instruction we use an OUTD Out Double instruction to move the result from the accumulator to V memory The result is 32 bits wide requiring the Out Double to move it Accumulator contents DirectSOFT32 Display viewed as real number X1 LDR Load the real number 45 into R45 he accumulator 45 000000 RADR Convert the degrees into radians leaving the result in the 0 7358981 accumulator SINR Take the sine of the number in he accumulator which is in 0 7071 067 radians OUTD Copy the value in the accumulator to V2000 0 7071067 v2000 and V2001 NOTE The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32 bit IEEE format You must use DirectSOFT32 for entering real numbers using the LDR Load Real instruction DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Sum SUM The Sum instruction counts number of bi
165. are opening For best results follow these guidelines in using a noise suppression diode e DO NOT use this circuit with an AC power supply e Place the diode as close to the inductive field device as possible e Use a diode with a peak inverse voltage rating PIV at least 100 PIV 3A forward current or larger Use a fast recovery type such as Schottky type DO NOT use a small signal diode such as 1N914 1N941 etc e Be sure the diode is in the circuit correctly before operation If installed backwards it short circuits the supply when the relay energizes DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications I O Modules Position Wiring and Specification Slot Numbering The DL205 bases each provide different numbers of slots for use with the I O modules You may notice the bases refer to 3 slot 4 slot etc One of the slots is dedicated to the CPU so you always have one less l O slot For example you have five I O slots with a 6 slot base The I O slots are numbered 0 4 The CPU slot always contains a PLC CPU or other CPU slot controller and is not numbered E gt Oe E g A c S 3 CPU Slot I O Slots A Module Placement The following table lists the valid locations for all types of modules in a DL205 Oe Restrictions system a M
166. be sourcing or sinking When connecting two devices in a series DC circuit one must be wired as sourcing and the other as sinking Solid State Several DL205 DC input modules are flexible because they detect current flow in Input Sensors either direction so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking In the following circuit a field device has an open collector NPN transistor output It sinks current from the PLC input point which sources current The power supply can be the 24 auxiliary supply or another supply 12 VDC or 24VDC as long as the input specifications are met De Field Device PLC DC Input ER a Output Input L 3 sinking sourcing n fal Ls E o E BB Ground 7 Common SS i it i QC eS ee l J In the next circuit a field device has an open collector PNP transistor output It sources current to the PLC input point which sinks the current back to ground Since the field device is sourcing current no additional power supply is required Field Device V PLC DC Input z A Input 5 AW sinking N Output sourcing GF L Ground Common l Solid State Sometimes an application requires connecting a PLC output point to a solid state Output Loads input on a device This type of connection is usually made to carry a low level control signal not to send DC power to an actuator Several of th
167. bits from discrete LDF memory locations into the accumulator The instruction requires a starting location _ LDF A aaa xY4 Y4 iv Aaaa and the number of bits Kbbb to be K bbb 230 240 250 1 260 loaded Unused accumulator bit locations are set to zero JirectSOFT32 Operand Data DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type A aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Inputs X 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 177 0 177 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 137 540 617 0 777 0 777 Global I O GX GY N 0 3777 Constant K 1 32 1 32 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero NOTE Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack In the following example when CO is on the binary pattern of C10 C16 7 bits will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The lower 6 bits of the accumulator are output to Y20 Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction LDF Cio Locator Constant C16 C15 C14 13 C12 c11 c10 K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
168. bytes begining with the Starting Address l to byte swap Number of Bytes K12 m Byte Swap ull Starting Address All V memory See page 3 53 Number of Bytes All V memory See page 3 53 or K1 128 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid Byte Swap No Byte Swapping Byte Preferences AIN AEX PRINTV VPRINT High Low v2000 0005h AIBIGIDIE gt v2001 B A v2002 D C V2003 XX E Byte Swap All Byte A BC DE High Low V2000 0005h gt v2001 A B v2002 C D B A DICE V2003 E xx Byte Swap All but Null Byte A B C D E High Low 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn v2000 0005h v20011 A B v2002 C D BA DIC E V2003 xx E DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions SWAPB Example The AIN Complete bit is used to trigger the SWAPB instruction Use a one shot so the SWAPB only executes once AIN Complete SWAPB C1 21 J Starting Address 12001 Number of Bytes K32 Byte Swap All ASCII Clear Buffer The ASCII Clear Buffer instruction will clear the ASCII receive buffer of the ACRB specified communications port number
169. c F A A 2 5 0 0 ENT ur gt P 3 ENT l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Comparative Boolean And If Equal The And If Equal instruction connects a ANDE normally open comparative contact in ra a ae series with another contact The contact Vaaa Bbbb 230 240 250 1 260 will be on when Vaaa Bbbb And If Not Equal The And If Not Equal instruction connects ANDNE a normally closed comparative contact in Parar series with another contact The contact T v aaa B bbb 290 240 250 1 260 will be on when Vaaa 4 Bbbb lel Operand Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb V memory V All All All All All All All All See page 3 50 See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K O FFFF O FFFF O FFFF O FFFF In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 5000 and V2002 2345 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V200
170. capable of issuing the MODBUS commands to read or write the appropriate data For details on For MODBUS RTU the MODBUS protocol please refer to the Gould MODBUS Protocol reference SE AFAR Guide P1 MBUS 300 Rev J In the event a more recent version is available check with your MODBUS supplier before ordering the documentation For more details on DirectNET order our DirectNET manual part number DA DNET M You will need to determine whether the network connection is a 3 wire RS 232 type or a 5 wire RS 422 type Normally the RS 232 signals are used for shorter distances 15 meters max for communications between two devices RS 422 signals are for longer distances 1000 meters max and for multi drop networks from 2 to 247 devices Use termination resistors at both ends of RS 422 network wiring matching the impedance rating of the cable between 100 and 500 ohms 230 240 250 1 260 RXD RS 422 RXD Multi drop TXD Network TXD Signal GND PC PLC Master 9 TXDFY Termination 10 TXD Resistor on PORT 1 DL250 1 DL260 slave only l PORT 2 DL240 slave only E 4 dd dd RS 232C 1 0V_ Signal GND 11 RTS Point to point 3RXD_ RXD Rs 932 i e PORT 2 DTE Device 4 Master LL l45CcTs DL250 1 DL260 TxD 4 TxD NS oy RS 422 Slave A A Po Port 1 Pinouts DL250 1 DL260 Po
171. chart I O module operation may fluctuate depending on the ambient temperature and your application Please refer to the appropriate I O module specifications for the temperature derating curves applying to specific modules Specification Rating Storage temperature 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C Ambient operating temperature 32 Fto 131 F 0 Cto 55 C Ambient humidity 30 95 relative humidity non condensing o gt Vibration resistance MIL STD 810C Method 514 2 ag Shock resistance MIL STD 810C Method 516 2 oa Noise immunity NEMA ICS3 304 eS Atmosphere No corrosive gases 8 suo 6 Operating temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV 1000 is 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV 1000 is 4 to 158 F 20 to70 C Equipment will operate below 30 humidity However static electricity problems occur much more frequently at lower humidity levels Make sure you take adequate precautions when you touch the equipment Consider using ground straps anti static floor coverings etc if you use the equipment in low humidity environments Power The power source must be capable of supplying voltage and current complying with the base power supply specifications AC Powered Bases 24 VDC Powered Bases 125 VDC Powered Bases Part Numbers D2 03B 1 D2 03BDC1 1 D2 06BDC2 1 D2 04B 1 D2 04BDC1 1 D2 09BDC2
172. conditional therefore no input contact is allowed DirectSOFT32 20 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E N D 4 TMR 3 SHFT ENT 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 1 78 Standard RLL Instructions CPU Control Instructions Stop The Stop instruction changes the STOP operational mode of the CPU from Run to Program Stop mode This instruction is ARALARA typically used to stop PLC operation in a 230 240 250 1 260 shutdown condition such as a I O module stor failure In the following example when SP45 comes on indicating a I O module failure the CPU will stop operation and switch to the program mode Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SP45 SP E F STOP ste gt S4FT stan Ea 5 ENT S T oO P SP45 will turn on SHFT RST SHFT MLR INST cv ENT if there is an I O module falure Reset Watch Dog The Reset Watch Dog Timer instruction Timer resets the CPU scan timer The default RSTWT setting for the watch dog timer is 200ms Scan times very seldom exceed 200ms x Y4 Y4 Y but it is possible For next loops rstwr 230 240 250 1 260 subroutines interrupt routines and table instructions can be programmed such that the scan becomes longer than 200ms When instructions are used in a manner that coul
173. diagram x1 ial CT7 xi CT7 Y10 Y10 OUT Current 1 2 3 4 0 Value Cs ory RST RST CT7 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont om gt pe Sur gt Ps Mo est SHFT Sger SHFT IS SHFT SX gt Soa gt J shet 9 F ent oe P 3 ENT pee gt suet IC o SHEF Me A f ENT Some gt sur 9 str wa 9 ENT Stage Counter In the following example when X1 makes an off to on transition counter CT2 will Example Using increment by one Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 Y4 and Y5 at Comparative different counts Although this is not shown in the example when the counter is reset Contacts using the Reset instruction the counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0 The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V memory location V1007 DirectSOFT Counting diagram x1 SGCNT CT2 K10 x1 CT2 K1 Y3 gt OUT Y3 Y4 CT2 K2 Y4 z Ou Y5 cT2 K3 Y5 Current S 3 ae OUT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont B Cc T Cc STR gt 1 ENT STR gt SHET 2 SHET MLR 2 sHFT Soor S o SHFT ISX gt gt ENT _0 BESI 2 za y 1 d 0 ENT OT gt 4 ENT Sa fe an gt sur So ser I Wr E a am gt sur e SHET I Wr E a 2a gt ENT gt P E ENT a 2 Me OT E g 3 EAT AT E 5 5 EAT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Timer Cou
174. example the program contains two Out instructions using the same location Y10 The physical output of Y10 is ultimately controlled by the last rung of logic referencing Y10 X1 will override the Y10 output being controlled by XO To avoid this situation multiple outputs using the same location should not be used in programming If you need to have an output controlled by multiple inputs see the OROUT instruction on page 5 19 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 18 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Out Bit of Word The Out Bit of Word instruction reflects OUTB the status of the rung on off and outputs the discrete on off state to the specified xX xX v iv bit in the referenced memory location Aaaa bb 230 240 250 1 260 Multiple Out Bit of Word instructions on referencing the same bit of the same word generally should not be used since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the status of the bit Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa bb aaa bb Vmemory B All See p 3 52 BCD 0 to 15 All See p 3 53 BCD 0 to 15 Pointer PB All See p 3 52 BCD All See p 3 53 BCD In the following Out Bit of Word example when input X1 is on bit 3 of V1400 and bit 6 of V1401 will turn on DirectSOFT32
175. for X3 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7640 Loop Table Beginning address V1400 V7340 V10000 V17740 V7641 Number of Loops Enabled 1 4 V7642 Error Code V memory Error Location for Loop Table V7643 V7647 Reserved V7650 Port 2 End code setting Setting AS5A Nonprocedure communications start V7651 Port 2 Data format Non procedure communications format setting V7652 Port 2 Format Type setting Non procedure communications type code setting V7653 Port 2 Terminate code setting Non procedure communications Termination code setting V7654 Port 2 Store v mem address Non procedure communication data store V Memory address V7655 Port 2 Setup area 0 7 Comm protocol flag 0 8 15 Comm time out response delay time flag 1 V7656 Port 2 Setup area 0 15 Communication flag2 flag 3 V7657 Port 2 Setup completion code V7660 V7717 Set up Information Locations reserved for set up information used with future options V7720 V7722 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters V7720 Titled Timer preset value pointer V7721 Title Counter preset value pointer V7722 HiByte Titled Timer preset block size LoByte Titled Counter preset block size V7740 Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup V7741 Output Hold or reset setting Expansion bases 1 and 2 DL250 1 V7747 Location contains a 10ms counter This location increments once every 10ms V7
176. for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2 transitions from Off to On DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x1 X2 Y5 STR X 1 ENT J Cut AND SHFT P D x 2 ENT OUT Yi 5 ENT In the following example Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2 transitions from On to Off DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x2 Xi Y3 STR X IN 1 ENT 11 our _0 et pel AND SHFT N D 50 aS X IN 2 ENT a Q OUT Y OUT 5 ENT 23 e 5 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ae Ea 25 C5 TH oD SE ap Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Set The Set instruction sets or turns on an SET image register point memory location or YViviviv a consecutive range of image register as points memory locations Once the Adaa aa 230 240 250 1 260 3 A ja He point location is set it will remain on until it SET is reset using the Reset instruction It is not necessary for the input controlling the Set instruction to remain on Reset The Reset instruction resets or turns off RST an image register point memory location Tig gix or a range of image registers O a Gi se a points memory locations Once the Aasa ana point location is reset it is not necessary RST f
177. formed by discrete locations CO C3 is added to the value in the accumulator using the Add Formatted instruction The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10 Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction DirectSOFT32 Display x3 x2 x1 xo X6 LDF xo Load the value represented ON OFF OFF OFF by discrete locations X0 X3 A IE II K4 into the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero ADDF co Add the value in the 00 0 0 0 0 0 8 Accumulator cal c2 ci co accumulator with the value A K4 represented by discrete 3 C0 C3 OFF OFF ON ON location CO C3 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 44 OUTE y10 Copy the lower 4 bits of the accumulator to discrete KS locations Y10 Y14 02 me 30 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes AAN o a pr Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 gt le 53 STR OFF OFF OFF ON O je L D F A E SHFT AnDsT 5s gt o gt n aa ae m A D D F A E SHFT o E A gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT gt d ENT GX F B A E Our SHFT gt j r gt A ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut oD SE ap Subtract Formatted Subtract Formatted is a 32 bit instruction Standard RLL Instructions Math Instruc
178. from Intelligent module function Step 1 Load the base number 0 3 into the first byte and the slot number 0 7 into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack maximum of 128 bytes Step 3 Load the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 4 Insert the RD instruction which specifies the starting V memory location Vaaa where the data will be read into Helpful Hint Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required 230 240 250 1 260 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 50 All See p 3 51 All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP54 on when RX WX RD WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the RD instruction will read six bytes of data from a intelligent module in base 1 slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy the information into V memory locations V1400 V 1402
179. fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 which is the starting location for the destination table and table counter is loaded into the accumulator The source location V1500 is specified in the Add to Top instruction The table counter will be increased by 1 after the instruction is executed DirectSOFT32 Display e LD I K6 Load the constant value 6 Hex into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator LDA O 1400 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator ATT V1500 Copy the specified value rom V1500 to the table Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ue gt A 1 ENT SHFT TE Er gt PREV a ENT SHET lawost 3 lo gt Ns fis o o Er ony 0 RE mE gt 8 1 i 5 A 0 A 0 ENT For the ATT instruction the table counter ae ee determines the number of additions that viaot lols lolol 4 0 To To 2 v1400 can be made before the instruction will viaoz 9 o 9 fo
180. instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table It is not set automatically You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 H DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 a ze ES 25 CS po fut oD Sc 0 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator The destination location V1500 is specified in the Remove from Table instruction The table counter will be decreased by 1 after the instruction is executed DirectSOFT32 Display x1 LD Load the constant value 6 j Hex into the lower 16 bits I K6 of the accumulator C 11400 to HEX DA ed ed the ate into O 1400 the accumulator E o RFT mine be e S V1500 specified location V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E gt i 1 ENT SHFT ANGST ae PREV a ENT SHEE onset Mo ASE A O R F T SHET ORN 5 MLR 7 E 1 d 5 s 0 l 0 ENI Since the table counter specif
181. is executed Typically network communications will last longer than 1 CPU scan The program must wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction Multiple Read and If you are using multiple reads and writes in the RLL program you have to interlock Write Interlocks the routines to make sure all the routines are executed If you don t use the interlocks then the CPU will only execute the first routine This is because each port can only handle one transaction at a time In the example below after the MRX instruction is executed C100 is set When the port has finished the communication task the second routine is executed and C100 is reset If you re using RLL PLUS Stage Programing you can put each routine in a separate program stage to ensure proper execution and switch from stage to stage allowing only one of them to be active at a time 5P116 will execute every time it attempts to poll the network You should see this counting up as you enable the MAX and MRX instructions Some things that would preventthis 1 Com Pon RTS and CTS notjumpered 2 Portnot setup for MODBUS RTU 3 Problem in logic thatis not allowing the MVVX or MRX to enable CNT Number of times that the PLC has tried to poll network CTO Port 2 busy bit SP116 _FirstScan SPO K9999 5P117 will come on when 1 The slave device sends an Exception Response Ifthis occurs look at the Y memory location asso
182. ll see the dialog box shown below Setup Communication Ports Port Port 2 y HSA Protocol K sequence Wa gt Wa DirectNET MODBUS Help X Non sequence O Remote I O Memory Address V2000 X Use for printing only Data bits 7 y Baud rate 9600 y Stop bits 1 v Parity Odd v e Memory Address Choose a V memory address for DirectSOFT32 to use to store the port setup information You will need to reserve 9 words in V memory for this purpose Select Always use for printing if it applies e Baud Rate Choose the baud rate that matches your printer e Stop Bits Parity Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to match your printer gt T Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU and click Close Then see Chapter 3 for port wiring information in order to connect your printer to the DL250 260 5 aS so co 20 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Message Instructions Port 2 on the DL250 1 260 has standard RS232 levels and should work with most printer serial input connections Text element this is used for printing character strings The character strings are defined as the character more than 0 ranged by the double quotation marks Two hex numbers preceded by the do
183. location Pointer P for DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 Current Values Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT memory locations The V memory location is the counter location 1000 For example the counter current value for CT3 resides in V memory location V1003 Discrete Status Bit The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory location It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value For example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2 Counter Count Reset CNT 5 aaa B bbb 7 Preset The counter discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the counter instruction Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range values A B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Counters CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 presei veies v 2000 2877 2000 3777 10000 17777 10000 87777 preset ariy j 2000 3777 10000 17777 10000 87777 pb K 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 ee CTN 0 77 or V41140 41143 0 177 or V41140 41147 0 177 or V41140 V41147 0 377 or V41100 41157 Countercurrent V CT 1000 1077 1000 1177 1000 1177 1000 1377 NOTE The current value of a timer can be accessed by using the CTA data type e CTA2 Current values may also be accessed by the V memory locati
184. not require installing a remote master module use the CPU s built in remote I O channel uBIseq TES v 5 Os e O Co o e 5 5 gt Remote I O 31 Bases per channel SM Net 250 1 and DL260 CPU Only RM Net CPU Base o D DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 418 System Design and Configuration Configuring the This section describes how to configure the DL250 1 and DL260 s built in remote CPU s Remote I O channel Additional information is in the Remote I O manual D2 REMIO M I O Channel which you will need in configuring the Remote slave units on the network You can ap ar ars use the D2 REMIO M manual exclusively when using regular Remote Masters and Remote Slaves for remote I O in any DL205 system The DL250 1 and DL260 CPU s built in remote I O channel has the same capability as a RM Net Remote Master module the D2 RMSM Specifically it can communicate with up to seven remote bases containing a maximum of 2048 I O points per channel at a maximum distance of 1000 meters If required you can still use Remote Master modules in the local CPU base 2048 I O points on each channel You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL250 1 and DL260 s Port 2 is capable of several protocols To configure the port using the Handheld Programmer use AUX 56 and follow the prompts making the same choices as indicated below on this page To conf
185. one or more parallel branches in series The And Store ANDSTR Branches in Series instruction allows this operation The following example shows a simple network with contact branches in series with parallel contacts DirectSOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics XO X1 YO STR XO our STR X1 OR X2 x2 ANDSTR OUT YO END x0 Combination You can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to solve most any Networks application problem The following example shows a simple combination network XO X2 X5 YO le ouT X1 X3 X4 Al od Gs Boolean Stack There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung This is because the DL205 CPUs use an 8 level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung Each time you enter a STR instruction the instruction is placed on the top of the boolean stack Any other STR instructions on the boolean stack are pushed down a level The ANDSTR and ORSTR instructions combine levels of the boolean stack when they are encountered Since the boolean stack is only eight levels an error will occur if the CPU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the boolean stack 5 as so Ey 26 e 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 58 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions The foll
186. or a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current per output point can be added to each output Refer to our catalog for a complete line of DINnectors DIN rail mounted fuse blocks Oui Go ER a DINnector External Fuses e a en fe DIN rail mounted Fuses ol oa oo oa 4 2 E 2 E K O S lle E y 19 0 A a O a NOTE For modules which have soldered or non replaceable fuses we recommend you return your module to us and let us replace your blown fuse s since disassembling the module will void your warranty DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EZS Installation Wiring and Specifications Glossary of Specification Terms 0 2c 5 9 Z ad O 2 S8 O pes ake ve cw Inputs or Outputs Per Module Commons Per Module Input Voltage Range Output Voltage Range Peak Voltage AC Frequency ON Voltage Level OFF Voltage Level Input Impedance Input Current Minimum ON Current Maximum OFF Current Minimum Load External DC Required ON Voltage Drop Maximum Leakage Current Maximum Inrush Current Base Power Required Indicates number of input or output points per module and designates current sinking current sourcing or either Number of commons per module and their electrical characteristics
187. read from the CPU at station address 5 and copied to V memory locations V2000 V2004 in the slave CPU DirectSOFT32 x1 SP124 LD LD j or I I K0205 Kf205 The constant value K0205 specifies The constant value Kf205 the ECOM DCM slot number 2 and specifies CPU port 2 and the slave address 5 the slave address 5 LD K10 Master Slave The constant value K10 specifies the number of CPU CPU bytes to be read LDA O 2300 V2277 X X X X X X X X V1777 Octal address 2300 is v2300 3 4 5 7 3 4 5 7 v2000 converted to 4C0 HEX and v2301 8 5 3 4 8 51 314 ve2001 loaded into the accumulator V2300 is the starting v2302 1 9 3 6 gt 1 9 3 6 v2002 location for the Master CPU gt where the specified data will v2303 9 5 7 1 9 5 7 1 v2z003 be read from v2304 1 4 2 3 gt 1 4 2 3 v2004 v2305 X X X X X X X X v2005 WX V2000 V2000 is the starting location in the for the Slave CPU where the specified data will be written to Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B str gt 1 ENT w SP B Cc E ANDN gt SHFT STRN 1 2 4 ENT L D K Cc A F SHFT anost 3 gt SHE ume 2 o SELENE L D K B A SHFT anost 3 gt SHFT mb i ENT L D A O Cc D A A SHFT anpst 3 o gt
188. remote I O cable than it is to run all those signal wires for each individual I O point The following paragraphs provide some general information on how much time some of the segments can require Initialize hardware Check I O module config and verify Initialize various memory based on retentive configuration Update input Read input data from Specialty and Remote I O Service peripheral CPU Bus Communication Update Clock Calendar RUN Execute ladder program PID Equations DL250 Update output Write output data to Specialty and Remote I O Do diagnostics E NO Report the error set flag register turn on LED NO Fatal error YES Force CPU into PGM mode m DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 v J a e Lol D E o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo EZS CPU Specifications and Operation The CPU performs an initialization task once the system power is on The initialization task is performed once at power up so it does not affect the scan time for the application program 47 Cc no 5 os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt aS 0 Initialization Process Reading Inputs DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Initialization DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Minimum 1 6 Seconds 1 0 Seconds 1 2 Seconds 1 2 Seco
189. rung or additional branch in STRNI a rung The status of the contact will be FVITITI opposite the status of the associated input x ana point on the module at the time the 290 2402501260 instruction is executed The image register is not updated Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 In the following example when X1 is on Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 x1 Y2 T ouT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes l B str SHFT a gt y ENT GX Cc out gt 2 ENT In the following example when X1 is off Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 x1 Y2 Jt our Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SP l B stan SHFT 5 gt ENT GX Cc our gt 2 LENT 5 aS so cO 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES Standard RLL Instructions Immediate Instructions Or Immediate The Or Immediate connects two contacts ORI in parallel The status of the contact will be IFTITITY the same as the status of the associated input point on the module at the time the 290 590 2504 260 instruction is executed The image register X aaa is not updated I Or Not Immediate The Or Not Immediate connects two ORNI contacts in parallel The status of the Iis Ji co
190. setting the lower and upper limits for the CH1 analog pot Default 0000 Range 0 9999 V7642 V7643 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH2 analog pot Default 0000 Range 0 9999 V7644 V7645 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH3 analog pot Default 0000 Range 0 9999 V7646 V7647 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH4 analog pot Default 0000 Range 0 9999 V7650 V7737 Locations reserved for set up information used with future options remote I O and data communications V7720 V7722 V7720 V7721 V7722 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters Titled Timer preset value pointer VO V3760 Title Counter preset value pointer VO V3760 HiByte Titled Timer preset block size LoByte Titled Counter preset block size 1 99 V7746 Location contains the battery voltage accurate to 0 1V For example a value of 32 indicates 3 2 volts V7747 Location contains a 10ms counter This location increments once every 10ms V7751 Fault Message Error Code stores the 4 digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is executed If you ve used ASCII messages DL240 only then the data label DLBL reference number for that message is stored here V7752 I O configuration Error stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current config DL205 Use
191. status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 v2000 1 0 00 x LD I v2000 z The unused accumulator Load the value in V2000 into i the lower 16 bits of the iis are sel to zero AN accumulator 0 00 0 1 0 0 0 Accumulator Xx 2 5 V2006 MUL V2006 Acc 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0 The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0 OUTD 2010 v2011 v2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and v2011 al 0 pc S Handheld Programmer Keystrokes poi O B C5 STR gt 1 ENT Y on L D C A A A GC SHFT lanpst _s_ _ _ 2 0 0 rm Cea 09 M U L c A A G SHFT ORs I isa anost gt 2 0 0 6 ENT GX D c A B A our SHFT 3 gt 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Multiply Double MULD X XIV Y 230 240 250 1 260 Multiply Double is a 32 bit instruction that multiplies th
192. that ANDD logically ands the value in the JTJ lv accumulator with an 8 digit max constant value Aaaa The result _ ANDD 230 240 250 1 260 resides in the accumulator Discrete Paes status flags indicate if the result of the And Double is zero or a negative number the most significant bit is on Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is anded with 36476A38 using the And double instruction The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 v2001 v2000 xi LDD aks EA lo 2 7 e ae 7 N Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 a A wo N Acc 0 1 0 1 0
193. the X X x Y accumulator stack The result resides in ANDS 230 240 250 1 260 the accumulator The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed from the stack and all values are moved up one level Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the And with Stack is zero or a negative number the most significant bit is on Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the binary value in the accumulator will be anded with the binary value in the first level or the accumulator stack The result resides in the accumulator The 32 bit value is then output to V1500 and V1501 DirectSOFT32 X1 LDD V1401 V1400 II v1400 7A 5 4 7 E 218 Load the value in V1400 and ee li ee to b V1401 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc op 1 op1po 1pojojof1 1 1 1 1 14 O opO 1 O 1 oOJofopo 1 1 14 1 OF 1 0
194. the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition V7666 V7774 Not used N A V7775 Scan stores the current scan time milliseconds N A V7776 Scan stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last N A Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds V7777 Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last N A Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation DL240 System V memory System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V3630 V3707 The default location for multiple preset values for UP DWN and UP counter 1 N A or pulse output function V3710 V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP DWN and UP counter 2 N A V3770 V3773 Not used N A V3774 V3777 Default locations for analog potentiometer data channels 1 4 respectively Range 0 9999 V7620 V7627 V7620 V7621 V7622 V7623 V7624 V7625 V7626 V7627 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters Sets the V memory location that contains the value Sets the V memory location that contains the message Sets the total number 1 16 of V memory locations to be displayed Sets the V memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed Sets the V memory location that contains the character code to be displayed Cont
195. to use this configuration and you will need to restructure your I O configuration uBissq TES o for O oO Q feb e WARNING It is extremely important to calculate the power budget If you exceed the power budget the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage A mD ZNN DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES System Design and Configuration Power Budget Calculation Worksheet Cc Be go 05 aD 55 YO ne qu SY A O This blank chart is provided for you to copy and use in your power budget calculations Base 0 Module Type 5 VDC mA Auxiliary Power Source 24 VDC Output mA Available Base Power CPU Slot Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Other Total Power Required Remaining Power Available 1 Use the power budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the system components This includes the CPU any I O modules and any other devices such as the Handheld Programmer or the DV 1000 operator interface Also make sure you obtain any external power requirements such as the 24VDC power required by the analog modules Add the current columns starting with Slot O and put the total in the row labeled Total power required Subtract
196. transorb provide the best surge and transient suppression of AC and DC powered coils providing the fastest response with the smallest overshoot Metal Oxide Varistors MOV provide the next best surge and transient suppression of AC and DC powered coils For example the waveform in the figure below shows the energy released when opening a contact switching a 24 VDC solenoid Notice the large voltage spike 24 VDC ve 32 n OS 24 VDC 24 VDC 2 9 O e e al O g Module Relay Contact 324 VDC This figure shows the same circuit with a transorb TVS across the coil Notice that the voltage spike is significantly reduced 24 VDC E 24 VDC 42 VDC Use the following table to help select a TVS or MOV suppressor for your application 24 VDC O o Module Relay Contact based on the inductive load voltage Vendor Catalog Type TVS MOV Diode Inductive Load Voltage Part Number Transient Voltage Suppressors www soliton com 8 channel TVS 8 channel TVS 24 VDC 110 VAC ZL TD8 24 ZL TD8 120 General Instrument TVS 110 120 VAC P6KE180CAGICT ND Transient Voltage _ TVS 220 240 VAC P6KE350CA Suppressors and LiteOn Diodes from DigiKey Cat TVS 12 24 VDC or VAC P6K30CAGICT ND alog Phone Diode 12 24 VDC or VAC 1N4004CT ND 1 800 344 4539 Harris Metal Oxide MOV 110 120 VAC V150LA20C Varistors from Newark MOV 220 240 VAC V250LA20C Cat
197. two digits 230 240 250 1 260 This means a HEX table of two V memory locations would require four V memory locations for the equivalent ASCII table The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program a HEX to ASCII table function The example on the following page shows a program for the HEX to ASCII table function Step 1 Load the number of V memory locations in the HEX table into the first level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the HEX table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Specify the starting V memory location Vaaa for the ASCII table in the HTA instruction Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator al T 3 Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range PS aaa aaa g gt Vmemory v All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 co Se 09 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions In the following example when X1 is ON the constant K2 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The starting location for the HEX table V1500 is loaded into the accumulator using the Lo
198. type NPN open collector Peak voltage 30 VDC Peak voltage 30 VDC AC frequency N A AC frequency N A ON voltage drop 0 5 VDC maximum ON voltage drop 1 0 VDC maximum Max load current 0 1A point Max load current 0 1A point 1 6A common 1 6A common Max leakage current 0 1mA 30 VDC Max leakage current 0 1mA 30 VDC Max inrush current 150mA for 10 ms Max inrush current 150 mA for 10 ms Minimum load 0 2mA Minimum load 0 2mA Base power required 200mA Max Base power required 200mA Max OFF to ON response 0 5 ms OFF to ON response 0 5 ms ON to OFF response 0 5 ms ON to OFF response 0 5 ms Terminal type Removable Terminal type Removable Status indicators Logic Side Status indicators Logic Side Weight 2 3 oz 65 g Weight 2 8 oz 80 g Fuses none Fus
199. type of wire used but 16 AWG is the e BANG recommended size Do not overtighten DII the connector screws recommended z pa torque value is 7 81 pound inches 0 882 e E OG PE Nem f amp LG Z NOTE You can connect either a 115 ce VAC or 220 VAC supply to the AC P 24 VDC OUT 3 terminals Special wiring or jumpers are 03a 8S not required as with some of the other Bo DirectLOGIC products NC coe 12 24 VDC Base Terminal Strip 125 VDC Base Terminal Strip el SUS P 12 24VDC 115 264 VDC D D Alme ea Ae a 14 D F C OU HTP H 24 VDC OUT D D osa WARNING Once the power wiring is connected install the plastic protective cover Y z When the cover is removed there is a risk of electrical shock if you accidentally touch Lo the wiring or wiring terminals DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications 213 O Wiring Strategies The DL205 PLC system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations By studying this section before actual installation you can probably find the best wiring strategy for your application This will help to lower system cost wiring errors and avoid safety problems PLC Isolation PLC circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries Boundaries shown in the drawing below Electrical isolation provides safety so that a fault in one area does not damage another A pow
200. unused accumulator bits are set to zero ne 0 0 O O 0 A O 1 Accumulator MULB x o 0 2 E V1420 V1420 gt Acc Ojo jo f1 C C 2 E The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator OUTD ojofo 1 C C 2 E V1500 V1501 V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D B E A A SHFT Hl anost 3 gt 1 4 o a EN M U L B B E Cc A SHFT orsr isc 1 gt 1 4 2 o ENT GX D B F A A Our SHFT 3 gt 1 5 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so cO 2 3 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Divide Binary Divide Binary is a 16 bit instruction that DIVB divides the unsigned 2 s complement ai IF binary value in the accumulator by a binary value Aaaa which is either a V DIVB 230 240 250 1 260 memory location or a 16 bit unsigned 2 s Aaaa complement binary constant The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Constant K 0 FFFF Discrete B
201. v e Protocol Click the check box to the left of MODBUS use AUX 56 on 230 240 250 1 260 the HPP and select MBUS and then you ll see the dialog box below x Port Port 2 Close Protocol K Sequence I DirectNET iz a Y MODBUS TT Non Sequence Remote 140 Time out eno ms The DL250 1 RTS on delay time o ms y does not sup RTS off delay time 0 ms Pe mig Suppression Station Number fi E feature Baud rate 38400 X Echo Suppression C RS 422 485 4 wire Stop bits 1 RS 232C 2 wire RS 485 2 wire Parity Odd v Port 2 15 Pin Timeout amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging an error RTS On Delay Time The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data RTS Off Delay Time The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data Station Number For making the CPU port a MODBUS master choose 1 The possible range for MODBUS slave numbers is from 1 to 247 but the DL250 1 and DL260 WX and RX network instructions used in Master mode will access only slaves 1 to 90 Each slave must have a unique number At powerup the port is automatically a slave unless and until the DL250 1 or DL260 executes ladder logic network instructions which use the port as a master Thereafter the port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again e Baud Rate
202. with inputs Per input point N A 40 0 us 2 0 us 2 0 us For example the time required for a DL240 to read two 8 point input modules located in a Remote base would be calculated as follows Where NM is the number of modules and NI is the total number of input points Remote I O Formula Time 6us 67us x NM 40us x NI Example Time 6us 67us x 2 40us x 16 Time 780 us J a e Lol D o on fe Service Peripherals Communication requests can occur at any time during the scan but the CPU only logs the requests for service until the Service Peripherals portion of the scan The CPU does not spend any time on this if there are no peripherals connected suonyeoosds Ndo To Log Request anytime DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Nothing Min 8 Max O us O us O us 0 us Connected Port 1 Send Min Max 22 28 us 23 26 us 3 2 9 2 us 3 2 9 2 us Rec Min Max 24 58 us 52 70 us 25 0 35 0 us 25 0 35 0 us Port 2 Send Min Max N A 26 30 us 3 6 11 5 us 3 6 11 5 us Rec Min Max N A 60 75 us 35 0 44 0 us 35 0 44 0 us DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EST CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc Ss 5 2 OT 50 g2 el0 No D as 0 CPU Bus Communication Update Clock Calendar Special Relays Special Registers Writing Outputs During the Service Peripherals portion of the s
203. xX v 230 240 250 1 260 The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison This does not affect the value in the accumulator Discrete Bit Flags Description SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in V1410 and V1411 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value that was loaded into the accumulator from V1400 and V1401 is placed on top of the stack when the second Load instruction is executed The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in the first level or the accumulator stack using the CMPS instruction The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison In this example if the value in the accumulator is less than the value in the stack SP60 will turn on energizing C30
204. your application Also The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For Next loop does not extend the scan time larger the Watch Dog Timer setting For more information on the Watch Dog Timer refer to the RSTWT instruction DirectSOFT32 Xi Ka 1 2 3 FOR RSTWT X20 Y5 T our NEXT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR 1 ENT F 0 R D SHFT Is ste orn gt 3 ENT R S T Ww T SHFT orn Ast mtr anon mer ENT l c A str SHFT A gt r ENT GX F OUT 2 5 ENT N E x T SHFT TMR 4 ser mer ENT 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn e DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Goto Subroutine GTS SBR Xl VIN Y 230 240 250 1 260 Subroutine Return RT X Viv Y 230 240 250 1 260 Subroutine Return Conditional RTC KX S ae 230 240 250 1 260 Instruction Set Program Control Instructions The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a section of ladder logic to be placed outside the main body of the program execute only when needed There can be a maximum of 128 GTS instructions and 64 SBR instructions used in a program The GTS instructions can be nested up to 8 levels An error E412 will occur if the maximum limits are exceeded Typically this will
205. 0 These real numbersare in the IEEE 32 bit floating point format so they occupy two V memory locations regardless of how big or small the number may be If you view a stored real number in hex binary or even BCD the number shown will be very difficult to decipher Just like all other number types you must keep track of real number locations in memory so they can be read with the proper instructions later The previous example above stored a real number in V1400 and V1401 Suppose that now we want to DR retreive that number Just use the Load Real with v1400 the V data type as shown to the right Next we could perform real math on it or convert it to a binary number DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Out OUT Viviv Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Out instruction is a 16 bit instruction that copies the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to a specified V memory OUT location Aaaa Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP76 on when the
206. 0 K5000 v2002 K2345 Y3 E Cc A A A _ _ str HT 4 gt 2 0 0 o gt oe ee ae 5 0 0 0 Vv E Cc A A Cc anp SHET 4 7 2 0 0 2 gt Cc D E F 2 3 4 5 ENT GX D OUT gt 3 ENT In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 2550 and V2002 2500 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v2000 K2550 v2002 K2500 Y3 E c A A A str SH T fa gt e 0 0 o gt OUT I c F F A ENT 2 5 5 0 w E A A c anon SHFT 4 gt 2 0 0 2 gt ep e F A A ENT 39 2 5 0 0 22 GX gt D ENT Co OUT 3 a a e 5 oT E DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Comparative Boolean Store STR Y Y Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 Store Not STRN The Comparative Store instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative contact The contact will be on when Aaaa gt Bbbb The Comparative Store Not instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in Aaaa B bbb Y Y Y Y a 230 240 250 1 260 rung with a normally closed comparative contact The contact will be on when Aaaa lt Bbbb Aaaa B bbb DL205 U
207. 00 V41114 337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41115 357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41116 377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41117 This portion of the table shows additional Counter contacts available with the DL260 MSB DL260 Additional Counter CT Contacts LSB Counter 17 16 gt 159 A A O AO 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41150 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41151 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41152 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41153 317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V41154 337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41155 357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41156 377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41157 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation Remo
208. 010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and v2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D Cc A A A SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 o o g J FNT B Cc D Cc P L SET 1 2 3 2 cv ANDST ENT GX D Cc A B A out ST gt 2 o 1 of pene 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Binary to Real The Binary to Real instruction converts a Conversion binary value in the accumulator to its BTOR equivalent real number floating point BTOR format The result resides in the Xx x Y4 Y accumulator Both the binary and the real 230 240 250 1 260 number may use all 32 bits of the accumulator Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The BTOR instruction converts the binary value in the accumulator the equivalent real number format The binary weight of the MSB is converted to the real number exponent by adding it to 127 decimal Then the remaining bits are copied to the mantissa as shown The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 a
209. 0403 V40403 V40502 V40502 Remote l O Using the Remote Slave Worksheet DirectSOFT32 Setup Program shown above can help organize our SPO system data in preparation for writing our as Slave 1 ladder program a blank full page copy of el Input this worksheet is in the Remote I O str Su Manual The four key parameters we Y37704 nis need to place in our Remote l 0O Os configuration table are in the lower right LD 23 corner of the worksheet You can K16 ey determine the address values by using the ya memory map given at the end of Chapter E o5 3 CPU Specifications and Operation The program segment required to transfer LDA Slave 1 our worksheet results to the Remote I O 040502 Output configuration table is shown to the right Remember to use the LDA or LD OUT instructions appropriately V306 The next page covers the remainder of the LD required program to get this remote l O K16 link up and running OUT V37707 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 4 22 System Design and Configuration When configuring a Remote l O channel DirectSOFT32 for fewer than 7 slaves we must fill the remainder of the table with zeros This is KO necessary because the CPU will try to interpret any non zero number as slave OUTD information V37710 We continue our setup program from the previous page by adding a segment which fills the remainder of the table wi
210. 07 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V41060 1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V41061 1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V41062 1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V41063 1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V41064 o m o O O 0 fed je suoyeoosds Ndo 1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V41065 1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V41066 1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V41067 1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V41070 1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V41071 1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V41072 1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V41073 1717 1716 1715 1714 1713
211. 1 0 5 v1i405 1 0 1 0 5 vi406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 vi406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 SP56 OFF I SP56 ON v1407 Xx X X Xx V1407 X X xX X until end of scan or next instruction that uses SP56 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so co 2 3 e 5 0 mn 5 166 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Add to Top The Add To Top instruction pushes a value ATT on to a V memory table from a V memory Arar ae location When the value is added to the aaa table all other values are pushed down 1 230 240 250 1 260 location The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Add To Top function Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator Remember the starting location of the table is used as the table length counter This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the ATT instructions which specifies source V memory location Vaaa This is where the value will be moved from Helpful Hint
212. 1 1 0 O O Oj OF 1 0 Ni N v2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ae gt 1 ENT SHFT asta Pa gt 11 A O O SHFT a SHFT A F 5 5 po gt suet A a ENT OX SHFT P gt pe R A B i A r ENT 4 v2010 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Rotate Left Rotate Left is a 32 bit instruction that rotates ROTL the bits in the accumulator a specified ra ar ae number Aaaa of places to the left ROTL 230 240 250 1 260 Aaaa Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Constant K 1 32 1 32 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the left using the Rotate Left instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double
213. 1 2 V2000 BO 1 2 Example with V2000 sp sp18 binary format where sp space Ju V memory Number of Characters as Register with uE Modifier 1 2 3 4 o V2000 sp sp 1 8 gE V2000 B sp sp 1 2 V2000 BS 1 2 V2000 BCO 0 0 1 2 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 223 ASCII Instructions VPRINT V memory text element the following is used for printing to V memory text stored in registers Use the followed by the number of characters after V memory number for representing the text If you assign 0 as the number of characters the function will read the character count from the first location Then it will start at the next V memory location and read that number of ASCII codes for the text from memory Example V2000 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed V2000 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx determined by the number in V2000 will be printed VPRINT Bit element the following is used for printing to V memory the state of the designated bit in V memory or a control relay bit The bit element can be assigned by the designating point and bit number preceded by the V memory number or relay number The output type is described as shown in the table below Data format Description 1 none Print 1 for an ON state and 0 for an OFF state 2 BOOL Print TRUE for an ON state and
214. 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc op 0 0 Oj O 0 Of OF O Of OJ OF O OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF 1 1 1 1 OF 1 0 XOR v2006 Acc 0 000000000000000 0010010001111010 XOR the value in the 6A38 accumulator with XOR V20068 0 0o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000 0110101000111 000 the value in V2006 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 O O O OF OJ OF OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF OF 1 17 17 Of OF 1 0 OF OF OF 17 0 gem ONE Copy the lower 16 bits of the AENA accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x B str 2 S4FT ser 1 EN L D v Cc A A A 0 SHFT anost 3 gt SHFT AND A A A 3 ENT 2 D gt x Q v C A A G So SHFT ser SHFT op gt SHFT AND 5 7 7 6 ENT g S GX v c A B A gt Q OUT gt SHFT AND 2 0 1 0 ENT S yD oT E DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions Exclusive Or The Exclusive OR Double is a 32 bit Double instruction that performs an exclusive or XORD of the value in the accumulator
215. 1 L 16 Output F2 02DA 2 L 16 Output F2 08DA 1 16 Output F2 08DA 2 16 Output F2 02DAS 1 32 Output F2 02DAS 2 32 Output F2 4AD2DA 16 Input amp 16 Output F2 04RTD 32 Input F2 04THM 32 Input Note 1 12pt modules consume 16 points The first 6 points are assigned two are skipped and then the next 6 points are assigned For example a D2 12TA installed in slot O would use YO Y5 and Y10 Y15 Y6 Y7 and Y16 Y17 would be unused DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 4 7 System Design and Configuration Calculating the Power Budget Managing your Power Resource Ni OLD SS CPU Power Specifications Module Power Requirements When you determine the types and quantity of l O modules you will be using in the DL205 system it is important to remember there is a limited amount of power available from the power supply We have provided a chart to help you easily see the amount of power available with each base The following chart will help you calculate the amount of power you need with your I O selections At the end of this section you will also find an example of power budgeting and a worksheet for your own calculations If the I O you choose exceeds the maximum power available from the power supply you may need to use local expansion bases or remote l O bases WARNING It is extremely important to calculate the power budget If you exceed the power budget the system may operate in an unpre
216. 1 O O O O OJO and V1501 5 9 C 1 4 C 4 j0 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v1501 V1500 B STR EZ 1 ENT G D D B E A A SHFT anpst 3 0 gt 1 4 o o ENT R O T R Cc SHFT orn inst mur orn xd 2 ENT GX D B F A A our SHFT gt 1 5 o o ENT 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Encode The Encode instruction encodes the bit ENCO position in the accumulator having a value of 1 and returns the appropriate binary Yiviv Y representation If the most significant bit is ___ ENCO 230 240 250 1 260 set to 1 Bit 31 the Encode instruction would place the value HEX 1F decimal 31 in the accumulator If the value to be encoded is 0000 or 0001 the instruction will place a zero in the accumulator If the value to be encoded has more than one bit position set to a 1 the least significant 1 will be encoded and SP53 will be set on Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on The value in V2000 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The bit po
217. 1 is on output Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 Xi Y2 out Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT OUT gt 2 ENT In the following Store Not example when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 X1 Y2 1 OUT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Handheld Programmer Keys rokes STRN gt 1 ENT OUT gt 2 ENT Store Bit of Word STRB X XIV Y 230 240 250 1 260 Store Not Bit of Word STRNB XIXISJ IL 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions 5 11 Boolean Instructions The Store Bit of Word instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact Status of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the associated memory location Aaaa bb The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated memory location Aaaa bb Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa bb aaa bb Vmemory B All See p 3 52 BCD 0 to 15 All See p 3 53 BCD 0 to 15 Pointer PB All See p 3 52 BCD 0 to 15 All See p 3 53 BCD 0 to 15 In the following Store Bi
218. 1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 is off output Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 X1 B1400 4 Y5 1 our Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT ANDN SHFT B gt Vv 1 4 0 0 gt K 4 ENT OUT gt 5 ENT 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ESOS Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions And Store The And Store instruction logically ands AND STR two branches of a rung in series Both IL did branches must begin with the Store our 230 240 250 1 260 imisiruction o Or Store The Or Store instruction logically ors two OR STR branches of a rung in parallel Both o IigJ gid branches must begin with the Store OUT 230 240 250 1 260 INSUUcusn R In the following And Store example the branch consisting of contacts X2 X3 and X4 have been anded with the branch consisting of contact X1 DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes X1 X2 X3 Y5 STR 5 1 ENT A P aa io STR gt 2 ENT X4 AND gt 3 ENT oR gt 4 ENT ANDST ENT ouT gt 5 ENT In the following Or Store example the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been ored with the branch c
219. 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V40043 V40243 1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V40044 V40244 1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V40045 V40245 1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V40046 V40246 1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V40047 V40247 1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V40050 V40250 1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V40051 V40251 1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V40052 V40252 1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V40053 V40253 1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V40054 V40254 1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V40055 V40255 1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V40056 V40256 1377 1376 1375
220. 11 a aprecia yourself with how numbers are used in 961428 7 1011 DirectLOGIC PLCs The information you decimal A 72B learn here applies to all our PLCs 300124 177 As any good computer does PLCs store and manipulate numbers in binary form ones and zeros So why do we have to deal with numbers in so many different forms Numbers have meaning and some representations are more convenient than others for particular purposes Sometimes we use numbers to represent a size or amount of something Other numbers refer to locations or addresses or to time In science we attach engineering units to numbers to give a particular meaning PLC Resources PLCs offer a fixed amount of resources depending on the model and configuration We use the word resources to include variable memory V memory I O points timers counters etc Most modular PLCs allow you to add I O points in groups of eight In fact all the resources of our PLCs are counted in octal It s easier for computers to count in groups of eight than ten because eight is an even power of 2 Octal means simply counting in groups of eight things at a time In the figure to the RA dene ee e right there are eight circles The quantity in decimal is 8 but in octal it is 10 8 and 9 are not valid in octal In octal 10 means 1 group of 8 plus 0 no individuals J a e Lol D o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo Octal 123 45 6 7 10 In the fig
221. 1123 1122 1121 1120 V40645 1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V40646 1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V40647 1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V40650 1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V40651 1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V40652 1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V40653 1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V40654 1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V40655 1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V40656 1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V40657 1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V40660 1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V40661 14
222. 115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V41044 1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V41045 1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V41046 1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V41047 1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V41050 1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V41051 1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V41052 1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V41053 1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V41054 1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V41055 1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V41056 1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V41057 1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 14
223. 1407 X X X X v1407 X X X x Scan N 1 Before STT Execution After STT Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Incremented vi4o1 0 5 0 0 06 0 0 0 1 v1400 visor os ofojo6 o o Jo 2 Jv1400 vi402 X X X X 1 v1402 9 9 9 9 o viao3 1x Tx x x 2 Source viaos x Px XIX 2 Source viaoa x x Tx x 3 9 9 9 9 V1500 viaoa x x 1x 1x 3 9 9 9 9 V1500 V1405 X X X X 4 V1405 X X X X 4 visos x x x x 5 SP56 visos x x x x 5 SEG SP56 OFF SP56 OFF V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X Scan N 5 Before STT Execution After STT Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Incremented vi401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 5 V1400 v1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 v1400 vi402 9 9 9 9 1 v1402 9 9 9 9 1 visos 3 lo 7 la 2 Source v1403 3lol7 la 2 Source viaoa ls l9l8l9 3 2 0 4 6 V1500 viaoalealolelo 3 2 0 4 16 V1500 v1i405 1 0 1 0 4 v1i405 1 o 1 0 4 V1406 X X X X 5 SP56 v1i406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 V1407 X X X X sP86 OFF v1407 X X X X Ai apa AA or next instruction E that uses SP56 Scan N 6 Before STT Execution After STT Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Resets to 1 not 0 k v1i401 Jo0O 5j0 0 0 6 O 0 0 6 v1400 v1401 1 2 3 4 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400 X S vi402 9 9 9 9 1 ae v1402 9 9 9 9 1 hes AA opm V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2 os viaoa 8 lo ls 9 3 1 2 1 3 4 Vv1500 visos 8 l9l8 l9 3 1 2 3 4 V1500 es v1405 1 0 1 0 4 v1i405 1 0 1 0 4 Se visos
224. 16 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V40440 V40540 1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V40441 V40541 1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V40442 V40542 1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V40443 V40543 1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V40444 V40544 1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V40445 V40545 1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V40446 V40546 1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V40447 V40547 1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V40450 V40550 1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V40451 V40551 1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V40452 V40552 1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262
225. 171 2170 2167 2166 2165 2164 2163 2162 2161 2160 40707 2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212 2211 2210 2207 2206 2205 2204 2203 2202 2201 2200 40710 2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225 2224 2223 2222 2221 2220 40711 2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245 2244 2243 2242 2241 2240 V40712 2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265 2264 2263 2262 2261 2260 V40713 2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312 2311 2310 2307 2306 2305 2304 2303 2302 2301 2300 40714 2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325 2324 2323 2322 2321 2320 40715 2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345 2344 2343 2342 2341 2340 40716 2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365 2364 2363 2362 2361 2360 V40717 2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412 2411 2410 2407 2406 2405 2404 2403 2402 2401 2400 40720 2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425 2424 2423 2422 2421 2420 V40721 2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445 2444 2443 2442 2441 2440 V40722 2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465 2464 2463
226. 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator Remember the starting location of the table is used as the table pointer This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the STT instruction which specifies the source V memory location Vaaa This is where the value will be moved from Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Helpful Hint The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on If you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan a one shot PD should be used in the input logic Helpful Hint The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the operation Also it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table For example if the table is 6 words long then the allowable range of values that could be in the pointer should be between 0 and 6 If the value is outside of this range the data will not be moved Also a one shot PD should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP56 on when the table pointer equals the table length NOTE S
227. 2 3 7 5 V2006 and V2007 V2006 ACC 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 9 The in V2006 and V2007 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator OUTD 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 19 v2010 v2011 v2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and v2011 1 ac Ke Handheld Programmer Keystrokes EE B ENT oe STR 2 1 oO L D D Cc A A A gE SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 0 0 ue aa S U B D Cc A A G SHFT ast SHFT isa 1 3 gt 2 0 o 6 EN GX D Cc A B A our S4FT gt 2 0 1 o pen DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Subtract Real The Subtract Real instruction subtracts a SUBR real number in the accumulator from either sixga F a real constant or a real number occupying SUBR two consecutive V memory locations The Aaa 230 240 250 1 260 result resides in the accumulator Both numbers must conform to the IEEE floating point format Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant R 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 to 3 402823E 038 3 402823E 038 Discrete Bit Flags Descr
228. 2 50 68 86 104 122 131 F Internal module circuitry V D2 D6 Do Ambient Temperature C F INPUT 3 Da D7 a ow I avjav S To Logic O Optical 5 15VDC 1 COM Isolator 4 14mA E FDA CLASS2 a m C J Configuration shown is current sinking DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 08NA 1 AC Input D2 08NA 2 AC Input Inputs per module 8 Inputs per module 8 Commons per module 1 2 1 O terminal points Commons per module 2 internally connected Input voltage range 80 132 VAC Input voltage range 170 265 VAC Peak voltage 132 VAC Peak voltage 265 VAC AC frequency 47 63 Hz AC frequency 47 63 Hz ON voltage level 75 VAC minimum ON voltage level 150 VAC minimum OFF voltage level 20 VAC maximum OFF voltage level 40 VAC maximum Input impedance 12K 60 Hz Input impedance 18K 60 Hz Input current 13mA 100VAC 60Hz
229. 2 bit instruction that performs an XORS exclusive or of the value in the xixi xis accumulator with the first level of the XORS accumulator stack The result resides in the accumulator The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed from the stack and all values are moved up one level Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or with Stack is zero or a negative number the most significant bit is on 230 240 250 1 260 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the binary value in the accumulator will be exclusive ored with the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack The result will reside in the accumulator DirectSOFT32 xt LDD V1401 V1400 II v1400 7 A 5 4 7 jE 2 8 Load the value in V1400 and az A me ia V1401 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Acc op 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 41 1 1 1 14 O OF OF 1 OF 1 OJ OJ OF OF 1 1 14 1 OF 1 0 ee Acc 90 1010310008181 441 1410 001 03 00000808184 1401 0 Exclusive OR the value 36476A38 in the accumulator with XOR 1
230. 205 204 203 202 201 200 V40410 V40510 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V40411 V40511 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V40412 V40512 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V40413 V40513 317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V40414 V40514 337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V40415 V40515 357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V40416 V40516 377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V40417 V40517 417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V40420 V40520 437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V40421 V40521 457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V40422 V40522 477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V40423 V40523 MSB DL250 1 DL260 Additional Input X and Output Y Points LSB 517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V40424 V40524 537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530
231. 205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications Ea Installing DL205 Bases Choosing the Base The DL205 system offers four different sizes of bases and three different power Type supply options The following diagram shows an example of a 6 slot base uo e e1su fad gt ox 09 jo 49 e h O fad Power Wiring N A Connections CPU Slot O Slots ULIM o 5 D 9 Your choice of base depends on three things e Number of I O modules required e Input power requirement AC or DC power e Available power budget Mounting the Base All I O configurations of the DL205 may use any of the base configurations The bases are secured to the equipment panel or mounting location using four M4 screws in the corner tabs of the base The full mounting dimensions are given in the previous section on Mounting Guidelines a Mounting Tabs elelejejele WARNING To minimize the risk of electrical shock personal injury or equipment damage always disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component VA uo TRR DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES Installation Wiring and Specifications 5A 2c 5 9 Z ood
232. 2064 2063 2062 2061 2060 V40103 V40303 2117 2116 2115 2114 2113 2112 2111 2110 2107 2106 2105 2104 2103 2102 2101 2100 V40104 V40304 2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125 2124 2123 2122 2121 2120 V40105 V40305 2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145 2144 2143 2142 2141 2140 V40106 V40306 2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165 2164 2163 2162 2161 2160 V40107 V40307 2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212 2211 2210 2207 2206 2205 2204 2203 2202 2201 2200 V40110 V40310 2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225 2224 2223 2222 2221 2220 V40111 V40311 2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245 2244 2243 2242 2241 2240 V40112 V40312 2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265 2264 2263 2262 2261 2260 V40113 V40313 2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312 2311 2310 2307 2306 2305 2304 2303 2302 2301 2300 V40114 V40314 2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325 2324 2323 2322 2321 2320 V40115 V40315 2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345 2344 2343 2342 2341 2340 V40116 V40316 2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365
233. 23 3222 3221 3220 V40751 3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245 3244 3243 3242 3241 3240 V40752 3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265 3264 3263 3262 3261 3260 V40753 3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312 3311 3310 3307 3306 3305 3304 3303 3302 3301 3300 V40754 3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325 3324 3323 3322 3321 3320 V40755 3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345 3344 3343 3342 3341 3340 V40756 3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365 3364 3363 3362 3361 3360 V40757 3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412 3411 3410 3407 3406 3405 3404 3403 3402 3401 3400 V40760 3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425 3424 3423 3422 3421 3420 V40761 3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445 3444 3443 3442 3441 3440 V40762 3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465 3464 3463 3462 3461 3460 V40763 3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512 3511 3510 3507 3506 3505 3504 3503 3502 3501 3500 V40764 D J a e Lol D o e SUONEOIIOBAdS Add 3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527
234. 2364 2363 2362 2361 2360 V40117 V40317 2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412 2411 2410 2407 2406 2405 2404 2403 2402 2401 2400 V40120 V40320 2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425 2424 2423 2422 2421 2420 V40121 V40321 2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445 2444 2443 2442 2441 2440 V40122 V40322 2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465 2464 2463 2462 2461 2460 V40123 V40323 2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512 2511 2510 2507 2506 2505 2504 2503 2502 2501 2500 V40124 V40324 2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525 2524 2523 2522 2521 2520 V40125 V40325 2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545 2544 2543 2542 2541 2540 V40126 V40326 2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565 2564 2563 2562 2561 2560 V40127 V40327 2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612 2611 2610 2607 2606 2605 2604 2603 2602 2601 2600 V40130 V40330 2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625 2624 2623 2622 2621 2620 V40131 V40331 2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645 2644 2643 2642 2641 2640 V40132 V40332 2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666
235. 24 VDC 32pt 5 15 VDC DC OUTPUT 4pt 12 24 VDC 8pt 12 24 VDC 16pt 12 24 VDC 2 Commons 32pt 12 24 VDC 4 Commons o AC INPUT NADA 0005 8pt 110 VAC 16pt 110 VAC DirectLoGic DL205 Family AC OUTPUT p CHEO 8pt 18 220 VAC 12pt 18 110 VAC 2 commons RELAY OUTPUT 4pt 5 30 VDC 5 240VAC 8pt 5 30 VDC 5 240 VAC 12pt 5 30VDC 5 240VAC isolated pts module available Di LOGIC beets F 85 265VAC JG SSS o ___J Koyo _ p2 04B 110 220VAC 4 CPU Slot controllers Remote Masters Remote Slaves Communications Temperature Input fim Filler Module SPECIALTY MODULES High Speed Counters 1 Y IN L m OUT ira our RELAY CPU VAC pwR HE EH RUN i p h CPU 1 5 Brt El y ie e 7 TER E mo TE DL2606 JERN D2 08NA 1 D2 16TD1 2 7 PORT 1 PORT2 L A CPUs BASES oooO DL230 2 0K Built in EEPROM Memory DL240 2 5K Built
236. 24VDC CLASS2 L To LED Us e N y lem bl ql vW h Logi l L112 24 w rom Logic q voc ae ion DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 F2 08TA AC Output Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 08TA AC Output Outputs per module 8 Output Points Consumed 10 Commons per module 2 isolated Operating voltage 24 140 VAC Output type SSR Triac with Zero Crossover Peak voltage 140 VAC Outputs per module 8 Commons per module 1 2 I O terminal points Operating voltage 15 264 VAC Output type SSR Triac Peak voltage 264 VAC AC frequency 47 to 63 Hz AC frequency 47 to 63 Hz ON voltage drop 1 6 Vrms O 1 5A ON voltage drop lt 1 5 VAC gt 0 1A lt 3 0 VAC lt 0 14 Max load current 1 5A point 30 C 1 0A point 60 C 4 0A common 8A module 60 C Max load current 0 5A point 4A common Max leakage current 4mA 264VAC 60Hz 1 2mA 100VAC 60Hz 0 9mA 100VAC 50Hz Max leakage current 0 7mA rms Max inrush current 10A for 10 ms Peak one cycle surge current 15A Minimum load 10 mA Minimum load 10mA Base power required 20 mA ON pt 250 mA max Base power required 250mA max OFF to ON response 1 ms OFF to ON response 0 5mS 1 2 cycle ON to OFF response 1 ms 1 2 cycle ON to OFF response 0 5mS 1 2 cycle Terminal type Rem
237. 264 263 262 261 260 V40013 V40213 317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V40014 V40214 337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V40015 V40215 357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V40016 V40216 377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V40017 V40217 417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V40020 V40220 437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V40021 V40221 457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V40022 V40222 477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V40023 V40223 517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V40024 V40224 537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40025 V40225 557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40026 V40226 577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40027 V40227 617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40030 V40230 637 636 635 634 633 632 631
238. 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41013 317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V41014 337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41015 357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41016 377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41017 MSB DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Additional Stage S Control Bits LSB 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ida 417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V41020 437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V41021 457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V41022 477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V41023 517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V41024 537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V41025 557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V41026 577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V41027 617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607
239. 288 88 88 E B BY 85 88 88 37 TERM through cable to con as ia A A nect the D2 EMs to a a Ni OFF gether I O addressing 4 D2 260 el eo 587 587 E 887 88 88 8874 El for TERM CPU A a 30m 98ft max cable length E A GF 1 0 addressing 1 gt ST Ay aD Note Do not use e Ethernet hubs to connect the local expansion system e together gt O 4 el I O addressing 3 e The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system e All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion bases Specialty modules are not supported in the expansion bases e The D2 CMs do not have to be in successive numerical order however the numerical rotary selection determines the X and Y addressing order The CPU will recognize the local and expansion I O on power up Do not duplicate numerial selections e The TERM termination switch on the two endmost D2 EMs must be in the ON position The other D2 EMs in between should be in the OFF position e Use the D2 EXCBL 1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2 EMs together Either of the RJ45 ports labelled A and B on the D2 EM can be used to connect one base to another uBissq TES v 5 Os 0 fe 3 Co c E o e 5 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 414 System Design and Configuration NOTE When applying power to the CPU DL250 1 260 and local expansion bases make sure the exp
240. 2C Up to 19 2K baud e Address selectable 1 90 e Connect to Direct SOFT32 D2 HPP DV1000 MMI or DirectNet master e 8 data bits one start one stop e Asynchronous Half duplex DTE e Odd or no parity 7 6 pin Female Modular Connector Port 2 Specifications DL280 i ab ar ae as we 230 240 250 1 260 0 0 o 0 0 e eee eo ee o o o o eee 0 90 o O 15 Go 15 pin Female D Connector DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 The operating parameters for Port 2 on the DL240 CPU is configurable using Aux functions on a programming device 6 Pin female modular RJ12 phone jack type connector e K sequence protocol DirectNet slave Port 2 Pin Descriptions DL240 only OV Power connection GND 5V Power connection O AJA OJIN RXD Receive Data RS232C TXD___ Transmit Data RS232C RTS Request to Send OV Power connection GND 15 Pin female D type connector Protocol K sequence DirectNet Master Slave MODBUS RTU Master Slave Remote I O ASCII IN OUT DL260 only RS232C non isolated distance within 15 m approx 50 feet RS422 non isolated distance within 1000 m RS485 non isolated distance within 1000m DL260 only Up to 38 4K baud Address selectable 1 90 Connects to DirectSOFT32 D2 HPP operator interfaces any DirectNet or MODBUS master slave ASCII devices DL260 only
241. 3 3102 3101 3100 V40144 V40344 3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125 3124 3123 3122 3121 3120 V40145 V40345 3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145 3144 3143 3142 3141 3140 V40146 V40346 3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165 3164 3163 3162 3161 3160 V40147 V40347 3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212 3211 3210 3207 3206 3205 3204 3203 3202 3201 3200 V40150 V40350 3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225 3224 3223 3222 3221 3220 V40151 V40351 3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245 3244 3243 3242 3241 3240 V40152 V40352 3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265 3264 3263 3262 3261 3260 V40153 V40353 3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312 3311 3310 3307 3306 3305 3304 3303 3302 3301 3300 V40154 V40354 3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325 3324 3323 3322 3321 3320 V40155 V40355 3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345 3344 3343 3342 3341 3340 V40156 V40356 3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365 3364 3363 3362 3361 3360 V40157 V40357 3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412 3
242. 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero NOTE Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack In the following example when X1 is on the 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator and output to V2010 and V2011 DirectSOFT32 xt Lob v2001 v2000 v2000 6 7 a o 5 o 2 6 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the 32 bit accumulator ace 6 1713 9 5 o 2 6 SUD 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 v2010 v2011 v2010 Copy the value in the 32 bit accumulator to V2010 and v2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes orn Ei E 1 ENT SHFT asta a gt Cc gt A A A A A i ENT ur sHFT gt 3 EA Cc gt A B i A E ENT 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut oD SE ap Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Load The Load Formatted instruction loads Formatted 1 32 consecutive
243. 304 303 302 301 300 V40614 337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V40615 357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V40616 377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V40617 MSB Additional DL250 1 DL260 Control Relays C LSB Address 417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V40620 437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V40621 457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V40622 477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V40623 517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V40624 537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40625 557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40626 577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40627 617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40630 637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40631 657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 6
244. 38 x o T e e o o t NOS D nos IZA k 047 E 1 58 ns Che NO6 eal NO7 E o LJ DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 50 2c Z Z a zZ 2 A So O pes hale ve Installation Wiring and Specifications F2 08TRS Relay Output Outputs per module 8 Commons per module 8 isolated Output Points Consumed 8 Operating voltage 12 28VDC 12 250VAC 7A 120VDC 0 5A Output type 3 Form C SPDT 5 Form A SPST normally open Peak voltage 150VDC 265VAC Max leakage current N A Max inrush current 12A Minimum load 10mA 12VDC Base power required 5v 670mA Max OFF to ON response 15 ms typical ON to OFF response 5 ms typical Terminal type Removable AC f 47 63 H C frequency ores Status indicators Logic Side ON voltage drop N A Weight 5 5 oz 156g Max load current resistive 7A points subject to derating Fuses None Typical Relay Life Operations Derating Char at Room Temperature erating Chart Voltage amp Load Currents 8 An
245. 4 2 dl GX D B F A A our S4FT gt 1 5 0 ae eae DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Increment Binary The Increment Binary instruction INCB increments a binary value in a specified V memory ion 1 h time th ral Ar ae memory locatio by each time the instruction is executed INCB 230 240 250 1 260 A aaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when C5 is on the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1 DirectSOFT32 v2000 4 A 3 C c5 INCB v2000 Increment the binary value in the accumulator by 1 v2000 4 A 3 D Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Cc F STR gt SHFT 2 5 ENT l N Cc B Cc A A A SHFT g tr a 1 gt 2 0 0 g ENT
246. 411 3410 3407 3406 3405 3404 3403 3402 3401 3400 V40160 V40360 3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425 3424 3423 3422 3421 3420 V40161 V40361 3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445 3444 3443 3442 3441 3440 V40162 V40362 3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465 3464 3463 3462 3461 3460 V40163 V40363 3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512 3511 3510 3507 3506 3505 3504 3503 3502 3501 3500 V40164 V40364 47 Cc Ss 5 2 OT 50 g2 el0 No e as 0 3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525 3524 3523 3522 3521 3520 V40165 V40365 3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545 3544 3543 3542 3541 3540 V40166 V40366 3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565 3564 3563 3562 3561 3560 V40167 V40367 3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612 3611 3610 3607 3606 3605 3604 3603 3602 3601 3600 V40170 V40370 3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625 3624 3623 3622 3621 3620 V40171 V40371 3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645 3644 3643 3642 3641 3640 V40172 V40372 3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 36
247. 43 642 641 640 V40632 677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40633 717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40634 737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40635 757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40636 777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40637 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 3 57 CPU Specifications and Operation MSB Additional DL250 1 DL260 Control Relays C LSB Address i iS is Wd 18 i Wi 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V40640 1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V40641 1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V40642 1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V40643 1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V40644 1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124
248. 450 0 D2 32ND3 2 25 0 H2 EBC 320 0 AC Input Modules H2 EBC F 450 0 D2 08NA 1 50 0 H2 CTRIO 400 0 D2 08NA 2 100 0 D2 DCM 300 0 D2 16NA 100 0 D2 RMSM 200 0 DC Output Modules D2 RSSS 150 0 D2 04TD1 60 20 D2 CTRINT 50 0 D2 08TD1 2 100 0 D2 08SIM 50 0 D2 16TD1 2 200 80 D2 CM 130 0 D2 16TD2 2 200 0 D2 EM 130 0 D2 32TD1 2 350 0 F2 CP128 235 0 AC Output Modules F2 DEVNETS 1 160 0 D2 08TA 250 0 F2 SDS 1 160 0 F2 08TA 250 0 D2 12TA 350 0 Relay Output Modules D2 04TRS 250 0 D2 08TR 250 0 F2 08TRS 670 0 F2 08TR 670 0 D2 12TR 450 0 Analog Modules F2 04AD 1 L 50 18 30 VDC 80 mA max L 10 15VDC O 90mA F2 04AD 2 L 60 18 26 4 VDC 80 mA max L 10 15VDC O 90mA F2 08AD 1 50 18 26 4 VDC 80 mA max F2 08AD 2 60 18 26 4 VDC 80 mA max F2 02DA 1 L 40 18 30VDC 60mA L 10 15VDC 70mA add 20mA loop F2 02DA 2 L 40 18 30 VDC 60 mA max L 10 15VDC O 70mA F2 08DA 1 30 18 30VDC 50mA per channel add 20mA loop F2 08DA 2 60 18 30 VDC 80 mA max F2 02DAS 1 100 18 30VDC 50mA per channel F2 02DAS 2 100 21 6 26 4 VDC 60 mA per channel F2 4AD2DA 60 18 26 4VDC O 80mA add 20mA loop F2 04RTD 90 0 F2 04THM 100 18 26 4 VDC 60 mA max DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 49 Power Budget The following example shows how to calculate the power budget for the DL205 Calculation system ARRS B
249. 5 1 1 7 Math Instructions Add Binary Add Binary Top of Stack instruction is a 32 Top of Stack bit instruction that adds the binary value in ADDBS the accumulator with the binary value in xIxTxTV the first level of the accumulator stack ____ ADDBs The result resides in the accumulator The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level 230 240 250 1 260 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack is added with the binary value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction The value in the accumu
250. 500K 3 11 1 3 Configuration shown is current sinking 110VAC Solenoid 1A 200K D2 08CDR Internal module circuitry 220VAC Resistive 1A 350K V 220VAC Solenoid 1A 100K fe ccon if INPUT y g E h 24VDC CA q HA 8 Lub o z E O t L A aaae 58 Ga 4 E S o o R aana A 0 1 Optical Li gt D ee 38 Xi COM Isolator 1 so 38 WC T 1 7 LL pate 38 24VDC ne ll 7 ES 502 WE 2 po oO f i A HEF 58 Internal module circuit 4d z Eas ADN internal module circuitry JS CB GS a es EE OF m Line L VDC 0 VAC 5 5 3 w i N A DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operations In This Chapter Overview CPU General Specifications CPU Base Electrical Specifications CPU Hardware Features Using Battery Backup Selecting the Program Storage Media CPU Setup CPU Operation I O Response Time CPU Scan Time Considerations PLC Numbering Systems Memory Map DL230 System V Memory DL240 System V Memory DL250 1 System V Memory DL260 System V Memory X Input Y Output Bit Map Control Relay Bit Map Stage Control Status Bit Map Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps GX GY Global I O Bit Map 32 CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc no 5 Os OG 50 ab Q el0 No gt aS 0 Over
251. 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40425 V40525 557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40426 V40526 577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40427 V40527 617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40430 V40530 637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40431 V40531 657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V40432 V40532 677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40433 V40533 717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40434 V40534 737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40435 V40535 757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40436 V40536 777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40437 V40537 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation MSB DL260 Additional Input X and Output Y Points cont d LSB x Input Y Output 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Address Address 1017 10
252. 55 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V40072 V40272 1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V40073 V40273 1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V40074 V40274 1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V40075 V40275 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40076 V40276 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V40077 V40277 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation MSB DL260 Remote l O GX and GY Points LSB GX GY i EAS S A AS A AAA O Address Address 2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 2011 2010 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000 V40100 V40300 2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025 2024 2023 2022 2021 2020 V40101 V40301 2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 2042 2041 2040 V40102 V40302 2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065
253. 57 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V40662 1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V40663 1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V40664 J a e Lol D E o e suoyeoosds Ndo 1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V40665 1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V40666 1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V40667 1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V40670 1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V40671 1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V40672 1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V40673 1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V40674 1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721
254. 576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V40467 V40567 suonyeoosds Ndo 1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V40470 V40570 1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V40471 V40571 1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V40472 V40572 1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V40473 V40573 1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V40474 V40574 1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V40475 V40575 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40476 V40576 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V40477 V40577 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 47 Cc Ss 5 2 OT 50 g2 el0 No DS as 0 CPU Specifications and Operation Control Relay Bit Map This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V memory address bit
255. 67 3666 3665 3664 3663 3662 3661 3660 V40173 V40373 3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712 3711 3710 3707 3706 3705 3704 3703 3702 3701 3700 V40174 V40374 3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725 3724 3723 3722 3721 3720 V40175 V40375 3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740 V40176 V40376 3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760 V40177 V40377 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration In This Chapter DL205 System Design Strategies Module Placement Calculating the Power Budget Local Expansion I O Remote l O Expansion Network Connections to MODBUS RTU and DirectNet Network Slave Operation Network Master Operation Network Master Operation DL260 only DL260 Non Sequence Protocol ASCII In Out PRINT DL250 1 Non Sequence Protocol PRINT 42 System Design and Configuration DL205 System Design Strategies I O System The DL205 PLCs offer the following ways to add l O to the system Configurations e Local I O consists of I O modules located in the same base as the CPU e Local Expansion I O consists of I O modules in expansion bases located close to the CPU local base Expa
256. 6us 67 5us x 2 46us x 16 Time 877 us o m a O O 0 fed O m suonyeoosds Ndo e NOTE This total time is the actual time required for the CPU to update these outputs This does not include any additional time that is required for the CPU to actually service the particular specialty modules Diagnostics The DL205 CPUs perform many types of system diagnostics The amount of time required depends on many things such as the number of I O modules installed etc The following table shows the minimum and maximum times that can be expected Diagnostic Time DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Minimum 600 0 us 422 0 us 26 8 us 26 8 us Maximum 900 0 us 855 0 us 103 0 us 103 0 us DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc Ss os OG 50 ae el0 No as 0 Application Program Execution The CPU processes the program from the top address 0 to the END instruction The CPU executes the program left to right and top to bottom As each rung is evaluated the appropriate image register or memory location is updated The time required to solve the application program depends on the type and number of instructions used and the amount of execution overhead You can add the execution times for all the instructions in your program to find the total program execution time For example the execution time for a
257. 7 2 Implies 2 exp 2 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 H NOTE The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32 bit IEEE format You must use DirectSOFT32 for this feature DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Multiply Multiply is a 16 bit instruction that MUL multiplies the BCD value Aaaa which is either a V memory location or a 4 digit Viviviv max constant by the BCD value in the MUL 230 240 250 1 260 lower 16 bits of the accumulator The Aaaa result can be up to 8 digits and resides in the accumulator Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The
258. 750 Reserved V7751 Fault Message Error Code stores the 4 digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is executed If you ve used ASCII messages DL240 only then the data label DLBL reference number for that message is stored here V7752 I O configuration Error stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current configuration V7753 I O Configuration Error stores the correct module ID code V7754 I O Configuration Error identifies the base and slot number V7755 Error code stores the fatal error code V7756 Error code stores the major error code V7757 Error code stores the minor error code V7760 V7764 Module Error stores the slot number and error code where an I O error occurs V7765 Scan stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 a e Lol D o e SUONEOIIO9AdS NdI 47 Cc ne S os OG 50 ab ok el0 No gt as 0 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents V memory V7766 Contains the number of seconds on the clock 00 to 59 V7767 Contains the number of minutes on the clock 00 to 59 V7770 Contains the number of hours on the clock 00 to 23 V7771 Contains the day of the week Mon Tue etc V7
259. 77 Outputs Y 0 477 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 177 Special Relays SP 0 137 320 717 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Constant K 1 16 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X6 is on the value formed by discrete locations X0 X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The value in the accumulator is divided by the value formed by discrete location CO C3 using the Divide Formatted instruction The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10 Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction DirectSOFT32 Display x3 x2 x11 xo X6 IDF xo Load the value represented ON OFF OFF OFF bd by discrete locations X0 X3 ee lo K4 into the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Divi
260. 772 Contains the day of the month 1st 2nd etc V7773 Contains the month 01 to 12 V7774 Contains the year 00 to 99 V7775 Scan stores the current scan time milliseconds V7776 Scan stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds V7777 Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds V36000 36027 Analog pointer method for expansion base 1 DL250 1 V36100 36127 Analog pointer method for expansion base 2 DL250 1 The following system control relays are used for Koyo Remote I O setup on Communications Port 2 System CRs Description of Contents C740 Completion of setups ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the Remote I O setup table C741 Erase received data turning on this flag will erase the received data during a communication error C743 Re start Turning on this relay will resume after a communications hang up on an error C750 to C757 Setup Error The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table contains an error C750 master C751 slave 1 C757 slave 7 C760 to C767 Communications Ready The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table data isvalid C760 master C761 slave 1 C767 slave 7 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 3 47 CPU Specifi
261. 8 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc op 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 41 1 1 1 14 O OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF 1 1 14 1 OF 1 0 ie Acc 36476A38 Or Top of stack i LDD I V1400 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator ORS 0103101000811 14 144 10 0014101 000008818 1 01 0 OR the value in the accumulator with the value in the first level of the 0017077001700 07171 0717107071000 181i1000 accumulator stack Acc O 1 1 1 Of 1 1 O07 OF 171 417 1 17 1 14 OF 171 07 1 Of 17 OF OF 171 1 17 0 170 OUTD i Lae Mi e V1500 Copy the value in the ep eje aa cal ea accumulator to V1500 and V1501 v1500 V150 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ora gt 4 ENT SHFT asta la gt Us fia o o En oH SHFT ee ENT Sur SHFT P 3 gt Pa is o fo En l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 79 Accumulator Logical Instructions Exclusive Or The Exclu
262. A A A E EEE 5 65 Out Double QUTD 2 A A AA Bee eee 5 66 Out Formatted QUEEF sect ee dengan pis caus ates aes a wits nantly eel a cen oi ia are ee Bytes 5 67 Out Indexed OU AS A A ad 5 68 Out Least QUTUL rei haa ida Ei ti da da lee 5 69 OUurMOSH OUTM 1u c2 o c oer se need dudes mecaccawe se sak bas ota adi sas hated 5 69 POD POR tds SS Stead Be A ais atria Sara 5 70 Accumulator Logical Instructions ocoooocconccnncnn eee eee eee eee eee 5 71 ANO AND fica acl sda Sle See then ti A it t 5 71 And Double ANDD a 22 018 dat 5 72 And Formattod ANDE 202035368 a EI E nr Ra 5 73 And with stack ANDSE ee tee efor Soa eet a borg alee abot buy a 5 74 ODIN duce seca pen ten Saeed ays leg ened ea rec aed Sea thee edit esto eed aes Ea tea pated 5 75 Or Do ble TOR a A a a A a e NA i 5 76 Or Formatted ORF iii AA A A A e E E 5 77 OF WH Stack ORS ostra US A oe aaa 5 78 EXCUSA da is E SS A SA 5 79 exclusive Or Double XORD ss la a A a ee ids Sete A E 5 80 Exclusive Or Formatted XORE ad DEN NA AAA wae 5 81 Exclusive Or with Stack XORS a a a ade td 5 82 Compare CMP Susi cp di id a ct 5 83 Compare Double CMPD cars scarcan drive 5 84 Compare Formatted CMPF is DS A a A 5 85 Compare with Stack CMPS iii A E A a e 5 86 Compare Real Number EMPR crias ct tati ita e ti 5 87 ES Table of Contents Math INStrUCIONS lt lt cia piel A A e A wee ee Ai 5 88 POG CIID A A E eke A A dda estar 5 88 Add D ubl ADD Duro y 5 89
263. Aaaa gt Bbbb Aaaa B bbb El Or Not The Comparative Or Not instruction ORN connects a normally open comparative Viviviv contact in parallel with another contact The contact will be on when Aaaa lt Bbbb 230 240 250 1 260 Aaaa Bbbb lt Oporand Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range ype B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb V memory v All All All All All All All All See page 3 50 See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Timer T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 6045 or V2002 gt 2345 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v2000 K6045 Y3 aan suet E 7 gt po a A o A A A gt OUT G A E F 6 6 y ENT Q C 6 v2002 S K2345 or I gt SHT Iano DA E 2 gt E c D E F 2 3 4 5 ENT ur gt JP 3 ENT In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 1000 or V2002 lt 2500 Y3 will en
264. C Data Type sania cee ei ata nd dae A A easy Bed tae 3 36 Timers andTimer Status Bits T Data type 0 eects 3 36 Timer Current Values V Data Type 222 5 csc0e ceca reia a a a 3 37 Counters and Counter Status Bits CT Data type occcocccccoccccr eee 3 37 Counter Current Values V Data Type 20 c cece eee eee teens 3 37 Word Memory V Data Type 50 0606 s 4e eke versa vad cise ned a as 3 37 Stages S Datatype q dca earned date isos Bad ode 3 38 Special Relays SP Data TPL RR A AA A aie take er uate 2 3 38 Remote 1 0 Points GX Data Type xv occ ssa contar reacia a cb pa bid a ee 3 38 DL230 System V MeMOlry 2304 00 E A E ARA ARS TA A A A 3 39 DE240 System V MEMOTY 20d EA A a ER eee eee a 3 41 DL250 1 System V memory applies to DL250 2 cece eee eee eee eee 3 44 DL260 System V memory iii A ia Pee eee Bie 3 47 DE230 MeSmoy Map is orero iiine SEA A daa 3 50 DE240 Memory Map vs 0 a a aa dae 3 51 DEZ50S 1 Memo Map cuidat dat e DIE iS Bad ae eee eats is 3 52 DL260 Memory Map A tld e da 3 53 Table of Contents X Input Y Output Bit Map 0 2 tea cise a te eee ae wh ee ee tee ee oe 3 54 Control Relay Bit Map cu Cira casita aid Rie oo ee toi eh eee 3 56 Stage Control Status Bit Map 55 000 ocios cd 3 60 Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps 0 00 eect eee eee eee eee 3 62 Remote I O Bit Map DL 260 only 0 2 cece cece eee eee eee eee eee e eens 3 63 Chapter 4 System Design and Con
265. CPU and click Close DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 4 37 System Design and Configuration RS 485 RS 485 signals are for longer distances 1000 meters max and for multi drop Network networks Use termination resistors at both ends of RS 485 network wiring xTxTxXTY matching the impedance rating of the cable between 100 and 500 ohms 230 240 250 1 260 Termination Resistor TXD RXD E TXD RXD TXD RXD TXD RXD TXD RXD A TXD RXD Signal GND Signal GND_ Signal GND Connect shield RXD to signal ground o OV Cable Use Belden 9841 or equivalent TXD TXD DL260 CPU Port 2 DL260 CPU Port 2 So RS 232 Normally the RS 232 signals are used for shorter distances 15 meters max for es Network communications between two devices Os 33 Ju 6 Port 2 Pin Descriptions DL260 only Fo oo he T 5V 5 VDC z2 i 1 11 2 TXD2 _ Transmit Data RS232C 5 i GND Signal GND O 70 3 RXD2 Receive Data RS232C i nE de 4 RTS2 Ready to Send RS 232C i i TXD o 5 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 232C l i es 6 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS485 TXD RXD 6 O 7 0V Logic Ground CTS e o 8 OV Logic Ground i RTS o 9 TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 RS 485 RTS es 10 TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 RS 485 i CTS Oa 15 11 RTS2 Request to Send RS 422 RS 485
266. Current Values in the table 8 Input Reg Input Reg 8 2 Convert T10 into decimal 8 3 Use the MODBUS data type from the table ES Timer Current Values V 256 VO V377 0 255 go os AD ec 25 Example 4 C54 Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay PLC Addr Dec Start Addr Data Type pg ood C54 44 decimal 49 1 Find Control Relays in the table 44 3072 Coil Coil 3116 2 Convert C54 into decimal 44 3 Add the starting address for the range 3072 4 Use the MODBUS data type from the table Control Relays C 2048 CO C3777 3072 5119 Coil DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 4 29 If Your MODBUS Some host software does not allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and Host Software address Instead you specify an address only This method requires another step to Requires an determine the address but it s still fairly simple Basically MODBUS also separates Address ONLY the data types by address ranges as well So this means an address alone can actually describe the type of data and location This is often referred to as adding the offset One important thing to remember here is that two different addressing modes may be available in your host software package These are e 484 Mode e 584 984 Mode We recommend that you use the 584 984 addressing mode if your host software allows you to choose This is because the 584 984 mode allows access to a hig
267. D2 F2 DL305 Product family DL405 Product family CoProcessor CP ASCII BASIC AB 64K memory 64 128K memory 128 512K memory 512 Radio modem R Telephone modem T DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Getting Started 19 Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming O D If you have experience with PLCs or want to setup a quick example this section is what you want to use This example is not intended to explain everything needed to start up your system It is only intended to provide a general picture of what is o needed to get your system powered up 3 a Step 1 Unpack the Unpack the DL205 equipment and verify you have the parts necessary to build this DL205 demonstration system The minimum parts needed are as follows Equipment e Base e CPU e D2 16ND3 2 DC input module or a F2 08SIM input simulator module e D2 16TD1 2 DC output module e Power cord e Hook up wire e A 24 VDC toggle switch if not using the input simulator module e A screwdriver regular or Phillips type These items are not supplied with your PLC You will need at least one of the following programming options e DirectSOFT32 Programming Software DirectSOFT32 Manual and a programming cable connects the CPU to a personal computer or e D2 HPP Handheld Programmer and the Handheld Programmer Manual
268. D2 USER M MILLA LLO Volume 1 of 2 PARA aura DL205 User Manual CREALO Manual Revisions If you contact us in reference to this manual remember to include the revision number Title DL205 User Manual Manual Number D2 USER M 9 95 minor corrections 2nd Edition 6 97 added DL250 downsized manual 5 98 minor corrections 7 99 added torque specs for base and I O 11 99 minor corrections 03 00 added new PID features minor corrections 11 00 added CE information minor corrections F 11 01 added surge protection info corrected RLL and DRUM instructions minor corrections er Edition 06 02 added DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs local expansion I O ASCII and MODBUS instructions split manual into two volumes Note DL250 has same functionality as DL250 1 except for local expansion I O capability Vol 1 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started IITTO LUCHO ii A A AA ata A Bae 1 2 The Purpose of this Manda a o gel BS core teks a e e a o de li 1 2 Where to Begin ui e RE ol ad domed weed td da eee 1 2 SupplementalManualS conduct e ate ac ea Bc aided alkene 1 2 Technical SUPPORT EE 1 2 Conventions USO sererai veer paras PEE AE A AL a ER 1 3 Key Topics for Each Chapter 2 E A A ale AE 1 3 DL205 System Components oscar raro ered aves A ATRAE acs 1 4 GPUS tra ls ln bees UREA aun NA a Babe E eee 1 4 BaSS a AI is Seen tale atc atts ana 1 4 V O Configuration sesane d cers Si O a e li 1 4 VO MOGUIGS
269. DPD And Positive Differential 5 23 DIVR Divide Real Number 5 99 2 ANDS And Stack 5 74 DIVS Divide Top of Stack 5 116 52 ASINR Arc Sine Real 5 121 DLBL Data Label 5 199 3 S ATANR Arc Tangent Real 5 122 DRUM Timed Drum 6 14 Go ATH ASCII to Hex 5 137 EDRUM Event Drum 6 16 nan ATT Add to Top of Table 5 166 ENCO Encode 5 128 BCD Binary Coded Decimal 5 131 END End 5 177 BCDCPL Tens Complement 5 133 ENI Enable Interrupts 5 188 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Instruction Page Instruction Page FAULT Fault 5 197 NJMP Not Jump Stage 7 24 FDGT Find Greater Than 5 152 NOP No Operation 5 177 FILL Fill 5 150 NOT Not 5 19 FIND Find 5 151 OR Or 5 12 5 31 5 75 FINDB Find Block 5 173 OR OUT Or Out 5 19 FOR For Next 5 180 OR OUTI Or Out Immediate 5 36 GOTO Goto Label 5 179 OR STR Or Store 5 16 GRAY Gray Code 5 141 ORB Or Bit of Word 5 13 GTS Goto Subroutine 5 182 ORD Or Double 5 76 HTA Hex to ASCII 5 138 ORE Or if Equal 5 28 INS element S2190 ORF Or Formatted 5 77 INCB Increment Binary 5 107 ORI Or Immediate 5 34 INT Interrupt OY ORMOV Or Move 5 171 D nyen ER ORN Or Not 5 12 5 31 a HSE pet sree ORNB Or Not Bit of Word 5 13 IRTC Inter
270. Design and Configuration Network Slave Operation This section describes how other devices on a network can communicate with a CPU port that you have configured as a DirectNET slave DL240 250 1 260 or MODBUS slave DL250 1 DL260 A MODBUS host must use the MODBUS RTU protocol to communicate with the DL250 1 or DL260 as a slave The host software must send a MODBUS function code and MODBUS address to specify a PLC memory location the DL250 1 or DL260 comprehends The DirectNET host uses normal I O addresses to access applicable DL205 CPU and system No CPU ladder logic is required to support either MODBUS slave or DirectNET slave operation MODBUS Function The MODBUS function code determines whether the access is a read or a write and Codes Supported whether to access a single data point or a group of them The DL250 1 and DL260 an ar ar support the MODBUS function codes described below 230 240 250 1 260 X Viv Y 230 240 250 1 260 MODBUS Function DL205 Data Types Function Code Available 01 Read a group of coils Y C T CT 02 Read a group of inputs X SP 05 Set Reset a single coil slave only Y C T CT 15 Set Reset a group of coils Y C T CT 03 04 Read a value from one or more registers V 06 Write a value into a single register V slave only 16 Write a value into a group of registers V Determining the There are typically t
271. DirectNET Sp M MODBUS MV Non Sequence Remote 1 0 Memory Address fv3000 s Help Data bits Fp El Baud rate o0 Stop bits hoo H Parity odds Port 2 15 Pin e Use For Printing Only Check the box to enable the port settings described below Match the settings to the connected device Memory Address Choose a V memory address to use as the starting location for the port setup parameters listed below e Data Bits Select either 7 bits or 8 bits to match the number of data bits specified for the connected device Baud Rate The available baud rates include 300 600 900 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 baud Choose a higher baud rate initially reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network Important You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value Refer to the appropriate product manual for details e Stop Bits Choose 1 or 2 stop bits to match the number of stop bits specified for the connected device e Parity Choose none even or odd parity for error checking Be sure to match the parity specified for the connected device 5s Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU and click Close DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 4 47 System Design and Configuration RS 422 RS 422 signals are for long distances 1000 meters ma
272. E s O 4 EN 5 E e L mn z D pe Eo 2 m 7 ig Internal module circuitry pA OUTPUT Optical 38 t Isolator To LED ee i Tp D2 08TA WE bef Go yl Lae Bl COM om TS l Z 110 220 6 3A m VAC COM DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uoelelsuy yeoyinads pue UIA suo 6 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 12TA AC Output Outputs per module 12 Max leakage current 2mA 132VAC 60Hz Output Points Consumed 16 4 unused see chart below Max inrush current 10A for 10 ms Commons per module 2 isolated Minimum load 10 mA Operating voltage 15 132 VAC Base power required 350 mA Max Output type SSR Triac OFF to ON response 1 ms Peak voltage 132 VAC ON to OFF response 1 ms 1 2 cycle AC frequency 47 to 63 Hz Terminal type Removable Bo ON voltage drop lt 1 5 VAC gt 50mA Status indicators Logic Side a 4 0 VA A 6 SOVAGE SOMA Weight 3 8 oz 110 9 gt a Max load current 0 3A point g p Fuses 2 1 per common O 1 8A common cH 3 15A slow blow replaceable lo Q Order D2 FUSE 1 5 per pack wa
273. El ales q A 62 Beeper On Off XxX x x Y An Change Heterence PE A 65 Run Self Diagnostics xlix x x Z z 23 Clear Ladder Range Viv Y Y AUX 7 EEPROM Operations 7 9 24 Clear All Ladders Viv Y Y 71 Copy CPU memory to SR g 7 Y JU AUX 3 V Memory Operations HPP EEPROM 38 31 Clear V Memory Viv Y Y 72 Write HPP EEPROM to x xX x x Y WN AUX 4 10 Configuration ERU as 41 pan 1 0 op Oran Viv Y Y 13 AAS to ES di 5 Y 42 1 O Diagnostics AAA 74 Blank Check HPP EE xlix x x 7 44 Power up I O Configura Y Y Y Y PROM tion Check 75 Erase HPP EEPROM x x Se x y 45 Select Configuration Viv Y Y 76 Show EEPROM Type x x x x Y 46 Configure I O xX X Y Y CPU and HPP AUX 5 CPU Configuration AUX 8 Password Operations 51 Modify Program Name Y Y Y Y 81 Modify Password Y Y Y Vi 52 Display Change Calen x Y Y Y 82 Unlock CPU Y Y Y Y dar 83 Lock CPU LAL Le 53 Display Scan Time Viv Y Y 54 Initialize Scratchpad Vivigv Y Y supported 55 Set Watchdog Timer Vivid Y x not supported 56 Set CPU Network Ad X Y4 Y Y not applicable dress 57 Set Retentive Ranges Viv Y Y 58 Test Operations Viv Y Y 59 Bit Override X v Y Y 5B a Interface Con Viv Y Y ig 5C Display Error History X v Y Y DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EN Clearing an Before you enter a new program you should always clear ladder memory You can Existing Pro
274. FT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes a ae gt E A A ENT ENI SHFT E A ES R ENT SN gt E 4 s 0 ENT X40 DISI sra la fast a ENT SHFT E a Nua D E ENT END sHET Hg ma ma gt Pa EN sm ST gt oo o 5 r Q1 ASET SHFT 3 gt F A ENT sas a str SHFT i 8 gt e 2 1 ENT T SETI er SHFT 8 gt iF 1 y 0 ENT ss we SHFT E en TR ENT T SETI IRT 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn e DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Interrupt Instructions Interrupt Example In the following example when X1 is on the value 10 is copied to V7634 This value for Software sets the software interrupt to 10 ms When X20 turns on the interrupt will be Interrupt enabled When X20 turns off the interrupt will be disabled Every 10 ms the CPU will jump to the interrupt label INT O 0 The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed If X35 is not on YO Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SPO B LD sta gt i ENT I K40 L D K B A SHFT inpsth 3 gt SHFT
275. For a device having a resolution of 720 counts per revolution you must subtract a BCD value of 152 In the following example when X1 is ON the binary value represented by X10 X27 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The gray code value in the accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010 DireciOFTS2 X27 x26 x25 O x12 x11 X10 Kie OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON i LDF I X10 Load the value represented by X10 X27 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc olo o 0 of of of of of of 0 of of of of off of of of of of of of of of of of of of 1 ol GRAY 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc 0 0 of 0 of 0 of of 0 of of of of of of off of of of of of of of of of of of of of 1 1 0 Convert the 16 bit grey code value in the accumulator to a BCD value A ouT 0 0 0 6 v2010 v2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to
276. GY 0 3777 MRX Number of Elements Operand Data Type DL260 Range V memory V all see page 3 53 i Constant K Bits 1 2000 z Registers 1 125 opm i Ss MRX ES Exception aa Response Buffer Operand Data Type DL260 Range V memory V all see page 3 53 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions B 207 MODBUS Instructions MRX Example DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it see Appendix D for comm port special relays One indicates Port busy SP116 and the other indicates Port Communication Error SP117 The Port Busy bit is on while the PLC communicates with the slave When the bit is off the program can initiate the next network request The Port Communication Error bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error Use of this bit is optional When used it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed Typically network communications will last longer than 1 CPU scan The program must wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction This rung does a MODBUS read from the first 32 coils of slave address number one lt will place the values into 32 bits ofthe master starting at CO Port 2 busy bit Instruction interlock bit MRX SP116 C100 Port Number Slave Address Function Code 01 Read Coil Status Start Slave Memory Address Start Master Memory A
277. Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Special Relay SP 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 617 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Network Instructions In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 see special relays is not on the RX instruction will access a ECOM or DCM operating as a master in slot 2 Ten consecutive bytes of data V2000 V2004 will be read from a CPU at station address 5 and copied into V memory locations V2300 V2304 in the CPU with the master DCM or ECOM DirectSOFT32 X1 SP124 LD LD or I l K0205 Kf205 The constant value K0205 specifies The constant value Kf205 the ECOM DOM slot number 2 and specifies CPU port 2 and the slave address 5 the slave address 5 LD K10 Master Slave The constant value K10 CPU CPU specifies the number of E 2 bytes to be read cee V2277 X X X X X XIX X1V1777 O 2300 v2300 3 4 5 7 3 4 5 7 v2000 Octal address 2300 is A converted to 4C0 HEX and v2301 8 5 3 4 8 5 8 4 v2001 loaded into the accumulator v2302 1 9 3 6 1 9 3 6 v2002 V2300 is the starting location for the Master CPU v2303 9 5 7 1 9 5 7 1 V2003 where the s
278. I v2000 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator accumulator bits are set to zero SS 0 00 0 4 9 3 5 Accumulator ADR V2006 v2006 2 50 0 Add the value in the lower Acc 7 4 3 5 16 bits of the accumulator with the value in V2006 OUT V2010 7 4 3 5 JJ Copy the value in the lower v2010 1 16 bits of the accumulator to am Cc V2010 os Handheld Programmer Keystrokes we gt B ENT D2 STR 1 oO L D Cc A A A gE SHFT f anpst 3 gt 2 0 o o J ENT A D D Cc A A G SHFT 7 3 3 gt 2 7 7 ENT GX Vv Cc A B A OUT gt SHFT AND 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Add Double Add Double is a 32 bit instruction that ADDD adds the BCD value in the accumulator IiI I d with a BCD value Aaaa which is either two consecutive V memory locations or ADDD ESD A an 8 digit max BCD constant The Aaaa result resides in the accumulator Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem Al
279. II IN AIN This instruction configures port 2 for raw ASCII input strings with parameters such as fixed and variable length ASCII strings termination characters byte swapping options and instruction control bits Use barcode scanners weight scales etc to write raw ASCII input strings into port 2 based on the AIN instruction s parameters 2 Write embedded ASCII strings directly to V memory from an external HMI or similar master device via a supported communications protocol using the CPU ports H2 ECOM or D2 DCM The AIN instruction is not used in this case 3 If a DL260 PLC is a master on a network the Network Read instruction RX can be used to read embedded ASCII data from a slave device via a supported communications protocol using port 2 H2 ECOM or D2 DCM The RX instruction places the data directly into V memory Writing ASCII The following instructions can be used to write ASCII output strings Output Strings 1 Print from V memory PRINTV Use this instruction to write raw ASCII strings out of port 2 to a display panel or a serial printer etc The instruction features the starting V memory address string length byte swapping options etc When the instruction s permissive bit is enabled the string is written to port 2 2 Print to V memory VPRINT Use this instruction to create pre coded ASCII strings in the PLC i e alarm messages When the instruction s permissive bit is enabled the message is loaded in
280. IMP 4 r ENT OUT GX vV H G D E V7633 out gt SHFT an 7 6 3 A cl Cc A xt ib str gt 2 o ENT j 1 K104 E N l SHFT 4 ave ENT Load the constant value K10 into the lower 16 bits A O Meo E of the accumulator D l S l OUT SHFT 3 a EST ENT V7634 Copy the value in the lower Bi 16 bits of the accumulator to E N D V7634 SHFT 4 ane 3 ENT l N T A X20 SHET 8 TMR MLR 2 0 ENT l c A ENI sta SHFT 7 gt 7 7 ENT x l F ser SHFT 7 gt 5 ENT X20 SP l D F stan SHFT 8 gt 3 ENT Vt a x l B A B H ser SHET 8 gt 1 0 gt 1 7 ENT l R T SHFT 5 orn mee I ENT END INT 00 The value entered 3 999 must be followed by the digit 4 to complete the instruction X20 Y5 IT SETI X35 Yo Y17 rt RSTI a IRT ze Ta 23 C5 po fut oO 5 lt lt IA NOTE Only one software interrupt is allowed in the DL240 and it must be Into DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ESTA Intelligent I O Instructions Intelligent I O Instructions Read from The Read from Intelligent Module Intelligent Module instruction reads a block of data 1 128 RD RD bytes maximum from an intelligent I O V aaa JSiviviv module into the CPU s V memory It loads the function parameters into the first and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional instructions Listed below are the steps to program the Read
281. INST ENT GX V Cc A B A OUT gt SHFT AND 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Decode The Decode instruction decodes a 5 bit DECO binary value of 0 31 0 1F HEX in the accumulator by setting the appropriate bit Y YY v position to a 1 If the accumulator contains _ DECO 230 240 250 1 260 the value F HEX bit 15 will be set in the DirectSOFT accumulator If the value to be decoded is greater than 31 the number is divided by 32 until the value is less than 32 and then the value is decoded In the following example when X1 is on the value formed by discrete locations X10 X14 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The five bit binary pattern in the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit position to a 1 using the Decode instruction X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 OFF ON OFF ON ON LDF X10 K5 Load the value in represented by discrete locations X10 X14 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc op op op opoyojojojojojojojo ojojojpo ojoj ojojojo pojojo o o 1jo 1 1 The
282. Instructions Fault Example In the following example when X1 is on the message SW 146 will display on the handheld programmer The NCONs use the HEX ASCII equivalent of the text to be displayed The HEX ASCII for a blank is 20 a 1 is 31 4 is 34 DirectSOFT32 raat FAULT 1 K1 DOO0OOOCO END SW 146 DLBL K1 J Ee a ACON ASW E E E 1 NCON K 2031 E NCON K 3436 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR 1 EN F A U L T B SHET 5 0 ISG ANDST MLR gt 1 ENT E N D SHF 4 Thi A ENT D L B L B SHF 3 ANDST 1 ANDST gt 1 ENT gt A c O N S Sa 0 2 INST TMR gt RST annn ENT N G O N Cc A D B SHE TMR 2 INST TMR gt 2 0 3 1 ENT N C O N D E D G SHFT ma 2 liste Tur gt 3 4 3 ea ands sae me ES 25 CS po fut oD Sc 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 199 Message Instructions Data Label The Data Label instruction marks the DLBL beginning of an ASCII numeric data area DLBLs are programmed after the End eae ie statement A maximum of 64 DL240 and DLBL K aaa 230 240 250 1 260 D
283. Keystrokes TH gt Next NEXT NEXT next P ENT SHET asta ls ls gt Is fo gt Ls Jen ur SHFT 8 F 5 2 3 0 zs 8 ENT 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 38 Standard RLL Instructions Immediate Instructions Set Immediate SETI Viviv Y 230 240 250 1 260 Reset Immediate RSTI SISIL 230 240 250 1 260 l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp The Set Immediate instruction immediately sets or turns on an output or a range of outputs in the image register and the corresponding output module s Sen m at the time the instruction is executed Once the outputs are set it is not necessary for the input to remain on The Reset Immediate instruction can be used to reset the outputs The Reset Immediate instruction immediately resets or turns off an output or a range of outputs in the image register and the output module s at the time the instruction is executed Once the outputs are reset it is not necessary for the input to Y aaa aaa RSTI remain on Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 In the following example when X1 is on Y5 through Y22 will be set on in the image register and on the correspond
284. L250 1 260 or 32 DL230 DLBL instructions can be used in a program Multiple NCONs and ACONSs can be used ina DLBL area Constant K 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 1 FFFF ASCII Constant The ASCII Constant instruction is used ACON with the DLBL instruction to store ASCII ATTE text for use with other instructions Two Y ASCII characters can be stored in an ACON 200 200 2001200 ACON instruction If only one character is A aaa stored in a ACON a leading space will be printed in the Fault message Esa eens E eo eer ASCII A 0 9 A Z 0 9 A Z 0 9 A Z 0 9 A Z Numerical The Numerical Constant instruction is Constant used with the DLBL instruction to store the NCON HEX ASCII equivalent of numerical data Iis gig for use with other instructions Two digits NCON can be stored in an NCON instruction K aaa 230 240 250 1 260 aaa aaa aaa aaa Constant K O FFFF O FFFF O FFFF O FFFF 5 aS so co 20 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Message Instructions Data Label In the following example an ACON and two NCON instructions are used within a Example DLBL instruction to build a text message See the FAULT instruction for information on displaying messages DirectSOFT32 e DLBL ACON ASW
285. Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ESTI Table Instructions Table Shift Left The Table Shift Left instruction shifts all the TSHFL bits in a V memory table to the left the TSHFL TE VR specified number of bit positions A aaa 230 240 250 1 260 Table Shift Right The Table Shift Right instruction shifts all the TSHFR bits in a V memory table to the right a TSHFR 1H F specified number of bit positions A aaa 230 240 250 1 260 The following description applies to both the Table Shift Left and Table Shift Right instructions A table is just a range of V memory locations The Table Shift Left and Table Shift Right instructions shift bits serially throughout the entire table Bits are shifted out the end of one word and into the opposite end of an adjacent word Atthe ends of the table bits are either discarded or zeros are shifted into the table The example tables below are arbitrarily four words long Table Shift Left Table Shift Right lt Shift in zeros e Discard bits V XXXX _ EN pi RN a ee AR V xxxx 1 eee le ee a ere A R V XXXX 2 eee ia Discard bits lt Shift in zeros Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory location
286. N 0 77 or V41140 41143 0 177 or V41140 41147 0 177 or V41140 V41147 0 377 or V41100 41157 Mn V CT 1000 1077 1000 1177 1000 1177 1000 1377 20999 NOTE The current value of a timer can be accessed by using the TA data type i e TA2 Current values may also be accessed by the V memory location l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut oD SE 47 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Stage Counter In the following example when X1 makes an off to on transition stage counter CT7 Example Using will increment by one When the current value reaches 3 the counter status bit CT7 Discrete Status will turn on and energize Y10 The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the Bits counter is reset using the RST instruction When the counter is reset the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 0 The current value for counter CT7 will be held in V memory location V1007 DirectSOFT Counting
287. N if the setup table data isvalid C760 master C761 slave 1 C767 slave 7 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 v a e Lol D hora o e SUONPOIIO9dS e 47 Cc ne S U 3 OG 50 ab ok el0 No gt a 0 CPU Specifications and Operation DL230 Memory Map Memory Type Discrete Memory Word Memory Qty Symbol Reference Reference Decimal octal octal Input Points X0 X177 V40400 V40407 1281 Xo Output Points YO Y177 V40500 V40507 1281 YO Control Relays CO C377 V40600 V40617 256 CO CO No ed Special Relays SPO SP117 V41200 V41204 112 SPO SP540 SP577 V41226 V41227 EN i Timers TO T77 64 TMR T EN K100 Timer Current None VO V77 64 Vo K100 Values gt Timer Status Bits TO T77 V41100 V41103 64 TO Counters CTO CT77 64 CNT CTO K10 Counter None V1000 V1077 64 v1000 K100 Current Values gt Counter Status CTO CT77 V41140 V41143 64 CTo Bits Data Words None V2000 V2377 256 None specific used with many instructions Data Words None V4000 V4177 128 None specific used with many Non volatile instructions Stages SO S377 V41000 V41017 256 s so som System None V7620 V7647 48 None specific used for various parameters V7750 V7777 purposes 1
288. NT GX B F A A OUT gt PREV PREV PREV 4 5 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Shift Left Shift Left is a 32 bit instruction that shifts SHFL the bits in the accumulator a specified rar ar ae number Aaaa of places to the left The vacant positions are filled with zeros and _ SHFL 2 AE the bits shifted out of the accumulator are Aaaa lost Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Constant K 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted 10 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction
289. OFF Load the status of 7 consecutive bits C10 C16 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Ni into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1312 11109 8 7654 3 2 1 0 Acc opo o popojojojojojoyopojo opojojpojo opojojojojojo opojo 1 1 1 0 OUTF Y20 eS K7 Location Constant Copy the value from the Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 specified number of bits in Y20 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF he accumulator to Y20 Y26 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Cc A sta gt SHFT 2 7 ENT D F SHFT anpst 3 s gt Cc B A H SHFT 2 i o gt 7 ENT GX F Our SHFT 5 gt Cc A H 7 o gt 7 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Load Address The Load Address instruction is a 16 bit LDA instruction lt converts any octal value or JJJ TZI address to the HEX equivalent value and loads the HEX value into the accumulator LDA 230 240 250 1 260 This instruction is useful when an address O aaa parameter is required since all addresses for the DL205 system are in octal Operand Data Type DL230 Ran
290. OUTIF Yaaa OUTIF the time the instruction is executed K bbb Accumulator bits that are not used by the AAA e instruction are set to zero 230 240 250 1 260 Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa bbb Outputs Y 0 1777 Constant K 1 32 In the following example when CO is on the binary pattern for X10 X17 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction The binary pattern in the accumulator is written to Y30 Y37 using the Out Immediate Formatted instruction This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs without waiting on the CPU scan DirectSOFT32 eo LDIF X10 Location constant x17 x16 x15 x14 x13 x12 x11 x10 I K8 X10 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Load the value of 8 x consecutive location into the Unused accumulator bits NS i x are set to zero accumulator starting with X10 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 876543210 Acc op o opopojojopojojoyopojo ofojojojo opojojojofo 1 o 1 1 0 1 0 1 OUTIF Y30 g K8 Location Constant Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30 T T ae Y30 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Y30 Y37 Handheld Programmer
291. Of OF Of Of OF OJ Of Of O O Of Of 17 1 1 0 Accumulator Location Constant Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y20 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Out Indexed The Out Indexed instruction is a 16 bit OUTX instruction lt copies a 16 bit or 4 digit value from the first level of the accumulator stack XXY to a source address offset by the value in _ OUTX 230 240 250 1 260 the accumulator V memory offset This A aaa instruction interprets the offset value as a HEX number The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to zero Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 In the following example when X1 is on the constant value 3544 is loaded into the accumulator This is the value that will be output to the specified offset V memory location V1525 The value 3544 will be placed onto the stack when the Load Address instruction is executed Remember two consecutive Load instructions places the value of the first load instruction onto the stack The Load Address instruction converts octal 25 to HEX 15 and places the value in the accumulator The Out Indexed instruc
292. Ol panels e Fixed station address of 1 e 8data bits one stop e Asynchronous Half duplex DTE e Odd parity Port 1 Pin Descriptions DL230 and DL240 1 OV Power connection GND 2 5V Power connection 3 RXD Receive Data RS232C 4 TXD _ Transmit Data RS232C 6 pin Female 5 5V Power connection Modular Connector 6 _OV__ Power connection GND Port 1 The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL250 1 and DL260 CPU are fixed This Tae ara e 6 Pin female modular RJ12 phone jack type connector 230 240 250 1 260 e K sequence protocol slave only e DirectNet slave only e MODBUS RTU slave only e RS232C 9600 baud e Connect to DirectSOFT32 D2 HPP DV1000 or DirectNet master 8data bits one start one stop e Asynchronous Half duplex DTE o m a O O 0 fed O SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo e Odd parity Port 1 Pin Descriptions DL250 1 and DL260 E 1 OV Power connection GND a 6 2 5V Power connection 3 RXD Receive Data RS232C 4 TXD _ Transmit Data RS232C 6 pin Female 5 5V Power connection Modular Connector 6 OV Power connection GND DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc Ss Os OG 50 ab ok 18 No D as 0 Port 2 Specifications Me wh oe e i 230 240 250 1 260 e RS23
293. On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid SP116 On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device SP117 On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error AIN Fixed Length Examples Fixed Length example when the PLC is reading the port continuously and timing is not critical AIN Complete AIN Port Number 1 Data Destination Fixed Length Interchar Timeout First Char Timeout Byte Swap Busy Complete Interchar Timeout Error First Char Timeout Error AIN Complete Data Read C1 c100 2 _AAANNNN gt gt oF7 uT Fixed Length example when character to character timing is critical AIN Complete Intercharacter timeout AIN Port Number C1 C2 5 Data Destination Fixed Length Interchar Timeout First Char Timeout Byte Swap Busy Complete e Interchar Timeout Error 22 First Char Timeout Error Co 20 AIN Complete Data Read S yD C1 c100 77 E 6 OS OUT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions First Char Timeout 1000 ms y Byte Swap C None c AIN Variable Length Configuration Length Type select Variable Length if the ASCII string length followed by termination characters will vary in length Port Number must be DL260 port 2 K2 Data Destination specifies whe
294. Print from V memory PRINTV 0000 e eee eee eee eae 5 226 ASCII Swap Bytes SWAPB cursis A be evaded agit bedded etek dde 5 227 Byte Swap Preferences 2 215 cha areas ddr ahe es ae ed s cava 5 227 ASCII Clear Buffer ACRB 322d nesses E A san aed wanes aus 5 228 Getting Started In This Chapter Introduction Conventions Used DL205 System Components Programming Methods DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming Steps to Designing a Successful System 1 2 Getting Started Lo D pa S a 09 D E Introduction The Purpose of this Manual Where to Begin Supplemental Manuals Technical Support Thank you for purchasing our DL205 family of products This manual shows you how to install program and maintain the equipment lt also helps you understand how to interface them to other devices in a control system This manual contains important information for personnel who will install DL205 PLCs and components and for the PLC programmer If you understand PLC systems our manuals will provide all the information you need to start and keep your system up and running If you already understand PLCs please read Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Specifications and proceed on to other chapters as needed Keep this manual handy for reference when you have questions If you are a new DL205 customer we sugg
295. SOFT Timing Diagram Seconds TMRA T20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 K45 x1 a C10 ae C10 TA20 K10 Y3 Y3 OUT Y4 H TA20 K20 Y4 Y5 gt OUT T20 TARO ON it is 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0 2 Current gt oy Value 1 10 Seconds Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont GX E ee gt B i ENT itt gt 4 ENT T C A 2 R gt SHF c 2 B 4 A 0 ENT STR gt SHFT MLR 2 0 gt N A c A E F D A ENT mr SHT t 9 gt 2 o l gt 4 5 EENT 3 o T c A B A GX F ENT str 2 SH Uma 2 peli gt 1 o ENT out gt 5 GX D OUT gt 3 ENT T C A C A STR gt SHF MLR 2 0 gt 2 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn e al Ze mate 23 C5 po fut oD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Counter CNT ARAKA Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Counter is a two input counter that increments when the count input logic transitions from off to on When the counter reset input is on the counter resets to 0 When the current value equals the preset value the counter status bit comes on and the counter continues to count up to a maximum count of 9999 The maximum value will be held until the counter is reset Instruction Specifications Counter Reference CTaaa Specifies the counter number Preset Value Bbbb Constant value K or a V memory
296. Specifications Inputs per module 4 sink source Outputs per module 4 Input Points Consumed 8 only 1st 4pts are used Output Points Consumed 8 only 1st 4pts are used Input Commons per module 1 Output Commons per module 1 Input voltage range 20 28 VDC Operating voltage 5 30VDC 5 240VAC Peak voltage 30 VDC Output type Relay form A SPST AC frequency n a Peak voltage 30VDC 264VAC ON voltage level 19 VDC minimum AC frequency 47 63 Hz De OFF voltage level TADC maximum Max load current resistive 1A point oe O Input impedance 4 7K 4A module resistive y Input current 5 mA 24 VDC Max leakage current 0 1mA 264VAC eS Maximum Current 8 mA 30 VDC Max inrush current 3A for lt 100 ms e 50 a 10A for lt 10 ms common oO Minimum ON current 4 5 mA 9 Minimum load 5 mA 5 VDC Bo Maximum OFF current 1 5mA Qe FF to ON 12 U OFF to ON response 1 to 10 ms CON Tesponse mS ON to OFF response 1 to 10 ms ONO OFF response 1o ms er Fuse output circuits 1 6 3A slow blow replaceable Fuse input circuits None Order D2 FUSE 3 5 per pack General Specifications Base power required 200 mA max Points Derating Chart Terminal type Removable 4 purs Status Indicators Logic side 3 gue ey Weight 3 5 oz 100 g 2 1 Typical Relay Life Operations IN 24VDC 0 es se ee Voltage Load Current Closures E vied O 19 20 30 40 5055C 24VDC Resistive in 500K i w G4 i di Ambisi Ter rature CORE 24VDC_ Solenoid 1A 100K o 5 P 110VAC Resistive 1A
297. T2 o T2 our OUT YO 5 Current Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Value B STR gt 1 ENT N Cc D A Tur gt 2 2 3 0 ENT T Cc Sin gt SHFT MLR ENT GX A OUT EA 0 ENT Timer Example Timing Diagram Seconds 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 1 10 Seconds In the following example a single input timer is used with a preset of 4 5 seconds Using Comparative Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 Y4 and Y5 at one second intervals respectively When X1 is turned off the timer will be reset to O and the comparative Contacts contacts will turn off Y3 Y4 and Y5 DirectSOFT x1 TMR T20 K45 TA20 K10 Y3 XI gt OUT Y3 TA20 K20 Y4 y4 gt OUT Y5 TA20 K30 Y5 gt eur T2 Current Value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ENT A n D y Ww Cc A 2 0 gt av Fite ENT Timing Diagram Seconds 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MLR ENT ENT MLR ENT ENT MLR ENT Vid id Id Id ENT 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 1 10 Seconds DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn e Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Accumulating The Accumulating Timer is a 0 1 se
298. The available baud rates include 300 600 900 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 baud Choose a higher baud rate initially reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network Important You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value Refer to the appropriate product manual for details e Stop Bits Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol e Parity Choose none even or odd parity for error checking 5s Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU and click Close DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 4 25 DirectNET Port In DirectSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Secondary Comm Port Configuration e Port From the port number list box choose Port 2 Xx ViVi Vv e Protocol Click the check box to the left of DirectNET use AUX 56 on 230 240 250 1 260 the HPP then select DNET and then you ll see the dialog box below Setup Communication Ports x Port Por 2 y Close Protocol K Sequence Tb T V DirectNET T M MODBUS Hel I Non Sequence E Remote 1 0 Time out s00ms x RTS on delay time 0ms y RTS off delay time 0ms y Station Number E 4 Baud rate a200 x one 5 ARAN Stop bits hoo n 5 f Parity foa y Format Hx y l ai 15 485 Z wire
299. US and DirectNet are single master multiple slave networks The master is the only member of the network that can initiate requests on the network This section teaches you how to design the required ladder logic for network master operation Master MODBUS RTU Protocol or DirectNET When using the DL250 1 or DL260 CPU as the master station you use simple RLL instructions to initiate the requests The WX instruction initiates network write operations and the RX instruction initiates network read operations Before executing either the WX or RX commands we will need to load data related to the read or write operation onto the CPU s accumulator stack When the WX or RX instruction executes it uses the information on the stack combined with data in the instruction box to completely define the task which goes to the port WX write RX read Network DL250 Network 1 uBIseq TES v 5 Os 0 O Co ome j o e 5 The following step by step procedure will provide you the information necessary to set up your ladder program to receive data from a network slave DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 4232 System Design and Configuration Step 1 The first Load LD instruction identifies F401 Identify Master the comm
300. User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Using the Accumulator Stack Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter to execute a function or for user defined functionality The accumulator stack is used when more than one Load type instruction is executed without the use of the Out type instruction The first load instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator Every Load instruction thereafter without the use of an Out instruction places a value into the accumulator and the value that was in the accumulator is placed onto the accumulator stack The Out instruction nullifies the previous load instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack when the next load instruction is executed Every time a value is placed onto the accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down one location The accumulator is eight levels deep eight 32 bit registers If there is a value in the eighth location when a new value is placed onto the stack the value in the eighth location is pushed off the stack and cannot be recovered LD Constant 3 2 4 5 K3245 Current Acc value Accumulator Stack
301. X Level7 X X X X X X X X 0 1 7 p2 0 5 6 Acc LO Level8 X X X X X X X X ADDS Add the value in the accumulator with the value in the first level of the Acc 2 9 15 6 7 9 8 2 accumulator stack Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD OUTD Copy the value in the Level1 0 0 3 9 5 0 2 6 accumulator to V1500 evel2 X X X X X X X X V1500 and V1501 ojojs5sj6 7jo 8 j 2 Level3 X X X X X X X X L 4 1X X X X X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v1501 V1500 eve Cm Level5 X X X X X X X X sa Soma gt 19 ENT Level6 X X X XX Xx X Xx ns Level 7 X X X XX X X X fol SHFT E D a gt B E A A ENT 52 ANDST __3 3 1 4 0 0 Level8 X X X X X X X X aS je L D D B E Cc A SHFT ENT 30 ANDST 3 3 EA 1 4 2 0 ar m A D D S SHFT 0 3 3 RST ENT GX D B F A A our SHFT 3 gt 1 5 0 oe ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Subtract Top Subtract Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction of Stack that subtracts the BCD value in the first SUBS level of the accumulator stack from the xT XTX To BCD value in the accumulator The result SUBS resides in the accumulator The value in 230 240 250 1 260 the first level of the accumulator stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruct
302. X6 LDF xo Load the value represented ore OFFI ON ON by discrete locations X0 X3 eee I K4 into the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Multiply the value in the 0000 0 0 O 3 Accumulator MUTE CO accumulator with the value A E LEA BI PEDO K4 represented by discrete x 2 CO C3 OFF OFF ON OFF locations CO C3 Acc 0 0 01 0 OJO 6 Copy the lower 4 bits of the OUTF M10 accumulator to discrete K4 locations Y10 Y13 2 5 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes o gt G Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 ef ENT FF ON ON OFF sa gt OFF ON ON O et a b D F A E SHFT AnpsTt 3 s gt o gt a G a eu m M U L F A E SHFT Srst isa llanosti 5 gt gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT A gt 4 ENT GX F B A E Our SHFT 5 gt i A gt r ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Divide Formatted Divide Formatted is a 16 bit instruction that DIVF divides the BCD value in the accumulator RT TF by the BCD value Aaaa a range of discrete bits The specified range Kbbb DIVF Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 can be 1 to 16 consecutive bits The first K bbb part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location Operand Data Type DL260 Range A B aaa bbb Inputs X 0 4
303. Xo OFF lt X1 Write Outputs Write Outputs to Specialty I O 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn Diagnostics K P DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l T2 Ea 25 OS TH oD SE ap Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Boolean Instructions Store STR Viviv Y 230 240 250 1 260 Store Not STRN SILIS Y 230 240 250 1 260 The Store instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact Status of the contact will be the same state as the associated image register point or memory location The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the associated image register point or memory location Aaaa Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 377 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 Special Relay SP 0 117 540 577 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 717 0 137 540 717 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following Store example when input X
304. Y 230 240 250 1 260 The And instruction logically ands a normally open contact in series with another contact in a rung The status of the contact will be the same state as the associated image register point or memory location The And Not instruction logically ands a normally closed contact in series with another contact in a rung The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the associated image register point or memory location Aaaa y Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs x 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 377 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer E 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 Special Relay SP 0 117 540 577 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 717 0 137 540 717 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following And example when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes X1 X2 l wa sTR gt 1 ENT out N AND gt 2 ENT OUT gt 5 ENT In the following And Not example when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keyst
305. ZH 2 Derating Chart o Points ics 250mA Pt Addresses Used 12 Points _ Used Points Used 9 300mA Pt Yn 0 Yes Yn 10 Yes J q F Yn 1 Yes Yn 11 Yes 6 7 pal 15 110 Yn 2 Yes Yn 12 Yes 3 A ot G4 Yn 3 Yes Yn 13 Yes 7 12 fas Yn 4 Yes Yn 14 Yes 0 T T T T T 1 2 Yn 5 Yes Yn 15 Yes D a A Po ioi D a E B 30 CJ Yn 6 No Yn 16 No Ambient Temperature C F D2 12TA Yn 7 No Yn 17 No aa n is the starting address Oo 5 g oe ioa t o CA O D Hee 4 2 pa a 1 Ha 215 D 5 a 0 D Internal module circuitry a p ey i re e Y O O OUTPUT Optical z 15 132 VAC EM og cB O D L t Isolator To LED 0 o 19 e rS C r En e LLO YA y HI 2 t E E eS S Com y 69 a O O V Line O mm leo le 15 132 3 154 NC gt patera Td we GC A When the AB switch is in the A position the LEDs display the output status of the module s first 6 output points Positon B displays the output status of the mod ule s second group of 6 output points DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 D2 04TRS Relay Output Installation Wiring and Specifications Outputs per module 4 Max inrush current 5A for lt 10ms Commons per module 4 isolated Minimum load 10mA Output Points Consumed 8 only 1st 4pts are used Base power required 5v 250mA Max Operating voltage 5 30VDC
306. _ Acc 9 9 9 9 415 2 46 Compared with CMP v2000 a lola l5 Compare the value in the accumulator with the value V2000 in V2000 SP60 C30 a a Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 52 ora gt ls ENT 25 SHFT snnstl a gt set Swe WE a ls Woo Se EN 55 ser ser srl ov gt Se o0 o o e z sme gt H Erne of ENT j Sir gt suet C n i 4 G ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions Compare Double The Compare Double instruction is a CMPD 32 bit instruction that compares the JVJ value in the accumulator with the value Aaaa which is either two consecutive V CMPD ZOD 290 230 1 260 memory locations or an 8 digit max Aaaa constant The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 1 FFFFFFFF 1 FFFFFFFF 1 FFFFFFFF 1 FFFFFFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP60 On when the val
307. a Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Constant K 1 32 1 32 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the right using the Rotate Right instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT Display V1401 V1400 x LDD 6 7 o 5 3 1fol1 I V1400 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ROTR Ko Acc o 1 1 o jop1j1 1fo jopojyopo 1po 1 fo o 1 1 o ojo 1 pojo ojo ojoj oJt The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the right OUTD V1500 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15141312 11109 8 7 65 43 210 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 Acc 0 1f0 1 10O 1 1 1 OJOJOJOJO 1 O 1 O O 1 1 O O O
308. able is written Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Step 3 Load the BCD hex bit pattern into the accumulator which will be logically combined with the table contents as they are copied Step 4 Insert the AND Move OR Move or XOR Move instruction This specifies the starting location of the copy of the original table This new table will automatically be the same length as the original table Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 53 The example table to the right contains V3000 V3100 BCD data as shown for demonstration 3131313 ANDMOV F5T gt 2T gt 2T gt purposes Suppose we want to move a K6666 table of two words at V3000 and AND it with K6666 The copy of the table at F F F F 6 6 6 6 V3100 shows the result of the AND operation for each word The program on the next page performs the ANDMOV operation example above It assumes that the data in the table at V3000 V3001 already exists First we load the table length two words into the accumulator Next we load the starting addrss of the source table using t
309. access the module again to update the status DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EZA CPU Scan Time Considerations The scan time covers all the cyclical tasks that are performed by the operating system You can use DirectSOFT32 or the Handheld Programmer to display the minimum maximum and current scan times that have occurred since the previous Program Mode to Run Mode transition This information can be very important when evaluating the performance of a system As shown previously there are several segments that make up the scan cycle Each of these segments requires a certain amount of time to complete Of all the segments the only one you really have the most control over is the amount of time it takes to execute the application program This is because different instructions take different amounts of time to execute So if you think you need a faster scan then you can try to choose faster instructions Your choice of I O modules and system configuration such as expansion or remote I O can also affect the scan time However these things are usually dictated by the application For example if you have a need to count pulses at high rates of speed then you ll probably have to use a High Speed Counter module Also if you have I O points that need to be located several hundred feet from the CPU then you need remote I O because it s much faster and cheaper to install a single
310. aced on the first level of the accumulator stack when the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1600 V1600 is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction The value to fill the table with V1400 is specified in the Fill instruction X1 LD Load the constant value 4 HEX into the lower 16 bits S A K4 of the accumulator X XX X V1576 LDA Convert the octal address X X X X V1577 1600 to HEX 380 and load the 2151010 lviso0 O 1600 value into the accumulator V1400 gt 5 00 A 2 5 0 0 v1601 2 5 0 0 V1602 FILL Fill the table with the value in V1400 2 5 0 0 v1603 V1400 X X X X V1604 X X X X v1605 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 7 B STR e 1 ENT L D E SHFT anost 3 gt PREV j ENT L D A B G A A SHFT anpst 3 o gt 1 6 0 a ENT F L L B E A A SHFT 5 8 ANDST ANDST gt 1 4 0 0 ENR DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 151 Table Instructions Find The Find instruction is used to search for a FIND specified value in a V memory table of up to TXIX TF 255 locations The function parameters are iy a loaded into the first and second levels of the FND accumulator stack and the accumulator by aad
311. ad Address instruction The starting location for the ASCII table V1400 is specified in the HEX to ASCII instruction DirectSOFT32 Display Hexadecimal x LD Equivalents ASCII TABLE I K2 Load the constant value into the lower 16 bits of the gt m accumulator This value defines the number of V 33 34 locations in the HEX table V1400 V1500 1234 a 31 32 v1401 O 1500 Convert octal 1500 to HEX 340 and load the value into the accumulator Ra gt HTA 37 38 v1402 V1400 is the starting V1400 V1501 5678 location for the ASCII table The conversion is executed by this instruction 35 36 V1403 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B sra gt 1 ENT L D c SHFT anostil 3 gt PREV ENT L D A B F A A SHFT anost 3 gt ENT suet H T A gt B E A A ENT The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value 0 30 8 38 1 31 9 39 2 32 A 41 3 33 B 42 4 34 C 43 5 35 D 44 _ 5 6 36 E 45 aS a Q 7 37 F 46 S S 520 Hr L DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instruction
312. ad a corresponding 0 or 9 F in the accumulator order specified are set to 0 Example C shows how the shuffle digits works when duplicate numbers are used specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed the most significant duplicate number in the order specified is used in the result DirectSOFT32 A B C x LDD v2001 v2000 v2001 2000 v2001 v2000 1 V2000 9 A B C D E F O 0O F E D CI B A 9 9JA B C D E F O Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator aa a 8 Oe 80401 87654321 87654321 Positions 9 A B C EJF 10 ago o F eE D c B 9 nce 9 A B C D E F 0 ace LDD V2007 V2006 V2007 V2006 V2007 V2006 v2006 1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4 0 0 4 3 0 0 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Load the value in V2006 and V2007 into the accumulator Specified 87654321 87654321 765 43 21 112 817 113161514 ace ojoj ja ofjo 2 1 pg 4 3 2 1 1 4 2111 acc Newbit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 4 2 1 7 54 821 SFLDGT Positions eee 3 BICJE F O D A 9 Acc oooO E D A 9 age ojojojoj 9 BIC Acc Shuffl
313. ains the character code to be displayed VO V2377 V7625 V7626 V7627 Contains the function number that can be assigned to each key Power Up mode change preset value password Reserved for future use V memory location for X Y or C points used 0 1 2 3 12 Default 0000 V7630 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 1 The default value is 2320 which indicates the first value should be obtained from V2320 Since there are 24 presets available the default range is V2320 V2377 You can change the starting point if necessary Default V2320 Range VO V2320 V7631 V7632 Not used N A V7633 Sets the desired function code for the high speed counter interrupt pulse catch pulse train and input filter Location is also used for setting the with without battery option enable disable CPU mode change and power up in Run Mode option Default 0000 Lower Byte Range Range 0 None 10 Up 40 Interrupt 50 Pulse Catch 60 Filtered discrete In Upper Byte Range Bits 8 11 14 15 Unused Bit 12 With Batt installed 0 disable BATT LED 1 enable BATT LED Bit 13 Power up in Run V7634 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default 0000 pulse train output and input filter for XO when D2 CTRINT is installed V7635 Contains set up information for high speed counter interrupt pulse catch Default
314. ains the function number that can be assigned to each key Power Up Mode Change Preset Value Password VO V3760 VO V3760 1 16 VO V3760 VO V3760 V memory location for X Y or C points used 0 1 2 3 12 Default 0000 V7630 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 1 Since there are 24 Default V3630 presets available the default range is V3630 V3707 You can change the Range VO V3707 starting point if necessary V7631 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 2 Since there are 24 Default V3710 presets available the default range is V3710 3767 You can change the Range VO V3710 starting point if necessary V7632 Contains the baud rate setting for Port 2 you can use AUX 56 from the Default 2 9600 baud Handheld Programmer or use DirectSOFT to set the port parameters if 9600 baud is unacceptable Also allows you to set a delay time between the assertion of the RTS signal and the transmission of data This is useful for radio modems that require a key up delay before data is transmitted e g a value of 0302 sets 10ms Turnaround Delay TAD and 9600 baud Lower Byte Baud Rate Lower Byte Range 00 300 01 1200 02 9600 03 19 2K Upper Byte Time Delay Upper Byte Range 01 2ms 02 5ms 03 10ms 04 20ms 05 50ms 06 100ms 07 500ms DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 o m ol O O 0 o r
315. ak voltage 30 VDC 10 mA AC frequency N A OFF voltage level 3 5 VDC maximum ON voltage level 19 VDC minimum Input impedance 2 7K OFF voltage level 7 VDC maximum Input current 4 0 mA 12 VDC 8 5 mA 24 VDC Minimum ON current 3 5 mA Input impedance 3 9K Input current 6 mA 24 VDC Minimum ON current 3 5 mA Maximum OFF current 1 5 mA Base power required 100 mA Max OFF to ON response 3 to 9 ms ON to OFF response 3 to 9 ms Terminal type Removable Status Indicator Logic side Weight 2 3 oz 65 g Maximum OFF current 1 5 mA Base power required 50 mA max OFF to ON response 1to8 ms ON to OFF response 1to8ms Terminal type Removable Status Indicator Logic side Weight 2 3 oz 65 g Points Derating Chart 8 6 A 4 CIN 12 24 gt 27 VDC 0 o E LO 4 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 1 5 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F 2 6 Ambient Temperature C F 3 0 17 12 24VDC Internally Cc ted J E gt connecter e O a gt i 3 3 A 7 4 zo z A 6 A 7 Internal module circuitry V INPUT ane ae 9 COM 1 it 12 24VDC 96 COM mI mw To LED SE
316. al 3rd Ed 06 02 Getting Started 130 Conventions Used O D LY When you see the light bulb icon in the left hand margin the paragraph to its E A immediate right will give you a special tip E The word TIP in boldface will mark the beginning of the text a 3 Qa immediate right will be a special note 90989 When you see the notepad icon in the left hand margin the paragraph to its 8 The word NOTE in boldface will mark the beginning of the text When you see the exclamation mark icon in the left hand margin the paragraph to YZ its immediate right will be a warning This information could prevent injury loss of Lom property or even death in extreme cases The word WARNING in boldface will mark the beginning of the text Key Topics for The beginning of each chapter will list the Each Chapter key topics that can be found in that vane chapter DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 1 4 Getting Started DL205 System Components O D c o a 09 D O CPUs Bases I O Configuration 1 O Modules The DL205 family is a versatile product line that provides a wide variety of features in an extremely compact package The CPUs are small but offer many instructions normally only found in larger more expensive systems The modular design also offers more flexibility in the fast moving industry of control systems The following is a summary o
317. al cover may not close properly or the connector may pull away from the module This applies especially for high temperature thermoplastics such as THHN Module type Suggested AWG Range Suggested Torque 4 point 16 24 AWG 7 81 Ib inch 0 882 Nem 8 point 16 24 AWG 7 81 lb inch 0 882 Nem 12 point 16 24 AWG 2 65 Ib in 0 3 Nem 16 point 16 24 AWG 2 65 Ib in 0 3 Nem i 2999 NOTE 16 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW is recommended Other 22 types of 16 AWG may be acceptable but it really depends on the thickness ne and stiffness of the wire insulation If the insulation is too thick or stiff Be and a majority of the module s I O points are used then the plastic 2S O fed ULM suo 9 2 Always use a continuous length of wire do not combine wires to attain a needed length Use the shortest possible wire length Use wire trays for routing where possible Avoid running wires near high energy wiring Also avoid running input wiring close to output wiring where possible 6 To minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance consider using multiple wires for the return line 7 Avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible Avoid creating sharp bends in the wires 9 To reduce the risk of having a module with a blown fuse we suggest you add external fuses to your I O wiring A fast blow fuse with a lower current rating than the I O module fuse can be added to each common
318. al instruction connects a ORE normally open comparative contact in rae ar ae parallel with another contact The 230 240 250 1 260 contact will be on when Vaaa Bbbb Vaaa B bbb Or If Not Equal The Or If Not Equal instruction connects ORNE a normally closed comparative contact in IIJ VE parallel with another contact The E E EE contact will be on when Vaaa 4 Bbbb Vaaa B bbb operand Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range ype B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb V memory vV All All All All All All All All See page 3 50 See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 4500 or V2002 2345 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v2000 K4500 y Y3 pene SHFT E gt pe 3 A 5 A a A A gt OUT E F A A 4 5 0 0 ENT Q E c A A c V2002 Y K2345 OR SHFT 7 gt 2 o o 2 gt a c D E F 2 3 4 5 ENT ur gt JP 3 ENT In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 3916 or V2002 2500 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v2000 K3916 Y3 ais SHFT E gt pe gt A r A i A 3 gt OUT D J B G 5 r 6 ENT R E c A A C v2002 K2500 orn SHFT 7 gt 2 o 7 j gt
319. alog Phone 1 800 463 9275 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 suo 6 2 22 Installation Wiring and Specifications Prolonging Relay Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching amount of spark Contact Life created at the time of open or closure and presence of airborne contaminants However there are some steps you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts e Switch the relay on or off only when the application requires it e If you have the option switch the load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current e Take measures to suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive DC loads such as contactors and solenoids circuit given below PLC Relay Output Inductive Field Device Output Input Da o ES A R z ee os MT 3 C Supply FO Common al Common A a Be S Adding external contact protection may extend relay life beyond the number of contact cycles listed in the specification tables for relay modules High current inductive loads such as clutches brakes motors direct acting solenoid valves and motor starters will benefit the most from external contact protection The RC network must be located close to the relay module output connector To find the values for the RC snubber network first determine the voltage across the contacts when open and the current through them when clos
320. alue in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is ored with 36476A38 using the Or Double instruction The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 x LDD V2001 V2000 1 v2000 TA 5 4 7 E 2 8 Load the value in V2000 and AR Ns SY A V2001 into accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc op 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 41 1 1 1 14 O OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF 1 1 14 1 OF 170 ORD ee Acc lt 0 1 0 10 7 0 0 0 4 A O 000000 000 0000000 od te tt Oe 0 OR the value in the accumulator with OR 36476438 0 0 1 1011001000111 0110101000111000 the constant value 36476A38 Acc O 1 1 1 O 1 1 OF OF 1 17 47 4 1 1 17 OF 17 17 OF 17 OF 17 OF OF 17 17 17 17 OF 170 OUTD a jw ae a V2010 Copy the value in the 7 6 7 F 6JA 7 A accumulator to V2010 and vV2011 v2010 v2011 Handheld Program
321. am shows the scan by scan results of the execution for our example program Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 6 and then starts over at 1 instead of 0 Also notice how SP56 is affected by the execution Although our example does not show it we are assuming that there is another part of the program that changes the value in V1500 data source prior to the execution of the STT instruction This is not required but it makes it easier to see how the data source is copied into the table Example of Execution Scan N Before STT Execution After STT Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Incremented V1401 X X X X 0 6 0 O O 0 v1400 v1401 0O 5 0 0 0_ 6 0 0 0 1 V1400 V1402 X X X X 1 V1402 X X X X TN viaos x x x Px 2 Source viaos x x x x 2 Source viaoa x x x Tx 3 0 5 0 0 v1500 viaoa x x Tx x 3 0 5 0 0 V1500 V1405 X X X X 4 V1405 X X X X 4 visos x x xIx 5 ae eee viso xx xx 5 E Be ee v
322. am to ensure a known starting point DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications Mounting Guidelines Before installing the PLC system you will need to know the dimensions of the components considered The diagrams on the following pages provide the component dimensions to use in defining your enclosure specifications Remember to leave room for potential expansion NOTE If you are using other components in your system refer to the appropriate manual to determine how those units can affect mounting dimensions Base Dimensions The following information shows the proper mounting dimensions The height oe dimension is the same for all bases The depth varies depending on your choice of O i S I O module The length varies as the number of slots increase Make sure you have 2 followed the installation guidelines for proper spacing 59 ER 20 A 2 with D2 DSCBL 1 5 85 NC _ ES onport2 148mm e a goe CI CI CI with 32pt g A ZIPLink cable or 448 5 3 54 9 99 i 113mm a base exp unit cable 90mm 76mm with 3 62 a 12 or 16pt I O a 92mm gt as ale with 2 95 e B M 4or8pt vo M 75mm with D2 EM Expansion Unit r D E 8 goooo00000 oooo000000 E
323. and off for 50 ms Remote l O points are represented by global relays They are generally used only to control remote I O but they can be used as normal control relays when remote I O is not used in the system In this example memory location GX0 represents an output point and memory location GX10 represents an input point DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Ladder Representation ISG 0000 Wait forStart Start P S1 JMP Ai 500 JMP SG S0001 Check for a Part Part Present S2 JMP Je ero 86 JMP x1 SG S0002 Clamp the part Clamp SET Part 9100 Logked 7 S3 umP x2 SP5 C10 OUT SP4 1 second clock SP5 100 ms clock SP6 50 ms clock X3 GX0 4 OUT GX10 Y12 our CPU Specifications and Operation DL230 System V memory System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V2320 V2377 The default location for multiple preset values for the UP counter N A V7620 V7627 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters V7620 Sets the V memory location that contains the value VO V2377 V7621 Sets the V memory location that contains the message VO V2377 V7622 Sets the total number 1 16 of V memory locations to be displayed 1 16 V7623 Sets the V memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed VO V2377 V7624 Sets the V memory location that cont
324. and the value Aaaa which is a 8 digit max ___ XORD YY YY constant The result resides in the K aaa 230 240 250 1 260 accumulator Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or Double is zero or a negative number the most significant bit is on Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is exclusively ored with 36476A38 using the Exclusive Or Double instruction The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 V2001 v2000 xt LDD 514 7 7 A k a e a Z a A og 7 Ses Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 XORD Acc 0 1 0 1 0 14 0 0 0 1 4 14 1 4 14 0 f of of 1 of 1 of of of of 1 1 4 1 of 1 0 K36476A38 a A wo N
325. ange DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer pP All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value SP62 on when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the constant 4526 will be loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in V2000 using the Compare instruction The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison In this example if the value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction SP60 will turn on energizing C30 DirectSOFT32 Y LD Constant II K4526 4 5 2 6 Load the constant value A The unused accumulator 4526 into the lower 16 bits of bits are set to zero the accumulator A
326. ansion bases power up at the same time or before the CPU base Expansion bases that power up after the CPU base will not be recognized by the CPU See chapter 3 Initialization Process timing specifications DL250 1 Local The D2 250 1 supports local expansion up to three total bases one CPU base Expansion System two local expansion bases and up to a maximum of 768 total I O points An example local expansion system is shown below All local and expansion I O points are updated on every CPU scan No specialty modules can be located in the expansion bases refer to the Module Placement Table earlier in this chapter for restrictions D2 CM Expansion D2 EM Termination Base Number Selection Switch Settings e 24 8 55 ee ae TEM I a A Use D2 EXCBL 1 1m V i OFF Category 5 straight e ll olololololo ls through cable to con I O addressing 3 nect the D2 EMs to El gether D2 250 1 DIE TERM CPU e 30m 98ft max cable length 2 SF E TERM aD Note Do not use OFF Ethernet hubs to connect the local expansion system together I O addressing 2 gn e The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system e All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion bases Specialty modules are not supported in the expansion bases e The D2 CMs do not have to be in successi
327. are moved up one level 230 240 250 1 260 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack is multiplied by the BCD value in the accumulator using the Multiply Stack instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display v1400 x1 LD Load the value in V1400 into 5jojojo Accumulator stack Ji the accumulator The unused accumulator after 1st LDD I V1400 bits are set to zero Level1 X X X X X X X X Acc L9 9 0 5 0 0 0 Level2 X X X X X X X X 3 1X X X X X X X X V1420 4 X X X X X X X X LD Load the value in V1420 into 0 2 0 0 5 X XX XXX X X the accumulator The unused ac
328. arting slave memory address of the data to be read See the table on the following page e Start Master Memory Address specifies the starting memory address in the master where the data will be placed See the table on the following page Number of Elements specifies how many coils inputs holding registers or input register will be read See the table on the following page e MODBUS Data Format specifies MODBUS 584 984 or 484 data format to be used e Exception Response Buffer specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be placed See the table on the following page gn e Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 MRX Slave Memory Address MRX Master Memory Addresses MRX Number of Elements MRX Exception Response Buffer System Design and Configuration Function Code MODBUS Data Format Slave Address Range s 01 Read Coil 484 Mode 1 999 01 Read Coil 584 984 Mode 1 65535 02 Read Input Status 484 Mode 1001 1999 02 Read Input Status 584 984 Mode 10001 19999 5 digit or 100001 165535 6 digit 03 Read Holding Register 484 Mode 4001 4999 03 Read Holding Register 584 984 40001 49999 5 digit or 4000001 465535 6 digit 04 Read Input Register 484 Mode 3001 3999 04 Read Input Register 584 984 Mode 30001 39999 5 digit or
329. ase Module Type 5 VDC mA Auxiliary Power Source 0 24 VDC Output mA Available D2 09B 1 2600 300 Base Power CPU Slot D2 260 330 Slot 0 D2 16ND3 2 100 0 Slot 1 D2 16NA 100 0 Slot 2 D2 16NA 100 0 Slot 3 F2 04AD 1 50 80 Slot 4 F2 02DA 1 40 60 Slot 5 D2 08TA 250 0 Slot 6 D2 08TD1 100 0 Slot 7 D2 08TR 250 0 Other Handheld Prog D2 HPP 200 0 Total Power Required 1520 140 Remaining Power Available 2600 1520 1080 300 140 160 1 Use the power budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the system components First enter the amount of power supplied by the base Next list the requirements for the CPU any I O modules and any other devices such as the Handheld Programmer or the DV 1000 operator interface Remember even though the Handheld or the DV 1000 are not installed in the base they still obtain their power from the system Also make sure you obtain any external power requirements such as the 24VDC power required by the analog modules 2 Add the current columns starting with Slot O and put the total in the row labeled Total power required 3 Subtract the row labeled Total power required from the row labeled Available Base Power Place the difference in the row labeled Remaining Power Available 4 If Total Power Required is greater than the power available from the base the power budget will be exceeded It will be unsafe
330. ases In addition port 2 supports up to 2048 points if you use the DL250 1 as a Remote master It includes an internal RISC based microprocessor for greater processing power The DL250 1 has 174 instructions The additional instructions to the DL240 instruction set include drum timers a print function floating point math and PID loop control for 4 loops The DL250 1 has a total of two built in communications ports The top port is identical to the top port of the DL240 DL250 with the exception of DirectNet slave feature The bottom port is a 15 pin RS232C RS422 port It will interface with DirectSOFT32 and operator interfaces and provides DirectNet and MODBUS RTU Master Slave connections DL260 CPU The DL260 offers all the DL250 1 features plus ASCII IN OUT and expanded Features MODBUS instructions It also supports up to 1280 local I O points by using up to four local expansion bases It has a maximum of 30 4K of program memory comprised of 15 8K of ladder memory and 14 6K of V memory data registers It also includes an internal RISC based microprocessor for greater processing power The DL260 has 231 instructions The additional instructions to the DL250 1 instruction set includes table instructions trigonometric instructions and support for 16 PID loops The DL260 has a total of two built in communications ports The top port is identical to the top port of the DL250 1 The bottom port is a 15 pin RS232C RS422 RS485 port
331. ative MODBUS addressing in your ladder program with no S need to perform octal to decimal conversions es Port 2 can also be used for ASCII IN OUT communications ake ES oO AO Module Unit Master Slave Paro cp DL240 CPU DirectNet K Sequence DL250 1 CPU DirectNet DirectNet K Sequence MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU DL260 CPU DirectNet DirectNet K Sequence MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU ASCII ASCII ECOM Ethernet Ethernet DCM DirectNet DirectNet K Sequence Modbus RTU DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Module Placement Slot Numbering System Design and Configuration The DL205 bases each provide different numbers of slots for use with the I O modules You may notice the bases refer to 3 slot 4 slot etc One of the slots is dedicated to the CPU so you always have one less l O slot For example you have five I O slots with a 6 slot base The I O slots are numbered 0 4 The CPU slot always contains a CPU and is not numbered ef AAA 0 ad DB BB BB aS 0 o Oj as ra A Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Sot g D E S sm 1 E Lalm CPU Slot VO Slots A Module Placement The following table lists the valid locations for all types of modules in a DL205 Restrictions
332. ator Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 1 0 2 4 ia LD I V1400 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 4 Accumulator SUBB 0 A 0 B V1420 V1420 Acc O 6 1 9 The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator OUT 0 6 1 9 V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
333. ave connectors with recessed screws The recessed screws help minimize the risk of someone accidentally touching active wiring Both types of connectors can be easily removed If you examine the connectors closely you ll notice there are squeeze tabs on the top and bottom To remove the terminal block press the squeeze tabs and pull the terminal block away from the module We also have DIN rail mounted terminal blocks DINnectors refer to our catalog for a complete listing of all available products ZIPLinks come with special pre assembled cables with the I O connectors installed and wired WARNING For some modules field device power may still be present on the terminal block even though the PLC system is turned off To minimize the risk of electrical shock check all field device power before you remove the connector DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications EA O Wiring Use the following guidelines when wiring the I O modules in your system Checklist 1 There is a limit to the size of wire the modules can accept The table below lists the suggested AWG for each module type When making terminal connections follow the suggested torque values ar termin
334. bbb consecutive bits The result resides in the Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions accumulator Operand Data Type DL260 Range A B aaa bbb Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays C 0 3777 Stage Bits Ss 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 See Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 137 320 717 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Constant K 1 16 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X6 is on the value formed by discrete locations X0 X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The value formed by discrete locations CO C3 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator using the Multiply Formatted instruction The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10 Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction DirectSOFT32 Display x3 x2 x1 xo
335. be used in an application where a block of program logic may be slow to execute and is not required to execute every scan The subroutine label and all associated logic is placed after the End statement in the program When the subroutine is called from the main program the CPU will execute the subroutine SBR with the same constant number K as the GTS instruction which called the subroutine By placing code in a subroutine it is only scanned and executed when needed since it resides after the End instruction Code which is not scanned does not impact the overall scan time of the program SBR K aaa Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa Constant K 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 1 FFFF When a Subroutine Return is executed in the subroutine the CPU will return to the point in the main body of the program from which it was called The Subroutine Return is used as termination of the subroutine which must be the last instruction in the subroutine and is a stand alone instruction no input contact on the rung The Subroutine Return Conditional instruction is a optional instruction used with a input contact to implement a conditional return from the subroutine The Subroutine Return RT is still required for termination of the Subroutine DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 RTC Instruction Set 5 183 Program Control
336. bel Example o ista os UA sd a is 5 200 Print Message PRINTS is a a 5 201 MODBUS RTU Instructions DL260 ooooooocccrcn eee eee eens 5 205 MODBUS Read from Network MRX 0 0 eee eee eee eee 5 205 MRX Slave Memory Address cuz ven eins wea yeaah a dae eee eee waled ete 5 206 MRX Master Memory Addresses 0 0c cece cece eens 5 206 MRX Number of Elements unre o02 doks doer dd ta dt it 5 206 MRX Exception Response Butler svsiee ceercyssedsaed taleedysheehverdeaeesdees oeaee 5 206 MRX Example tata Rees obese AA Reb ie A eh es BEE 5 207 MODBUS Write to Network MWX 205 cios A epee ened 5 208 MWX Slave Memory Address ostias iaa Baas Oe sas A ss 5 209 MWX Master Memory Addresses 00 ccc eee eee eee 5 209 MW Number of Elements coi riada AA ia 5 209 MWX Exception Response Buffer sosoovcrirsra card Aa ea a eee 5 209 MWXEXamMple vecina A Ad a a a a 5 210 Table of Contents EDS ASCII Instructions DL260 20 ii a He ae ie eh ee ia 5 211 Reading ASCII Input Strings SA E bra sede eee O Reseed 5 211 Writing ASGILOUIpUr SiringS ds o A a e eri 5 211 Managing the ASCII Strings irrita auras A da 5 211 AS Oa Mia sy Stat AIN iS e A O E EE di R 5 212 ASCILNEMONARIND darte 5 216 AFIND Search EXAMPLE A 5 217 PROMISE MU ACK AS EE IS AA iets EE 5 219 ASC Compare CMPV xs cx Fier sett a A ae at eee mag a Se ee a 5 220 ASCII Print to V memory VPRINT lt i ced xian A IA A AA ate wees 5 221 ASCII
337. binary vlaue is converted to DECO bit position 11 NI o A 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 3210 Decode the five bit binary Acc 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O OJ OJ OJ O O OF OF OF O OF O 1 OF OF OF OF O OF OF O OF OF O pattern in the accumulator and set the corresponding bit position to a 1 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes a E 1 ENT SHFT asta ls gt Wa fo gt Es e SET j 3 F 4 2 NST ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Accumulator Binary The Binary instruction converts a BCD BIN Value in the accumulator to the equivalent binary value The result resides in the MESAS accumulator BIN 230 240 250 1 260 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The BCD value in the accumulator is converted to the binary HEX equivalent using the BIN instruction The binary value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction The handheld programmer will display the binary valu
338. ble Remote I O Table for the built in remote I O channel is the Memory Age ONEN SH memory address we selected in the Port 2 setup The table consists of blocks of four words Remote I O data which correspond to each slave in the Reserved V37700 xxxx system as shown to the right The first V37701 ox four table locations are reserved The CPU reads data from the table after powerup interpreting the four data words in each block with these meanings 1 Starting address of slave s input data V37702 xxxx V37703 xxxx Slave 1 V37704 xxxx V37705 xxxx 2 Number of slave s input points V37706 xxxx 3 Starting address of outputs in slave V37707 xxxx 4 Number of slave s output points o o The table is 32 words long If your system has fewer than seven remote slave bases then the remainder of the table must be Slave 7 V37734 0000 filled with zeros For example a 3 slave V37735 0000 system will have a remote configuration V37736 0000 table containing 4 reserved words 12 vaz737 0000 words of data and 16 words of 0000 A portion of the ladder program must DirectSOFT32 configure this table only once at powerup Use the LDA instruction as me LDA shown to the right to load an address to ll 040000 place in the table Use the regular LD constant to load the number of the slave s ae el input or output po
339. ble Pointer Automatically Decremented v1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 po o 6 V1400 v1i401 0 5 0 0 1 00 0 5 v1400 v1i402 9 9 9 9 2 v1402 9 9 9 9 2 visos 3 lo 74 3 Destinatio visos 3 lol7 la 3 Destination visos 8 lo ls lo 4 X X X X V1500 visos 8 Jo ls l9 4 2 0 4 6 V1500 vi405 1 0 1 0 5 v1405 1 0 1 0 5 wit viaos 2 o 4 e 6 ii Spek eee visos 2lolalel 6 ni Sasot V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X xX Scan N 1 Before RFB Execution After RFB Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Decremented v1i401 0 5 0j o0 1 0 0 0 5 Vv1400 v1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 JOJO 4 V1400 v1i402 9 9 9 9 2 v1i402 9 9 9 9 2 visos 3 lo 74 3 Destinatio visos 13 lo l7 a 3 Destination visos lola lo 4 2 0 4 6 V1500 vi4o4 8 l9l8 l9 e 1 0 1 0 V1500 vi405 1 0 1 0 5 v1i405 1 0 1 0 5 visos 2 0 4 o6 6 SP56 Sucot visos 210 4 6 6 SP56 oe V1407 X XXX l E V1407 X X X X i Scan N 4 Before RFB Execution After RFB Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Decremented vi401 0 5 0 0 1 0 O O 2 v1400 v1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 O JO 1 v1400 vi402 9 9 9 9 2 v1402 9 9 9 9 2 visos 3 lo 74 3 Destinatio visos 3 lol7 la 3 So Destination visos lo ls l9 4 3 0 7 4 1V1500 visos e Jo ls l9 4 9 9 9 9 V1500 vi405 1 0 1 0 5 v1405 1 0 1 0 5 vi406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 v1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 viao7 X x x x I _ SP56 OFF v1407 x Tx x x SP56 OFF Scan N 5 Before RFB Execution After RFB Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer
340. c SHFT anost 3 gt PREV 3 ENT L D A D A A A SHFT anpst 3 o gt 3 0 o ENT S w A P D B A A SHFT ast SHFT anon o ev gt 3 1 0 o ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLLInstructions 5 1 75 Clock Calendar Instructions Clock Calendar Instructions Date The Date instruction can be used to set the DATE date in the CPU The instruction requires xVXTITTY two consecutive V memory locations Vaaa to set the date If the values in the specified _ DATE 230 240 250 1 260 locations are not valid the date will not be V aaa set The current date can be read from 4 consecutive V memory locations V7771 V7774 Date Range V Memory Location BCD READ Only Year 0 99 V7774 Month 1 12 V7773 Day 1 31 V7772 Day of Week 0 06 V7771 The values entered for the day of week are 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 In the following example when CO is on the constant value K94010301 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction CO should be a contact from a one shot PD instruction The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Doubl
341. can the CPU analyzes the communications request and responds as appropriate The amount of time required to service the peripherals depends on the content of the request To Service Request DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Minimum 260 us 250 us 8 us 8 us Run Mode Max 30 ms 20 ms 410 us 410 us Program Mode Max 3 5 Seconds 4 Seconds 2 Second 3 7 Second Some specialty modules can also communicate directly with the CPU via the CPU bus During this portion of the cycle the CPU completes any CPU bus communications The actual time required depends on the type of modules installed and the type of request being processed NOTE Some specialty modules can have a considerable impact on the CPU scan time If timing is critical in your application consult the module documentation for any information concerning the impact on the scan time The clock calendar and special relays are updated and loaded into special V memory locations during this time This update is performed during both Run and Program Modes Modes DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Program Minimum 8 0 us fixed 35 0 us 11 0 us 11 0 us Mode Maximum 8 0 us fixed 48 0 us 11 0 us 11 0 us Run Mode Minimum 20 0 us 60 0 us 19 0 us 19 0 us Maximum 26 0 us 85 0 us 26 0 us 26 0 us The time required to write the output status for the local and expansion I O modules depends on which CPU you are using and the number of output
342. cations and Operation DL260 System V memory System Description of Contents Default Values Ranges V memory V3630 V3707 The default location for multiple preset values for UP DWN and UP counter 1 N A or pulse output function V3710 V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP DWN and UP counter 2 N A V3770 V3777 Not used N A V7620 V7627 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters V7620 Sets the V memory location that contains the value VO V3760 V7621 Sets the V memory location that contains the message VO V3760 V7622 Sets the total number 1 32 of V memory locations to be displayed 1 32 V7623 Sets the V memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed VO V3760 V7624 Sets the V memory location that contains the character code to be displayed VO V3760 V7625 Contains the function number that can be assigned to each key V memory for X Y or C V7626 Sets the power up mode 0 1 2 3 12 V7627 Change Preset Value password Default 0000 V7630 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 1 Since there are 24 Default V3630 presets available the default range is V3630 V3707 You can change the Range VO V3710 starting point if necessary V7631 Starting location for the multi step presets for channel 2 Since there are 24 Default V3710 presets available the default range is V3710 3767 You can change the Range VO
343. ccumulator is an invalid floating point number SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit SP74 On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non real number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag Pl LDR 1 R7 0 Load the real number 7 0 into the accumulator 7 decimal 4 0 E O 0 0 0 O Accumulator 1 5 4 17 0 0 0 0 0 ADDR 2 2 Acc 4 1 B o o jojojo ADDR R15 0 V1401 V1400 Add the real number 15 0 to 4 1 BJO O O O O0 Hex number the accumulator contents which is in real number format Real Value 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 18 4 21 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 OUTD Ace o 1lo olo o 011110111 0lo o ol o ololo ololo ololo ololo ojolo V1400 i Copy the result in the accumulator to V1400 and V1401 Sign Bit es m Mantissa 23 bits Ju aoc f A os 128 2 1 131 1 011 x 2 exp 4 10110 binary 22 decimal o S 131 127 4 Os Implies 2 exp 4 cw i 09 AAA NOTE The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the
344. ce the module is inserted into the base push in the retaining clips to firmly secure the module to the base N S DO gt O O LI Bo E E oo 3 E oo oo gt 2 2 oo a 0 N O qe eo z O Ss 2 os O i ae D gt N y CPU must be positioned in the first slot of the base Align module PC board to slots in base and slide in Push the retaining clips in to secure the module to the DL205 base WARNING Minimize the risk of electrical shock personal injury or equipment damage always disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component A am ZNN DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 12 Installation Wiring and Specifications Base Wiring Guidelines Base wiring The diagrams show the terminal connections located on the power supply of the DL205 bases The base terminals can accept up to 16 AWG You may be 110 220 VAC Base Terminal Strip able to use larger wiring depending on AMS the
345. ch Pad Memory 8 1 Diagnostic Status 8 1 DL305 Memory Bits per unit Bytes Data registers 8 1 T C accumulator 16 2 I O internal relays shift register 1 1 bits T C bits stage bits Scratch Pad Memory 8 Diagnostic Status 5 word R W 16 10 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 4 33 The third instruction in the RX or WX 4 0600 sequence is a Load Address LDA instruction lts purpose is to load the starting address of the memory area to be ia Starting address of transferred Entered as an octal number master transfer area the LDA instruction converts it to hex and places the result in the accumulator LDA 040600 V40600 Step 3 Specify Master Memory Area octal For a WX instruction the DL250 1 260 CPU sends the number of bytes previously specified from its memory area beginning at the LDA address specified For an RX instruction the DL250 1 260 CPU reads the number of bytes previously 15 0 specified from the slave placing the MSB V40601 LSB received data into its memory area beginning at the LDA address specified MSB LSB 15 0 NOTE Since V memory words are always 16 bits you may not always use the whole word For example if you only specify 3 bytes and you are reading Y outputs from the slave you will only get 24 bits of data In th
346. ciated with that instruction and consult the MODICON MODBUS manual for details 2 Cabling problem Consult wiring diagram in user manual and verify 3 Setting for communications are not matching For example Baud rates parities stop bits all must match 4 Polling a slave address number that doesnt exist Under good conditions SP116 will be counting up and SP117 will not You will get an occasional error in many field environments that introduce electrical RF noise into the application Each application will dictate what an allowable percentage of error is acceptable Anything below 10 typically does not affect the throughput very much CNT Number of times that the PLC has errored CT1 Se Ho os aD cT oO BO Oo Nc Port 2 error bit sP117 _FirstScan SPO K9999 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration This rung does a MODBUS write to the first holding register 40001 of slave address number one It will writes the values over that reside in 2000 This particular Function code only writes to 1 register Use Function code 16 to write to multiple registers Only one Network instructionYX RX MWX MRS can be enabled in one scan Thatis the reason for the interlock bits For using many network instructions on the same port look at using the Shift Register instruction Port2 busybit Instruction interlock bit MUY SP116 C100 Port Number Slave Address Function Code 06 P
347. ck using the Divide Binary Stack instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 Accumulator stack ololi a4 after 1st LDD X1 LD Load the value in V1400 into the accumulator The unused accumulator Levelt X X X XX X X X V1400 bits are set to zero m Level2 X X X X X X X X Acc 9 9 9 9 0 0 1 4 Level3 X X X X X X X X 4 X X X KX X X X X V1421 V1420 5 X X X X X X X X O O 0 0 C 3 5 0 6 X X X X X X X X Load the value in V1420 and cee V1421 into the accumulator 7 X X X X X X X X wee 8 X X X X X X X X Acc 9 919 9 C 3175 0 Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD Divide the binary value in Dba the accumulator by the Leveli jO 0 0 000 1 4 binary value in the first level Acc opojojojjoje C 4 Level2 X X X X X X X X of the accumulator stack Level3 X X X X X X X X Level4 X X X X X X X X Level5 X X X X X X X X Copy the value in the QUID accumulator to V1500 olololollololcla Level6 X X X X X X X X en and V150 Level 7 X X X XX XX X Y13501 oe Level8 X X X X X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes The remai
348. cond Timer TMRA two input timer that will time to a Enable TMRA Taad Accumulating Fast maximum of 9999999 9 The B bbb Timer TMRAF Accumulating Fast Timer is a 0 01 FTITITI second two input timer that will time to a Resol maximum of 999999 99 These timers Sen A ae have two inputs an enable and a reset Preset Timer The timer will start timing when the enable is on and stop timing when the enable is off without resetting the current value to 0 The reset will reset the timer when on and allow the timer to time when off Reset Instruction Specifications Timer Reference Taaa Specifies the timer number Preset Timer Preset Value Bbbb Constant value K or a V memory location Pointer P for Caution The TMRA uses two DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 consecutive timer locations since Current Value Timer current values are the preset can now be 8 digits which accessed by referencing the associated equires two V memory locations For V or T memory location See Note For example if TMRA TO is used in the example the timer current value for T3 Program the next available timer resides in V memory location V3 would be T2 Or if TO was a normal Discrete Status Bit The discrete status timer and T1 was an accumulating bit is accessed by referencing the timer the next available timer would associated T memory location It will be Pe TS Enable TMRAF T aaa B bbb
349. ct 9 The DL205 system is designed to be powered by 110 220 VAC 24 VDC or 125 VDC normally available throughout an industrial environment Electrical power in some areas where the PLCs are installed is not always stable and storms can cause power surges Due to this powerline filters are recommended for protecting the DL205 PLCs from power surges and EMI RFI noise The Automation Powerline Filter for use with 120 VAC and 240 VAC 1 5 Amps is an exellent choice 5A 2c 5 9 Z ood O 2 S8 O pes ake ve cw These units install easily between the power source and the PLC Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper operation of your DL205 system Applications of DL205 systems vary and may require additional features The minimum considerations for enclosures include e Conformance to electrical standards e Protection from the elements in an industrial environment e Common ground reference e Maintenance of specified ambient temperature e Access to equipment e Security or restricted access e Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance of equipment Enclosures DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 7 Installation Wiring and Specifications Environmental The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to the Specifications DL205 system CPU Bases I O Modules The ranges that vary for the Handheld Programmer are noted at the bottom of this
350. ct Connect the wires as shown Observe all the Power Wiring precautions stated earlier in this manual For details on wiring see Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Specifications Line When the wiring is complete replace the CPU and module covers Do not apply power at this time Ground a Neutral Q D E 5 a 09 dl D a D 2 ejeljelejele Step 6 Connect Connect the D2 HPP to the top port RJ the Handheld style phone jack of the CPU using the Programmer appropriate cable Step 7 Switch On Apply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the CPU is on If not the System Power remove power from the system and check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting section in Chapter 9 for assistance Step 8 Enter the Slide the switch on the CPU to the STOP position 250 1 260 only and then back to Program the TERM position This puts the CPU in the program mode and allows access to the CPU program The PGM indicator should be illuminated on the HPP Enter the following keystrokes on the HPP CPUs automatically examine any installed modules and establishes the correct 9098 NOTE It is not necessary for you to configure the I O for this system since the DL205 E configuration XO YO Handheld Programmer Keystrokes l D B STR gt 1 ENT GX Cc OUT gt 2 av END After entering the simple
351. cumulator This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Step 5 Insert the Find Block instruction This specifies the starting location of the block of data you are trying to locate Start Addr Table 1 kega of words Table 2 Start Addr Table 3 Pa bs E of bytes ae so Cm 2d Table n 2 DD End Addr n DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Swap SWAP X X 18 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The Swap instruction exchanges the data in two tables of equal length SWAP A aaa The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions Step 1 Load the length of the tables number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Remember that the tables must be of equal length Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the first table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Step 3 Insert the Swap instruction This specifies the starting addess of the second table This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Helpful hint The data swap occurs
352. cumulator wad bits are set to zero 6 X xX xX XX X X X en 7 1X X X XX X X X ojojo o jo 2 0 0 pee 8 X XxX XX XX X MULS Multiply the value in the accumulator with the value in the first level of the accumulator stack Acc 2 119 9 f9 7949 0 Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD OUTD Copy the value in the Level1 0 0 005 00 0 accumulator to V1500 V1500 and V1501 Level2 X X X X X X X X 910 9 1819 19 19 Level 3 X X X XX XX X V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level4 X X X X X X X X B Level5 X X X X X X X X _ str gt 1 mul Level6 X X X X X X X X ae e x2 suet L D gt e E A A ENT Level 7 X X X X X X X X ce ANDST 3 1 4 0 0 O Level8 X XX X X X X X o3 L D B E C A o SHFT anpst 3 gt 1 4 2 o ENT 50 o M U L s P SHFT orst isa lanosT rst ENT GX D B F A A our SHFT 3 gt 1 5 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Divide by Top Divide Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction of Stack that divides the 8 digit BCD value in the DIVS accumulator by a 4 digit BCD value in the xixi xis first level of the accumulator stack The result resides in the accumulator and the 230 240 250 1 260 remainder resides in th
353. d etc V7773 Contains the month 01 to 12 V7774 Contains the year 00 to 99 V7775 Scan stores the current scan time milliseconds V7776 Scan stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds V7777 Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds V36000 36027 Analog pointer method for expansion base 1 V36100 36127 Analog pointer method for expansion base 2 V36200 36227 Analog pointer method for expansion base 3 V36300 36327 Analog pointer method for expansion base 4 V37700 37737 Port 2 Setup register for Koyo Remote l O The following system control relays are used for Koyo Remote l O setup on Communications Port 2 System CRs Description of Contents C740 Completion of setups ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the Remote I O setup table C741 Erase received data turning on this flag will erase the received data during a communication error C743 Re start Turning on this relay will resume after a communications hang up on an error C750 to C757 Setup Error The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table contains an error C750 master C751 slave 1 C757 slave 7 C760 to C767 Communications Ready The corresponding relay will be O
354. d Troubleshooting Procedures 1 13 HON Table of Contents Chapter 2 Installation Wiring and Specifications Safety Guidelines is ii NS RI a 2 2 PINTO AIN e e a ida a ida 2 2 Daley TECONIQUES e pri in A IN o in in E 2 2 Class 1 Division 2ZApproval rss ces dues EA Bats eae eed es eae 2 2 Orderly System Shutdown a cad or ed cd el at he ee Wee dea kee ei de 2 3 System Power DISCONNGCL criada e dt E ARA awe 2 3 Mounting Guidelines 2002 dt de da 2 4 Base DIMeMSiONs E E coed tale tl Dn Bde Sia A A ae AS EE 2 4 Panel Mounting and Layouts c00i40d vette awed met aaa bed id eel ad ad demoed veka eee 2 5 ENCIOSUTES 00 ida dra entice tee A E be Naas baer eka alo sare ove ea ab 2 6 Environmental Specifications te oia oie tee aad nc Rides oR peda a Lee Nias Eke 2 7 POW ad tudes a a alanis a ds Se 2 7 Agency ApprovalS A A ee de eee eee eee a 2 7 Component DIMENSIONS pa fate teats Ae es cr Ree Meet ee a 2 8 Installing DL205 Bas s iii a ee ee A ee ee a 2 9 Choosing the Base Type 242 6 0 ce8 ne hea dace kw A we 2 9 MOURINO Me BaSe eros vs ie e spec A at Sets Brae ane dees 2 9 Using Mounting Rails 3 ct a a Seta 2 10 Installing Components in the Base ooocccoccccnn eee eee eee eens 2 11 Base Wiring Guidelines ma podia ei ee ee eS A Be ane eee ae 2 12 Base WINNT lit cet Ez te Set waste ee et ban EA see 2 12 VO Wiring Strategies jic5 c3s ese teenth e eit eid ja 2 13 PLC Isolation Boundaries 3 siauei hadi ia
355. d exceed the watch dog timer setting this instruction can be used to reset the timer A software timeout error E003 will occur and the CPU will enter the program mode if the scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting Placement of the RSTWT instruction in the program is very important The instruction has to be executed before the scan time exceeds the watch dog timer s setting If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timer s setting the timeout value may be permanently increased from the default value of 200ms by AUX 55 on the HPP or the appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package This eliminates the need for the RSTWT instruction In the following example the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT instruction is executed See the For Next instruction for a detailed example DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes R S T Ww T SHET ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR EN RSTWT l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Instruction Set 5 1 79 Program Control Instructions Program Control Instructions Goto Label The Goto Label skips all instructions GOTO between the Goto and the corresponding LBL LBL instruction The operand value for the K aaa Goto and the corresponding LBL GOTO AP YA instruction are the same The logic A ZAD 288 La 200 between Goto and LBL ins
356. ddress Number of Elernents Modbus Data type 584 984 Mode Exception Response Buffer 400 Instruction interlock bit 2100 RST 5 as so aa 26 O 5 0 mn e DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 208 Standard RLL Instructions MODBUS Instructions l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp MODBUS The MODBUS Write to Network MWX instruction is used to write a block of data from the Write to Network network masters s DL260 memory to MODBUS memory addresses within a slave device MWX on the network The instruction allows the user to specify the MODBUS Function Code slave station address starting master and slave memory addresses number of elements to X XIX Y transfer MODBUS data format and the Exception Response Buffer 230 240 250 1 260 MX Port Number K2 gt Slave Address K1 gt Domin jis Force Multiple Coils Start Slave Memory Address K1 Start Master Memory Address C10 d Number of Elements K16 Modbus Data Format C 484 mode l Exception Response Buffer 2500 Port Number must be DL260 Port 2 K2 e Slave Address specify a slave station address 0 247 e Function Code The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the MWX instruction 05 Force Single coil 06 Preset Single Register 15 Force Multiple Coils 16 Preset Multiple Registers Start Slave Memory Address specifies t
357. de the value in the 000 0 00 0 8 Accumulator c3 c2 c1 co DIVE CO accumulator with the value i lorrlorel on ofr K4 represented by discrete ao 2 C0 C3 ji cation G0 03 aco o o o o fo o o f o ofofoffofofofo Copy the lower 4 bits of the First stack location contains OUTF Y10 accumulator to discrete the remainder K4 locations Y10 Y13 re an am fo Handheld Programmer Keystrokes TS Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 G es an e ENT OFF ON OFF OFF po fut co L D F A E sc SHFT anpsT 3 5 gt 0 gt a ENT 09 D Vv F A E SHFT a 3 AND 7 NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT o gt ENT GX F B A E Our SHFT 5 gt 1 A gt a ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Add Top Add Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction that of Stack adds the BCD value in the accumulator ADDS with the BCD value in the first level of the ADDS xT xIx I7 accumulator stack The result resides in all the accumulator The value in the first level 230 240 250 1 260 Of the accumulator stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction re
358. dictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage The following chart shows the amount of current available for the two voltages supplied from the DL205 base Use these currents when calculating the power budget for you system The Auxiliary 24V Power Source mentioned in the table is a connection at the base terminal strip allowing you to connect to devices or DL205 modules that require 24VDC Current Supplied D2 03BDC1 1 2600 mA D2 06BDC2 1 2600 mA Use the power requirements shown on the next page to calculate the power budget for your system If an External 24VDC power supply is required the external 24VDC from the base power supply may be used as long as the power budget is not exceeded DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 dp lt 2 9 3 U 0 o e uone1nbiuoo pue gn e go os AD cT oO BO Oo Nc System Design and Configuration CPUs 5VDC Base Power External Power Combination 5VDC Base Power External Power Required Required Modules Required Required D2 230 120 0 D2 08CDR 200 0 D2 240 120 0 Specialty Modules etc D2 250 1 330 0 H2 PBC 530 0 D2 260 330 0 H2 ECOM 320 0 DC Input Modules H2 ECOM F 450 0 D2 08ND3 50 0 H2 ERM 320 0 D2 16ND3 2 100 0 H2 ERM F
359. e RUN ON CPU is in Run Mode OFF CPU is in Stop or program Mode CPU ON CPU self diagnostics error OFF CPU self diagnostics good BATT ON CPU battery voltage is low OFF CPU battery voltage is good or disabled DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation Adjusting the There are 4 analog potentiometers pots Analog on the face plate of the DL240 CPU ET e Potentiometers These pots can be used to change timer earr E El cru xlYIX Xx constants pis red of aa Aon DL2400 output etc Each analog channel has lie 230 240 250 1 260 corresponding V memory locations for Ll setting lower and upper limits for each Analog Pots O on analog channel The setup procedures O o are covered later in this chapter S To increase the value associated with the analog pot turn the pot clockwise To decrease the value turn the pot counter clockwise Turn clockwise to increase value O cut Communication The DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs have two ports while the DL230 has only Ports one 72 f 2 cpu L foja pwR EX E run a lt BATT C cpu OG Port 1 30 DL250 1 and DL260 DL260 B res 253 6P6C Phone Jack AAA Port 2 Port 2 No RS232C 9600 baud DL250 1 and DL260 Additional DL260 Features J5 Communication Port 15 pin SVGA Connector ASCII IN OUT Instructions A e ob RS232C RS422 up
360. e SWAPB instruction for details Termination Code Length consists of either 1 or 2 characters Refer to the ASCII table on the following page Busy Bit is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data Complete Bit is set once the ASCII data has been received up to the termination code characters lt will be reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled Inter character Timeout Error Bit is set when the Character Timeout is exceed See Character Timeout explanation above First Character Timeout Error Bit is set when the First Character Timeout is exceed See First Character Timeout explanation above Overflow Error Bit is set when the ASCII data received exceeds the Maximum Variable Length specified Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions Data Destination All V memory See page 3 53 Max Variable Length K1 128 Bits Busy Complete C0 3777 Timeout Error Overflow AIN Variable Length Example AIN Variable Length example used to read barcodes on boxes PE photoelectric sensor C6 Intercharacter timeout Firstcharacter timeout AIN overflow error Box present PE C5 Scan code AIN Complete C1 C2 C3 C4 AIN Complete C1 Scan code AIN Port Number Data Destination Maximum Yariable Length Interchar Timeout First Char Timeout Byte Swap Termination Code s Overflow Error Busy Complete
361. e if you enable bit override for X1 and X1 is off at the time then the CPU will not change the state of X1 This means that even if X1 comes on the CPU will not acknowledge the change So if you used X1 in the program it would always be evaluated as off in this case Of course if X1 was on when the bit override was enabled then X1 would always be evaluated as on There is an advantage available when you use the bit override feature The regular forcing is not disabled because the bit override is enabled For example if you enabled the Bit Override for YO and it was off at the time then the CPU would not change the state of YO However you can still use a programming device to change the status Now if you use the programming device to force YO on it will remain on and the CPU will not change the state of YO If you then force YO off the CPU will maintain YO as off The CPU will never update the point with the results from the application program or from the I O update until the bit override is removed The following diagram shows a brief overview of the bit override feature Notice the CPU does not update the Image Register when bit override is enabled Input Update no esate Pa x12 x2 x1 xo p OFF ON ON OFF l Force from vias va vi Yola Force from Bit Override ON Programmer OFF usd ON ON OFF Programmer c377 c2 ci co Solution Soluti
362. e value that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator The values in the stack are shifted up one position in the stack DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 as so Ey 26 e 5 0 a al ze ES 25 OS po fut oD Sc 0 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load POP POP the 1st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location OUT V1400 Copy data from the accumulator to V1400 POP POP the 1st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location OUT V1401 Copy data from the accumulator to V1401 POP POP the 1st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location OUT V1402 Copy data from the accumulator to V1402 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Previous Acc value Acc X x x X Current Acc value Acc 0 o o 0 V1400 Previous Acc value Acc 0 0 o 0 Current Acc value Acc 0 0 o 0 V1400 Previous Acc value Acc 0 0 o 0 Current Acc value Acc X x x X V1400 Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Le
363. e 3 to 9 ms ON to OFF response 3 to 9 ms Terminal type removeable 40 pin Connector or ZIPLink sold separately Status Indicator Module Activity LED Weight 2 1 oz 60 g Installation Wiring and Specifications Derating Chart Points 32 Hee 16 0 T T T T 0 10 20 40 50 55 C ef 24 D 322 50 68 104 122 131 F VDC Ambient Temperature C F ACT w O D2 32ND3 Current Flow Jato AO A4 oda 2avoc A1 AS Do A2 A6 oo aJa oo afer ffan Current Flow BO B4 oo aay B1 B5 n o 24voc B2 B6 oo a B3 B7 55 Aba o cufci ag JA co 04 Do Current Flow 00 C1 C5 oo gt Sto 0 C2 08 oo 24VDC y TIM o C3 C7 oo Do CI cr ae A Do D4 aa s 0 0 Di D5 A Current Fl se D2 D2 D6 urrent Flow a o0 D2 D6 270 5 D7 SL D3 D7 24VDC T CoM 5 avjav S a Internal module circuitry V 22 26VDC O 4 6mA INPUT aa CLASS2 I To Logic wa kbh COM o nu 24 VDC Optical Isolator Configuration shown is current sinking DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uoelelsuy yeoyinads pue ULNA suo 6 0 2c ZO Z ad z fav 2 N S8 O pes ke ve Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 32ND3 2 DC Input Inputs per module 32 sink source Commons per
364. e 4 C54 caia Add a as ir e A 4 28 If Your MODBUS Host Software Requires an Address ONLY 0 000 eee eee 4 29 Example 1 V2100 584 984 Mode xt di Is a AA A A 4 30 Example 2 Y20 584 984 Mode 0000000 ll Pe a a A 4 30 Example 3 T10 Current Value 484 Mode 0 cece eee 4 30 Example 4 C54 584 984 Mode 2 cece eect eee eens 4 30 Determining the DirectNET Address 00 cece eee eee eens 4 30 Network Master Operation 0 2 cece cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeee 4 31 Step 1 Identify Master Port and Slave 0 ccc cette eens 4 32 Step 2 Load Number of Bytes to Transfer 0 cece eee eens 4 32 Step 3 Specify Master Memory Area 00 0c cece eee 4 33 Step 4 Specify Slave Memory Area 2 0 0 c cee eee 4 33 Communications from a Ladder Program cece eee eet eee eens 4 34 Multiple Read and Write Interlocks 0 cece eee 4 34 Network MODBUS RTU Master Operation DL260 only 00e cece e eee eee eee 4 35 MODBUS Function Codes Supported 00 kisi neha a Kine eke aces eee wakes 4 35 MODBUS Port Configuration esha rara Aha Mie nies as 4 36 ASS si ay aid dA cathe ee Oe crete cree eth end Mune se be dhs cre ace 4 37 Newark ds a o eee Bera ade Aled 4 37 ASI y di EA A A e Sy ees eee hes 4 37 Network otto rd A A A AAA AAA AAA AAA 4 37 MODBUS Read from Network MRX o ooooococccccccoccccc eee 4 38 MRX Slave Memory Address
365. e 8 digit BCD value in the accumulator by the 8 digit BCD value in the two consecutive V memory locations specified in the instruction The lower 8 digits of the results reside in the accumulator Upper digits of the result reside in the accumulator stack Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions MULD A aaa Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Pointer P Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded into the accumulator When converted to BCD the number is 12345678 That numberis stored in V1400 and V1401 After loading the constant K2 into the accumulator we multiply it times 12345678 which is 24691356 DirectSOFT32 Display
366. e A o el a eos dee ee aie 5 5 Simple RUNOS ar in Dr bailas REE as tn Dd hes 5 5 Normally Closed Contact session a rias 5 5 Gontacts ll Ses uta dE tE AE A A ede re 5 6 MidlIN6 QU PUES sei c aes ened Heals a Ved A a deidad 5 6 Parallel Element S scsi e UA sted NAS y eee 5 6 Joining Series Branches in Parallel 0 0 cece eee eee eae 5 7 Joining Parallel Branches in Series xxi aan a era vada babe eed eee 5 7 Combination Networks semanas droit ha Me Uca ir 5 7 BOSA AE E A A ESA A ee 5 7 Comparative Boolean cio a e 5 8 immediate Boolean a E AN saya ewe ewes 5 9 Boolean Instructions siii ii did eee da ij IA 5 10 Store SM A A A A ta 5 10 Store Not STRN oi a A A eo a A ENE tA E 5 10 SIOrS BIO Word STAB prada A ad ei 5 11 Store Not Bit of Word STRNB 3000440 a aie 5 11 A teeraa A a eee eee a a a a i 5 12 OFNO ORIN ta Docta A Pte 5 12 Or Bitof Wordi ORB Lct ca ans Ear 5 13 Or Not Bit of Word ORNB Dope ae 5 13 ANAND ae pets a PONE tee tae ts ad oi tato iia 5 14 And NO AND eee a a el e AA rd e NO ete 5 14 And Bit ol Word ANDB 2uriapori rita A A A e ie a 5 15 And Not Bit of Word ANDNBI cosas tra A A 28 58 5 15 And Store ANDS DE A A ES AA A ak a 5 16 OrStore OR Bese ce A a o o e E 5 16 OUT a os a Met dad anes NO bee mares Bris 5 17 Out Bit of Word QUID xe Aice soc toh et oe od da e tale a ta tet Ae 5 18 Or QUT OR QUT resi et dl pi idad di 5 19 A A Daten te miei aaa wien asst wi a island shane ble d
367. e ASCII Extract instruction extracts a specified number of bytes of ASCII data from one series of V memory registers and places it into another series of V memory registers Other features include Extract at Index for skipping over unnecessary bytes before begining the Extract operation Shift ASCII Option for One Byte Left or One Byte Right Byte Swap and Convert data to a BCD format 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions ASCII Compare The ASCII Compare instruction compares two groups of V memory registers The CMPV CMPV will compare any data type ASCII to ASCII BCD to BCD etc of one series ra ac as group of V memory registers to another series of V memory registers for a S50 aap cepa coy Paced byte length Compare from Starting Address specifies the begining V memory register of the first group of V memory CMPY registers to be eompalee from Compare from Starting Address 3400 E Compare to Starting Address specifies the Compare to Starting Address V3500 begining V memory register of Number of Bytes K12 the second group of a V memory registers to be compared to Number of Bytes specifies the length of each V memory group to be compared SP61 1 ON the result is equal SP61 0 OFF the result is not equal Compare from Starting Address All V memory See page 3 53 Compar
368. e Bit of Word 5 11 TTD Table to Destination 5 154 STRE Store if Equal 5 27 UDC Up Down Counter 5 50 STRI Store Immediate 5 33 VPRINT ASCII Print to V Memory 5 221 STRN Store Not 5 10 5 30 WT Write to Intelligent Module 5 192 STRNB Store Not Bit of Word 5 11 WX Write to Network 5 195 STRND Store Negative Differential 5 21 XOR Exclusive Or 5 79 STRNE Store if Not Equal 5 27 XORD Exclusive Or Double 5 80 STRNI Store Not Immediate 5 33 XORF Exclusive Or Formatted 5 81 STRND Store Negative Differential 5 21 XORMOV Exclusive Or Move 5 171 STRPD Store Positive Differential 5 21 XORS Exclusive Or Stack 5 82 ae ES 25 G5 TH SD SE 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions NS Boolean Instructions Using Boolean Instructions Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time for a 1K boolean program It is because most all programs utilize many boolean instructions These are typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output contacts in various series and parallel combinations Since the DirectSOFT32 package allows the use of graphic symbols to build the program you don t absolutely have to know the mnemonics of the instructions However it may helpful at some point especially if you ever have to troubleshoot the program with a Handheld Programmer The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder programs END Statement A
369. e DL205 DC output modules are the sinking type This means that each DC output provides a path to ground when it is energized In the following circuit the PLC output point sinks current to the output common when energized It is connected to a sourcing input of a field device input PLC DC Sinking Output Field Device DC pwr O Power V d Output Input MA re sinking F sourcing Y NS He 10 30 VDC o Common P Ground 0 C DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications ES In the next example a PLC sinking DC output point is connected to the sinking input of a field device This is a little tricky because both the PLC output and field device input are sinking type Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device a sourcing capability needs to be added to the PLC output by using a pull up resistor In the circuit below a Rout up is connected from the output to the DC output circuit power input PLC DC Output NOTE 1 DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load gt 25 mA with this pull up method NOTE 2 Using the pull up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output point logic In other words the field device input is energized when the PLC output is OFF from a ladder logic point of view Your ladder program must comprehend
370. e counter to any Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions value that is within the range of the table The table counter automatically decrements from 4 0 as the instruction is executed Notice how the last two table positions 5 and 6 are not moved up through the table Also notice how SP56 which comes on when the table counter is zero is only on until the end of the scan Example of Execution Scan N Bel ore RFT Execution er RFT Execution Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Automatically Decremented 0 0 0 4 V1400 9 9 1 0 0 0 3 v14 Table Counter V1401 OS 01013 v1401 Salas 1 00 indicates that vi402 9 9 f9 9 2 vi402 4 0 7 9 2 5 boe these 4 inati Pere colors wii visos 3 lol7la l 3 Destination visos 8 los l9 3 Destination be used L visos e oJsjol a EF El Start here v1404 8 o 8 J9 4 gt 9 8 19 0 V4590 vi405 1 0 1 0 5 v1i405 1 0 1 f0 5 SP56 SP56 V14 2 0 4 6 6 V14 2 0 4 6 6 e SP56 OFF a SP56 OFF V1407
371. e default settings are e Station Address 1 e Hex Mode e Odd Parity e 9600 Baud The DirectNet Manual provides additional information about choosing the communication settings for network operation The DL205 CPUs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default The default ranges are suitable for many applications but you can change them if your application requires additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all The default settings are Memory Area DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Default Range Avail Range Default Range Avail Range Default Range Avail Range Default Range Avail Range Control Relays C300 C377 CO C377 C300 C377 CO C377 C1000 C1777 C0 C1777 C1000 C1777 CO C3777 V Memory V2000 V7777 VO V7777 V2000 V7777 VO V7777 V1400 V3777 VO V17777 V1400 V3777 VO V37777 Timers None by default TO T77 None by default TO T177 None by default TO 1377 None by default TO 1377 Counters CTO CT77 CTO CT77 CTO CT177 CTO CT177 CTO CT177 CTO CT177 CTO CT377 CTO CT377 Stages None by default S0 S377 None by default S0 S777 None by default S0 S1777 None by default S0 S1777 Password Protection A mD ZN
372. e first level of the accumulator stack DIVS Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the Load instruction loads the value in V1400 into the accumulator The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The BCD value in the accumulator is divided by the BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack using the Divide Stack instruction The Out Double instruction copies the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 Accumulator stack ololel
373. e following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The binary value in V1420 and V1421 is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary Double instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 o lololello ofF F x LDD I V1400 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator 0 0 0 6 0 0 F F Accumulator 0 000 1 A 0 1 V1421 and V1420 SUBBD V1420 Acc OJOJOJS5 EJ6 F E The binary value in V1420 and V1421 is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator oy V1501 V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 we and V1501 Cc oc fo Handheld Programmer Keystrokes poi B 3 S STR 1 ENT _ Cm L D D B E A A S 2 SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 1 4 0 o ENT nN s U B B D B E c A SHEL ast SHFT ISG 1 1 3 gt 1 4 2 0 END GX D B F A A our SeT 3 gt 1 5 0 o ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Multiply Binary MULB xX x Y 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions
374. e in V2010 and V2011 as a HEX value DirectSOFT32 v2001 V2000 LDD L V2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 8421 8 4 2 14 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Acc opopojojojojojojofojojojojo 1 ojp1 ojojojof1fo 1pojo 1 o 1jo oJt BCD Value 28529 16384 8192 2048 1024 512 256 64 32 16 1 BIN Binary Equivalent Value 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Convert the BCD value in Ace 0 0 0 0 of of OJ Of of Of Of Of Of Of Of Off of 1 1f Of 1 1 1 4 of 1 4 1 of of of 4 the accumulator to the binary equivalent value 2 15 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 4 2 6 4 7 6 8g8 4 1 5 7 8g8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 3 9 9 42 216 8 71318 4 2 0 5 718 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4 4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4 4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2 8e 1 9 4 76 3 1 8 4 2 6 3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6 6 2 2 6 8 414 8 OUTD V2010 ololololls6 FI71 1 The binary HEX value Copy the binary value in
375. e in a slot that previously held an input module the CPU will not go into RUN mode and the configuration check will detect the change and print a message on the Handheld Programmer or DirectSOFT32 screen use AUX 44 on the HPP to enable the configuration check If the system detects a change in the PLC Setup l O configuration check at power up error code E252 will be generated You can use AUX 42 to determine the exact base and slot location where the change occurred When a configuration error is generated you may actually want to use the new I O configuration For example you may have intentionally changed an I O module to use with a program change You can use PLC Diagnostics l O Diagnostics in DirectSoft32 or AUX 45 to select the new configuration or keep the existing configuration stored in memory WARNING You should always correct any l O configuration errors before you place the CPU into RUN mode Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment wrt Ce a WARNING Verify the I O configuration being selected will work properly with the CPU program Always correct any I O configuration errors before placing the CPU in RUN mode Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment o 5 Os 0 O Co ome j o e 5 uBIseq TES DL205 User Ma
376. e instruction The Date instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the date in the CPU DirectSOFT32 Display Constant K co 9 4 0 0 3 o 1 ro LDD In this example the Date I K94010301 instruction uses the value set in Load the constant Acc 9 4 0 3 0 1 V2000 and V2001 to set the date value K94010301 in the appropriate V memory into the accumulator locations V7771 V7774 9 4 0 0 3 o 1 OUTD AGG v2000 Copy the value in 9 4 o0 o 3jo 1 the accumulator to V2000 and V2001 v2001 2000 Format DATE V2001 V2000 v2000 9 4 JO J1 0 3 10 1 Set the date in the CPU using the value in V2000 and V2001 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 2 A Year Month Day Day of Week m gt gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ENT U STR 0 PESI 77 L D D J E A B SHFT llanpstTi 3 3 gt PREV 6 4 1 ENT 22 Ox A D A B 0 3 0 1 ENT ad 5 GX D C A A A our SHFT 3 gt 2 0 0 0 ENT o D A T E C A A A SHFT 3 o mala 2 2 0 0 ov ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Clock Calendar Instructions 9 176 Time The Time instruction can be used to set the TIME time 24 hour clock in the CPU The AEI aF in
377. e into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Step 3 Insert the Set Bit or Reset Bit instruction This specifies the reference for the bit number of the bit you want to set or reset The bit number is in octal and the first bit in the table is number 0 Helpful hint Remember that each V memory location contains 16 bits So the bits of the first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal For example if the table length is six words then 6 words 6 x 16 bits 96 bits decimal or 140 octal The permissible range of bit reference numbers would be 0 to 137 octal Flag 53 will be set if the bit specified is outside the range of the table Operand Data Type DL450 Range aaa Vmemory Vv All See page 3 51 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 on when the bit number which is referenced in the Set Bit or Reset Bit exceeds the range of the table NOTE Status flags are only valid until the end of the scan or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed For example supppose we have a table V3000 starting at V3000 that is two words long as MSB LSB shown to the right Each word in the table contains 16 bits or 0 to 17 in octal To set bit 12 in the second word we use its octal reference bit 14 Then we compute the 16 bits
378. e the digits in the first level of the accumulator stack based on the pattern in the accumulator The result is in the accumulator QUID elole r lofoJalo ololoJol elofa a oloJo o laa c V2010 v2011 v2010 v2011 v2010 v2011 v2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and v2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D Cc A A A SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 0 0 ae eae o cr L D D 6 A A G 50 SHFT lANDST 3 a gt 2 0 0 e 5T as Q S F L D G T co SHET RST SHET 5 ANDST 3 6 MLR ENT a a GX D C A B A O SHFT gt ENT 5J OUT 3 2 0 1 0 ar m DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Table Instructions Move The Move instruction moves the values MOV from a V memory table to another IVITITY V memory table the same length The function parameters are loaded into the MOV 230 240 250 1 260 first level of the accumulator stack and the V aaa accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Move function Step 1 Load the number of V memory locations to be moved into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the locations to be moved into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the MOVE instruction which specifies starting V memory location Vaaa
379. e to Starting Address All V memory See page 3 53 Number of Bytes All V memory See page 3 53 or K0 127 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction SP61 On when result is equal SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid CMPV Example The CMPV instruction executes when the AIN instruction is complete If the compared V memory tables are equal SP61 will turn ON AIN Complete 01 CMPY 24 Compare from Starting Address 2001 Compare to Starting Address 110001 Number of Bytes K32 n Cc Oo S wn Strings are equal SP61 C11 25 HNN L JJ am O w O Z oO y dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ASCII Print to V memory VPRINT X X x Y 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions ESA ASCII Instructions The ASCII Print to V memory instruction will write a specified ASCII string into a series of V memory registers Other features include Byte Swap options to suppress or convert leading zeros or spaces and _Date and _Time options for U S European and Asian date formats and 12 or 24 hour time formats Byte Swap swaps the high byte and low byte within each V memory register the ASCII string is printed to See the SWAPB instruction for details Print to Starting V memory Address specifies the begining of a series of V memory addresses where the ASCII string will be
380. ed If the load supply is AC then convert the current and voltage values to peak values Now you are ready to calculate values for R and C according to the formulas 1 V 50 R QQ _ where x 1 10 10x1 V C uF C minimum 0 001 uF the voltage rating of C must be V non polarized R minimum 0 5 Q 1 2 W tolerance is 5 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications 2 23 For example suppose a relay contact drives a load at 120VAC 1 2 A Since this example has an AC power source first calculate the peak values loeak Itms X 1 414 0 5 x 1 414 0 707 Amperes Vpeak Vrms X 1 414 120 x 1 414 169 7 Volts Now finding the values of R and C i 0 707 C uF 0 05 uF voltage rating 170 Volts 10 10 V 50 25s R Q _ where x 1 aL 163K V na 22 85 50 169 7 X 1 1 29 R Q zz 26 2 1 2 W 5 Ss 169 7 10 x 0 707 Os a Q If the contact is switching a DC inductive load add a diode across the load as near to load coil as possible When the load is energized the diode is reverse biased high impedance When the load is turned off energy stored in its coil is released in the form of a negative going voltage spike At this moment the diode is forward biased low impedance and shunts the energy to ground This protects the relay contacts from the high voltage arc that would occur as the contacts
381. ee value stored in the RADR accumulator to the equivalent real number I in radians The result resides in the accumulator The Degree Real instruction converts the degree real radian value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real number in degrees The result resides in the accumulator DEGR The two instructions described above convert real numbers into the accumulator from degree format to radian format and visa versa In degree format a circle contains 360 degrees In radian format a circle contains 2 II radians These convert between both positive and negative real numbers and for angles greater than a full circle These functions are very useful when combined with the transcendantal trigonometric functions see the section on math instructions Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP71 On anytime the V memory specified by a pointer P is not valid SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number SP74 On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32 bit IEEE format You must
382. en Data Label Area to X1 is on the constant value K4 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load V Memory X Viv Y 230 240 250 1 260 l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next Load and Load Label LDLBL instructions are executed The constant value KO is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the offset for the source and destination data and is placed in the first stack location after the LDLBL instruction is executed The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the LDLBL instruction The MOVMC instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the copying of data from the Data Label Area to V memory DirectSOFT32 Data Label Area 5 Xi Programmed i LD After the END 1 K4 Instruction X X X X 1v1777 Load the value 4 into the DLBL K1 accumulator specifying the N CON gt 1 2 3 4 v2000 number of locations to be copied K 123 4 D N CON 4 5 3 2 v2001 KO K 4 5 3 2 6 1 5 1 v2002 Load the value 0 into the NG ON accumulator specifying the K 61 5 1 offset for source and destination locations N CON gt 8 8 4 5 v2003 DLBL K 8 8 4 5 K1 X
383. ength of the table up to 255 locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the FDGT instructions which specifies the greater than search value Results The offset from the starting address to the first Vmemory location which contains the greater than search value is returned to the accumulator SP53 will be set on if the value is not found and 0 will be returned in the accumulator Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa Vmemory All See p 3 53 Constant K O FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 on if there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value NOTE Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instructio
384. ens 3 25 Normal Maximum WO Response ainia eeann nanne 3 25 Improving Response TIM o tater ohare eit US A at 3 26 CPU Scan Time Considerations ooooccccncccnnn eee eee eee eens 3 27 Initialization Process ccoo ds ala Seana vaes 3 28 Reading INPUTS sui A A A A eee est ete 3 28 Reading Inputs from Specialty I O tato E AAA VIA At sas e 3 29 SeMice PeripneralS aburra eee tae a les Ra ke ee ee la 3 29 CPU Bus Communication se seiersen ersaat Ra e A A a id da 3 30 Update Clock Calendar Special Relays Special Registers ooocoooccocooccocoo 3 30 Writing Qutputs esos a ias Skat eo Add a aed Weed Ae thes ieee 3 30 Writing Outputs to Specialty I O acy a Pa ee a ences Bee att ee oa By E 3 31 DAQMOSUCS iors cache al A sata eee ease IAN ee eat eG Es anes 3 31 Application Program Execution 2 40 seeebsed ace a A ee in eed eee a e da 3 32 PLC Numbering SystemS ai A A ta Sh Fe hectares 3 33 PRECIOSOS o A cd y 3 33 MEM e RO NN RN eee ee eee Lee 3 34 Binary Coded Decimal Numbers io coccion ac wanes Cee e ac Aa a dd 3 34 Hexadecimal Numbers 20 20 48 di e E e ed bd Bia AA E a da SA s 3 34 Memory Map eta oe 3 35 Octal Numbering Sy e A Mt o Md e o lls Mg 3 35 Discrete and Word Locations iia ss cadens cd owed ee eek eee ee EE 3 35 V Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas ooococcocccccocccc 3 35 Input Points X Data Type ai cake tala okt is A 3 36 Output Points Y Data Type snc 500 ncbcate rata ids avboatads 3 36 Control Relays
385. er Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 08TD1 DC Output D2 08TD2 DC Output Outputs per module 8 current sinking Outputs per module 8 current sourcing Commons per module 1 2 I O terminal points Commons per module 1 Operating voltage 10 2 26 4 VDC Output voltage 10 8 26 4VDC Output type NPN open collector Operating voltage range 12 24VDC Peak voltage 40 VDC Peak voltage 40VDC AC frequency n a AC frequency n a ON voltage drop 1 5 VDC maximum ON voltage drop 1 5 VDC Max load current 0 3A point 2 4A common Max output current 0 3A point 2 4A common Max leakage current 0 1mA 40 VDC Max leakage current 0 1mA 40VDC Max inrush current 1mA for 10ms Installation Wiring and Specifications OFF to ON response 1ms ON to OFF response 1ms Terminal type Removable Status indicators Logic Side Weight 2 3 oz 65 g Fuse 5A 250V fast blow non replaceable Max inrush current 1A for 10 ms Minimum load 0 5mA Base power required 5v 100mA Max OFF to ON response 1 ms ON to OFF response 1 ms Terminal type Removable Status indicators Logic Side Weight 2 3 oz 65 g Fuses 1 per common 5A fast blow non replaceable Base power required 5V 100mA max Derating Chart Derating Chart
386. eren Hes 5 185 Understanding Master Control Relays o ooooocccocccconrac ees 5 185 MES MUER Example se a Sad sind E eet aes e ates is aa 5 186 InterruptinsirUCIONS Lair sia iia sti a A add ia 5 187 Interrupt INT spas ianiai is Readies ade AA Mea A Meat aS 5 187 Interrupt Return IRT 9425 cia A A A Be owe ees Gees Sa ee ee ee a 5 188 Interrupt Return Conditional IRTO decia came oe sent Ca eae hs En eae vars antl ai 5 188 Enable Interrupts ENI cacti at eed rra ek ae ae eee velba bab aa va atone 5 188 Disable inierruptS DISI srne BS Rawle te Paki Pet bate on A ahah De bya 5 188 Interrupt Example for Interrupt Module 0ooooccccoccccnncc 5 189 Interrupt Example for Software Interrupt oococooccccoocccnncc 5 190 Intelligent I O Instructions oi sn ii De ee cal eevee ees see 5 191 Read trom Intelligent Module RD 02422 0 news eee a a data a 5 191 Write to Intelligent Module WT 00 need ey Ree ely ee Des WBE i Ree ORS 5 192 Network INStructiONnS 5 03 sis cia or A eee eee ee eee Ree es 5 193 Read from Network RX 2a cuts tauro tou ee ad Ochs Rebs ee ee ee eee ee 5 193 Write to Network WX us o cg duels pan ie AA POP 5 195 Message Instructions 0ooooooccccc eee eee 5 197 PUI O a e O cee ds NED Rs Sete CI 5 197 Fault Example orita dar ia id 5 198 Data Label DUBE ssprsserprr pavo De E e a a 5 199 ASGIIGConstant ACON Ss AA a a 5 199 Numerical Constant NCON 00 ba a e AN da al ai 5 199 Data La
387. erence a V memory location is viewed as HEX Use the Load Address instruction to move a address into the pointer location This instruction performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion for you The following example uses a pointer operand in a Load instruction V memory location 3000 is the pointer location V3000 contains the value 400 which is the HEX equivalent of the Octal address V memory location V2000 The CPU copies the data from V2000 into the lower word of the accumulator i LD I P3000 v2000 2 6 3 5 V3000 P3000 contains the value 400 Hex 400 Hex 2000 Octal which v2001 X X X X contains the value 2635 v2002 x x x x V3000 v2003 X X X X oj jojo v2004 X x x x Accumulator V2005 X X X X 3 5 OUT 2 6 V3100 e Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of v3100 2 6 3 5 the accumulator to V3100 V3101 X X X X The following example is similar to the one above except for the LDA load address instruction which automatically converts the Octal address to the Hex equivalent X1 LDA Load the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with Hexadecimal 2 lololo O 2000 equivalent to Octal 2000 400 U d tor bit 2000 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal ata set ear atone 400 and loaded into the accumulator OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of V 3000 the accumu
388. ergize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E c A A A v2000 K1000 Y3 str SHFT 4 A 2 0 0 0 om OUT B A A A 1 0 0 0 ENT v2002 K2500 FOAN gt SHFT ee e 2 A 0 A 0 e 2 gt lt C F A A 2 5 0 0 ENT ur gt P 3 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Comparative Boolean And The Comparative And instruction AND connects a normally open comparative Jiviv liv contact in series with another contact ji da j gt See Sc The contact will be on when Aaaa gt Bbbb And Not The Comparative And Not instruction ANDN connects a normally open comparative Ya 20 ae 4 contact in series with another contact Y Aaaa j bbb 230 240 250 1 260 The contact will be on when Aaaa lt lt Bbbb ana Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range ype B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb V memory V All All All All All All All All See page 3 50 See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See pa
389. erline filter will provide isolation between the power source and the power supply A transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the primary and secondary sides Opto couplers provide optical isolation in Input and Output circuits This isolates logic circuitry from the field side where factory machinery connects Note the discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs because each is isolated from the logic side Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface and the operator from power input faults or field wiring faults When wiring a PLC it is extremely important to avoid making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other uo e e1su 13 o jun ox 09 jo 0 e ah O fad e ULM suo 6 Primary Side Secondary or Field Side Logic side Power PLC backplane Input Input Main Module Filter gt Power m CPU p Supply backplane Output Module Inputs gt Outputs Isolation Programming Device Isolation Boundary Operator Interface or Network Boundary The next figure shows the physical layout of a DL205 PLC system as viewed from the front In addition to the basic circuits covered above AC powered and 125VDC bases include an auxiliary 24VDC power supply with its own isolation boundary Since the supply output is isolated from the ot
390. es none External DC required 24VDC 4V 80mA max Points f Points 16 Derating Chart 16 Derating Chart 124 124 a a m eN 44 i OUT 12 24 4 o voe 0 T T T T T VDC 0 A 0 10 30 0 HC A 05174 0 ret nT sana e oL Ll 4 32 50 68 86 104 122131 o 1000 LU 5 Ambient Temperature C F 1 C0 fs 32 50 e 36 108 ROLE p 2 El ls Ambient Temperature C F 21 UU 6 ce B30 E07 pee B 3 0 3 E tf ay ee A D2 16TD1 2 E D2 16TD2 2 T 5 1 T L 2 amp 10 2 264 i 5 eoi r Oe eeu 3 E z ae ifi gt 78 LATS as e EEA O g oF LO 7 T Sy a 4 Pa O a 24VDC 1 T 12 pun AO S 3 5 ip D D eerie a CB 2 sp 0 D H 7 o gt _ Bee mo S connect Cy E po D d 7 3 HEO 7 T 4 mor el IO 1 7 o D T D NC 7 NM OS i sS o es LSO e LS o S 1H Fola E e A 5 O T 2 5 fo O E g 2 o P O S T E 7 3 6 re S p E A rar ae 3 Pp V Internal module circuitry 7 S O A S L7 B Internal module circuitry Optical D2 16TD2 2 gt 24VDC D2 16TD1 2 Isolator Y COM Y No J Ne J When the AB switch is in the A position ten T When the AB switch is in the A position the LEDs display the output status of the the LEDs display the output status of the m module s first 8 output points Positon B OUTPUT module s first 8 output points Positon B displays the output status of the mod e displays the output status of the mod ule s second group of 8 output points ule s second group o
391. es the 2d ASINR inverse sine of the real number stored in the ASINA 72 xix zig accumulator The result resides in the ha 6 ie Set See accumulator Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32 bit format DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Arc Cosine Real ACOSR XI XIXI 230 240 250 1 260 Arc Tangent Real ATANR XIX el 230 240 250 1 260 Square Root Real SQRTR XIXIX 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions The Arc Cosine Real instruction takes the inverse cosine of the real number stored in the accumulator The result resides in the accumulator Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32 bit format ACOSR The Arc Tangent Real instruction takes the inverse tangent of the real number stored in the accumulator The result resides in the accumulator Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32 bit format ATANR The Square Root Real instruction takes the square root of the real number stored in the accumulator The result resides in the accumulator Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32 bit format SQRTR NOTE The square root function can be useful in several situations However if you are trying to do the square root extract function for
392. es the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads C10 C13 4 binary bits into the accumulator The Or Formatted instruction logically ORs the accumulator contents with Y20 Y23 bit pattern The Out Formatted instruction outputs the accumulator s lower four bits to C20 C23 DirectSOFT32 at LDF C10 Eogation Constant 13 612 C11 C10 el K4 C10 K4 OFF ON ON OFF Load the status of 4 consecutive bits C10 C13 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Sy into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 876543210 ORF Y20 K4 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j 0jo0jo o ojojojo oj o0 o0o ojo ojojojojojojojo oj1j1 o Or the binary bit pattern Y20 Y23 with the value in the accumulator Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 OR Y20 Y23 ON OFF OFF OFF 1000 OUTF C20 K4 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O OJ OJ OF OF O O OF OF OF Of OF O OF O OF OF OF OF OF 1 1 1 0 A a Copy the specified number of bits from the accumulator E Mm to C20 C23 9 o Handheld Programmer Keystroke
393. escription SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero NOTE Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator and output to V2010 DirectSOFT32 a LD V2000 1 v2000 B oll sl Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the Pepe eel accumulator Ace 0 oJofo s a 3 5 OUT V2010 v2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to v2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E gt gt 1 ENT SHET ANDST 3 gt Cc A A a A a A ENT ur gt olg ano 2 i 0 i 1 0 ENE l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Load Double The Load Double instruction is a 32 bit LDD instruction that loads the value Aaaa FTITILY which is either two consecutive V memory locations or an 8 digit constant value into _ LDD 230 240 250 1 260 the accumulator Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page
394. est you read this manual completely to understand the wide variety of features in the DL205 family of products We believe you will be pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with our products If you have purchased operator interfaces or DirectSOFT32 you will need to supplement this manual with the manuals that are written for these products We realize that even though we strive to be the best the information may be arranged in such a way you cannot find what you are looking for First check these resources for help in locating the information e Table of Contents chapter and section listing of contents in the front of this manual e Quick Guide to Contents chapter summary listing on the next page e Appendices reference material for key topics near the end of this manual e Index alphabetical listing of key words at the end of this manual You can also check our online resources for the latest product support information e Internet Our address in Brazil is http www soliton com br If you still need assistance please call us at 770 844 4200 Our technical support group is glad to work with you in answering your questions They are available Monday through Friday from 9 00 A M to 6 00 P M Eastern Standard Time If you have a comment or question about any of our products services or manuals please fill out and return the Suggestions card that was shipped with this manual DL205 User Manu
395. etup Communication Ports Pott Port 2 z Protocol K Sequence I DirectNET M MODBUS IV Non Sequence I Remote 140 Time out eno ms y RTS on delay time Oms RTS off delay time Oms l Data bits fe 4 Close Help Echo Suppression AS 422 485 4 wire RS 232C 2 wire C RS 485 2 wire M X0NZXOFF flow control T RTS flow control Baud rate 19200 ha Stop bits h Parity oa y Memory Address fvioooq gt Port 2 15 Pin e Timeout amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging an error RTS On Delay Time The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data e RTS Off Delay Time The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data e Data Bits Select either 7 bits or 8 bits to match the number of data bits specified for the connected devices Baud Rate The available baud rates include 300 600 900 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 baud Choose a higher baud rate initially reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network Important You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value Refer to the appropriate product manual for details e Stop Bits Choose 1 or 2 stop bits to match the number of stop bits specified for the connected devices e Parity Choose none even or odd parity for error checking Be
396. evices co 6 Port 2 Pin Descriptions DL260 only Kol e SS 1 5V 5VDC S7 i 1 11 2 TXD2 _ Transmit Data RS232C GND Signal GND O O 3 RXD2 Receive Data RS232C RXD e gt 4 RTS2 Ready to Send RS 232C TXD o 5 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 232C i 6 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS485 TXD RXD hg A O T oV Logic Ground CTS e o ES RTS O 9 TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 RS 485 RTS e O _ 10 TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 RS 485 OR CTS MA 15 11 RTS2 Request to Send RS 422 RS 485 i Loop RTS est to Send RS 422 RS 485 ASCII Back m 4 CPU Port 2 13 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS 485 Device on each 14 CTS2 Clear to Send RS422 L RS 485 device CTS 15 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 422 RS 485 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 446 System Design and Configuration DL250 1 Non Sequence Protocol PRINT MODBUS Port Configuring port 2 on the DL250 1 for Non Sequence enables the CPU to use the Configuration PRINT instruction to print the embedded text or text data variable message to port 2 on the elwl sl ZX DL250 1 See the PRINT instruction in chapter 5 eee ee ih DirectSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Secondary Comm Port Port From the port number list box at the top choose Port 2 e Protocol Click the check box to the left of Non Sequence Setup Communication Ports Ed Port Port 2 y Close Protocol K Sequence T
397. example program slide the switch from the TERM position to the RUN position and back to TERM The RUN indicator on the CPU will come on indicating the CPU has entered the run mode If not repeat Step 8 insuring the program is entered properly or refer to the troubleshooting guide in chapter 9 During Run mode operation the output status indicator O on the output module should reflect the switch status When the switch is on the output should be on DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Lo D pa S a 09 D E Step 1 Review the Installation Guidelines Step 2 Understand the CPU Setup Procedures Step 3 Understand the O System Configurations Step 4 Determine the I O Module Specifications and Wiring Characteristics Step 5 Understand the System Operation 1 12 Getting Started Steps to Designing a Successful System Always make safety your first priority in any system application Chapter 2 provides several guidelines that will help provide a safer more reliable system This chapter also includes wiring guidelines for the various system components The CPU is the heart of your automation system Make sure you take time to understand the various features and setup requirements It is important to understand how your local I O system can be configured It is also important to understand how the system Power Budget is calculated This can affect your I O placement and or c
398. f 8 output points DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uo e e1su 13 o jun ox 09 jo 09 e Sh O o e ULIM suo 6 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 32TD1 DC Output D2 32TD2 DC Output Outputs per module 32 current sourcin Outputs per module 32 current sinking sad 9 Commons per module 4 8 points common isolated Commons per module 4 8 I O terminal points P P Operating voltage 12 to 24VDC Operating voltage 12 24 VDC p g q Peak voltage 30VDC Output type NPN open collector 9 Max load current 0 1A point 0 8A common Peak voltage 30 VDC p Min load 0 2mA AC frequency N A Max leakage current 0 1mA 30VDC ON voltage drop 0 5 VDC maximum 9 a ON voltage drop 0 5 VDC 0 1A Max load current 0 1A point Max inrush current 150mA 10ms DN Max leakage current 0 1mA 30 VDC ec OFF to ON response 0 5ms O Max inrush current 150 mA for 10 ms o ON to OFF response 0 5ms O Minimum load 0 2mA cH Status indicators Module activity green LED O 3 Base power requ
399. f the major DL205 system components There are four feature enhanced CPUs in this product line the DL230 DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 All CPUs include built in communication ports Each CPU offers a large amount of program memory a substantial instruction set and advanced diagnostics The DL250 1 features drum timers floating point math 4 built in PID loops with automatic tuning and 2 bases of local expansion capability The DL260 features ASCII IN OUT and extended MODBUS communications table and trigonometric instructions 16 PID loops with autotuning and up to 4 bases of local expansion Details of these CPU features and more are covered in Chapter 3 CPU Specifications and Operation Four base sizes are available 3 4 6 and 9 slot The 1 bases with a connector for local expansion on the right side can serve in local local expansion and remote I O configurations All bases include a built in power supply The 1 bases can replace existing non 1 bases if necessary The DL230 and DL240 CPUs can support up to 256 local I O points The DL250 1 can support up to 768 local I O points with up to two expansion bases The DL260 can support up to 1280 local I O points with up to four expansion bases These points can be assigned as input or output points The DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 systems can also be expanded by adding remote I O points The DL250 1 and DL260 provide a built in master for remote I O networks The I O configurati
400. f you have an application that cannot wait until the next I O update you can use Immediate Instructions These do not use the status of the input image register to solve the application program The Immediate instructions immediately read the input status directly from I O modules However this lengthens the program scan since the CPU has to read the I O point status again A complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in Chapter 5 Read Inputs from After the CPU reads the inputs from the Specialty and input modules it reads any input point Remote I O data from any Specialty modules that are installed such as Counter Interface modules etc This is also the portion of the scan that reads the input status from Remote l O racks ae NOTE It may appear the Remote l O point status is updated every scan This is not quite true The CPU will receive information from the Remote I O Master module every scan but the Remote Master may not have received an update from all the Remote slaves Remember the Remote I O link is managed by the Remote Master not the CPU J a e Lol D o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo Service Peripherals After the CPU reads the inputs from the input modules it reads any attached and Force I O peripheral devices This is primarily a communications service for any attached devices For example it would read a programming device to see if any inp
401. factured cable with RJ45 connectors already attached The maximum total expansion system cable length is 30m 98ft Do not use Ethernet hubs to connect the local expansion network together 5e Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 D2 EXCBL 1 Cable 7 1 A GRN WHT GRN WHT e 4 4 5 5 12345678 6 GRN GRN 6 8 pin RJ45 Connector A 8P8C RJ45 RJ45 Note Commercially available Patch Straight through Category 5 UTP cables will work in place of the D2 EXCBL 1 The D2 EM modules only use the wires connected to pins 3 and 6 as shown above DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration KE DL260 Local The D2 260 supports local expansion up to five total bases one CPU base four Expansion System local expansion bases and up to a maximum of 1280 total I O points An example local expansion system is shown below All local and expansion I O points are updated on every CPU scan No specialty modules can be located in the expansion bases refer to the Module Placement Table earlier in this chapter for restrictions D2 CM Expansion D2 EM Termination Base Number Selection Switch Settings z 7 ES M B m M E 18 ee TEM aci a za A lt el rs z Eg I O addressing 5 gt Use D2 EXCBL 1 1m s Category 5 straight 5
402. ferred into the first level of the accumulator stack Step 3 Load the address of the data in the master that is to be written to the network into the accumulator This parameter requires a HEX value Step 4 Insert the WX instruction which specifies the starting V memory location Aaaa where the data will be written to the slave Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See page 3 51 All V mem See page 3 52 All V mem See page 3 53 Inputs X 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 177 0 177 0 377 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Special Relay SP 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 617 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn a ae ES 25 G5 po fut CD Sc 0 Standard RLL Instructions Network Instructions In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 see special relays is not on the RX instruction will access a DCM or ECOM operating as a master in slot 2 10 consecutive bytes of data is
403. ff DirectSOFT Counting diagram x1 CNT cT2 x1 K3 C10 C10 CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3 e OUT Y4 Ll CTA2 K2 Y4 gt ou WS L Current 1 2 3 4 0 Value CTA2 K3 Y5 OUT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont B Cc T Cc STR gt 1 ENT STR gt SHFT 2 SHFT MLR 2 Cc B A c str gt SHFT r j A ENT gt 5 ENT Q GY c D GX E aV cnt e gt a Jen our gt a JL EN 22 Sy C T C c T C o STR gt SHFT 2 SHFT MLR 2 STR gt SHFT 2 SHFT MLR 2 O B D S J gt i ENT gt a ENT ar GX D GX F a OUT gt 3 ENT OUT gt 5 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Stage Counter The Stage Counter is a single input counter SGCNT that increments when the input logic Counter Iig diJ transitions from off to on This counter differs from other counters since it will hold ____ SGCNT CT aaa its current value until reset using the RST Ebon instruction The Stage Counter is designed for use in RLLPLYS programs but can be used in relay ladder logic programs When the current value equals the preset value The counter discrete stat
404. figuration DL205 System Design Strategies 0 cece eee eee eee eee eee eens 4 2 VO System Configurations suscriba td ars 4 2 Networking Configurations ooccooccccoccnce nr 4 2 Module Placement ia sac a a a a lee Sa e ate eae eee 4 3 Slot NUMINN CERRO O ET uo A takes Sele ce ug 4 3 Module Placement Restrictions gt 1 A A A Sey A Eee 4 3 Automatic VO Configuration A a e 4 4 Manual HO GONIquratlO Madri is ns Ns is 4 4 Removing a Manual Configuration ooccocccococcccconrr teens 4 5 Power On I O Configuration Check 0 000 cece eee eens 4 5 I O Points Required for Each Module 2 i5 2 2scecsader re aii 4 6 Calculating the Power Budget 0oooocconcncccnn eee eee e eee eens 4 7 Managing your Power Resource 2 0 cece eee eee eee 4 7 CPU Power Spe ificati hs lt i escat ett ed debate kame dees he ovules Bids adil E 4 7 Module Power Requirements lt 4 2c2ctsevecterusevtcees esas men ee pt td 4 7 Power Budget Calculation Example ooocccoccccoccccn eee eee ees 4 9 Power Budget Calculation Worksheet 00 00 cece eects 4 10 Local Expansion VO ls oo A O ee eee eee e ee 4 11 D2 CM Local Expansion Module s e cseei ssgeuteeteGied bag seed toe ghe Seid eae ears 4 11 D2 EM Local Expansion Module 2 20 50 c2c4 sc3nhbo 0s woh de behead eka bee bias 4 12 D2 EXCBL 1 Local Expansion Cable 0 00 cece eee ees 4 12 DL260 Local Expansion System 2 dia as A wore dos Herta ew a
405. for the destination table Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 2000 V2000 the starting location for the source table is loaded into the accumulator The destination table location V2030 is specified in the Move instruction LD Load the constant value 6 1 K6 HEX into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator X X X X V1776 X X X X v2026 X X X X V1777 X XX X V2027 LDA Convert octal 2000 to HEX O 2000 400 and load the value into 9 11 2 18 42000 0 4 2 8 v2030 the accumulator 0 5 0 0 v2001 _ 0 5 0 0 v2031 D 9 9 9 9 v2002
406. g diagram shows the scan by scan results of the execution for our example program Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from O 6 and then starts over at 1 instead of 0 Also notice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan Example of Execution Scan N Before TTD Execution After TTD Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Incremented vi401 0 5 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 V1400 v1401 0O 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 v1400 V1i402 9 9 9 9 1 vi402 9 9 9 9 N visos 3 lo 74 2 Destination visos 3 lo l7 l4 2 Destination visos 89 l8 l9 3 X X X X V1500 visos 8 9l8 l9 3 0 5j0 0 v1500 vi405 1 0 1 0 4 vi405 1 0 1 0 4 visos 210 4 6 5 cig Spee ake viaos 2folale 5 it Seas V1407 X X X xX V1407 X X X X Scan N 1 Before TTD Execution After TTD Execution Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Automatically Incremented vi40o1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 71 V1400 vi4o1 0 5 0 0 0 6 O O JO 2 V1400 de E Destination eee Sa Destination V1403 3 0 7 4 2
407. g the input or output update portion of the CPU cycle The immediate instructions take longer to execute because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or writes the module This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write outputs portion of the CPU cycle 29929 NOTE Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status from the module it only uses the results to solve that one instruction It does not use the new status to update the image register Therefore any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values Any immediate instructions that follow will access the module again to update the status The immediate output instruction will write the status to the module and update the image register fa Sn el 8 T CPU Scan y The CPU reads the inputs from p J the local base and stores the status in an input image Read Inputs register x128 x2 x xo OFF ON OFF OFF OFF lt _ xo Input Image Register OFF lt _ x1 Read Inputs from Specialty I O Immediate instruction does Solve the Application Program not use the input image xo YO register but instead reads the 1 el Md the module 1 O Point XO Changes immediately ON lt _
408. ge 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Timer T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 5000 and V2002 gt 2345 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ls EN 4na Ele Y pa hi Ma suet E 7 gt 0 a A i A P A i gt F A A A 5 0 0 0 ENT ND gt SHET YND K 2 0 f 0 5 2 gt Cc D E F 2 3 4 5 ENT Sour gt 3 3 ENT In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 7000 and V2002 lt 2500 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes a fa V2002 K2500 Y3 Son SHET E 3 gt pe A A a A 7 A gt Z lt OUT H A A A Sl a 7 3 7 ENT Cc Cc j NDN gt SHET ae 2 0 r 0 2 EA 0 Cc F A A as 2 5 o o ENT gs ou gt SHET e 3 ENT g5 Je a DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 33 Immediate Instructions Immediate Instructions Store The Store Immediate instruction begins a Immediate new rung or additional branch in a rung STRI The status of the contact will be the same X aaa SILILI as the status of the associated input point ES ao Ga El on the module at the time the instruction is E executed The image register is not updated Store Not The Store Not Immediate instruction Immediate begins a new
409. ge DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Octal Address O All V memory All V memory All V memory All V memory See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP76 on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero 299999 NOTE Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack In the following example when X1 is on the octal number 40400 will be converted to a HEX 4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 x LDA Octal Hexadecimal 1 I O 40400 4 0 4 0 0 4 1 0 0 Load The HEX equivalent to Th d lat the octal number into the 1C UNUSEG ACCUMIUARO lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero PE A accumulator ace o lololol Too OUT 4 1j0 0 V2000 v2000 Copy the value in lower 16 bits of the accumulator to v2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Sora gt Pa ENT SHFT nostra o gt EL a JE Ir Ie Yew Sur gt Str ano oo Ao Wo Mo EN 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed
410. ge current 0 1mA 40 VDC non replaceable D 5 a Fonts Eli Inductive Load z 4 2A Pt Maximum Number of Switching Cycles per Minute SS 3 Load Duration of output in ON state qe Current 7ms 40ms 100ms 2 3A Pt 0 1A 8000 1400 600 14 4A Pt 0 5A 1600 300 120 A 1 0A 800 140 60 T 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 1 54 540 90 35 32 50 68 86 104 1221317 2 04 400 70 Ambient Temperature C F 3 04 270 2 z 4 0A 200 7 At 40ms duration loads of 3 0A or greater cannot be used At 100ms duration loads of 2 0A or greater cannot be used Here s how to use the table Find the load current you expect to use and the duration that the ouput is ON The number at the intersection of the row and column represents the switching cycles per minute For example a 1A inductive load that is on for 100ms can be switched on and off a maximum of 60 times per minute To convert this to duty cycle percentage use Duration x cycles 60 Our Internally connected example would be 60x 1 60 1 10 duty cycle mar 24VDC i DH ov o To LED gt Output E yO ij 12 24 53A T SAW i aks Optical voc _T T Isolator e o Common M Other Circuits DL205 Us
411. gram use AUX Function 24 to clear the complete program You can also use other AUX functions to clear other memory areas e AUX 23 Clear Ladder Range e AUX 24 Clear all Ladders e AUX 31 Clear V Memory Setting the Clock The DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 also have a Clock Calendar that can be used for and Calendar many purposes If you need to use this feature there are also AUX functions AFINA available that allow you set the date and time For example you would use AUX 52 Display Change Calendar to set the time and date with the Handheld Programmer With DirectSOFT32 you would use the PLC Setup menu options using K Sequence protocol only 230 240 250 1 260 The CPU uses the following format to Handheld Programmer Display display the date and time e Date Year Month Date Day of 23 08 17 97 05 20 week 0 6 Sunday thru Saturday e Time 24 hour format Hours Minutes Seconds You can use the AUX function to change any component of the date or time However the CPU will not automatically correct any discrepancy between the date and the day of the week For example if you change the date to the 15th of the month and the 15th is on a Thursday you will also have to change the day of the week unless the CPU already shows the date as Thursday The day of the week can only be set using the handheld programmer J a e Lol D lors o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo Initializing Sy
412. hanges For example a conveyor system would typically suffer no harm if the system were shut down all at once In a way it is the equivalent of an E STOP On the other hand for a continuous process such as waste water treatment holding the last state would allow the current state of the process to continue until the operator can intervene manually V7741 and V7742 are reserved for the expansion base Output Hold option The bit definitions are as follows Bit 0 Output Off Default Bit 1 Output Hold D2 CM Expansion Base Hold Output Expansion V memory SlotO Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Base No Register Exp Base 1 V7741 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Exp Base 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Exp Base 3 V7742 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Exp Base 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 WARNING Selecting HOLD LAST STATE means that outputs on the expansion bases will not be under program control in the event of a communications failure Consider the consequences to process operation carefully before selecting this mode uBIseq TES v E Os e O Co o e 5 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 416 System Design and Configuration gn Cc e Ho 05 mko cT oo BO Oo Nc Enabling I O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT32 Enabling the I O Config Check will force the CPU at power up to examine the local and expan
413. hat the viaoz 9 ofofo 1 JA first data location V1401 will be used visos l3 o 7 4 2 Destination when the pointer is equal to zero and viaos 8 o fsTo 3 XXX v50 again when the pointer is equal to six vi405 j1 jojijo 4 Why Because the pointer is only equal to N1406 E pO AB S zero before the very first execution From IOT EAA then on it increments from one to six and then resets to one Also our example uses a normal input contact X1 to control the execution Since the CPU scan is extremely fast and the pointer increments automatically the table would cycle through the locations very quickly If this is a problem you have an option of using SP56 in conjunction with a of the accumulator 9 one shot PD and a latch C1 for example a S ae to allow the table to cycle through all SET eo locations one time and then stop The logic 26 f PA SP56 C1 o shown here is not required it s just an RST Pe Le optional method X1 DirectSOFT32 Display optional latch example using SP56 co C1 Cen LD K6 Load the constant value 6 l HEX into the lower 16 bits Since Special Relays are reset at the end of the scan this latch must follow the TTD instruction in the program DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l T2 ES 23 C5 TH oD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The followin
414. he LDA instruction Then we load the data into the accumulator to be ANDed with the table In the ANDMOV command we specify the table destination V3100 2 5 aS yo co 26 O 5 0 H DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 9 172 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions DirectSOFT32 Display a ae ES 25 G5 po fut CD Sc 0 LD Load the constant value 2 Hex into the lower 16 bits K2 of the accumulator Handheld Programmer Keystrokes en gt 0 END LDA se Med te ne Cie SHFT L D gt PREV Cc ENT O 3000 accumulator This is the ANDST 3 2 table beginning SHFT anos 3 Lo gt Hos Jo Wo fo Et a 6086 Hex into the lower SHFT llanosr 3 gt PREY ts fs fs So JE K6666 16 bits of the accumulator y Y 5 y 5 B x X Anp SHFT orst inst ano gt 3 1 0 o ENT ANDMOV AN Ding le contents with the 03100 accumulator as it is written The example to the right shows a table of V3000 V3100 two words at V3000 and logically ORs it Talal ORMOV glolola with K8888 The copy of the table at K8888 V3100 shows the result of the OR E gt E operation for each word The program to the right performs the DirectSOFT32 Display ORMOV example above lt assumes that xo T the data in the table at V3000 V3001 1 K2 already exists First we load the table Load the constant value 2 length two words into the accumulator Hex into the lower 16 bits E of the accum
415. he final string adds the units of degrees to the line of text and the N adds a carriage return line feed i PRINT K2 Print the message to Port 2 Reactor temperature V2000 deg N when X1 makes an off to on A A transition Message will read a represents a space Reactor temperature 0156 deg V memory text element this is used for printing text stored in V memory Use the followed by the number of characters after V memory number for representing the e text If you assign 0 as the number of characters the print function will read the 22 character count from the first location Then it will start at the next V memory location 52 and read that number of ASCII codes for the text from memory oo Example a E V2000 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed V2000 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx determined by the number in V2000 will be printed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 204 Standard RLL Instructions Message Instructions Bit element this is used for printing the state of the designated bit in V memory or a relay bit The bit element can be assigned by the designating point and bit number preceded by the V memory number or relay number The output type is described as shown in the table below Data format Description 1 none Print 1 for an ON state and 0 for an OFF state 2 BOOL Print TRUE for an ON state and FALSE for an OFF sta
416. he output status from the image register to the Remote I O racks NOTE It may appear the Remote l O point status is updated every scan This is not quite true The CPU will send the information to the Remote l O Master module every scan but the Remote Master will update the actual remote modules during the next communication sequence between the master and slave modules Remember the Remote I O link communication is managed by the Remote Master not the CPU During this part of the scan the CPU performs all system diagnostics and other tasks such as dol dis Y calculating the scan time Read Inputs from Specialty I O e updating special relays Y e resetting the watchdog timer Service Peripherals Force I O DL205 CPUs automatically detect and yo report many different error conditions CPU Bus Communication Appendix B contains a listing of the Y various error codes available with the Update Clock Special Relays DL205 system Y One of the more important diagnostic Solve the Application Program tasks is the scan time calculation and Y watchdog timer control DL205 CPUs Solve PID Loop Equations have a watchdog timer that stores the Y maximum time allowed for the CPU to Write Outputs complete the solve application segment of Y the scan cycle The default value set from Write Outputs to Specialty 1 O the factory is 200 mS If this time is y exceeded the CPU wi
417. he starting slave memory address where the data will be written Start Master Memory Address specifies the starting address of the data in the master that is to written to the slave Number of Elements specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to This field is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected MODBUS Data Format specifies MODBUS 584 984 or 484 data format to be used e Exception Response Buffer specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be placed DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 MWX Slave Memory Address MWX Master Memory Addresses MWX Number of Elements MWX Exception Response Buffer Standard RLL Instructions MODBUS Instructions Function Code MODBUS Data Format Slave Address Range s 05 Force Single Coil 484 Mode 1 999 05 Force Single Coil 584 984 Mode 1 65535 06 Preset Single Register 484 Mode 4001 4999 06 Preset Single Register 584 984 Mode 40001 49999 5 digit or 400001 465535 6 digit 15 Force Multiple Coils 484 1 999 15 Force Multiple Coils 585 984 Mode 1 65535 16 Preset Multiple Registers 484 Mode 4001 4999 16 Preset Multiple Registers 584 984 Mode 40001 49999 5 digit or 4000001 465535 6 digit Operand Data Type DL260 Range Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays C 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0
418. hen an AIN instruction has executed its Complete bit can be used to trigger an AFIND instruction to search for a de sired portion of the ASCII string Once the string is found the AEX instruction can be used to extract the located string AIN Complete C1 Base Address Total Number of Bytes Search Starting Index Direction Found Index Value From Beginning Found Index 142200 ode39 Give delay time for AFIND instruction to complete C7 SET Give delay time for AFIND instruction to Search string not found Data not found with complete in table AFIND C7 142200 Kf c10 16 SET Give delay time for AFIND instruction to complete C7 RST Give delay time for AFIND instruction to Data not found with complete AFIND C7 C10 MR Delay for AFIND complete TO Delay for AFIND EX complete TO Source Base Address Extract at Index Number of Bytes Shit ASCII Option Byte Swap Convert ASCII To BCD HEX Destination Base Address Y3000 Give delay time for AFIND instruction to complete ae T2 ES 25 S5 TH oD SE dp C7 RST DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ASCII Extract AEX X Xx x Y 230 240 250 1 260 number Source Base Address specifies the begining V memory register where the entire ASCII string is stored in memory Extract at Index specifies which byte to skip to with respect to the Source Ba
419. her number of memory locations within each data type If your software only supports 484 mode then there may be some PLC memory locations that will be unavailable The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PLC data you are using The PLC memory types are split into two categories for this purpose e Discrete X SP Y R S T CT contacts e Word V Timer current value Counter current value In either case you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the appropriate MODBUS addresses as required The table below shows the exact equation used for each group of data DL250 1 Memory Type QTY PLC Range MODBUS 484 Mode 584 984 MODBUS Dec Octal Address Range Address Mode Data Type Decimal Address For Discrete Data Types Convert PLC Addr to Dec Start of Range Appropriate Mode Address Inputs X 512 XO X777 2048 2560 1001 10001 Input Special Relays SP 512 SPO SP137 3072 3167 1001 10001 Input SP320 SP717 3280 3535 Outputs Y 512 YO Y777 2048 2560 1 1 Coil 5 Control Relays C 1024 CO C1777 3072 4095 1 1 Coil as Timer Contacts T 256 TO 1377 6144 6399 1 1 Coil so Counter Contacts CT 128 CTO CT177 6400 6527 1 1 Coil EU Stage Status Bits S 1024 SO S1777 5120 6143 1 1 Coil 52 For Word Data Types Convert PLC Addr to Dec Appropriate Mode Address 9a Timer Cu
420. her three circuits it can power input and or output circuits DL2 Primary Side me Secondary or Power Main Logic side Input Filter Power oe nterna Supply CPU gt Backplane Auxiliary 24VDC Out lt 24VDC Comm Input Module Output Module Supply i 1 i i Y Y To Programming Inputs Commons Outputs Commons Device Operator S Supply f Interface Network Field Side UPP Y TOIS ea Output Circuit DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES Installation Wiring and Specifications In some cases using the built in auxiliary 24VDC supply can result in a cost savings for your control system lt can power combined loads up to 300mA Be careful not to exceed the current rating of the supply If you are the system designer for your application you may be able to select and design in field devices which can use the 24VDC auxiliary supply Powering l O All AC powered and 125VDC DL205 bases feature the internal auxiliary supply If Circuits with the input devices AND output loads need 24VDC power the auxiliary supply may be Auxiliary Supply able to power both circuits as shown in the following diagram S AC Power or 125VDC Bases DN 5 Power Input DL205 PLC oS Auxiliary Input Module Output Module o 24VDC Supply Inputs Com
421. hether to access a single data point or a group of them The DL260 supports the MODBUS function codes described below aie ae aes aan en eee ee MODBUS Function DL205 Data Types Function Code Available 01 Read a group of coils Y C T CT 02 Read a group of inputs X SP 05 Set Reset a single coil slave only Y C T CT 15 Set Reset a group of coils Y C T CT w 03 04 Read a value from one or more registers V as 06 eae into a single register V gs QU 07 Read Exception Status V 3 08 Diagnostics V os 16 Write a value into a group of registers V E DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES System Design and Configuration MODBUS Port In DirectSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Secondary Comm Port Configuration e Port From the port number list box at the top choose Port 2 X Xx x Y e Protocol Click the check box to the left of MODBUS use AUX 56 on the 230 240 250 1 260 HPP and select MBUS and then you ll see the dialog box below x Port Port 2 y Close Protocol K Sequence l DirectNET Sie am M MODBUS M Non Sequence Remote 1 0 Time out 800 ms y RTS on delay time Ooms y RTS off delay time om y Station Number h m Baud rate fasaoo y Echo Suppression C RS 422 485 4 wire Stop bits 1 RS 232C 2 wire I RS 485 2 wire Parity Odd v Port 2 15 Pin
422. his is a PLC message N X1 makes an off to on transition DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 203 Message Instructions V memory element this is used for printing V memory contents in the integer format or real format Use V memory number or V memory number with and data type The data types are shown in the table below The Character code must be capital letters NOTE There must be a space entered before and after the V memory address to separate it from the text string Failure to do this will result in an error code 499 Character code Description 1 none 16 bit binary decimal number 2 B 4 digit BCD 3 D 32 bit binary decimal number 4 DB 8 digit BCD 5 Floating point number real number 6 E Floating point number real number with exponent Example V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number V2000 B Print BCD data in V2000 V2000 D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number V2000 D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001 V2000 R Print floating point number in V2000 V2001 as real number V2000 E Print floating point number in V2000 V2001 as real number with exponent Example The following example prints a message containing text and a variable The reactor temperature labels the data which is at V2000 You can use the B qualifier after the V2000 if the data is in BCD format for example T
423. his parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the RFT instructions which specifies destination V memory location Vaaa This is where the value will be moved to Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Helpful Hint The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on If you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan a one shot PD should be used in the input logic Helpful Hint The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the operation Also it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table For example if the table is 6 words long then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter should be between 1 and 6 If the value is outside of this range or zero the data will not be moved from the table Also a one shot PD should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP56 on when the table counter equals 0 NOTE Status flags SPs are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or the end of the scan The pointer for this
424. i Type of Load 50mA 5A 7A il 24 VDC Resistive 10M 600K 300K 6 bart 24 VDC Solenoid 150K 75K N mb 4 ae umber 110 VAC Resistive 600K 300K Points On 6A pt 110 VAC Solenoid 500K 200K 100 duty cycle 4 a 220 VAC Resistive 300K 150K 2 7A pt 220 VAC Solenoid 250K 100K 0 I 1 At 120 VDC 0 5A resistive load contact life cycle is 200K cycles 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 2 Normally closed contacts have 1 2 the current handling capability of the normally 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F open contacts Ambient Temperature C F OUT RELAY Typical Circuit NO Q i BAM lo OD EDs er ee 1 0 Kz NDG 2 6 2 250VAC Internal Circuitry NO 1 Es Y 3 l p O t F2 08TRS NCO normally closed 3 c3 NAS 10ma 7A gt bro NO 2 Sy Y e ENO O D i NO3 os er O 2 NINO c4 ES T ce NCO p D o O os FAA 102 LE P o O 5 at nos Y a NOs y O Points 0 6 only y cs p D 12 28VDC a 5 E NO 4 os E S D 12 250VAC Internal Circuitry formally closed NC6 NC 6 eL O O G Line D s 12 28VD NC 7 normall Closed 6 c7 bb S Sommo X 3 TE BENAG o amp MOE o D E or BARNA i NO6 NC c T D NO 7 O DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 D2 12TR Relay Output Installation Wiring and Specifications
425. ia sae SRG 4 13 DL250 1 Local Expansion System es hine tt exh eae ta eae bee 4 14 Expansion Base Output Hold Option etica AA tad 4 15 Enabling I O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT32 000 eee ees 4 16 Remote VO ExpanSio i asistidas ira RRA A RADA RRA AAA DARA 4 17 How to Add Remote O Channels coxis dore a dl edd eee 4 17 Configuring the CPU s Remote I O Channel oococcocccccoccc eee ees 4 18 Configure Remote I O SIAVGS 2 cae co sa ccs A eee ned eden ere hag a 4 20 Configuring the Remote I O Table 0 cece eens 4 20 Remote O Setup Program wv ends ee si elds ad Gee ED ee 4 21 Remote O Test Program AER ee AA aes PEPE ea er E 4 22 Network Connections to MODBUS and DirectNet 00 ccc cece eee eee eee 4 23 Config ring Port Z occ yas wens Saad ao ad sad Od aes BENE Ae Reels eae ea 4 23 MODBUS Port Config ratioMis n soreer raa e eid aoe yd Bide leew earch nied See ew wine ees e es 4 24 Vi Table of Contents DirectNET Port Configuration is ELE AS A AS eared acute 4 25 Network Slave Operation ie eee eee 4 26 MODBUS Function Codes Supported 1 0 a ioraers da eed dd AA a co 4 26 Determining the MODBUS Address 0 00 cece eet eee 4 26 If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address 00 cece eee eee 4 27 Example 1 V2100 cari o dks E AAA A A eee a 4 28 EXample 20 V20 stats il Ed E E Ni Sesa 4 28 Example 3 T10 Current Value a a MNS dali at ath tht accio 4 28 Exampl
426. id 1A 100K OSALE 110VAC Resistive 1A 500K OUT RELAY 6 110VAC Solenoid 1A 200K qe 220VAC Resistive 1A 350K 0 Cou a4 4 220VAC Solenoid 1A 100K 10500 5005 A 1A Pt 2 6 3 00 07 ae D2 08TR 0 I I saibe TASEN 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 5 240 VAC c one 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F 1 ES gt Ambient Temperature C F j O 9 L 35 4 Ty 1 E i 169 L a 5 ER Internal module circuitry 4 L 2 E tL A J 4 E amp f o 6 OUTPUT L ES p s l r D 6 l T Sy j H o d V To LED Lt COM y J tine N A 5 30 VDC 6 3A All 5 240 VAC DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 F2 08TR Relay Output Installation Wiring and Specifications Outputs per module 8 Max leakage current N A Commons per module 2 isolated Max inrush current 12A Output Points Consumed 8 Minimum load 10mA O 12VDC Operating voltage 12 28VDC 12 250VAC 10A Base power required 5v 670mA Max 120VDC 0 5A Output type 8 Form A SPST normally open Peak voltage 150VDC 265VAC OFF to ON response 15 ms typical ON to OFF response 5 ms typical Terminal type Removable AC frequency 47 63 Hz Status indicators Logic Side ON voltage drop N A Weight 5 5 oz 156g o gt Max load current resistive 10A common 30m subject to derating Fuses None pl pE oo 4 45 Typica
427. ied in the Remove From Bottom The table pointer V1400 in this case will be decremented by 1 after each execution of the RFB instruction DirectSOFT32 Display Dl LD 1 K6 Load the constant value 6 HEX into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator LDA O 1400 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator This is the table pointer location RFB V1500 Copy the specified value from the table to the specified Handheld Programmer Keystrokes destination V1500 8 STR gt 1 ENT L D G SHFT anost 3 gt PREV ENT AN ae Io gt Pa Ea Eo Wo ET SHET AN Ps Sa gt a E Sa E ENE It is important to understand how the table mae apa locations are numbered If you examine vor lols lolol a o Jo Jo To v1400 the example table you ll notice that the viaoz 9 o ofo 2 ae first data location V1401 will be used visos 3 Jo 7 4 3 Destination when the pointer is equal to one The visos e o a JoJa LAL L vis00 second data location V1402 will be used visos 1 0 1 0 5 when the pointer is equal to two etc 1406 E e A Sg V1407 X X X X Also our example uses a normal input DirectSOFT32 Display optional one shot method contact X1 to control the execution x1
428. ient Temperature C F 1 5A 50 60Hz a s BE gt Hz a al ole 4 T F D 4 b D O Internal module circuitry T Ae A Fall Ko 2 HP D D OUTPUT E D Ne 3 Fe im O D L r 5 30 VDC o O 5 240 VAC e lcp O A o EBP D L hed 2 a E S D o V To LED 4 1 t i D an O COM pz Sa LPAI On Oe 1 E Sy O O 5 30 VDC ki a p 5 240 VAC 3 i 2 D2 12TR Addresses Used NE J Points _ Used Points Used a Yn 0 Yes Yn 10 Yes module s tint el peine Positon B Yn 1 Yes Yn 11 Yes displays the output status of the mod Yn 2 Yes Yn 12 Yes ule s second group of 8 output points Yn 3 Yes Yn 13 Yes Yn 4 Yes Yn 14 Yes Yn 5 Yes Yn 15 Yes Yn 6 No Yn 16 No Yn 7 No Yn 17 No n is the starting address DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uo1 e e1su ar yeoyinads pue ULM suo 6 Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 08CDR 4 pt DC Input 4pt Relay Output CB IT o 6 OUTPUT 5 240VAC ie Input Specifications Output
429. ies how many coils inputs holding registers or input register will be read See the table on the following page e MODBUS Data Format specifies MODBUS 584 984 or 484 data format to be used e Exception Response Buffer specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be placed See the table on the following page 2 5 aS so co 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions MODBUS Instructions MRX Slave Memory Address Function Code MODBUS Data Format Slave Address Range s 01 Read Coil 484 Mode 1 999 01 Read Coil 584 984 Mode 1 65535 02 Read Input Status 484 Mode 1001 1999 02 Read Input Status 584 984 Mode 10001 19999 5 digit or 100001 165535 6 digit 03 Read Holding Register 484 Mode 4001 4999 03 Read Holding Register 584 984 40001 49999 5 digit or 4000001 465535 6 digit 04 Read Input Register 484 Mode 3001 3999 04 Read Input Register 584 984 Mode 30001 39999 5 digit or 3000001 365535 6 digit 07 Read Exception Status 484 and 584 984 Mode n a MRX Master Memory Addresses Operand Data Type DL260 Range Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays C 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 777 V memory V all see page 3 53 Global Inputs GX 0 3777 Global Outputs
430. ies the e Teinie range of data that will be removed from the aga los looda o Jo To T6 lv1a00 table it is important to understand how the viao2 9 olofo 2 n table locations are numbered If you visos 3 o 7 la 3 Destination examine the example table you ll notice visos e o efo a LALLA L Jvi600 that the data locations are numbered from visos 1 0 1 0 5 the top of the table For example if the dia EE Bal E table counter started at 6 then all six of the ea as locations would be affected during the instruction execution Also our example uses a normal input DirectSOFT32 Display optional one shot method contact X1 to control the execution xi 66 Since the CPU scan is extremely fast and PD the pointer decrements automatically the co i data would be removed from the table very K6 quickly lf this is a problem for your Load the constant value 6 a E HEX into the lower 16 bits applicaton you have an option of using a of the accumulator one shot PD to remove one value each T time the input contact transitions from low oan to high Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator This is the table pointer location DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 The following diagram shows the scan by scan results of the execution for our example program In our example we re showing the table counter set to 4 initially Remember you can set the tabl
431. ified number of times If the For instruction is not energized the section of ladder logic between the For and Next instructions is not executed For Next instructions cannot be nested Up to 64 For Next loops may be used in a program If the maximum number of For Next loops is exceeded error E413 will occur The normal I O update and CPU housekeeping is suspended while executing the For Next loop The program scan can increase significantly depending on the amount of times the logic between the For and Next instruction is executed With the exception of immediate 1 0 instructions I O will not be updated until the program execution is completed for that scan Depending on the length of time required to complete the program execution it may be necessary to reset the watch dog timer inside of the For Next loop using the RSTWT instruction Aaaa FOR NEXT Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa V memory All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Constant K 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Instruction Set 5 181 Program Control Instructions In the following example when X1 is on the application program inside the For Next loop will be executed three times If X1 is off the program inside the loop will not be executed The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending on
432. ift the data in the accumulator 4 bits K4 to the right OUT a V1410 Output the lower 16 bits of the A E accumulator to V1410 V1410 Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits They use two consecutive V memory locations or 8 digit BCD constants to manipulate data in the accumulator The following example rotates the value 67053101 two bits to the right and outputs the value to V1410 and V1411 a LDD Constant 8 7 0 5 3 1 0 1 I K67053101 Load the value 67053101 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Acc 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 Of Of OF 1 OF 1 Of OF 1 1 Of OF Of 1 O OF OF OF OF O ol alo ROTR K2 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2019 18 17 16 15141312 11109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Acc 0 1 0 1 1 0 O 17 1 1 0 Of OF OF OF 1 O 1 OF OF 1 1 OF OF OF 1 OF O OF OF O o Rotate the data in the accumulator 2 bits to the right Z J0 as OUTD 33 V1410 22 Output the value in the s o c s cl4 To oy D accumulator to V1410 and V1411 Oc V1411 V1410 _ an 09 DL205
433. igure the port in DirectSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Setup Secondary Comm Port 230 240 250 1 260 Port From the port number list box at the top choose Port 2 e Protocol Click the check box to the left of Remote I O called M NET on the HPP and then you ll see the dialog box shown below x Port Port 2 y Close Protocol K Sequence Ti ib I DirectNET Se Help J Non Sequence Y Remote 1 0 Memory Address Y37700 Station Number 1 E Baud rate 38400 y Port 2 15 Pin Memory Address Choose a V memory address to use as the starting location of a Remote I O configuration table V37700 is the default This table is separate and independent from the table for any Remote Master s in the system e Station Number Choose 0 as the station number which makes the DL250 1 or DL260 the master Station numbers 1 7 are reserved for remote slaves Baud Rate The baud rates 19200 and 38400 are available Choose 38400 initially as the remote I O baud rate and revert to 19200 baud if you experience data errors or noise problems on the link Important You must configure the baud rate on the Remote Slaves via DIP switches to match the baud rate selection for the CPU s Port 2 a Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU and click Close 5s Ho os AD ec oO YO jo Oc 99 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06
434. imer The timer status bit will be on when the current value is equal or greater than the preset value of a corresponding timer When input XO turns on timer T1 will start When the timer reaches the preset of 3 seconds K of 30 timer status contact T1 turns on When T1 turns on output Y12 turns on DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 YO OUT Y1 X10 OUT C5 OUT C5 Y10 OUT Y20 OUT TMR T1 K30 Y12 OUT Timer Current CPU Specifications and Operation ESA Some information is automatically stored Values in V memory such as the current values x0 TUR F V Data Type associated with timers For example VO K1000 holds the current value for Timer 0 V1 a Ro holds the current value for Timer 1 etc S out These are 4 digit BCD values The primary reason for this is Vile 00 Y13 programming flexibility The example our shows how you can use relational ies Vi K100 via contacts to monitor several time intervals S e out from a single timer 5 a Counters and You have access to counter status bits that XO Counter Status reflect the relationship between the CNT ied Cis Bits current value and the preset value of a i CT Data type specified counter The counter status bit will be on when the current value is equal or greater than the preset value of a CT3 Y12 corresponding counter o
435. in EEPROM Memory DL250 1 7 6K Built in Flash Memory DL260 15 8K Built in Flash Memory 3 Slot Base 110 220VAC 24VDC 4 Slot Base 110 220VAC 24VDC 6 Slot Base 110 220VAC 24VDC 125 VDC 9 Slot Base 110 220VAC 24VDC 125 VDC 0000 PROGRAMMING Handheld Programmer with Built in RLLPLUS DirectSOFT32 Program ming for Windows DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 i ANALOG 2CH OUTPUT 8CH OUTPUT 4 IN 2 OUT 4CH INPUT 8 CH INPUT a 1 7 Getting Started DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System As you examine this manual you will notice there are many different products available Sometimes it is difficult to remember the specifications for any given product However if you take a few minutes to understand the numbering system it may save you some time and confusion The charts below show how the part numbering systems work for each product category Part numbers for accessory items such as cables batteries memory cartridges etc are typically an abbreviation of the description for the item Q D a 5 Ke 02 pe D a D 2 CPUs Specialty CPUs Product family D4 440DC 1 Class of CPU Abbreviation 230 330 430 Den
436. in V2006 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator using the Subtract instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 2000 2 4 7 5 x LD t i V2000 Load the value in V2000 into The unused accumulator the lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero _ accumulator 000 0 2 4 7 5 Accumulator SUB 1 5 9 2 V2006 V2006 Acc 0 8 8 3 Subtract the value in V2006 from the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator OUT ols s 3 v2010 v2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 5 aS 3 5 cf ENT STR gt 1 23 L D c A A A je SHFT gt ENT 5J ANDST 3 2 0 0 0 a E S U B v C A A G SHFT rst isa 1 gt SH ano 2 0 0 6 ENT GX v e A B A OUT gt SHFT AND 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Subtract Double Subtract Double is a 32 bit instruction that SUBD subtracts the BCD value Aaaa which is FT either two consecutive V memory locations or an 8 digit max constant SUBD q ae eee ae from the BCD value in the accumulator Aaaa The result resides in the accumulator
437. ing output module s DirectSOFT32 sen Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT x l F c c ser SFT gt 5s gt 2 2 ENT In the following example when X1 is on Y5 through Y22 will be reset off in the image register and on the corresponding output module s DirectSOFT32 X1 Y5 Y22 Rsm Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT S l F c c ast SHFT sg gt s gt 2 2 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Immediate Instructions Load Immediate The Load Immediate instruction loads a LDI 16 bit V memory value into the accumulator The valid address range includes all input xX xX xX v point addresses on the local base The PLD 230 240 250 1 260 value reflects the current status of the input wees points at the time the instruction is executed This instruction may be used instead of the LDIF instruction which requires you to specify the number of input points Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaaaa Inputs V 40400 40477 In the following example when CO is on the binary pattern of X10 X17 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Immediate instruction The Out Immediate instruction could be used to copy the
438. ints The following page gives a short program LD example for one slave K16 OUT V37705 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 4 21 Consider the simple system featuring Remote I O shown below The DL250 1 or DL260 s built in Remote I O channel connects to one slave base which we will assign a station address 1 The baud rates on the master and slave will be 38 4KB We can map the remote I O points as any type of I O point simply by choosing the appropriate range of V memory Since we have plenty of standard I O addresses available X and Y we will have the remote I O points start at the next X and Y addresses after the main base points X60 and Y40 respectively Main Base with CPU as Master Remote Slave Worksheet DL260 Remote Base Address 1 Choose 1 7 CPU 16 16 16 16 16 Slot Module NEUE EMS Number Name Input Addr No Inputs Output Addr No Outputs Port 2 l l l O O 0 08ND3S X060 8 1 08ND3S X070 8 2 08TD1 Y040 8 X0 X17 X20 X37 X40 X57 YO Y17 Y20 Y37 3 08TD1 Y050 8 V40400 40401 40402 40500 V40501 4 Remote Slave 5 D2 RSSS 8 8 8 8 de Slave l O o Input Bit Start Address X060V Memory Address V_40403 Total Input Points __ 16 Output Bit Start Address Y040 V Memory Address V_ 40502 X60 X67 X70 X77 Y40 Y47 Y50 Y57 Total Output Points _16 V4
439. ion between the two is Binary Coded Decimal BCD representation A BCD digit ranges from 0 to 9 and is stored as four binary bits a nibble This permits each V memory location to store four BCD digits with a range of decimal numbers from 0000 to 9999 BCD number 4 9 3 6 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 V memory storage 0 1 00 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 In a pure binary sense a 16 bit word represents numbers from 0 to 65535 In storing BCD numbers the range is reduced to 0 to 9999 Many math instructions use BCD data and DirectSOFT32 and the handheld programmer allow us to enter and view data in BCD Special RLL instructions convert from BCD to binary or visa versa Hexadecimal numbers are similar to BCD numbers except they utilize all possible binary values in each 4 bit digit They are base 16 numbers so we need 16 different digits To extend our decimal digits 0 through 9 we use A through F as shown Decimal 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Hexadecimal 0123 45 67 89 AB CODE F A 4 digit hexadecimal number can represent all 65536 values in a V memory word The range is from 0000 to FFFF hex PLCs often need this full range for sensor data etc Hexadecimal is a convenient way for humans to view full binary data Hexadecimal number A 7 F 4 V memory storage 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 0 1 0 0 DL205 User Manua
440. ion causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction pushing the value previously loaded into the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack is subtracted from the BCD value in the accumulator using the Subtract Stack instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 Xt LDD Load the value in V1400 and opop p7 2 0 5 6 Accumulator stack wa V1401 into the accumulator after 1st LDD og Level1 X X X X X X X X Acc 9 0 1 7 2 0 5 6 Level2
441. ions such as add subtract multiply etc Since there are 32 bits you can use up to an 8 digit BCD number or a 32 bit 2 s complement number The accumulator is reset to O at the end of every CPU scan Copying Data to The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a the Accumulator V memory location to the accumulator or to copy data from the accumulator to V memory The following example copies data from V memory location V1400 to Vmemory location V1410 j rp 8elolal5 I 1400 Copy data from V1400 to the peo acun ator bits lower 16 bits of the a accumulator acc o o ofo 8 o 35 A OUT V1410 8 9 1315 Copy data from the lower 16 bits V1410 of the accumulator to V1410 Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V memory locations are 16 bits the Load Double and Out Double or variations thereof use two consecutive V memory locations or 8 digit BCD constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a Vmemory address or from a Vmemory address to the accumulator For example if you wanted to copy data from Vmemory location V1400 and V1401 to Vmemory location V1410 and V1411 the most efficient way to perform this function would be as follows Ki LDD V1401 V1400 v1400 e 7 3 9 s o 2 6 Copy data from V1400 and V1401 to the accumulator OUTD
442. iption SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP71 On anytime the V memory specified by a pointer P is not valid SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number SP73 on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit SP74 On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non real number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag DirectSOFT32 Display Py LDR I R22 0 Load the real number 22 0 into the accumulator 2 2 decimal 4 1 BO 0 0 0 O Accumulator 15 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 SUBR 7 Acc 4 0 E 0 0 0 0 0 SUBR R15 0 V1401 V1400 Subtract the real number 4 O0OJEJO O O O O Hex number 15 0 from the accululator contents which is in real number format Real Value 842 11842 11842 1842 1 18 4211 8 42118 4214 8 421 OUTD Ace lo 1lololo o 1lololololo ojo olo o olo o ololo olo o olo V1400 ojoj1 1 Copy the result in the accumulator to V1400 and V1401 Sign Bit Exponent X bits Mantissa 23 bits 128 1 129 1 11 x 2 exp 2 111 binary 7 decimal 129 12
443. ircuit above the current in the common path is 4 times any channel s input current when all inputs are energized This is especially important in output circuits where heavier gauge wire is sometimes necessary on commons Most DL205 input and output modules group their I O points into banks that share a common return path The best indication of I O common grouping is on the wiring label such as the one shown to the right The miniature schematic shows two circuit banks with eight input points in each The common terminal for each is labeled CA and CB respectively In the wiring label example the positive terminal of a DC supply connects to the common terminals Some symbols you will see on the wiring labels and their meanings are DODBDUBD CDU DOANVJJASOO AC supply DC supply AC or DC supply la 4 ee 7 Ko Input Switch Output Load o o L DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 18 Installation Wiring and Specifications Connecting DC I O In the previous section on Sourcing and Sinking concepts the DC I O circuits were to Solid State explained to sometimes only allow current to flow one way This is also true for many Field Devices of the field devices which have solid state transistor interfaces In other words field devices can also
444. ired 350mA Max 1 0 Status none BB OFF to ON response 0 5 ms Terminal type removeable 40 pin connector or ZIPLink Ho ON to OFF response 0 5 ms sold separately Cc EU Terminal type removeable 40 pin connector or ZIPLink Weight 2 102 609 sold separately Fuses none Status indicators Module Activity Base power required 5V 350mA max all points on Weight 2 1 oz 60 g Fuses none Point Derating Chart Point Derating Chart 32 N i N I 5 gt 16 4 0 T T T T T OUT 12 24 0 10 2 30 40 50 55 C VDC en en N 32 50 68 86 104 122131 F ACT 0 T T T R Ambient Temperature C F 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C VDC O 32 50 68 86 104 122131 F ACT D2 32TD2 Ambient Temperature C F Ez O N AO A4 D2 32TD1 A TAS oo CurtengFiow E nm 12 24VDC A2 A6 a i AO A4 oo i A3 A7 oo A1 AS oo e Cr VI oo A2 A6 oo ae BO B4 oo A3 A7 oo B1 B5 oo CL Vi oo 12 24VDO B2 B6 oo B0 B4 joa esle7 55 B1 BS Do Current Flow cn vu on zjas oo o Cofea ffan 83 B7 ood 12 24VDC cI ES pra cu Vil io C2 C6 oo CO C4 00 A c3 C7 oo c1 05 0 0 Cure Flow cmjvm 00 C2 C6 oo Do D4 oo c3 C7 oo 12 24VDC D1 D5 oo Ci vi oo a D2 D6 oo DO D4 p s Current Fl D3 D7 u a D1 D5 gent Flow Emi viv D2 D6 ah DE y D3 D7 oo Equivalent Input Circuit O CIv viv S 12200 S 12 24VDC E i v Internal module circuitry 0 1A Internal module circuitry O ara pre 1 Optical Isolator CLASS V T 12 24VDC 4 1 y 01A output 3 le lt N J TT
445. is case only the 8 least significant bits of the last word location will be modified The remaining 8 bits are not affected Step 4 The last instruction in our sequence is the Specify Slave WX or RX instruction itself Use WX to ve ie im Memory Area write to the slave and RX to read from the slave All four of our instructions are iD shown to the right In the last instruction K128 you must specify the starting address and a valid data type for the slave LDA 040600 RX YO e DirectNET slaves specify the same address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave s native I O address MODBUS DL405 or DL205 slaves specify the same address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave s native I O address e MODBUS 305 slaves use the following table to convert DL305 addresses to MODBUS addresses uBIseq TES o el O oO Q feb e DL305 Series CPU Memory Type to MODBUS Cross Reference PLC Memory type PLC base MODBUS PLC Memory Type PLC base MODBUS address base addr address base addr TMR CNT Current Values R600 VO TMR CNT Status Bits CT600 GY600 I O Points IO 000 GYO Control Relays C160 GY160 Data Registers R401 V100 Shift Registers SR400 GY400 R400 Stage Status Bits D3 330P only SO GY200 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 LESS System Design and Configuration gn fom e go o5 mk
446. is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Stack instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 X1 LDD Load the value in V1400 and OO 4120058 Ac mulator stack 1400 V1401 into the accumulator aner 1s Level1 X X X X X X X X Acc 9 9 1 JAJ 2J0 5 B Level2 X X X X X X X X 3 1X X X X X X X X V1421 V1420 4 1X X X X X X X X LDD Load the value in V1420 and 0 p0 3 A 5s o Cc 6 5 X X X XX X X X v1420 V1421 into the accumulator 6 X x x xx xX xX X 7 1X X X XX X X X O JO 3 AT5 Cc 6 Aco E 8 xX x x XX X X X SUBBS Subtract the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack from the Acc 9 9 12 9 3 0 6 B binary value in the i accumulator a after 2n OUTD Copy the value in the Level1 0 0 1 A205B V1500 ee Level2 X X X X X X X X ojoj 2 0 3 0 6 B Level3 X X X X X X X X V1501 V1500 J Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level4 X X X X X X X X 1 Level5 X X X X X X X X B ro str gt 1 ENT Level6 X X X XXXXX o5 o D D gt e E A A ENT Level7 X X X X X X X X 32 ANDST __3 3 1 4 0 o Levelg X X X X X X X X cD L D D B E C A SE SHFT anp
447. it Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative 8 NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 i LD 1 v1400 Load the value in V1400 into the The unused accumulator lower 16 bits of the accumulator bits are set to zero 0 00 0 F A O 1 Accumulator DIVB gt 0 0 5 o V1420 V1420 Acc 0 3 2 0 ojojofjofjojojojo The binary value in the accumulator is divided by First stack location contains the binary value in V1420 the remainder OUT o 3 2 0 V1500 v1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 J bits of the accumulator to V1500 10 aoc os Handheld Programmer Keystrokes we gt 8 ENT D2 STR 1 oO L D B E A A gE SHFT f anost 3 gt 1 4 0 o ENT D l V B B E Cc A SA T a s AND 1 gt 1
448. ition RUN and STOP mode changes will not be allowed by any interface device handheld programmer DirectSOFT32 programing package or operator interface Programs may be viewed or monitored but no changes may be made If the switch is in the TERM position and no program password is in effect all operating modes as well as program access will be allowed through the connected programming or monitoring device Modeswitch Position CPU Action RUN Run Program CPU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered No changes are allowed by the attached programming monitoring device TERM Terminal RUN PROGRAM and the TEST modes are available Mode and program changes are allowed by the programming monitoring device STOP DL250 1 and CPU is forced into the STOP mode No changes are allowed by the DL260 only Stop Pro programming monitoring device gram There are two ways to change the CPU mode 1 Use the CPU mode switch to select the operating mode 2 Place the CPU mode switch in the TERM position and use a programming A A device to change operating modes In this position you can change py between Run and Program modes 235 ep 93 Status Indicators The status indicator LEDs on the CPU front panels have specific functions which can S Q help in programming and troubleshooting 22 33 Indicator Status Meaning D PWR ON Power good OFF Power failur
449. l 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation ES Memory Map With any PLC system you generally have many different types of information to process This includes input device status output device status various timing elements parts counts etc lt is important to understand how the system represents and stores the various types of data For example you need to know how the system identifies input points output points data words etc The following paragraphs discuss the various memory types used in the DL205 CPUs A memory map overview for the DL230 DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs follows the memory descriptions Octal Numbering System All memory locations or areas are numbered in Octal base 8 For example the diagram shows how the octal numbering system works for the discrete input points Notice the octal system does not contain any numbers with the digits 8 or 9 XO X1 X2 XB X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 1X13 X14 1X15 X16 X17 Discrete and Word Locations As you examine the different memory Discrete On or Off 1 bit types you ll notice two types of memory XO in the DL205 discrete and word memory Discrete memory is one bit that can be either a 1 or a0 Word memory is referred to as V memory variable and is a 16 bit location norma
450. l 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications 2 29 OFF to ON The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition Response ON to OFF The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition Response Terminal Type Indicates whether the terminal type is a removable or non removable connector or a terminal Status Indicators The LEDs that indicate the ON OFF status of an input point These LEDs are electrically located on either the logic side or the field device side of the input circuit Weight Indicates the weight of the module See Appendix E for a list of the weights for the various DL205 components Fuses Protective device for an output circuit which stops current flow when current exceeds the fuse rating They may be replaceable or non replaceable or located externally or internally uoelyelsuy t S m o 09 D Q p O EY a ULM suo 6 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 0 2c 5 9 A ad lt 2 S8 O pes L ve cw Installation Wiring and Specifications D2 08ND3 DC Input Inputs per module 8 sink source D2 16ND3 2 DC Input Commons per module 1 2 I O terminal points Inputs per module 16 sink source Input voltage range 10 2 26 4 VDC Peak voltage 26 4 VDC AC frequency n a ON voltage level 9 5 VDC minimum Commons per module 2 isolated Input voltage range 20 28 VDC Pe
451. l Relay Life Operations Derating Chart Q at Room Temperature A oS Use separate commons jaj Voltage amp Load Current 55 Type of Load 50mA 5A 7A 8 2 5A pt na 24 VDC Resistive 10M 600K 300K RR 24 VDC Solenoid 150K 75K 6 110 VAC Resistive 600K 300K Number 110 VAC Solenoid 500K 200K Points On 4 SAPE 100 duty cycle 4 220 VAC Resistiva 300K 150K nee ANA 220 VAC Solenoid 250K 100K a7 1 Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown by the use 0 f ion techniques described in the 205 User Manual Since 6 these meadies have no leskade current they pa not nave a built in pe 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C For example if you place a diode across a 24VDC inductive load you can 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 F significantly increase the life of the relay Ambient Temperature C F 2 At 120 VDC 0 5A resistive load contact life cycle is 200K cycles OUT RELAY op 4 1 02 5 2 0501 6 3 0 017 F2 08TR D com Typical Circuit NO 1 A 50 60Hz ypical Circui 4 T AE imaia E all points Si NO 0 8 l aye 12 28VDC Y NO 2 NO 1 E 58 2 250VAC Internal Circuitry 1 L C 0 3 8 TTE T G No 3 No2 KE L a 3 y 5 NO3
452. l V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is added with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 v2001 v2000 a LDD el7 3 sll5 ol2 6 I V2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 67 39 5 0 2 6 Accumulator ADDD V2006 2 0 0 0 4 0 4 6 V2006 and V2007 Acc 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2 Add the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 and V2007
453. l with another contact in a rung The TXT TI status of the contact will be open until the associated image register point makes an Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 Off to On transition closing it for one CPU J scan Thereafter it remains open until another Off to On transition Or Negative The Or Negative Differential instruction Differential logically ors a normally open contact in ORND parallel with another contact in a rung The x xI Ivo status of the contact will be open until the associated image register point makes an Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 On to Off transition closing it for one CPU i scan Thereafter it remains open until another On to Off transition Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Inputs X 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 177 0 377 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following example Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on or for one CPU scan when X2 transitions from Off to On DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes X1 Y5 STR x 1 ENT Our OR SHFT P D X2 X 2 ENT J OUT Y 5 ENT In the following example Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on or for one CPU scan when X2 transitions from On to Off DirectSOFT32 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02
454. lator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 X1 LDD Load the value in V1400 and oJo s a s o ee Accumulator stack V1401 into the accumulator after 1st LDD II v1400 Level 1 X X X X X X X X aco Lo o 3 a s o c s Level 2 X X X X X X X X 3 1X X X X X X X X V1421 V1420 4 1X X X X X X X X LDD Load the value in V1420 and o 9414 18 rl 597 5 X X X XX XXX V1421 into the accumulator V1420 6 X X X X X X X X T X X X XX X X X oto 1 7 B jo 5 F ree 8 xX x x XX XX X ADDBS Add the binary value in the accumulator with the binary o olsTellol1T2Ts5 value in the first level of the Acc accumulator stack Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD OUTD Copy the value in the Leveli 0 0 3A 5 0 C 6 accumulator to V1500 Level2 X X X XX XX X v1500 and V1501 ojols 2llo 1 2 5 Level3 X X X X X X X X V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level4 X X X X X X X X Level5 X X X X X X X X _0 B Sm gt ENT Level6 X X X X X X X X ne STR 1 AS L D D B E A A Level 7 X X X X X X X X ef SHFT anpst 3 3 1 4 o o ENT Level8 X X X XX X X X Qa 52 L D D B E G A SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 1 4 2 0 ENT 22 m A
455. lator to V3000 ace Lo Jo o To o 4 oo LD V3000 P3000 contains the value 400 HEX 400 HEX 2000 Octal which P 3000 contains the value 2635 94 Wore V3000 OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of V 3100 the accumulator to V3100 v2000 2 6 3 5 v2001 X X X X v2002 X X X X 9 Accumulator 30 V3000 v2003 X X X X aS o 4 jojo v2004a X x x x ojofojo 2 6 3 5 ce v2005 X x x x 26 je 53D 7 m v3100 2 6 3 5 V3101 X X X X DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Load The Load instruction is a 16 bit instruction LD that loads the value Aaaa which is either FUITITIY a V memory location or a 4 digit constant into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator o ILD 230 240 250 1 260 The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are Aaaa set to 0 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags D
456. lays C 1024 Coil Timer Contacts T Coil Counter Contacts CT 128 CTO CT177 6400 6271 Coil For Word Data Types Convert PLC Addr to Dec Data Type V Memory user data V 3072 V1400 V7377 768 3839 Holding Register V10000 17777 4096 8191 56 V Memory system V 256 V7400 V7777 3480 3735 Holding Register uBIseq TES v 5 Os e O a c o e 5 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration The following examples show how to generate the MODBUS address and data type for hosts which require this format Example 1 V2100 Find the MODBUS address for User V PLC Address Dec Data Type orato varon V2100 1088 decimal 1 Find V memory in the table 1088 Hold Reg Holding Reg 1088 2 Convert V2100 into decimal 1088 3 Use the MODBUS data type from the table e V Memory user data V 768 3839 12288 V10000 V37777 4096 16383 Example 2 Y20 Find the MODBUS address for output Y20 PLC Addr Dec Start Addr Data Type 1 Find Y outputs in the table Y20 16 decimal 2 Convert Y20 into decimal 16 16 2048 Coil 3 Add the starting address for the range 2048 4 Use the MODBUS data type from the table Outputs Y 1024 YO Y1777 2048 3071 Coil Example 3 T10 Current Find the MODBUS address to obtain the PLC Address Dec Data Type Value current value from Timer T10 T10 8 decimal 1 Find Timer
457. le In the following MLS MLR example logic between the first MLS K1 A and MLR KO B will function only if input XO is on The logic between the MLS K2 C and MLR K1 D will function only if input X10 and XO is on The last rung is not controlled by either of the MLS coils DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes xO Ki A A T MLS STR gt 0 5N Y B x1 co MLS gt 1 EN B T OUT sra gt y EN x2 c1 ST gt suet C 3 A o ENT OUT Cc T STR gt 2 EN X3 Yo GX c B Sur our gt SHFT b i ENT D ENT X10 K2 o LSTR gt 3 MeS our gt io JE i i B A i Z5 Yi sr gt i o ENT i OUT i Y C T MLS EA 2 EN i x4 Y2 F i gt ENT OUT STR 5 i GX B p i our gt ia aes 1 K1 D 1 E T i MLR str gt a EN i GX C T i x5 EN i c2 our gt 2 OUT T B MLR 2 1 EN X6 Y3 F en Um STR gt 5 EN GX c C OUT gt SHFT A 5 ENT KO B G a MLR STR gt 6 EN GX D D X7 Y22 OUT gt 3 EN OUT T A ES say oe o EN H T STR 2 7 EN GX C C out gt 2 2 ENT a ae ES 25 G5 po fut CD Sc 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 187 Interrupt Instructions Interrupt Ins
458. led PRINTY Port Number K2 Start Address Number of Bytes Append character s 4 Character rracaccnnnnconcncnncononond C 2 Characters Character Code 1 hexadecimal Character Code 2 hexadecimal Byte al Busy co j None Complete C All C All but Null Port Number port 2 K2 Start Address All V memory See page 3 53 Number of Bytes All V memory See page 3 53 or k1 128 Bits Busy Complete C0 3777 JJ Discrete Bit Flags Description I a i cc SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction e PS SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid g 2 SP116 On when CPU port 2 is communicating with al 3 another device gE SP117 On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error See the previous page for an example using the PRINTV instruction DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 227 ASCII Instructions ASCII Swap Bytes The ASCII Swap Bytes instruction swaps byte positions high byte to low byte SWAPB and low byte to high byte within each V memory register of a series of TR TE IZ V memory registers for a specified number of bytes on oe Starting Address specifies the begining o of a series of V memory registers the instruction will use to begin byte swapping SWAPB Number of Bytes specifies the number of Starting Address Y2500
459. ll DL205 programs require an END statement as the last instruction This tells the CPU it is the end of the program Normally any instructions placed after the END statement will not be executed There are exceptions to this such as interrupt routines etc The instruction set at the end of this chapter discussed this in detail X0 ai OUT All programs must have pS D and END statement nD pS Simple Rungs You will use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils The boolean instruction Store or STR instruction performs this function The output point is represented by the Output or OUT instruction The following example shows how to enter a single contact and a single output coil DirectSOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics STR X0 I af ouT END x0 Normally Closed Normally closed contacts are also very common This is accomplished with the Contact Store Not or STRN instruction The following example shows a simple rung with a normally closed contact DirectSOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics STRN X0 n We SOUT YO END SS D E Y 5 as so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn e md Z y DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 56 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Contacts in Series Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series The following example shows two contacts in series and a single output coil The instructions used Midline Outputs
460. ll enter the Program Diagnostics Mode turn off all outputs and report the l error For example the Handheld Programmer displays E003 S W TIMEOUT when the scan overrun occurs You can use AUX 53 to view the minimum maximum and current scan time Use AUX 55 to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value There is also an RSTWT instruction that can be used in the application program to reset the watch dog timer during the CPU scan DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EZ I O Response Time Is Timing Important l O response time is the amount of time required for the control system to sense a for Your change in an input point and update a corresponding output point In the majority of Application applications the CPU performs this task practically instantaneously However some applications do require extremely fast update times There are four things that can affect the I O response time e The point in the scan period when the field input changes states e Input module Off to On delay time e CPU scan time e Output module Off to On delay time Normal Minimum The I O response time is shortest when the module senses the input change before I O Response the Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle In this case the input status is read the application program is solved and the output point gets updated The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation
461. ll not operate However you can 38 successfully connect the supply and field device every time by understanding 2G sourcing and sinking 0 eS For example the figure to the right depicts a sinking input To properly connect the z ipii a PLC __ external supply you will have to connect it O so the input provides a path to ground eining Start at the PLC input terminal follow P Input through the input sensing circuit exit at Y Sensing the common terminal and connect the supply to the common terminal By gommans adding the switch between the supply ss Fe and the input the circuit has been completed Current flows in the direction of the arrow when the switch is closed By applying the circuit principle above to the four possible combinations of input output sinking sourcing types as shown below The l O module specifications at the end of this chapter list the input or output type Sinking Input Sinking Output PLC __ a PLO _ APS Output Load Input Output ani Y Sensing Switch Y 4 Common Common Ei a a AE J Sourcing Input Sourcing Output PLC PLC ays 4 ee ae 7 Common Y H Input Output ale Y Sensing Switch Y Input Pea epul Load AAA
462. llar sign means an 8 bit ASCII character code Also two characters preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table Character code Description 1 Dollar sign 2 Double quotation 3 L or l Line feed LF 4 N or n Carriage return line feed CRLF 5 P or p Form feed 6 R or r Carriage return CR 7 T or t Tab The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the printer Example oe Length O without character A Length 1 with character A 7 Length 1 with blank p Length 1 with double quotation mark S R L Length 2 with one CR and one LF 0D 0A Length 2 with one CR and one LF Length 1 with one mark In printing an ordinary line of text you will need to include double quotation marks before and after the text string Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction contains invalid text or no quotations It is important to test your PRINT instruction data during the application development The following example prints the message to port 2 We use a PD contact which causes the message instruction to be active for just one scan Note the N at the end of the message which produces a carriage return line feed on the printer This prepares the printer to print the next line starting from the left margin HL PRINT K2 Print the message to Port 2 when Hello t
463. lly used to manipulate data numbers store data numbers etc Some information is automatically stored Word Locations 16 bits in V memory For example the timer current values are stored in V memory 01110 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 o or O O 0 fed je SUONPOIIO9AdS NdI V Memory The discrete memory area is for inputs outputs control relays special relays Locations for stages timer status bits and counter status bits However you can also access the Discrete Memory bit data types as a V memory word Each V memory location contains 16 Areas consecutive discrete locations For example the following diagram shows how the X input points are mapped into V memory locations 16 Discrete X Input Points X17 x16 x15 x14 x13 x12 X11 X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 Xx3 x2 X1 X0 A II A AA Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o V40400 These discrete memory areas and their corresponding V memory ranges are listed in the memory area table for the DL230 DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs in this chapter DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ESJ CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc ne S os OG 50 ab ok el0 No gt as 0 Input Points X Data Type Output Points Y Data Type Co
464. location Aaaa and number of bits dele 230 240 250 1 260 Kbbb to be ANDed Discrete status flags indicate if the result is zero or a negative number the most significant bit 1 Operand Data DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type A B aaa bbb aaa bbb Inputs X 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 177 0 377 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Special Relays SP 0 777 0 777 320 717 320 717 Constant K 1 32 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative 8 NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads C10 C13 4 binary bits into the accumulator The accumulator contents is logically ANDed with the bit pattern from Y20 Y23 using the And Formatted instruction The Out Formatted instruction outputs the accumulator s lower four bits to C20 C23
465. losed comparative A V aaa B bbb 230 240 250 1 260 contact The contact will be on when Vaaa Bbbb Operand Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb V memory Vv All All All All All All All All See page 3 50 See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 4933 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E Cc A A A v2000 i 4 Y3 str SHFT 4 2 2 0 0 0 I q E J D D gt 4 9 3 3 ENT at gt 3 ENT In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 5060 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2000 K5060 P Y3 A SHET E gt Ie Wig O Wio sad F A G A gt 5 0 6 0 ENE ET gt i 3 yl 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Comparative Boolean Or If Equal The Or If Equ
466. lue will be 0 Bits DirectSOFT x1 UDC CT2 K3 X2 X3 CT2 Y10 OUT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR ES 1 ENT Cc STR gt 2 ENT D sta gt 3 ae U D Cc Cc SHFT ise 3 2 gt 2 Up Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts DirectSOFT X1 X1 X2 X3 CT2 Current Value Counting Diagram Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont D gt 3 ENT C T STR gt SHFT A SHFT ua J ENT GX B A OUT A 1 0 ENT In the following example when X1 makes an off to on transition counter CT2 will increment by one Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different counts When the reset X3 turns on the counter status bit will turn off the current value will be 0 and the comparative contacts will turn off UDC CT2 X2 V2000 X3 CTA2 K1 Y3 IV CTA2 K2 OUT Y4 Handheld Programmer Keys rokes STR ENT STR ENT STR ENT OUT SHFT SHFT ENT STR SHET 7 e X1 X2 X3 Y3 Y4 Current Value Counting Diagram
467. m See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the accumulator is ored with V2006 using the Or instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to V2010 using the Out instruction LD v2000 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator OR v2006 Or the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 OUT v2010 V2000 2 8 7 A The upper 16 bits of the accumulator ae a i ee will be set to 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Acc op o o popojo jojojoj oyopojo ofpofojpojo 1foj1j ojpojojo 1 1 1 1 O 1 0 a A wo N Acc 9000000000000000001010000d8d841 8 1010 6A38 OR V2006 9000000000000000 0110101000111 000 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 O O OJ OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 1 OF
468. m preset 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0 1 10 Seconds Timing Diagram preset 300 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0 1 10 Seconds DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EN CPU Operation Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good understanding of how DL205 CPUs control all aspects of system operation The flow chart below shows the main tasks of the CPU operating system In this section we CPU Operating System will investigate four aspects of CPU operation e CPU Operating System the CPU manages all aspects of system control e CPU Operating Modes The three primary modes of operation are Program Mode Run Mode and Test Mode e CPU Timing The two important areas we discuss are the I O response time and the CPU scan time e CPU Memory Map The CPUs memory map shows the CPU addresses of various system resources such as timers counters inputs and outputs At powerup the CPU initializes the internal electronic hardware Memory initialization starts with examining the retentive memory settings In general the contents of retentive memory is preserved and non retentive memory is initialized to zero unless otherwise specified After the one time powerup tasks the CPU begins the cyclical scan activity The flowchart to the right shows how the tasks differ based on the CPU m
469. mage register point makes an On to Off transition Thereafter the contact remains open until the next On to Off transition the symbol inside the contact represents the transition Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Aaaa Aaaa 1 Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Inputs X 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 177 0 377 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following example each time X1 is makes an Off to On transition Y4 will energize for one scan DirectSOFT32 x1 Y4 T our In the following example each time X1 is makes an On to Off transition Y4 will energize for one scan DirectSOFT32 X1 Y4 LI our Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR SHFT P D x 1 ENT OUT Y 4 ENT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes D mr Q D 02 o Q D pe Q D I STR SHFT N D X 1 ENT OUT Y 4 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Or Positive The Or Positive Differential instruction Differential logically ors a normally open contact in ORPD paralle
470. mage register however the Kgs 0 230 240 250 1 260 outputs in the range specified in the PausE Pause instruction will be turned off at the output module Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 In the following example when X1 is ON Y10 Y17 will be turned OFF at the output module The execution of the ladder program will not be affected DirectSOFT x1 Y10 YI7 Pa USE Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT INST 9 6 0 ENT ENT gt 1 0 gt 1 7 ENT l ae a 23 C5 TH CD SE ap DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Comparative Boolean 9 27 Comparative Boolean Store If Equal The Store If Equal instruction begins a STRE new rung or additional branch in a rung I I ASX with a normally open comparative ass Bbbb contact The contact will be on when 230 240 250 1 260 Vaaa Bbbb Store If Not Equal The Store If Not Equal instruction begins STRNE a new rung or additional branch in a rung Ta a a VE with a normally c
471. mer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D c A A A 72 SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 o 0 UN ENT 2 Q D K D G E H G A D l PS OR SHFT 3 gt SHFT IMP 3 6 4 7 6 SHFT 0 SHFT 3 8 ENT C5 uE GX D C A B A ci our ST 3 gt 2 0 1 o J ENT SE 09 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 77 Accumulator Logical Instructions Or The Or Formatted instruction logically Formatted ORs the binary value in the accumulator ORF and a specified range of discrete bits 1 32 The instruction requires a starting ___ ORF Aaaa x xX v v location Aaaa and the number of bits Spa 230 240 250 1 260 Kbbb to be ORed Discrete status flags indicate if the result is zero or negative the most significant bit 1 Operand Data DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type A B aaa bbb aaa bbb Inputs X 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 177 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 137 0 777 320 717 320 717 Global I O GX 0 3777 GY Constant K 1 32 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative 3 NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction us
472. mmer Keystrokes e gt F 1 ENT SHFT renee D a gt sHFT le E E ENT SHFT mise D a gt SHFT K ip c A ENT SHFT asta eo gt Ee o Wo 40 E SHET ORST Neri ano ORST 2 gt SHFT MP i 1 ENT WARNING The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0 If the offset or the specified data table range is large enough to cause data to be copied from V memory to beyond the end of the DLBL area then anything after the specified DLBL area will be replaced with invalid instructions 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Set Bit SETBIT XIXIX V 230 240 250 1 260 Reset Bit RSTBIT XIXIX IV 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The Set Bit instruction sets a single bit to one within a range of V memory locations SETBIT A aaa The Reset Bit instruction resets a single bit to zero within a range of V memory RSTBIT locations A aaa The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value O to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the tabl
473. module 4 8 I O terminal points Input voltage range 4 50 to 15 6VDC min to max Peak voltage 16VDC Input current 4mA 5VDC 11mA E 12VDC 14mA E 15VDC Max input current 16mA 15 6VDC Input impedance 1k ohms O 5 15VDC ON voltage level 4VDC OFF voltage level 2VDC Min ON current 3mA Max OFF current 0 5mA OFF to ON response 3 to 9ms ON to OFF response 3 to 9ms Status Indicators Module activity LED Terminal type removeable 40 pin Connector or ZIPLink sold separately Base power required 5V 25mA max all points on Weight 2 10z 60g 7 S Derating Chart Input Voltage 5VDC IN 24 Points Current Flow CT VDC 32 A n 15VDC T pz O a D2 32ND3 2 eee pe oe A As i b b b do do bo dsc vie HE AD TAG oo 32 50 68 86 104 122181 F De Loe Do i one T ASAT mae Ambient Temperature C F 7 Er oO CI CI oo 7 zan b0 B4 in Derating Chart Current Flow Ho B1 B5 oo Input Voltage 12VDC and 15VDC a spe O 621868 ao Poi tsvoc 4 aon or foo 83 B7 00 oints wane z SIER cufcn 54 ASA Co C4 oo Too a ES oo 16 15voc lt Current Flow pn Lo C6 oo eee C3 C7 oo 15VDC F eee cmfcm oo 0 o Do D4 00 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C D1 D5 oo 3
474. module 230 240 250 1 260 D2 RMSM to be installed in the local base The CPU updates the remote master then the remote master handles all communication to and from the remote I O base by communicating to the remote slave module D2 RSSS installed in each remote base DL250 1 and D2 260 CPU The CPU s comm port 2 features a built in Remote I O channel You may also use up to 7 D2 RMSM remote masters in the local base as described above you can use either or both methods DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Maximum number of Remote Masters supported in none 2 8 8 the local CPU base 1 channel per Remote Master CPU built in Remote I O channels none none 1 1 Maximum l O points supported by each channel none 2048 2048 2048 Maximum Remote I O points supported none limited by total references available Maximum number of remote I O bases per channel none 7 7 7 RM NET Maximum number of remote I O bases per channel none 31 31 31 SM NET Remote l O points map into different CPU memory locations therefore it does not reduce the number of local I O points Refer to the DL205 Remote I O manual for details on remote I O configuration and numbering Configuring the built in remote I O channel is described in the following section The following figure shows 1 CPU base and one remote I O channel with seven remote bases If the CPU is a DL250 1 or DL260 adding the first remote I O channel does
475. n Solve PID The DL260 CPU can process up to 16 PID loops and the DL250 1 can process up to Loop Equations 4 PID loops The loop calculations are run as a separate task from the ladder TE IF IS program execution immediately following it Only loops which have been configured are calculated and then only according to a built in loop scheduler The sample time calculation interval of each loop is programmable Please refer to Chapter 8 PID Loop Operation for more on the effects of PID loop calculation on the overall CPU scan time Write Outputs Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and constructed the output image register the CPU writes the contents of the output image register to the corresponding output points located in the local CPU base or the local expansion bases Remember the CPU also made sure any forcing operation changes were stored in the output image register so the forced points get updated with the status specified earlier 230 240 250 1 260 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EZ CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc Ss 5 2 OT 50 g2 el0 No D as 0 Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I O Diagnostics After the CPU updates the outputs in the local and expansion bases it sends the output point information that is required by any Specialty modules which are installed For example this is the portion of the scan that writes t
476. n This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator The greater than search value is specified in the Find Greater Than instruction If a value is found greater than the search value the offset from the starting location of the table where the value is located will reside in the accumulator If there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value a zero is stored in the accumulator and SP53 will come ON DirectSOFT32 Display ina LD I K6 Load the constant value 6 HEX into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Begin here gt 0 1 J2 To vio o Pere LDA 0 5 0j 0j vi401 1 Accumulator O 1400 9191919 v1402 2 gt 0000000 2 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 3p0 7 4 vi403 3 V1402 contains the location 300 and load the value into here the first val t 8 918 9 V1404 4 where the Tirst value greater the accumulator than the search value was 1 0 1 0f v1405 5 found 9999 was the 2nd location after the start of the FDGT X X X X v1406 specified table K8989 X X X X V1407 Find the value in the table greater than the specified value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D G SHFT llanpstTi 3 g
477. n bits to be shifted from right to left The maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control relays The minimum block size is 8 control relays Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Control Relay Cc 0 377 0 377 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 1777 0 3777 0 3777 DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B T Xx Data Input SR STR gt 1 d Cc T str gt 2 En x2 From CO i Clock Input lock Inpu sth gt 3 EN Ss R A To C17 SHFT 267 SHFT orn SHFT gt 6 gt B H 5 ENT X3 Reset Input Inputs on Successive Scans Shift Register Bits Data Clock Reset 1 4 0 CO C17 0 1 0 __ Fa TS 0 1 0 __ ZO 1 1 0 __ BE FE 0 1 0 __ Y 0 0 1 indicates on indicates off DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 53 Accumulator Stack Load Accumulator Stack Load and Output Data Instructions Using the The accumulator in the DL205 series CPUs is a 32 bit register which is used as a Accumulator temporary storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manor For example you have to use the accumulator to perform math operat
478. n a separate supply must be used as shown to the right in the figure below Separate Supplies O AC Power S AC Power o gt 20 oe Power Input Power Input 2 di DL205 PLC ps DL205 PLC E S pe 345 Auxiliary Input Module Output Module Auxiliary Input Module Output Module 8s 24VDC 24VDC aS Supply Inputs Com Outputs Com Supply Inputs Com Outputs Com Ze ry ry L ry ry L ty 7 y y ty gt y y OO E Loads 29 Loads Load Supply Some applications will use the PLC external power source to also power the input circuit This typically occurs on DC powered PLCs as shown in the drawing below to the left The inputs share the PLC power source supply while the outputs have their own separate supply A worst case scenario from a cost and complexity view point is an application which requires separate power sources for the PLC input devices and output loads The example wiring diagram below on the right shows how this can work but also the auxiliary supply output is an unused resource You will want to avoid this situation if possible o DC Power A AC Power ad Y Y DL205 PLC Power Input DL205 PLC Po
479. n port so you can easily connect a handheld programmer or a personal computer without needing any additional hardware The DL240 has a maximum of 3 8K of memory comprised of 2 5K of ladder memory and approximately 1 3K of V memory data registers There are129 instructions available for program development and a maximum of 256 points local I O and 896 points with remote I O are supported Program storage is in the EEPROM which is installed at the factory In addition to the EEPROM there is also RAM on the CPU which will store system parameters V memory and other data which is not in the application program The DL240 has two communication ports The top port is the same port configuration as the DL230 The bottom port also supports the DirectNET protocol so you can use the DL240 in a DirectNET network Since the port is RS232C you must use an RS232C RS422 converter for multi drop connections DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation 33 DL250 1 CPU The DL250 1 replaces the DL250 CPU It offers all the DL240 features plus more Features program instructions a built in Remote l O Master port It offers all the features of the DL250 CPU with the addition of supporting Local expansion I O It has a maximum of 14 8K of program memory comprised of 7 6K of ladder memory and 7 2K of V memory data registers It supports a maximum of 256 points of local I O and a maximum of 768 I O points max of two local expansion b
480. n the stack into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Hexadecimal A A X1 uel Value in 1st level of stack is LD ojojoj used as offset The value is 1 I Ki The unused accumulator Accumulator Stack Load the offset value of 1 K1 into the lower 16 bits are set to zero A re bits of the accumulator Acc 9 9 9 0 0 14 Leveli 0 000000 1 Level2 X X X X X X X X LDSX Ko Level3 X X X X X X X X Constan Level4 X X X X X X X X Move the offset to the stack kjopojoj2 Load the accumulator with the data label Level 6 50 RENTA A number The unused accumulator Level6 X X X X X X X X bits are set to zero Levl7 X XX XX XXX T on Acc L919 19 2 9 2 Level8 X X X X X X X X Vv2000 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2000 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero END Be AGE ojojojo 2 3 2 3 Acc DLBL K2 2l3l2 3 NCON Offset 0 K3333 2000 _o 50 as e eS NCON Offset 1 os K2323 52 5 mn NCON aneri K4549 dd DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load
481. nd V1501 using the Out Double instruction The handheld programmer would display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 Xt D ololols 7 2 4 1 1 v1400 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator 8421 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 18 4 2 18 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Acc opojojofojojojojojojopojo 1poj1 poj1 1p1jojop1fpojo jop1jojojoJoj 1 2 exp 18 AR Binary Value 127 18 145 145 128 16 1 BTOR Convert the binary value in the accumulator to the real number equivalent format Acc op1jopop1jojojoj1jop1fpoj1 1p1joj pojo 1poj1jojojojo o 1jojojojojo Sign Bit Exponent 8 bits Mantissa 23 bits Real Number Format OUTD V1500 4lelaAlell4lelalo The real number HEX value Copy the real value in the copied to V1500 accumulator to V1500 and V1501 V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D B E A A SHFT lanosT 3 3 gt ENT l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp SHFT B T 7 ENT GX D B F A A our SHFT 3 gt 1 5 0 0 ENT
482. nd or limit z Disconnect switches you can prevent accidental equipment startup When installed properly de these devices will prevent any machine operations from occurring For example if the machine has a jammed part the PLC control program can turn off the saw blade and retract the arbor However since the operator must open the guard to remove the part you must include a bypass switch to disconnect all system power any time the guard is opened The operator must also have a quick method of manually disconnecting all system power This is accomplished with a mechanical device clearly labeled as an Emergency Stop switch Use E Stop and Master Relay estop Power On Guard a Guard Limit Switch TE Limit elay a oe e P Master Relay Contacts Master Relay Contacts To disconnect PLC Power Output Master Module Saw Relay Contacts Abor To disconnect output module power After an Emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption there may be requirements that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted For example there may be specific register values that must be established or maintained from the state prior to the shutdown before operations can resume In this case you may want to use retentive memory locations or include constants in the control progr
483. nder resides in the B first stack location Io STR gt 1 ENT xS Level1 0 0 0 00000 L D B E A A os SHFT anost 3 gt 1 4 o g ENT Level2 X X XX XX X X SO 32 E D D gt e E C A air Level3 X X X XX X X X on ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0 Level4 X X X X X X X X Cc D V B S Level5 X X X X X X X X SHFT ENT Y 3 E AND L RST Level6 X X X X X X X X GX D B F A A L X X X XX X X X Our SHFT 5 gt a 5 r o ENT evel 7 Level8 X X X X X X X X DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 121 Math Instructions Transcendental Functions The DL260 CPU features special numerical functions to complement its real number capability The transcendental functions include the trigonometric sine cosine and tangent and also their inverses arc sine arc cosine and arc tangent The square root function is also grouped with these other functions The transcendental math instructions operate on a real number in the accumulator it cannot be BCD or binary The real number result resides in the accumulator The square root function operates on the full range of positive real numbers The sine cosine and tangent functions require numbers expressed in radians You can work with angles expressed in degrees by first converting them to radians with the Radian RAD instruction then performing the trig function All transcendental functions utilize the following flag bits
484. ndicators to show the status of the input Module Status points Indicators Status indicators gt E E B oo AY ooo ooo uo e e1su Terminal t E o 09 yo D Q p O EY ULM fe D 9 Optio Pogra Y Lod Terminal Cover installed Wire tray area behind terminal cover Color Coding of I O The DL205 family of I O modules have a color coding scheme to help you quickly Modules identify if a module is either an input module output module or a specialty module This is done through a color bar indicator located on the front of each module The color scheme is listed below i Sabie Be EE ER SE olor Bar 0542857 EZ Komm el 34 e 27 Module Type Color Code el ET Discrete Analog Output Red e E Discrete Analog Input Blue Other White nr DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EZS Installation Wiring and Specifications Wiring the Different There are two types of module connectors for the DL205 I O Some modules have 5A ale Z Z ad Z 2 A So 50 pes hale ve EU Module Connectors normal screw terminal connectors Other modules h
485. nds Time Maximum 3 6 Seconds 2 0 Seconds 2 7 Seconds 3 7 Seconds Time w 2 exp w 4 exp bases bases The time required to read the input status for the input modules depends on which CPU you are using and the number of input points in the base The following table shows typical update times required by the CPU Timing Factors DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Overhead 64 0 us 32 0 us 12 6 us 12 6 us Per input point 6 0 us 12 3 us 2 5 us 2 5 us For example the time required for a DL240 to read two 8 point input modules would be calculated as follows Where NI is the total number of input points Formula Time 32us 12 3 x NI Example Time 32us 12 3 x 16 Time 228 8 us NOTE This information provides the amount of time the CPU spends reading the input status from the modules Don t confuse this with the I O response time that was discussed earlier CPU Specifications and Operation Reading Inputs During this portion of the cycle the CPU reads any input points associated with the from Specialty I O following e Remote I O e Specialty Modules such as High Speed Counter etc The time required to read any input status from these modules depends on which CPU you are using the number of modules and the number of input points Remote Module DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Overhead N A 6 0 us 1 82 us 1 82 us Per module N A 67 0 us 17 9 us 17 9 us
486. ng the Analog Potentiometer Ranges XIXYIxX X 230 240 250 1 260 CPU Specifications and Operation ESA There are 4 analog potentiometers pots on the face plate of the DL240 CPU These pots can be used to change timer constants frequency of pulse train output value for an analog output module etc Each analog channel has corresponding V memory locations for setting lower and upper limits for each analog channel The table below shows the V memory locations used for each analog channel N r LAA pwr C Cd un part IE E cru DL240 CPU TERM Analog Pots eon The following V memory locations are the default location for the analog pots CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Analog Data V3774 V3775 V3776 V3777 Analog Data Lower Limit V7640 V7642 V7644 V7646 Analog Data Upper Limit V7641 V7643 V7645 V7647 You can use the program logic to load the limits into these locations or you can use a programming device to load the values The range for each limit is O 9999 These analog pots have a resolution of 256 pieces Therefore if the span between the upper and lower limits is less than or equal to 256 then you have better resolution or more precise control Use the formula shown to determine the smallest amount of change that can be detected For example a range of 100 600 would result in a resolution of 1 95 Therefore the smalles
487. nly until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is divided by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double instruction The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator an the remainder resides in the first stack location The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display v1401 V1400 a LDD o 1 5 o ofojojo Led V1400 Load the value in V1400 and The unused accumulator V1401 into the accumulator bits are set to zero 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 Accumulator DIVD 0 00 O 00 5 0 V1421 and V1420 v1420 Acc 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The value in the accumulator is divided by the value in V1420 and V1421 First stack location contains the remainder OUTD 1500 ojojoj3 pojojoj o Copy the value in the V1501 V1500 l accumulator to V1500 1 and V1501 ac os Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 5 SO B 5 sra gt i ENT Y YN L D D B E A A Sec SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 1 4 0 o ENT 09 D Vv B E Cc A SHET 3 8 AND gt 1 4 2 0 ENT GX D B F A A our SHET 3 gt
488. nsion cables connect the expansion bases and CPU base in daisy chain format e Remote I O consists of I O modules located in bases which are serially connected to the local CPU base through a Remote Master module or may connect directly to the bottom port on a DL250 1 or DL260 CPU A DL205 system can be developed using many different arrangements of these configurations All I O configurations use the standard complement of DL205 I O modules and bases Local expansion requires using 1 bases Networking The DL205 PLCs offers the following way to add networking to the system Configurations e Ethernet Communications Module connects DL205 systems DL240 DL250 1 or DL260 CPUs only and DL405 CPU systems in high speed peer to peer networks Any PLC can initiate communications with any other PLC when using the ECOM modules e Data Communications Module connects a DL205 DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 only system to devices using the DirectNET protocol or connects as a slave to a MODBUS RTU network e DL250 1 Communications Port The DL250 1 CPU has a 15 Pin connector on Port 2 that provides a built in MODBUS RTU or DirectNET master slave connection e DL260 Communications Port The DL260 CPU has a 15 Pin connector on Port 2 that provides a built in DirectNET master slave or MODBUS RTU master slave connection with more MODBUS function codes than the DL250 1 The DL260 MRX and MWX instructions allow you to enter n
489. nstruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads the binary value 6 from C10 C13 into the accumulator The CMPF instruction compares the value in the accumulator to the value in Y20 Y23 E hex The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison In this example if the value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction SP60 will turn on energizing C30 DirectSOFT32 X1 LDF C10 Load the value of the Location Constant C13 C12 C11 C10 Ji specified discrete locations C10 Ka K4 C10 C13 into the OFF ON ON OFF accumu tor The unused accumulator bits are set to zero ed Compare the value in the GMPF x20 accumulator with the value K4 of the specified discrete Acc 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 location Y20 Y23 Compared ve 930 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 da OUT ON ON ON OFF ha AS E 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 H DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions Compare with The Compare with Stack instruction is a Stack 32 bit instruction that compares the value ___ CMPS CMPS in the accumulator with the value in the first level of the accumulator stack xX X
490. ntact will be opposite the status of the associated input point on the module at SN ey See eee the time the instruction is executed The X aaa image register is not updated Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 In the following example when X1 or X2 is on Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 X1 Y5 our Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENIT Q Cc or SHFT 3 gt 7 ENT GX F OUT gt 5 ENT In the following example when X1 is on or X2 is off Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 X1 Y5 our X2 te l ze ante 23 os Handheld Programmer Keystrokes po fut Su B ENT p str gt 1 vn R Cc orn SHFT 7 gt 2 ENT GX F OUT gt 5 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ESTE Immediate Instructions And Immediate The And Immediate connects two ANDI contacts in series The status of the Iis Lid contact will be the same as the status of the associated input point on the module a 230 240 250 1 260 at the time the instruction is executed The image register is not updated And Not Immediate The And Not Immediate connects two ANDNI co
491. ntacts in series The status of the YViviviv contact will be opposite the status of the associated input point on the module at i i ia 230 240 250 1 260 the time the instruction is executed The image register is not updated Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 In the following example when X1 and X2 are on Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR F 1 ENT v l c Ano SHFT s gt A ENT GX F OUT 5 ENT In the following example when X1 is on and X2 is off Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 A OUT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENE w f C ANDN SHFT 8 gt 7 ENT GX F OUT gt 5 ENT 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES Standard RLL Instructions Immediate Instructions Out Immediate The Out Immediate instruction reflects the OUTI status of the rung on off and outputs the XIX LiF discrete on off status to the specified module output point and the image register Yaaa 230 240 250 1 260 ar the time the instruction is executed If our multiple Out Immediate instructions referencing the same discrete point are used it is possible fo
492. nter and Shift Register Up Down Counter UDC Y IVY Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 This Up Down Counter counts up on each off to on transition of the Up input and Up counts down on each off to on transition of the Down input The counter is reset to 0 when the Reset input is on The count range is 0 99999999 The count input not being used must be off in order for the active count input to function CT aad B bbb UDC own Counter Reset Preset Instruction Specification Counter Reference CTaaa Specifies the counter number Preset Value Bbbb Constant value K or two consecutive V memory locations Pointer P for DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 Current Values Current count is a double word value accessed by referencing the associated V or CT memory locations The V memory location is the counter location 1000 For example the counter current value for CT5 resides in V memory location V1005 and V1006 Discrete Status Bit The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory location It will be on if value is equal to or greater than the preset value For example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2 Caution The UDC uses two V memory locations for the 8 digit current value This means the UDC uses two consecutive counter locations If UDC CT1 is used in the program the next available counter is CT3 The counter discrete
493. ntroduction Using Boolean Instructions Boolean Instructions Comparative Boolean Instructions Immediate Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register Instructions Accumulator Stack Load and Output Data Instructions Accumulator Logical Instructions Math Instructions Transcendental Instructions Bit Operation Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Table Instructions Clock Calendar Instructions CPU Control Instructions Program Control Instructions Interrupt Instructions Intelligent I O Instructions Network Instructions Message Instructions MODBUS RTU Instructions ASCII Instructions Standard RLL Instructions Introduction The DL205 CPUs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of operations There are several instructions that are not available in all of the CPUs This chapter shows you how to use these individual instructions There are two ways to quickly find the instruction you need e f you know the instruction category Boolean Comparative Boolean etc use the header at the top of the page to find the pages that discuss the instructions in that category e f you know the individual instruction name use the following table to find the page that discusses the instruction
494. ntrol Relays C Data Type Timers and Timer Status Bits T Data type The discrete input points are noted by an X data type There are up to 512 discrete input points available with the DL205 CPUs In this example the output point YO will be turned on when input XO energizes The discrete output points are noted by a Y data type There are up to 512 discrete output points available with the DL205 CPUs In this example output point Y1 will turn on when input X1 energizes Control relays are discrete bits normally used to control the user program The control relays do not represent a real world device that is they cannot be physically tied to switches output coils etc They are internal to the CPU Control relays can be programmed as discrete inputs or discrete outputs These locations are used in programming the discrete memory locations C or the corresponding word location which has 16 consecutive discrete locations In this example memory location C5 will energize when input X10 turns on The second rung shows a simple example of how to use a control relay as an input The amount of timers available depends on the model of CPU you are using The tables at the end of this section provide the number of timers for the DL230 DL240 D2 250 1 and DL260 Regardless of the number of timers you have access to timer status bits that reflect the relationship between the current value and the preset value of a specified t
495. nts in integer format or real format Use V memory number or V memory number with and data type The data types are shown in the table below The Character code must be capital letters NOTE There must be a space entered before and after the V memory address to separate it from the text string Failure to do this will result in an error code 499 Character code Description 1 none 16 bit binary decimal number 2 B 4 digit BCD 3 D 32 bit binary decimal number 4 DB 8 digit BCD 5 Floating point number real number 6 E Floating point number real number with exponent Examples V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number V2000 B Print BCD data in V2000 V2000 D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number V2000 D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001 V2000 R Print floating point number in V2000 V2001 as real number V2000 E Print floating point number in V2000 V2001 as real number with exponent The following modifiers can be added to any of the modifies above to suppress or convert leading zeros or spaces The character code must be capital letters Character code Description 1 S Suppresses leading spaces 2 co Converts leading spaces to zeros 3 0 Suppresses leading zeros Example with V2000 0018 binary format V memory Number of Characters Register with Modifier 1 2 3 4 V2000 0 0 1 8 V2000 B 0 0
496. nual 3rd Ed 06 02 for Each Module System Design and Configuration 1 O Points Required Each type of module requires a certain number of I O points This is also true for the specialty modules such as analog counter interface etc DC Input Modules Number of I O Pts Required Specialty Modules etc Number of I O Pts Required D2 08ND3 8 Input H2 ECOM F None D2 16ND3 2 16 Input D2 DCM None D2 32ND3 2 32 Input H2 ERM F None AC Input Modules H2 EBC F None D2 08NA 1 8 Input D2 RMSM None D2 08NA 2 8 Input D2 RSSS None D2 16NA 16 Input F2 CP128 None DC Output Modules H2 CTRIO None D2 04TD1 8 Output Only the first four D2 CTRINT 8 Input points are used 8 Output D2 08TD1 8 Output F2 DEVNETS 1 None D2 16TD1 2 16 Output H2 PBC None D2 16TD2 2 16 Output F2 SDS 1 None D2 32TD1 2 32 Output D2 08SIM 8 Input AC Output Modules D2 EM None D2 08TA 8 Output D2 CM None F2 08TA 8 Output D2 12TA 16 Output See note 1 Relay Output Modules D2 04TRS 8 Output Only the first four points are used D2 08TR 8 Output F2 08TRS 8 Output F2 08TR 8 Output D2 12TR 16 Output See note 1 c Combination Modules Ss D2 08CDR 8 In 8 Out Only the first four ND S points are used for each type AD Analog Modules EE oO F2 04AD 1 L 16 Input vo F2 04AD 2 L 16 Input op F2 08AD 1 16 Input F2 02DA
497. o ia OFF on OFF OFF Result of Program Image Register example Siri Specialty Modules such as the Data Communications Module can transfer data to and from the CPU over the CPU bus on the backplane This data is more than standard I O point status This type of communications can only occur on the CPU local base There is a portion of the execution cycle used to communicate with these modules The CPU performs both read and write requests during this segment The DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs have an internal real time clock and calendar timer which is accessible to the application program Special V memory locations hold this information This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get updated on every scan Also there are several different Special Relays such as diagnostic relays etc that are also updated during this segment DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EZ Solve Application The CPU evaluates each instruction in the s Program application program during this segment of the scan cycle The instructions define Read Inputs the relationship between input conditions Y and the system outputs Read Inputs from Specialty I O The CPU begins
498. o cT oO YO Jo Oc 99 Communications Typically network communications will sp 17 v1 from a last longer than 1 scan The program must SET Ladder Program wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction SP116 LD KF101 Port Communication Error a Port Busy Koo LDA 040600 RX YO The port which can be a master has two Special Relay contacts associated with it see Appendix D for comm port special relays One indicates Port busy SP116 and the other indicates Port Communication Error SP117 The example above shows the use of these contacts for a network master that only reads a device RX The Port Busy bit is on while the PLC communicates with the slave When the bit is off the program can initiate the next network request The Port Communication Error bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error Use of this bit is optional When used it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed Multiple Read and If you are using multiple reads and writes Interlocking Relay Write Interlocks in the RLL program you have to interlock sp316 C100 the routines to make sure all the routines IY REO are executed If you don t use the interlocks then the CPU will only execute LD
499. o after 1st LDD X1 LD Load the value in V1400 into the accumulator The unused accumulator Level1 X X X X X X X X 1 V1400 bits are set to zero _ Level2 X X X X X X X X Acc 9 9 0 9 2 0 Level3 X X X X X X X X Level4 X X X X X X X X V1421 V1420 5 X X X X X X X X rep Load the value in V1420 and 918130 il be 079 6 X X X XX X X X video V1421 into the accumulator 7 xX xxxxxx x 8 X X X X X X X X Acc O0JO 5 0 0 0 0 0 Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD DIVS Divide the value in the Leveli 0 0 000 0 2 0 accumulator by the value in the first level of the Acc 9 1 19 2 9 0 0 0 Level2 X X X XX XXX accumulator stack Level3 X X X X X X X X Level4 X X X X X X X X OUTD Copy the value in the Level5 X X X X X X X X accumulator to V1500 V1500 and V1501 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0 Level6 X X X X X X X X V1501 V1500 Level7 X X X X X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level8 X X X X X X X X enn gt B 4 ENT The remainder resides in the l first stack location L D B E A A re SHFT ANDST 3 gt 1 4 0 0 ENT Leveli 0 0 000 0 0 0 je Level2 X X X X X X X X PS SHFT L D D gt B E c A ENT os ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0 Level3 X X X X X X XK X E SHFT P l v S ENT Level4 X X X X X X X X Ge 3 8 AND RST Levels X X X XX XX X mn GX D B F A A Levele X X X XX Xx Xx X our SHFT 3 gt i 7 7 o ENT evel Level 7 X X X X X X X X Level8 X X X X X X X X DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions
500. o be assigned if necessary 230 240 250 1 260 DL260 DL250 1 DL250 DL240 DL230 Total number of local expansion bases per system 5 3 These CPUs do not sup Maximum number of expansion bases 4 2 port local oe aye Total I O includes CPU base and expansion bases 1280 768 Maximum inputs 1024 512 Maximum outputs 1024 512 Maximum expansion system cable length 30m 98ft D2 CM Local A Rane nodule The D2 CM module is placed in the CPU slot of each Mer expansion base The rotary MEIE switch is used to select the SB expansion base number The EM A expansion base I O addressing Xs and Ys is based on the numerical order Se of the rotary switch selection e R and is recognized by the CPU on power up Duplicate expansion base numbers will not be recognized by the CPU uBIseq TES The status indicator LEDs on the D2 CM front panels have specific functions which can help in programming and troubleshooting v 5 Os 0 O Co ome j o e 5 D2 CM Indicators Status Meaning PWR ON Power good Green OFF Power failure RUN ON D2 CM has established communication with PLC Green OFF D2 CM has not established communication with PLC DIAG ON Hardware watch dog failure Red ON OFF I O module failure ON 500ms OFF 500ms OFF No D2 CM error
501. o the CPU The addresses are assigned in groups of 8 or 16 depending on the number of points for the I O module The discrete input and output modules can be mixed in any order but there may be restrictions placed on some specialty modules The following diagram shows the I O numbering convention for an example system Both the Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT32 provide AUX functions that allow you to automatically configure the I O For example with the Handheld Programmer AUX 46 executes an automatic configuration which allows the CPU to examine the installed modules and determine the I O configuration and addressing With DirectSOFT32 the PLC Configure I O menu option would be used X XIS Y 230 240 250 1 260 Cc 5s Ho os AD ec oO BO Oo Nc Slot Slot 3 Siomay 8pt Input 16pt Output 16pt Input 8pt Input X0 X7 YO Y17 X10 X27 X30 X37 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Manual 8pt Input 16pt Output 16pt Input 8pt Input X0 X7 YO Y17 X100 X117 X20 X27 It may never become necessary but DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs allow manual I O address assignments for any I O slot s in local or local expansion bases You can manually modify an auto configuration to match arbitrary I O numbering For example two adjacent input modules can have starting addresses at X20 and X200 Use DirectSOFT32 PLC Configure I O menu option
502. ode and the existence of any errors The scan time is defined as the average time around the task loop Note that the CPU is always reading the inputs even during program mode This allows programming tools to monitor input status at any time The outputs are only updated in Run mode In program mode they are in the off state In Run Mode the CPU executes the user ladder program Immediately afterwards any PID loops which are configured are executed DL250 only Then the CPU writes the output results of these two tasks to the appropriate output points Error detection has two levels Non fatal errors are reported but the CPU remains in its current mode If a fatal error occurs the CPU is forced into program mode and the outputs go off DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Initialize hardware Check I O module config and verify Initialize various memory based on retentive configuration Update input Read input data from Specialty and Remote I O Service peripheral CPU Bus Communication Update Clock Calendar RUN Execute ladder program PID Operations DL250 Update output Write output data to Specialty and Remote I O Do diagnostics Report the error set flag register turn on LED NO Fatal error YES Force CPU into PGM mode CR v J a e Lol D
503. odule Unit Local CPU Base Local Expansion Remote l O Base Base CPUs CPU Slot Only DC Input Modules Y Y Y AC Input Modules Y Y Y DC Output Modules Y Y Y AC Output Modules Y vr Y Relay Output Modules Y Y Y Analog Input and Output Modules Y Y Y Local Expansion Base Expansion Module Y Y Base Controller Module CPU Slot Only Serial Remote I O Remote Master Y Remote Slave Unit CPU Slot Only Ethernet Remote Master Y CPU Interface Ethernet Base Controller Slot 0 Only Slot 0 Only WinPLC Slot 0 Only DeviceNet Slot 0 Only Profibus Slot 0 Only SDS Slot 0 Only Specialty Modules Counter Interface Slot 0 Only Counter I O Y nt Data Communications Y Ethernet Communications Y BASIC CoProcessor Y Simulator Y Y Y Filler Y Y Y When used with H2 ERM Ethernet Remote l O system DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications 2 25 Special Placement In most cases the analog modules can be placed in any slot However the Considerations for placement can also depend on the type of CPU you are using and the other types of Analog Modules modules installed to the left of the analog modules If you re using a DL230 CPU or a DL240 CPU with firmware earlier than V1 4 you should check the DL205 Analog I O Manual for any possible placement restrictions related to your particular module You can order the DL205 Analog I O Manual by ordering part number D2 ANLG M Discrete Input The discrete modules provide LED status i
504. ol 5 115 Divide by Top of Stack BINS lt oasis A o 2a 5 116 Add Binary Top of Stack ADDBS csud oc Se A dhl Peed LAA Redeye 5 117 Subtract Binary Top of Stack SUBBS 422 422d bos A Ge ed Ze 5 118 Multiply Binary Top of Stack MULBS 2000 22 4 sane wowed eed a ees A 5 119 Divide Binary by Top of Stack DIVBS oocooocccccccccnnc 5 120 Transcendental Functions cooccocconcco eee eee eee e eee eee eeeeeee 5 121 Sine Gali OUNEL SS aia ea thee ae ta ses A ele ad Med ea a A 5 121 Cosine Real COSA er ira A AS eames de Galea o Bae eee ee ede ee ans 5 121 Tangent Real TANR a ii rrranai acna Sete cen a rad o one eee we 5 121 ALC MS ASA ASIN css ii A A ane da A ti ene eae 5 121 Arc Cosme Real ACOSR Gus copas de 5 122 Arc Tangent Real ATANR ooo a a a ake do 5 122 Square Root Real SQRTR A dt eae 5 122 Bit Operation Instructions 6 0 62 sass ee A ee eee ee ee eee ee eee 5 123 SUMSUM actress A a cdo lee pea og a andes DA are 5 123 Shift Left SHFL ipana nea hide Seka ada peels ada eke ales 5 124 A Po PM ee 5 125 Rotate Left ROTL a Be a ean Boat Derren ental a AG Ae ee aaa eB AS 5 126 Table of Contents EJS Rotate Right HOME SI AE E AA A a mae 5 127 Encode ENGO eiee a a AS dica in AE 5 128 Decode DECO aires snene ersan e Ee wel Uns ios llas Re 5 129 Number Conversion Instructions Accumulator ooooccccncnccnn 5 130 Binary BIN cecina E ASS E EE AEE 5 130 Binary Coded Decimal BCD ars ii eee eee A cea ias 5 131
505. oled aS E A S ale eee S meses Badass 5 19 Positive Differential PD Saa eee meen an 5 20 Store Positive Differential STRPD soria A det A ees 5 21 Store Negativo Differential S PRND copo ria it bts AN A A 5 21 Or Positive Differential ORPD a a dd ida aie ria cal 5 22 Or Negative Differential ORND covtoorcot rinda id e RA 5 22 Table of Contents And Positive Differential ANDPD 0 ccc eee eee 5 23 And Negative Differential ANDND 0000 cece eee 5 23 SOSA wae eye A EN a E Oi cea ies Wee ao eE Non e ERS 5 24 A O O EOS NO 5 24 Set Bit ol Word SETB eere caeicind arriba eit ad dee E EREA AE ad a veer ae 5 25 Reset Bit ot Word HS 1B cansar e vas 5 25 Pause PAUSE unid das tasa E EAE RA A ASA 5 26 Comparative Boolean 2 0 e200 vec aora RR 5 27 SOSA REQUA SURE toi ori Phd keane it AAA eats edhe wee hae 5 27 Store If Not Equal STRNE traste A thd e Ib demas 5 27 ONPE DRAE ESE A E EENEN 5 28 Or IfNotEg al ORNE ut e ra adn Acad UND Gerd cg el eat aa 5 28 Andit E Qual ANDEJ eer saca as a aud Bares 5 29 And If Not Equal ANDNE 2002 A RR RI A AE A tan 5 29 Store STR rt de AS ad ia acne 5 30 Store Not STRN sresti aadis AA A ta 5 30 OO cs a OS TS E E NE Eo 5 31 ONO ORNATO S EOE i 5 31 And AND oral tia RR A tte A Gera dean eds 5 32 And N t ANDN MCE tran yer a A Ns 5 32 Immediate Instructions ccoooccccccc eee eee 5 33 Store Immediate STRI crie rrn ke A eh ad Ad a a 5 33 Store
506. om Table APT rd dd dao be 5 163 Add to TOPMATT nep A AAA 5 166 Table Shit ben ISHFE ui ori da Seed ee iS la 5 169 Table SHIT Right CL SHIPR att chan whe A Aaa E s als 5 169 AND Move ANDMOV coco sara egies rs Eb a dee he eee ade Rots 5 171 ORIMOVe ORMOWV lt lt ansias ridad wade teat heen edad hie lal ead A ete 5 171 Exclusive OR Move XORMOV obs sad plete sews ees hahaa ease eee 5 171 Find Block FINDB ooo pet Wald BEER wad a Rhea ed OE ake RA 5 173 Swap SWAP cts wens ete a ale eee a ee ee ees eee heater ead aa 5 174 Clock Calendar Instructions lt A N Oot sere AA ere 5 175 Datel DATE reer ta nee oe Gone arr rr areca oer rer re oor E RPO EEE ATA MOREE a Tene ar 5 175 Time TIME A A ES A A dE 5 176 CPU Control Instructions tati as ai eee 5 177 NO Operation NOP ser darnie teuen aaa seeder anes ewatstedestaeor sees eins ee ees 5 177 ENA END Rc gees Cot ane 5 177 Stop STOP eraa a waked AS a Va eee Rares aes 5 178 Reset Watch Dog Timer RSTWT ar AS AA A Stes 5 178 EIN Table of Contents Program Control Instructions oooococcoccncconn eee eee eens 5 179 Goo Lab GOTO EBM Na A EE E O 5 179 For Next POR NED sir a as 5 180 Goto Subroutine GTS SBR odias si aa ai see 5 182 Subroutine Return RT ise Ge thd RD eS ace ald Ais fa At 5 182 Subroutine Return Conditional RTO correctas aora a cinder dedi baa Ae 5 182 Master Line Set MLS 20003 sii RAN 5 185 Master Line Reset MLR ic dees SS E A cae S
507. om the bottom of a RFB V memory table to a V memory location and xiz zig decrements a table pointer by 1 The first V __ RFB memory location in the table contains the Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 table pointer which indicates the next location in the table to be moved The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on The instruction will stop operation when the pointer equals 0 The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Remove From Bottom function Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value O to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator Remember the starting location of the table blank is used as the table pointer This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Insert the RFB instructions which specifies destination V memory location Vaaa Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Helpful Hint The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on If you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan a one
508. on DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 47 Timer Counter and Shift Register Counter Example In the following example when X1 makes an off to on transition counter CT2 will Using Discrete increment by one When the current value reaches the preset value of 3 the counter Status Bits status bit CT2 will turn on and energize Y10 When the reset C10 turns on the counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0 The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V memory location V1002 DirectSOFT Counting diagram x1 CNT CT2 X1 K3 AS C10 C10 CT2 Y10 Y10 OUT Current 1 2 3 4 0 Value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont B Cc EN Cc SR gt i ENT STH gt SHFT 5 SHFT LR A ENT Cc B A GX B A str gt SHFT A 1 on ENT out gt 1 op ENT GY Cc D CNT gt 2 A 3 ENT Counter Example In the following example when X1 makes an off to on transition counter CT2 will Using Comparative increment by one Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 Y4 and Y5 at Contacts different counts When the reset C10 turns on the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 0 and the comparative contacts will turn o
509. on Resistance gt 10 Me at 500 VDC Auxiliary 24 VDC Output 20 28 VDC less than 1V p p 20 28 VDC less than 1V p p 300 mA max 300 mA max Fusing internal to base non replaceable 2A 250V non replaceable 3 15A O non replaceable 2A 250V power supply slow blow fuse external fus 250V slow blow fuse exter slow blow fuse external fus ing recommended nal fusing recommended ing recommended DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uonyelado pue suoneaoads Add CPU Specifications and Operation CPU Hardware Features Sa io Status Indicators a LL J7 pwr DEI EJ RUN pwr C IE run BATT EA cru Batt E cru 16 DL260 un DL250 1 Fey cru O El pe A Mode Switch _ Port 1 Port 2 Pe Battery Slot Status Indicators ee Port 1 a Mode Switch BATT El id RUN DL240 Bi cH O cH Analog O H Adjustments PORT1 PORT2 47 no 5 os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt as 0 Port 2 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 3 7 CPU Specifications and Operation Mode Switch The mode switch on the DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs provide positions for Functions enabling and disabling program changes in the CPU Unless the mode switch is in the TERM pos
510. on parameters are loaded into the ARX first and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Read A aaa from Intelligent module function Step 1 Load the slave address 0 90 BCD into the first byte and the PLC internal port KF2 or slot number of the master DCM or ECOM 0 7 into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack Step 3 Load the address of the data to be read into the accumulator This parameter requires a HEX value Step 4 Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting V memory location Aaaa where the data will be read from in the slave Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa V memory Vv All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See page 3 51 All V mem See page 3 52 All V mem See page 3 53 Inputs X 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 177 0 177 0 377
511. onfiguration options There are many different I O modules available with the DL205 system Chapter 2 provides the specifications and wiring diagrams for the discrete I O modules NOTE Specialty modules have their own manuals and are not included in this manual Before you begin to enter a program it is very helpful to understand how the DL205 system processes information This involves not only program execution steps but also involves the various modes of operation and memory layout characteristics See Chapter 3 for more information DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 0 LI o out YO Y Initialize hardware Check I O module config and verify Step 6 Review the Programming Concepts Step 7 Choose the Instructions Step 8 Understand the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Procedures The DL205 provides four main approaches to solving the application program including the PID loop task depicted in the next figure e RLL diagram style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic and general CPU register accumulator manipulation It includes dozens of instructions which will augment drums stages and loops e The DL250 1 and DL260 have four timer event drum types each with up to 16 steps They offer both time and or event based step transitions Drums are be
512. ons are explained in Chapter 4 System Design and Configuration The DL205 has some of the most powerful modules in the industry A complete range of discrete modules which support 24 VDC 110 220 VAC and up to 10A relay outputs Subject to derating are offered The analog modules provide 12 and 16 bit resolution and several selections of input and output signal ranges including bipolar Several specialty and communications modules are also available Programming Methods DirectSOFT32 Programming for Windows Handheld Programmer There are two programming methods available to the DL205 CPUs RLL Relay Ladder Logic and RLLPES Stage Programming Both the DirectSOFT32 programming package and the handheld programmer support RLL and Stage The DL205 can be programmed with one of the most advanced programming packages in the industry DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 is a Windows based software package that supports many Windows features you already know such as cut and paste between applications point and click editing viewing and editing multiple application programs at the same time etc DirectSOFT32 universally supports the DirectLOGIC CPU families This means you can use the same DirectSOFT32 package to program DLO5 DLO6 DL105 DL205 DL305 DL405 or any new CPUs we may add to our product line There is a separate manual that discusses the DirectSOFT32 programming software All DL205 CPUs have a built in programming port for u
513. ons that occur over long cables Be sure to add the jumper at the last slave to connect the required internal termination resistor uBIseq TES v 5 Os e fe 5 Co T o e 5 Ideally the two termination resistors at Addens T the cables opposite ends and the Sxternma MM cable s rated impedance will all three resistor i match For cable impedances greater ooo Internal than 150 ohms add a series resistor at the ao last slave as shown to the right If less than 2 150 ohms parallel a matching resistance across the slave s pins 1 and 2 instead 3 CID Remember to size the termination resistor E at Port 2 to match the cables rated impedance The resistance values should be between 100 and 500 ohms DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EZ System Design and Configuration gn e go os AD cT oO BO Oo Nc Configure Remote After configuring the DL250 1 or DL260 CPU s Port 2 and wiring it to the remote O Slaves slave s use the following checklist to complete the configuration of the remote slaves Full instructions for these steps are in the Remote I O manual e Set the baud rate to match CPU s Port 2 setting e Select a station address for each slave from 1 to 7 Each device on the remote link must have a unique station address There can be only one master address 0 on the remote link Configuring the The beginning of the configuration ta
514. onsisting of X3 and X4 DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x1 x2 Y9 STR gt 1 ENT OUT AND gt 2 ENT X3 X4 STR gt 3 ENT AND gt 4 ENT ORST ENT out gt 5 ENT l ae Ea 25 C5 TH oD SE ap DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Out The Out instruction reflects the status of OUT the rung on off and outputs the discrete ILL did on off state to the specified image aa or location 230 240 250 1 260 register point memory Multiple Out instructions referencing the same discrete location should not be used since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the physical output point our Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Global 0 3777 Global 0 3777 In the following Out example when input X1 is on output Y2 and Y5 will energize DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes X1 Y2 STR gt 1 ENT OUT ouT gt 2 ENT YS OUT out gt 5 ENT In the following Out
515. or the input to remain on Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 377 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 Timer and counter operand data types are not valid using the Set instruction NOTE You cannot set inputs X s that are assigned to input modules In the following example when X1 is on Y5 through Y22 will energize DirectSOFT Pa SET Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT SET gt 5 gt 2 2 ENT In the following example when X1 is on Y5 through Y22 will be reset or de energized DirectSOFT Y5 Y22 xt RST oy Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT RST gt 5 gt 2 2 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Set Bit of Word The Set Bit of Word instruction sets or SETB turns on a bit in a V memory location Once INIAPAFT the bit is set it will remain on until it is reset Aaaa bb using the Reset Bit of Word instruction lt SET 230 240 250 1 260 is not necessary for
516. ory Aaaa Do location Or Not Bit of Word The Or Not Bit of Word instruction ORNB logically ors a normally closed contact in SI x s g parallel with another contact in a rung 230 gan 2001 A Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the ARAR SD associated memory location 1 Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa bb aaa bb Vmemory B All See p 3 52 BCD 0 to 15 All See p 3 53 BCD 0 to 15 Pointer PB All See p 3 52 BCD All See p 3 53 BCD In the following Or Bit of Word example when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on output Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 X1 Y7 our OUT B1400 7 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT OR SHFT B gt V 1 4 0 0 gt K 7 ENT OUT gt 7 ENT In the following Or Bit of Word example when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is off output Y7 will energize DirectSOFT32 x1 Y7 OUT op 50 B1400 7 AS fol LA Handheld Programmer Keystrokes je JoN e STR gt 1 ENT Sa ORN SHFT B gt V 1 4 0 0 n E gt K 7 ENT OUT gt 7 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions And AND Viviv Y 230 240 250 1 260 And Not ANDN SILIL
517. otes a differentiation between 1 2 3 4 Similar modules D3 05B DC Product family Number of slots Type of Base DC or empty D4 16 NI D 2 F Discrete I O DL05 06 Product Family DL205 Product family DL305 Product family DL405 Product family 0406210732 Input Output Combination AC DC Either Relay Current Sinking Current Sourcing Current Sinking Sourcing High Current Isolation Fast I O Denotes a differentiation between 1 2 3 4 Similar modules EEE N a C A D E R 1 3 H S F DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Getting Started Getting Started Analog I O DLO5 06 DL205 Product family DL305 Product family DL405 Product family Number of channels 02 04 08 16 Alternate example of Analog I O AD Input Analog to Digital asing abbreviations Output Digital to Analog DA Fa 08 THM n Combination AND note n indicates thermocouple type Isolated such as J K T R S or E Denotes a differentiation between 1 2 3 4 Similar modules Communication and Networking Special I O and Devices Programming DL205 Product family DL305 Product family DL405 Product family Name Abbreviation DCM Data Communication Module HSC High Speed Counter HPP RLL PLUS Handheld Program mer MAREA Rae DL205 Product family
518. ough it will not function if the MLS is off 230 240 250 1 260 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Constant K 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 Master Line Reset The Master Line Reset instruction marks MLR the end of control for the corresponding JT JIT MLS instruction The MLR reference is one K aaa u V less than the corresponding MLS MEE Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Constant K 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 Understanding The Master Line Set MLS and Master Line Reset MLR instructions allow you to Master Control quickly enable or disable sections of the RLL program This provides program Relays control flexibility The following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions operate by creating a sub power rail for control logic MLS When contact X0 is on logic under the first MLS E will be executed x1 0 our When contact X2 and X0 is on logic under the second MLS will be executed MLR MLR The MLR instructions note the end of the Master Control area They will be entered in adjacent addresses 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Instruction Set Program Control Instructions MLS MLR Examp
519. ovable Terminal type Removable Status indicators Logic Side Status indicators Logic side Weight 2 8 oz 80 g Weight 3 5 oz Fuses 1 per common 6 3A slow blow Fuses N A Points Derating Chart 300mA Pt Amps per Point Derating Chart Derating Note All outputs can be run at the current per point shown 2 0 There is no derating for the number of I O points used 20 125 C O 4 5 TE 6 10 20 30 40 50 68 86 104 Ambient Temperature C F 7 50 55 C 122131 F F2 08TA C E 20 125VAC E 20 125VAC HOHHH 20 125VAC 50 60Hz 1 5A 0 Internal module circuitry PP AA _ CA 4 Y 8 T p 400mA Pt e 500mA Pt OUT 15 220 gt 2 VAC 0 0 7 S 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 1 5 32 50 68 86 104 122131 F 2 Di 1 6 Ambient Temperature C F 3 0 C07 D2 08TA 110 220 l ii wae w Cy 1 amp C 40mA 0 5A ES 50 60Hz 0 t E 4 a be 9 if
520. ow lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value 30 0 38 8 31 1 39 9 32 2 41 A 33 3 42 B 34 4 43 C 35 5 44 D 36 6 45 E 37 7 46 F 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 138 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions DirectSOFT32 Display Hexadecimal ASCII TABLE Equivalents X1 LD Load the constant value into the lower 16 bits of the I K4 accumulator This value defines the number of V memory location in the z gt ASCII table V1400 33 34 LDA Convert octal 1400 to HEX 1 234 300 and load the value into V1600 O 1400 the accumulator V1401 31 32 ATH V1600 is the starting location for the HEX table l V1600 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v1402 37 38 t gt IP 1 PT 5678 V1601 L D E SHFT lanos 3 gt PREY a ENT vs 3536 A 3 og gt Pa A ee JET me sHFT A als gt IP E Aa eao E HEX to ASCII The HEX to ASCII instruction converts a HTA table of HEX values to a specified table of HTA diaig Ivo ASCII values HEX values are one digit and Vaaa their ASCII equivalents are
521. owing example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic al ae o 25 G5 po fut SD Sc 0 X0 STR X1 ORSTR AND x4 YO STR a our Output En x2 AND ia ANDSTR ps 7 BE E a STR X1 CA pelo HE gt 71 Sooo 1 X1 OR X2 AND X3 1 X4 AND X1 OR X2 AND X3 El STR X0 el STR X0 ANDSTR Comparative The DL205 CPUs provide Comparative Boolean instructions that allow you to Boolean quickly and easily compare two numbers The Comparative Boolean provides evaluation of two 4 digit values using boolean contacts The valid evaluations are equal to not equal to equal to or greater than and less than In the following example when the value in Vmemory location V1400 is equal to the constant value 1234 Y3 will energize DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ee Ka NOT X5 OR X4 AND X1 OR X2 AND X3 STR X0 V1400 1234 Y3 2 our Standard RLL Instructions 5 9 Boolean Instructions Immediate Boolean The DL205 CPUs usually can complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds However in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next I O update occurs The DL205 CPUs offer Immediate input and outputs which are special boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs during the program execution portion of the CPU cycle You may recall that this is normally done durin
522. pecified data will be read into v2304 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 v2004 V2305 X X X X X X X X v2005 RX 2000 V2000 is the starting location in the for the Slave CPU where the specified data will be read from Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENI w SP B Cc E ANDN gt SHFT STRN 1 2 4 ENT L D K Cc A F SHFT anost 3 gt SeT ume 2 o 55i MENE L D K B A SHFT anost 3 gt SHFT ve 4 ENT L D A Cc D A A SHFT anpst 3 ol gt 2 3 0 o ENT R X Cc A A A SHFT oan ser gt 2 o 0 ae eek al ze ES 25 OS po fut oD Sc 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Write to Network WX X V Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions ESTO Network Instructions The Write to Network instruction is used to write a block of data from the master device to a slave device on the same network The function parameters are WX loaded into the first and second level of the A aaa accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Write to Network function Step 1 Load the slave address 0 90 BCD into the first byte and the PLC internal port KF2 or slot number of the master DCM or ECOM 0 7 into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the number of bytes to be trans
523. perate properly na 5 Jumper in position shown selects write protect for EEPROM a LU EEPROM The DL230 and DL240 CPUs use different sizes of EEPROMs The CPUs come from the factory with EEPROMs already installed However if you need extra EEPROMs select one that is compatible with the following part numbers CPU Type EEPROM Part Number Capacity DL230 Hitachi HN58C65P 25 8K byte 2Kw DL240 Hitachi HN58C256P 20 32K byte 3Kw There are many AUX functions specifically for use with an EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer This enables you to quickly and easily copy programs between a program developed offline in the Handheld and the CPU Also you can erase EEPROMs compare them etc See the DL205 Handheld Programmer Manual for details on using these AUX functions with the Handheld Programmer NOTE If the instructions are supported in both CPUs and the program size is within the limits of the DL230 you can move a program between the two CPUs However the EEPROM installed in the Handheld Programmer must be the same size or larger than the CPU being used For example you could not install a DL240 EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer and download the program to a DL230 Instead if the program is within the size limits of the DL230 use a DL230 chip in the Handheld when you obtain the program from the DL240
524. points in the base The following table shows typical update times required by the CPU Timing Factors DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Overhead 66 0 us 33 0 us 28 1 us 28 1 us Per output point 8 5 us 14 6 us 3 0 us 3 0 us For example the time required for a DL240 to write data for two 8 point output modules would be calculated as follows where NO is the total number of output points Formula Time 33 NO x 14 6us Example Time 33 16 x 14 6us Time 266 6us DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation ES Writing Outputs to During this portion of the cycle the CPU writes any output points associated with the Specialty I O following e Remote I O e Specialty Modules such as High Speed Counter etc The time required to write any output image register data to these modules depends on which CPU you are using the number of modules and the number of output points Remote Module DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Overhead N A 6 0 us 1 9 us 1 9 us Per module N A 67 5 us 17 7 us 17 7 us with outputs Per output point N A 46 0 us 3 2 us 3 2 us For example the time required for a DL240 to write two 8 point output modules located in a Remote base would be calculated as follows Where NM is the number of modules and NO is the total number of output points Remote I O Formula Time 6us 67 5us x NM 46us x NO Example Time
525. pt will not execute if the value is out of range NOTE See the example program of a software interrupt Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa Constant O 0 3 0 3 0 3 DL240 250 1 260 Software DL240 250 1 260 Hardware Interrupt Input Interrupt Routine Interrupt Input Interrupt Routine V7634 sets interrupt time INTO X0 cannot be used along with s w interrupt INTO X1 INT 1 X2 INT 2 X3 INT 3 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn 5 1 88 Standard RLL Instructions Interrupt Instructions Interrupt Return When an Interrupt Return is executed in IRT the interrupt routine the CPU will return to xVITITIT the point in the main body of the program from which it was called The Interrupt RT oe A Return is programmed as the last instruction in an interrupt routine and is a stand alone instruction no input contact on the rung Interrupt Return The Interrupt Return Conditional Conditional instruction is a optional instruction used IRTC with an input contact to implement a condtional return from the interrupt rte x x v Y routine The Interrupt Return is required to 230 240 250 1 260 terminate the interrupt routine Enable Interrupts The Enable Inte
526. py the value in the 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 accumulator AS acc ol 1 1 1 4 4 0 1 0 1 1 110 oJo 1 oloJolo ol1 1 110 olojoJo 1 o gfedcba gfedcba gfedcba gf e dc b a Segment Segment 7 Labels lt gt Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 2 y O Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF lt gt lt gt Handheld Programmer Keystrokes f f MA B STR gt 1 ENT L D B E A A J ANDST _3 gt 1 4 0 0 ENT 10 Cc S E G am la SHFT RST SHFT 4 6 ENT opm oO GX F Cc A D Cc o gt out SHFT s gt 2 o gt 3 a ENT po fut oO SE 09 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Gray Code The Gray code instruction converts a 16 bit GRAY gray code value to a BCD value The BCD conversion requires 10 bits of the x Y4 4 Y accumulator The upper 22 bits are set to _ GRAY 230 240 250 1 260 0 This instruction is designed for use with devices typically encoders that use the grey code numbering scheme The Gray Code instruction will directly convert a gray code number to a BCD number for devices having a resolution of 512 or 1024 counts per revolution If a device having a resolution of 360 counts per revolution is to be used you must subtract a BCD value of 76 from the converted value to obtain the proper result
527. r Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents V memory V7753 1 O Configuration Error stores the correct module ID code V7754 1 O Configuration Error identifies the base and slot number V7755 Error code stores the fatal error code V7756 Error code stores the major error code V7757 Error code stores the minor error code V7760 V7764 Module Error stores the slot number and error code where an I O error occurs V7765 Scan stores the number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program to Run Mode transition V7766 Contains the number of seconds on the clock 00 to 59 V7767 Contains the number of minutes on the clock 00 to 59 V7770 Contains the number of hours on the clock 00 to 23 V7771 Contains the day of the week Mon Tue etc V7772 Contains the day of the month 1st 2nd etc V7773 Contains the month 01 to 12 V7774 Contains the year 00 to 99 V7775 Scan stores the current scan time milliseconds V7776 Scan stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds V7777 Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition milliseconds DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 v a e Lol D hora o e SUONEOIIO9AdS e 47 Cc Ss
528. r the module output status to change multiple times in a CPU scan See Or Out Immediate Or Out Immediate The Or Out Immediate instruction has OROUTI been designed to use more than 1 rung of YViviviv discrete logic to control a single output y Multiple Or Out Immediate instructions orouT referencing the same output coil may be used since all contacts controlling the output are ored together If the status of 230 240 250 1 260 any rung is on at the time the instruction is executed the output will also be on Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 In the following example when X1 or X4 is on Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x1 Y2 an gt 18 ENT OR out o D F A INST __3 5 0 SNP ia Cc x4 Y2 gt 5 ENT OR out E str gt 4 ENT o D F A INST __3 5 0 BNT J ENE Cc gt A ENT l ze ES 23 C5 TH oD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 37 Immediate Instructions Out The Out Immediate Formatted instruction Immediate outputs a 1 32 bit binary value from the Formatted accumulator to specified output points at
529. re specifications Remember to leave room for potential expansion Appendix E provides the weights for each component NOTE If you are using other components in your system make sure you refer to the appropriate manual to determine how those units can affect mounting dimensions DirectV IEW 1000 Optimation Units 5 12 Large panel rear view shown 1 343 i 130mm re jue 9 5 gt f l 34mm i 241 3mm ers 3 Power ole A 264 Tag 72mm __ 67mm ve Bp 4 t P 50 8mm A i 101 6mr 1 03 le Ho A le fa 492 _ 5 gt 8 4 125mm as 213 3mm g La 3 8 Note Space allowance should be made 88 9mm behind the panel for the serial cable and y power connector If you will be adding or removing panels for a multi drop then you may want to allow for hand room to 1 75 reach the address switch on the back 44 5mm We recommend 4 inches 1 O modules in Base with D2 DSCBL 1 5 85 onport2 148mm ee 30 8 mm with 32pt i a ZIPLink cable or je 4 45 75mm i base exp unit cable 113mm 4 with 3 62 L 3 54 12 or 16pt VO 93mm ees B with 2 95 B 4or8pt vo M 75mm DIN Rail slot Handheld programmer cable Pa 6 6 ft 2m cy DL
530. re the ASCII string will be placed in V memory Maximum Variable Length specifies in bytes the maximum length of a Variable Length ASCII string the port will receive Inter character Timeout if the amount of time between incoming ASCII characters exceeds the set time the Timeout Error bit will be set No data will be stored at the Data Destination V memory location The Timeout Error bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled Oms selection disables this feature First Character Timeout if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the first character is received exceeds the set time the specified First Character Timeout bit will be set The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled Oms selection disables this feature DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Interchar T O Error First Char T20 Error AIN Length Type r Termination Code Length C Fived Leng h 1 Character C Variable Length J C 2Characters A ay Port Number TermCode 1 20 Jhexadecimal Data Destination V2000 Palade 2 0 _ fe aeset Data Destination Byte count ETE C4 Data Destination 1 Start of data o Eror Maximum Variable k40 A gt Length Busy co Interchar Timeout 50 ms y Complete C1 z C2 E C3 A Byte Swap swaps the high byte and low byte within each V memory register of the Varaible Length ASCII string See th
531. reset Single Register Start Slave Memory Address 40001 Start Master Memory Address 142000 Number of Elernents n a Modbus Data type 584 984 Mode Exception Response Buffer 400 Instruction interlock bit C100 SET This rung does a MODBUS read from the first 32 coils of Slave address number one It will place the values into 32 bits of the master starting at CO Port 2 busy bit Instruction interlock bit MRX SP116 C100 Port Number Slave Address Function Code 01 Read Coil Status Start Slave Memory Address Start Master Memory Address Number of Elements Modbus Data type 584 984 Mode Exception Response Buffer 400 Instruction interlock bit C100 RST DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 uBissq TES o m or O je Ko Cc x fed e ES System Design and Configuration DL260 Non Sequence Protocol ASCII In Out and PRINT MODBUS Port Configuration xX x x v 230 240 250 1 260 Configuring port 2 on the DL260 for Non Sequence allows the CPU to use port 2 to either read or write raw ASCII strings using the ASCII instructions See the ASCII In Out instructions and the PRINT instruction in chapter 5 In DireciSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Secondary Comm Port e Port From the port number list box at the top choose Port 2 e Protocol Click the check box to the left of Non Sequence S
532. rokes Y5 ia i STR gt 1 ENT y 1 out Ju oc ANDN gt 2 ENT e por _ aS OUT gt 5 ENT TH co SE op And Bit of Word ANDB X x Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 And Not Bit of Word ANDNB X XIJ Y 230 240 250 1 260 The And Bit of Word instruction logically ands a normally open contact in series with another contact in a rung The status of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the associated memory location The And Not Bit of Word instruction logically ands a normally closed contact in series with another contact in a rung The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated memory location Standard RLL Instructi Boolean Instructions ons Aaaa bb it Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa bb aaa bb Vmemory B All See p 3 52 BCD 0 to 15 All See p 3 53 BCD 0 to 15 Pointer PB All See p 3 52 BCD All See p 3 53 BCD In the following And Bit of Word example when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on output Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 x1 B1400 4 Y5 or STR gt 1 ENT AND SHFT B gt v 1 4 0 0 gt K 4 ENT OUT gt 5 ENT In the following And Not Bit of Word example when input X
533. rom Vmemory locations V1400 V 1402 DirectSOFT32 Displa j j CPU Intelligent Module X1 LD The constant value K0102 Data ages specifies the base number 01 and the base slot 12 number 02 v1377 X X xX x Address 0 viaoo 3 4 1 2 34 Address LD The constant value K6 visor 7181516 56 Address 2 K specifies the number of 78 Address 3 bytes to be written V1402 0 1 9 0 50 Address 4 V1403 X X X X 01 Address 5 LD The constant value KO vi404 X X X X 12 specifies the starting address 5 KO in the intelligent module Handheld Programmer Keystrokes CHS B Pt STR 2 1 ENT poa V1400 is the starting L D A B A c Co ar location in the CPU where SHFT gt PREV ENT ie k ANDST 3 0 1 0 2 Gc V1400 the specified data will be _ written from L D G mn SHFT anost 3 gt PREV A ENT l am L D A SHFT anpstl 3 gt PREV ENT Ww T B E A A SHFT anon MLR gt 1 4 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ESTOS Network Instructions Network Instructions Read from Network The Read from Network instruction is used RX X V iV iv 230 240 250 1 260 by the master device on a network to read a block of data from another CPU The functi
534. rrent Values V 256 VO V377 0 255 3001 30001 Input Reg Counter Current Values V 128 V1000 V1177 512 639 3001 30001 Input Reg V Memory user data V 3072 V1400 V7377 768 3839 4001 40001 Hold Reg 4096 V10000 V1i7777 4096 8192 V Memory system V 320 V700 V777 448 768 4001 40001 Hold Reg V7400 V7777 3840 3735 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration The following examples show how to generate the MODBUS addresses for hosts which require this format Example 1 V2100 Find the MODBUS address for User V PLC Address Dec Mode Address 584 984 Mode location V2100 V2100 1088 decimal 1 Find V memory in the table 1088 40001 41089 2 Convert V2100 into decimal 1088 3 Add the MODBUS starting address for the mode 40001 V Memory system V 320 V700 V777 448 768 4001 40001 Hold Reg V7400 V7777 3840 3735 Example 2 Y20 Find the MODBUS address for output Y20 PLC Addr Dec Start Addr Mode 584 984 Mode 1 Find Y outputs in the table Y20 16 decimal 2 Convert Y20 into decimal 16 16 2048 1 3 Add the starting address for the range 2048 4 Add the MODBUS address for the mode 1 Outputs Y 1024 YO Y1777 20488 3071 1 1 Coil Example 3 T10 Current Find the MODBUS address to obtain the PLC Address Dec Mode Address Value c
535. rrupt instruction is ENI programmed in the main body of the LILI LI application program before the End instruction to enable hardware or di e ae software interrupts Once the coil has ii been energized interrupts will be enabled until the interrupt is disabled by the Disable Interrupt instruction Disable Interrupts The Disable Interrupt instruction is DISI programmed in the main body of the xI IJTI application program before the End instruction to disable both hardware or e Ns 2 20200 2 software interrupts Once the coil has been energized interrupts will be disabled until the interrupt is enabled by the Enable Interrupt instruction l T2 a 25 o5 ope oD SE 47 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 189 Interrupt Instructions Interrupt Example In the following example when X40 is on the interrupts will be enabled When X40 is for Interrupt off the interrupts will be disabled When a interrupt signal X1 is received the CPU will Module jump to the interrupt label INT O 1 The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction is executed DirectSO
536. rs You can do this by using DirectSOFT32 to save the program V memory and system parameters to hard floppy disk on a personal computer To install the D2 BAT CPU battery in e ED DL230 or DL240 CPUs 1 Gently push the battery connector onto the circuit board connector uy 2 Push the battery into the retaining clip Don t use excessive force You may break the retaining clip 3 Make a note of the date the battery was installed DL230 and DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 To install the D2 BAT 1 CPU battery in the DL250 1 DL260 CPUs CR2354 1 Press the retaining clip on the battery door down and swing the battery door open 2 Place the battery into the coin type slot with the side outward 3 Close the battery door making sure that it locks securely in place 4 Make a note of the date the battery was J a e Lol D E o e SUONEDIIOBAdS Ndo installed YZ WARNING Do not attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of an old battery by Lom fire The battery may explode or release hazardous materials Enabling the In the DL205 CPUs the battery can be enabled by setting bit 12 in V7633 On In this Battery Backup mode the battery Low LED will come on when the battery voltage is less than 2 5VDC SP43 and error E41 will occur
537. rt 2 Pin Descriptions DL240 only 1 OV Power connection GND 1 OV Power connection GND v 2 5V Power conection 2 5V Power conection 2 0 3 RXD Receive Data RS232C 3 RXD_ Receive Data RS232C Of 4 TXD__ Transmit Data RS232C 4 _TXD__ Transmit Data RS232C oo 6 pin Female 5 5V Power conection 5 RTS Request to Send 33 Modular Connector 6 OV Power connection GND 6 OV Power connection GND ER Y Port 2 Pin Descriptions DL250 1 DL260 ae 1 5V 5 VDC The recommended cable 3 2 TXD2 _ Transmit Data RS232C for RS422 is Belden RTS2 Ready to Send RS 232C 3 4 5 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 232C 6 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS 485 DL260 7 8 9 OV Logic Ground OV Logic Ground TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 RS 485 DL260 A ic 10 TXD2 Transmit Data 2 11 RTS2 A ena working See the Network Request to Send RS 422 RS 485 DL260 Master Operation DL260 sis Female 13 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 RS 485 DL260 Only section later in this D Connector 14 CTS2 Clear to Send RS422 RS 485 DL260 chapter for details 15 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 422 RS 485 DL260 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 4 24 System Design and Configuration MODBUS Port In DirectSOFT32 choose the PLC menu then Setup then Secondary Comm Port Configuration Port From the port number list box at the top choose Port 2 x x Y
538. rupt Return Conditional 5 188 ORND Or Negative Differential 5 22 eG Initial Stage ines ORNE Or if Not Equal 5 28 De pump Ga ORNI Or Not Immediate 5 34 aa Label A ORPD Or Positive Differential 5 22 sd sa Sa ORS Or Stack 5 78 LDI Load Immediate 5 39 OUT Out 5 17 5 65 LDIF Load Immediate Formatted 5 40 OUTB Out Bit of Word 5 18 LDA Load Address 5 61 LDD Load Double 5 59 table el ae OUTF Out Formatted 5 67 LDF Load Formatted 5 60 LDR Load Real Number 5 64 ra Sones as LDX 2d indeed 562 OUTIF Out Immediate Formatted 5 37 LDLBL Load Label 5 145 SUE Sut roast e LDSX Load Indexed from Constant 5 63 OUM ll aoe MDRMD Masked Drum Event Discrete 6 20 Ones Qut Indexed aida MDRMW Masked Drum Event Word 6 22 PAUSE rause TRS MLR Master Line Reset 5185 PD Positive Differential 5 20 MLS Master Line Set 5 185 ROF Pop ZA MOV Move 5 144 PRINT Print 5 201 MOVMG Move Memory Cartridge 5 145 PRINTV ASCII Out from V Memory 5 226 MRX Read from MODBUS Network 5 205 RADR Radian Real Conversion 5 136 MWX Write to MODBUS Network 5 208 RD Read from Intelligent Module 5 191 MUL Multipl 5 94 RFB Remove from Bottom of Table 5 157 MULB aaah Binary 5 105 RFT Remove from Top of Table 5 163 en MULBS Multiply Binary Top of Stack 5 119 ROTL Rotate Left 5 126 29 MULD Multiply Double 5 95 ROTR Rotate Right 5 127 eo MULF Multiply Formatted 5 111 RST Reset 5 24 2a MULR Multiply Real 5 96 RSTB Reset Bit of Word 5 25 2 2 MULS Multiply Top of Stack 5 115 RSTBIT Reset Bit 5 148 Pa
539. ry SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The binary value in the accumulator will be added to the binary value in V1420 using the Add Binary instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 Alols o x LD I V1400 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Theunusod accumulator bits are set to zero 0 0 0 O 0 A O 5 Accumulator ADDB V1420 1 2 C 4 V1420 Acc 1 C C 9 The binary value in the accumulator is added to the binary value in V1420 OUTD 1 C C 9 V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 02 o Q D Q D I 5 n c B STR gt 1 ENT 2 O L D B E A A 2 SHFT anost 3 gt 1 4 0 o ENT D A D D B B E Cc A SHET 3 3 1 gt 1 4 2 o ENT GX D B F A A out SHT 5 2 1 5 0 o ENT
540. s Segment SEG AA Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 The BCD Segment instruction converts a four digit HEX value in the accumulator to seven segment display format The result resides in the accumulator SEG In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction The binary HEX value in the accumulator is converted to seven segment format using the Segment instruction The bit pattern in the accumulator is copied to Y20 Y57 using the Out Formatted Labels instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 a LD 6 F 7 1 I v1400 A Load the value in V1400 nto the lower 16 bits of the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc 0 0 0 OJ Of O Of OF Of OF Of OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 1 OF 171 1 1 O 1 171 OF OF OF 1 SEG Convert the binary HEX value in the accumulator to seven segment display format OUTF Y20 K32 Co
541. s ASCII Instructions ASCII Input The ASCII Input instruction allows the CPU to receive ASCII strings through the AIN specified communications port and places the string into a series of specified V memory registers The ASCII data can be received as a fixed number of bytes or x XIX V asavariable length string with a specified termination character s Other features 230 240 250 1 260 include Byte Swap preferences Character Timeout and user defined flag bits for l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Busy Complete and Timeout Error AIN gt Length Type Fixed Length Wanable Length Port Number Data Destination Byte count Fixed Length Interchar Timeout m Byte Swap C All but null AIN Fixed Length Configuration Length Type select fixed length based on the length of the ASCII string that will be sent to the CPU port Port Number must be DL260 port 2 K2 Data Destination specifies where the ASCII string will be placed in V memory Fixed Length specifies the length in bytes of the fixed length ASCII string the port will receive Inter character Timeout if the amount of time between incoming ASCII characters exceeds the set time the specified Timeout Error bit will be set No data will be stored at the Data Destination V memory location The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled Oms selection disable
542. s into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value O to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex Step 3 Insert the Table Shift Left or Table shift Right instruction This specifies the number of bit positions you wish to shift the entire table The number of bit positions must be in octal Helpful hint Remember that each V memory location contains 16 bits So the bits of the first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal If you want to shift the e entire table by 20 bits that is 24 octal Flag 53 will be set if the number of bits to be 22 shifted is larger than the total bits contained within the table Flag 67 will be set if the 59D last bit shifted just before it is discarded is a 1 S gt nm Operand Data Type DL260 Range r Vmemory vV All See p 3 53 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 1 70 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 on when the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the total bits contained within the table SP67 on when the last bit shifted just before it is discarded is a 1 NOTE Status flags are only valid until the end of the scan or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed
543. s Location Constant C23 C221 c21 C20 22 B C20 Ka On on ON OFF D STR 4 1 ENT 20 je L D F B A E 5J SHFT aninstl 3 7 gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT 3 A gt 4 ENT am m Q F Cc A E or SHFT 5 gt NEXT 7 r gt 4 ENT GX F Cc A E our SHFT E gt PREV PREV 7 7 gt 4 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumualtor Logical Instructions 5 78 Or with Stack The Or with Stack instruction is a 32 bit ORS instruction that logically ors the value in the accumulator with the first level of the X X x Y accumulator stack The result resides in ORS 230 240 250 1 260 the accumulator The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed from the stack and all values are moved up one level Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Or with Stack is zero or a negative number the most significant bit is on Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero SP70 Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative In the following example when X1 is on the binary value in the accumulator will be ored with the binary value in the first level of the stack The result resides in the accumulator DirectSOFT32 v1401 V1400 ZE KR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1
544. s this feature First Character Timeout if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the first character is received exceeds the set time the specified First Character Timeout bit will be set The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled Oms selection disables this feature DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Data Destination Data Destination 1 Start of data 2 ms y First Char Ti te irst Char Timeou 500ms y First Char T4D Error Busy Complete C1 Interchar T O0 Error C2 Byte Swap swaps the high byte and low byte within each V memory register of the Fixed Length ASCII string See the SWAPB instruction for details Busy Bit is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data Complete Bit is set once the ASCII data has been received for the specified fixed length and reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled Inter character Timeout Error Bit is set when the Character Timeout is exceed See Character Timeout explanation above First Character Timeout Error Bit is set when the First Character Timeout is exceed See First Character Timeout explanation above Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions Data Destination All V memory See page 3 53 Fixed Length K1 128 Bits Busy Complete Timeout Error Overflow C0 3777 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53
545. se Address before extracting the data Number of Bytes specifies the number of bytes to be extracted Shift ASCII Option shifts all extracted data one byte left or one byte right to displace unwanted characters if necessary Byte Swap swaps the high byte and the low byte within each V memory register of the extracted data See the SWAPB instruction for details Convert BCD Hex ASCII to BCD Hex if enabled this will convert ASCII numerical characters to Hexidecimal numerical values Destination Base Address specifies the V memory register where the extracted data will be stored Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions AEX Source Base Address Extract at Index Number of Bytes E Shift ASCII Option None C One Byte Left C One Byte Right K8 Byte Swap None C All C All but Null I Convert BCD HEXJASCII to BCD HEX Destination Base Address Y4100 Source Base Address All V memory See page 3 53 Extract at Index All V memory See page 3 53 or K0 127 Number of Bytes K1 128 Destination Base Address All V memory See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid See the previous page for an example usinig the AEX instruction DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Th
546. se with the handheld programmer D2 HPP The handheld programmer can be used to create modify and debug your application program A separate manual that discusses the DL205 Handheld Programmer is available DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Getting Started 15 DL205 System The diagram below shows the major components and configurations of the DL205 Diagrams system The next two pages show specific components for building your system x Machine Simple Motion Control a Control Flexible solutions in one package a Packaging High speed counting up to 100 KHz ni Conveyors Pulse train output up to 50KHz O Handheld Elevators High speed Edge timing Programmer DL260 with H2 CTRIO High Speed I O Module Sh RS232C max 50ft 16 2m Ez 2 Programming or Computer Interface Simple programming Ple through the RLL Program kaak Programming or O Computer Interface Bl oLaos Operator Interface O O R RS232C max 50ft 16 2m RS232C max 50ft 16 2m DL305 RS232 422 RS232 422 Convertor Convertor DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Getting Started Getting Started DC INPUT 8pt 12 24 VDC 16pt 24 VDC 32pt
547. ser Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Operand Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb V memory V All All All All All All All All See page 3 50 See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Timer T 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 gt 1000 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V Cc A A A H pe Y3 str gt SHFT II anp b 7 A our Sie ie le e Tew 1 0 0 0 GX D OUT gt 3 ENT In the following example when the value in V memory location V2000 lt 4050 Y3 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v2000 K4050 Y3 SP v c A A A STRN gt SHFT AND 2 0 0 0 I lt our E A F A gt 4 0 5 0 ENT GX D OUT gt 3 ENT Or OR Viviv Y 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions Comparative Boolean The Comparative Or _ instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another contact The contact will be on when
548. ses the same flags is executed The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location when the following Load Address and Load instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator This value is placed in the first level of the accumulator stack when the following Load instruction is executed The offset K2 is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction The value to be found in the table is specified in the Find instruction If a value is found equal to the search value the offset from the starting location of the table where the value is located will reside in the accumulator 2 5 aS yo co 26 O 53 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions DirectSOFT32 Display Table length 400 401 402 403 404 405 V1404 contains the location where the match was found 406 The value 8989 was the 4th location after the start of the 407 specified table I K6 Offset Load the constant value 6 HEX into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Begin here gt Accumulator oy 0000000 4 LDA
549. shot PD should be used in the input logic Helpful Hint The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will begin The special relay SPO or a one shot PD should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP56 on when the table pointer equals 0 NOTE Status flags SPs are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or the end of the scan 2 5 as so co 26 O 5 0 H The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table It is not set automatically You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 a ze ES 25 CS po fut oD Sc 0 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator Remember V1400 is used as the pointer location and is not actually part of the table data source The destination location V1500 is specif
550. sion l O configuration before entering the RUN mode If there is a change in the I O configuration the CPU will not enter the RUN mode For example if local expansion base 1 does not power up with the CPU and the other expansion bases the I O Configuration Check will prevent the CPU from entering the RUN mode If the I O Configuration check is disabled and automatic addressing is used the CPU would assign addresses from expansion base 1 to base 2 and possibly enter the RUN mode This is not desirable and can be prevented by enabling the I O Configuration check Manual addressing can be used to manually assign addresses to the I O modules This will prevent any automatic addressing re assignments by the CPU The I O Configuration Check can also be used with manual addressing To display the I O Config Check window use DireciSOFT32 gt PLC menu gt Setup gt l O Config Check x Check 1 0 Config on Power Up Yes C No te Select Yes then Save to Disk DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 417 Remote I O Expansion How to Add Remote O is useful for a system that has a sufficient number of sensors and other Remote l O field devices located a relative long distance away up to 1000 meters or 3050 feet Channels from the more central location of the CPU The methods of adding remote l O are X Viv iv DL240 CPUs Remote I O requires a remote master
551. sition set to a 1 in the accumulator is encoded to the corresponding 5 bit binary value using the Encode instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT V2000 Xi 1 0 0110 v2000 wee x a Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 accumulator Acc 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O OJ OJ OF O O OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF OF OF OF O O O OF O OF OF O l Bit postion 12 is converted to binary ENCO 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Encode the bit position se to 1 in the accumulator to a Acc op 0 0 0 0 O 0 O O OJ OJ OF O O OF OF OF OF OF O OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 1 OF O 5 bit binary value OUT Pa V2010 AA PRA Copy the value in the lower 16 bits ojojoje of the accumulator to V2010 f i V2010 Binary value 1 for 12 oc 5 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes opm O B 5 str gt 1 ENT Y 9 L D Cc A A A HFT ENT 5 S anost a gt 2 0 0 o E N Cc o SHET 4 TMR 2
552. sive Or instruction is a 16 bit XOR instruction that performs an exclusive or Siviviv of the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator and a specified V memory XOR 230 240 250 1 260 location Aaaa The result resides in the Aaaa in the accumulator The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the XOR is zero Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer P All V mem All V mem All V mem All V mem See page 3 50 See page 3 51 See page 3 52 See page 3 53 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero 29999 NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the accumulator is exclusive ored with V2006 using the Exclusive Or instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 a LD gt AE 1 Vv2000 Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator ee E Os the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0 accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2
553. st 3 3 gt 1 4 2 0 ENT vn S U B B S SHFT RST SHFT ISG 4 4 RST ENT GX D B F A A our HT gt lo 5 0 o eT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Multiply Binary Multiply Binary Top of Stack is a 16 bit Top of Stack instruction that multiplies the 16 bit binary MULBS value in the first level of the accumulator Ii xixidg stack by the 16 bit binary value in the MULBS accumulator The result resides in the accumulator and can be 32 bits 8 digits max The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed and all stack locations are moved up one level 230 240 250 1 260 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the Load instruction moves the value in V1400 into the accumulator The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the stack The binary value in the accumulator stack s first level is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply Binary Stack instruction The Ou
554. st be a minimum of 2 50mm clearance between the panel door and the nearest DL205 component uo e e1su t E o 0 yo D Q p O EY a ULNA suo 6 Note The cabinet configuration below is not suitable for EU installations Refer to Appendix F European Union Directives Temperature Probe f LD 50m Omin e Power Source O Pane A 6 OOO BUS Bar Panel Grou d Ground Brai 5 single Point round Terminal Earth Ground Copper Lugs Star Washers Star Washers Note there is a minimum of 2 50mm clearance between the panel door or any devices mounted in the panel door and the nearest DL205 component DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EN Installation Wiring and Specifications 5 The ground terminal on the DL205 base must be connected to a single point ground Use copper stranded wire to achieve a low impedance Copper eye lugs should be crimped and soldered to the ends of the stranded wire to ensure good surface contact Remove anodized finishes and use copper lugs and star washers at termination points A general rule is to achieve a 0 1 ohm of DC resistance between the DL205 base and the single point ground 6 There must be a single point ground i e copper bus bar for all devices in the panel requiring an ear
555. st for a repetitive process based on a single series of steps e Stage programming also called RLLP s is based on state transition Getting Started 113 Q D a 5 Ke 02 pe D a D 2 diagrams Stages divide the ladder program into sections which correspond to the states in a flow chart of your process e The DL260 PID Loop Operation uses setup tables to configure 16 loops The DL250 1 PID Loop Operation uses setup tables to configure 4 loops Features include auto tuning alarms SP ramp soak generation and more Standard RLL Programming see Chapter 5 ei LDD 1 V1076 CMPD K309482 SP62 YO Cud Stage Programming see Chapter 7 Timer Event Drum Sequencer see Chapter 6 PID Loop Operation see Chapter 8 SP PID gt Process PV Once you have installed the system and TMR T1 CNT CT3 understand the theory of operation you K30 kio can choose from one of the most powerful instruction sets available Equipment failures can occur at any time Switches fail batteries need to be replaced etc In most cases the majority of the troubleshooting and maintenance time is spent trying to locate the problem The DL205 system has many built in features that help you quickly identify problems Refer to Chapter 9 for diagnostics and troubleshooting tips
556. st level of stack 0 0 1101100100011 1 0110101000811 1 000 the value in the first level of the Acc 0 1 1 0 O OF 1 Of OF OF 1 1 1 0 OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF 17 OF OF 1 OF OF OF OF 1 0 accumulator stack veo SB La re al a A wo N ax XORS 2 Copy the value in the pd EE le eee e accumulator to V1500 and V1501 V1500 V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR gt 1 ENT L D D B E A A SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 1 4 o g ENT X Q S SHFT SET OR SHFT RST ENT GX D B E A A our SHET 3 1 5 0 0 ENT l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Compare CMP SILIS Y 230 240 250 1 260 The compare instruction is a 16 bit instruction that compares the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with the value in a specified V memory location Aaaa The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Logical Instructions CMP Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 R
557. stant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator Remember V1400 is used as the pointer location and is not actually part of the table data source The destination location V1500 is specified in the Table to Destination instruction The table pointer V1400 in this case will be increased by 1 after each execution of the TTD instruction DirectSOFT32 Display Load the constant value 6 HEX into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator i LD I K6 LDA Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into O 1400 the accumulator This is the table pointer location TTD V1500 the table to the specified destination V1500 Copy the specified value from Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ran 2 1 ENT L D G SHFT inpst 3 gt PREV A ENT SHFT anost 3 eo gt Ea Ea o eo ET SHET RE mE y 3 2 1 i 5 0 0 ENT It is important to understand how the table aren bs Boiniek locations are numbered If you examine visor PoTstololo e folololo lvi400 the example table you ll notice t
558. status bit and the current value are not specified in the counter instruction al T2 TS 25 CO po fut oD SE dp Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Counters CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 V memory for 1400 7377 1400 7377 preset values T 2000 2377 2000 3777 a 10000 17777 10000 37777 Pointers 1400 7377 1400 7377 preset only E 2000 3777 10000 17777 10000 37777 Constants presa onl K 0 99999999 0 99999999 0 99999999 5 0 99999999 soe ie aa CTN 0 77 or V41140 41143 0 177 or V41140 41147 0 177 or V41140 V41147 0 377 or V41100 41157 pri V CT 1000 1077 1000 1177 1000 1177 1000 1377 NOTE The current value of a timer can be accessed by using the TA data type i e TA2 Current values may also be accessed by the V memory location DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Up Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Standard RLL Instructions Timer Counter and Shift Register In the following example if X2 and X3 are off when X1 toggles from off to on the counter will increment by one If X1 and X3 are off the counter will decrement by one when X2 toggles from off to on When the count value reaches the preset value of 3 the counter status bit will turn on When the reset X3 turns on the counter status bit will turn off and the current va
559. stem The DL205 CPUs maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as Memory the scratchpad In some cases you may make changes to the system setup that will be stored in system memory For example if you specify a range of Control Relays CRs as retentive these changes are stored AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values WARNING You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear any setup information that is stored in system memory Usually you ll only need to initialize the system memory if you are changing programs and the old program required a special system setup You can usually change from program to program without ever initializing system memory wrt Ce CN Remember this AUX function will reset all system memory If you have set special parameters such as retentive ranges etc they will be erased when AUX 54 is used Make sure you that you have considered all ramifications of this operation before you select it DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc no 5 Os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt as 0 Setting the CPU Network Address x Y4 Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 Setting Retentive Memory Ranges The DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs have built in DirectNet ports You can use the Handheld Programmer to set the network address for the port and the port communication parameters Th
560. string Today is Friday which had previously been loaded into V memory Note that a Search Starting Index of constant K 5 combined with a Forward Direction Seach is used to prevent finding the day portion of the word Today The Found Index will be placed into V4000 o AFIND Base Address Total Number of Bytes Search Starting Index K5 bi r Direction y r Found Index Value Forward From Beginning C Reverse From End Notice that quotation marks Fordinion are not placed around the Seach fa Shire Search String Only use quota tion marks if they re actually part of the Search String ASCII Characters g HEX Equivalent Base Address O T 54h Low o 1 Lo 6Fh High V9000 Reverse Direction Search 2 d 64h Low 3 a 61h High 9001 4 y 79h Low V3002 Search start Index Number Y gt 5 20h High 6 i 69h Low 7 Cs 73h High V3003 8 20h Low Haci V3004 Forward Direction Search 9 F 46h High 10 r 72h Low 11 i 69h High ee Begining Index Number Y gt 12 d 64h Low 9 13 La 61h High V3006 zE End Index Number 14 y 79h Low on 15 een High V200 gt 5 0 or m Found Index Number 0012 V4000 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ASCII Instructions AFIND Example Combined with AEX Instruction W
561. struction This value specifies the offset for the source and destination data and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction The MOVMC instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the copying of data from V memory to the data label area 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT32 x1 Data Label Area j LD Programmed I After the END K4 h Instruction Load the value 4 into the i accumulator specifying the X XIX X V1777 DLBL K1 number of locations to be copied LD 1 2 3 4 v2000 gt N CON K2 Offset K 7041 Offset Load the value 2 into the 415 8 2 v2001 N CON accumulator specifying the K 4 6 4 8 offset for source and destination locations 6 1 5 1 v202 gt IN CON LDA K 61549 O 2000 8 8 4 5 V20083 gt N CON K 8 8 4 5 Convert octal 2000 to HEX 400 and load the value into 2 5 0 0 v2004 gt N CON the accumulator This specifies the source location K 25 0 0 where the data will be 6 8 3 5 ve copied from 005 N CON K 6 8 3 5 MOVMC X X X X V2006 K1 K1 is the data label destination area where the data will be copied to Handheld Progra
562. struction requires two consecutive V memory locations Vaaa which are used to ___ TIME 230 240 250 1 260 get the time If the values in the specified V aaa locations are not valid the time will not be set The current time can be read from memory locations V7747 and V7766 V7770 Date Range V Memory Location BCD READ Only 1 100 seconds 10ms 0 99 V7747 Seconds 0 59 V7766 Minutes 0 59 V7767 Hour 0 23 V7770 Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa Vmemory All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 In the following example when CO is on the constant value K73000 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction CO should be a contact from a one shot PD instruction The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double instruction The Time instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the time in the CPU DirectSOFT32 Display Constant K ojojo 7 3 ojojo The Time instruction uses the value set in V2000 and V2001 to set the time in the appropriate V memory locations V7766 V7770 eo LDD 1 K73000 Load the constant Acc value K73000 into the accumulator Acc OUTD v2000 Copy the value in the ololol7 i3lololo accumulator to V2000 and V2001 e008 Format v2001 V2000 0 JO JO
563. sults in a carry SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is added with the value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 X1 LDD Load the value in V1400 and 0jopspaps o 2 6 Accumulator stack V1401 into the accumulator after 1st LDD dd Level X X X X X X X X Acc 9 0 3 9 5 0 2 6 Level2 X X X X X X X X Level3 X X X X X X X X V1421 V1420 Level4 X X X X X X X X LDD Load the value in V1420 and 0j0 1 7 21015 6 Level5 X X X X X X X X vi4e0 V1421 into the accumulator Level6 X X X XX XX
564. sure to match the parity specified for the connected devices e Echo Suppression Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on port 2 Memory Address Choose a V memory address to use as the starting location for the port setup parameters listed below Cc S Ho os AD ec oO BO Oo Nc DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration e Xon Xoff Flow Control Choose this selection if you have port 2 wired for Hardware Flow Control Xon Xoff with RTS and CTS signal connected between all devices RTS Flow Control Choose this selection if you have Port 2 RTS signal wired between all devcies Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to M the CPU and click Close RS 485 RS 485 signals are for long distances 1000 meters max Use termination Network resistors at both ends of RS 485 network wiring matching the impedance rating of the cable between 100 and 500 ohms Termination Ese a Resistor i TXD RXD _TXD RXD TXD RXD TXD RXD Signal GND Signal GND Connect shield RXD to signal ground E EC A we ek ee ASCII Device Cable Use Belden 9841 or equivalent o 15 La 2 el TXD DL260 CPU Port 2 SA fon RS 232 RS 232 signals are used for shorter distances 15 meters max and limited to ES Network communications between two d
565. t Improving Response Time There are a few things you can do the help improve throughput e Choose instructions with faster execution times e Use immediate I O instructions which update the I O points during the ladder program execution segment e Choose modules that have faster response times Immediate I O instructions are probably the most useful technique The following example shows immediate input and output instructions and their effect Scan Solve Solve Solve Solve Scan Program Program Program Program Normal Read Read Write 53 Normal Input Input Output Write Immediate Immediate Outputs Field Input Input Module Off On Delay Output Module Off On Delay gt t 1 O Response Time In this case you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items Input Delay Instruction Execution Time Output Delay Response Time The instruction execution time is calculated by adding the time for the immediate input instruction the immediate output instruction and all instructions in between NOTE When the immediate instruction reads the current status from a module it uses the results to solve that one instruction without updating the image register Therefore any regular instructions that follow will still use image register values Any immediate instructions that follow will
566. t PREV s ENT L D A B E A A SHFT anpst 3 o gt 1 4 o o ENT F D G T l J l J SHET 5 3 e ma gt NeT 9 8 gs pee DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn 5 154 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions Table to The Table To Destination instruction moves Destination a value from a V memory table to a V TTD memory location and increments the table xT XIX TY pointer by 1 The first V memory location in TTD the table contains the table pointer which Aaaa A90 Sh eon 260 indicates the next location in the table to be moved The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on The table pointer will reset to 1 when the value equals the last location in the table The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Table To Destination function Step 1 Load the length of the data table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the table into the accumulator Remember the starting location of the table is used as the table pointer This parameter must be a HEX value
567. t ov 3 gt 2 o 1 oc e se lla A str gt SHFT Stan 6 o ENT Esa gt suet C a D 4 A ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Logical Instructions Compare The Compare Formatted compares the Formatted value in the accumulator with a specified CMPF number of discrete locations 1 32 The instruction requires a starting location __ CMPF A aaa xXx Y iv K bbb Aaaa and the number of bits Kbbb to be 230 240 250 1 260 compared The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison Operand Data DL250 1 Range DL260 Range Type A B aaa bbb aaa bbb Inputs x 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 1777 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 177 0 377 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Special Relays SP 0 137 0 777 320 717 320 717 Constant K 1 32 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value 8 NOTE Status flags are valid only until another i
568. t Double instruction copies the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 DirectSOFT32 Display v1400 Accumulator stack after 1st LDD X1 LD Load the value in V1400 into dl Ea IS the accumulator The unused accumulator evelt X X X XX X X X I V1400 bits are set to zero j arae Level2 X X X X X X X X Acc L9 1 9 9 CE 3 5 0 Level3 X X X X X X X X 4 1X X X X X X X X 5 XX X X X X X X A 6 X X X X X X X X LD Load the value in V1420 into The unused accumulator v1420 the accumulator bits are set to zero 7 X X X XX XX X X X X XX X X X Acc ojojojo g MULBS Multiply the binary value in the accumulator with the binary value in the first level Acc 0 0 0 F Accumulator stack of the accumulator stack after 2nd LDD Leveli 0 0 0 0C 3 5 0 Level2 X X X X X X X X OUTD Copy the value in the va accumulator to V1500 olololfellal2l4lo eN a E ES 500 and V1501 Level4 X X X X X X X X ywo w300 Level5 X X X XXXXX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level6 X X X X X X X X on B Level7 X X X XX X X X So str gt 1 ENT ae Level8 X X X X X X X X 0 L D B E A A c SHFT l anost a gt 1 4 0 o ENT of O L D B E Cc A e SHFT gt ENT I ANDST 3 1 4 2 0 jo 7 M U L
569. t The Invert instruction inverts or takes the INV one s complement of the 32 bit value in the accumulator The result resides in the 4 1 Y accumulator Ny 230 240 250 1 260 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is inverted using the Invert instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction V2001 v2000 a LDD 0 4 0 5 0 2 5 j 0 I v2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator DirectSOFT32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Acc 0 0 0 OJ O 1 O OF Of O OJ OF OF 1 OF 1 OF OF OF OF OF OF 1 OF OF 1 OF 1 INV 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 al ace 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 of tfolfs spa af spol o 1 o 1 1 N o Invert the binary bit pattern in the accumulator OUTD FI B EJA F D aA F v2010 v2011 2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and v2011
570. t increment would be 1 95 units The actual result depends on exactly how you re using the values in the control program eo H L Resolution gt 56 H high limit of the range L low limit of the range Example Calculations H 600 L 100 600 100 Resolution TN ion 500 Resolution 256 Resolution 1 95 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 v J a e Lol D E o e suonediin9ds Add CPU Specifications and Operation The following example shows how you could use these analog potentiometers to change the preset value for a timer See Chapter 5 for details on how these instructions operate Program loads ranges into V memory DirectSOFT SPO LD K100 OUT V7640 LD K600 OUT V7641 x1 TMR T20 V3774 T20 YO OUT 100 4 600 O cH1 E O cre 47 Cc Ss os OG 50 ab ok 18 No D as 0 Turn clockwise to increase the timer preset Q 100 O cH1 O cH2 Turn all the way counter clockwise to use lowest value X1 T2 YO Current Value X1 T2 YO Current Value Load the lower limit 100 for the analog range on Ch1 into V7640 Load the upper limit 600 for the analog range on Ch1 into V7641 Use V3774 as the preset for the timer This will allow you to quickly adjust the preset from 100 to 600 with the CH1 analog pot Timing Diagra
571. t of Word example when bit 12 of V memory location V1400 is on output Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 B1400 12 Y2 1 our Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR SHFT B gt v 1 4 0 0 gt K 1 2 ENT OUT gt 2 ENT In the following Store Not Bit of Word example when bit 12 of V memory location V1400 is off output Y2 will energize DirectSOFT32 B1400 12 Y2 A our Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STRN SHFT B gt v 1 4 0 0 gt K 1 2 ENT OUT gt 2 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Or The Orinstruction logically ors a normally OR open contact in parallel with another FUI contact in a rung The status of the contact will be the same state as the 290 24028051 260 associated image register point or maaa memory location Or Not The Or Not instruction logically ors a ORN normally closed contact in parallel with Vivilviv another contact in a rung The status of the contact will be opposite the state of 230 240 250 1 260 Aaaa the associated image register point or memory location ae Operand Data T
572. table provides a listing of the individual Input points associated with each V memory address bit for the DL230 DL240 and DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs The DL250 1 ranges apply to the DL250 MSB DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Input X and Output Y Points LSB X Input Y Output TA eee O A E es ia eae o Address Address 017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V40400 V40500 037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V40401 V40501 057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V40402 V40502 077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V40403 V40503 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V40404 V40504 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V40405 V40505 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V40406 V40506 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V40407 V40507 MSB DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Input X and Output Y Points LSB 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206
573. tatus flags SPs are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or the end of the scan The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets to 1 automatically when the table length is reached DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions In the following example when X1 is on the constant value K6 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed The octal address 1400 V1400 which is the starting location for the destination table and table pointer is loaded into the accumulator The data source location V1500 is specified in the Source to Table instruction The table pointer will be increased by 1 after each time the instruction is executed DirectSOFT32 Display i LD I K6 Load the constant value 6 Hex into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator LDA O 1400 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator STT V1500 Copy the specified value from the source location V1500 to the table Handheld Programmer Keystrokes oe 1 ENT SHFT ala PREV on ENT
574. te 3 ONOFF Print ON for an ON state and OFF for an OFF state Example V2000 15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in 1 0 format C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1 0 format C100 BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE FALSE format C100 ON OFF Prints the status of COO in ON OFF format V2000 15 BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE FALSE format The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128 The number of characters for each element is listed in the table below Element type Maximum Characters Text 1 character 1 16 bit binary 6 32 bit binary 11 4 digit BCD 8 digit BCD 8 Floating point real number 13 Floating point real with exponent 13 V memory text 2 Bit 1 0 format 1 Bit TRUE FALSE format 5 Bit ON OFF format 3 The handheld programmer s mnemonic is PRINT followed by the DEF field l re Special relay flags SP116 and SP117 indicate the status of the DL250 1 260 CPU ps ports busy or communications error See the appendix on special relays for a 35 description 2 ee an 3 NOTE You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX instruction DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions ESTE MODBUS Instructions MODBUS
575. te l O Bit Map DL 260 only This table provides a listing of the individual remote I O points associated with each V memory address bit MSB DL260 Remote I O GX and GY Points LSB GX GY A A aaa een Salo ra ol Address 017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V40000 V40200 037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V40001 V40201 057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V40002 V40202 077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V40003 V40203 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V40004 V40204 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V40005 V40205 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V40006 V40206 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V40007 V40207 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V40010 V40210 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V40011 V40211 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V40012 V40212 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265
576. ted instruction The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10 Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction X3 X2 X1 XO X6 LDF xo Load the value represented ON OFF OFF ON by discrete locations X0 X3 II K4 into the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero SUBF co Subtract the value 0 00 0 0 0 0 9 Accumulator cal c2 c1l co represented by C0 C3 from pe K4 the value in the accumulator 8 C0 C3 ON OFF OFF OFF ACC 0 0 0 0 O O0 0 1 OUTF Y10 Copy the lower 4 bits of the accumulator to discrete K4 locations Y10 Y13 nm Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 G OFF OFF OFF ON sra gt 6 EN L D F A E SHFT anpst 3 5 gt 0 gt 4 ENT S U B F A E SHFT ar SHET sq j gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT gt 4 ENT GX F B A E out SHFT s gt 1 o gt 4 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Multiply Formatted Multiply Formatted is a 16 bit instruction MULF that multiplies the BCD value in the xT XIX TY accumulator by the BCD value Aaaa which is a range of discrete bits The MULF Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 specified range Kbbb can be 1 to 16 K
577. th ground return The single point of ground must be connected to the panel ground termination The panel ground termination must be connected to earth ground For this connection you should use 12 AWG stranded copper wire as a minimum Minimum wire sizes color coding and general safety practices should comply with appropriate electrical codes and standards for your region A good common ground reference Earth ground is essential for proper operation of the DL205 There are several methods of providing an adequate common ground reference including a Installing a ground rod as close to the panel as possible b Connection to incoming power system ground 7 Properly evaluate any installations where the ambient temperature may approach the lower or upper limits of the specifications Place a temperature probe in the panel close the door and operate the system until the ambient temperature has stabilized If the ambient temperature is not within the operating specification for the DL205 system measures such as installing a cooling heating source must be taken to get the ambient temperature within the DL205 operating specifications 8 Device mounting bolts and ground braid termination bolts should be 10 copper bolts or equivalent Tapped holes instead of nut bolt arrangements should be used whenever possible To assure good contact on termination areas impediments such as paint coating or corrosion should be removed in the area of conta
578. th the present system hardware available These can be mixed between input and output points as necessary DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 o m ol O O 0 o O SUONPOIIO9AdS NdI 47 Ss os OG 50 ab ok el0 No a 0 CPU Specifications and Operation DL250 1 Memory Map This memory map applies to the DL250 as well Memory Type Discrete Memory Word Memory Qty Symbol Reference Reference Decimal octal octal Input Points X0 X777 V40400 V40437 512 xo Output Points YO Y777 V40500 V40537 512 YO Control Relays CO C1777 V40600 V40677 1024 CO Co a Special Relays SPO SP777 V41200 V41237 512 igs Timers TO T377 V41100 V41117 256 E T K100 Timer Current None VO V377 256 Vo K100 Values gt Timer Status Bits TO T377 V41100 V41117 256 TO Counters CTO CT177 V41140 V41147 128 __ CNT CTO K10 Counter None V1000 V1177 128 v1000 K100 Current Values gt Counter Status CTO CT177 V41140 V41147 128 CTO Bits Data Words None V1400 V7377 7168 None specific used with many V10000 V17777 instructions Stages S0 S1777 V41000 V41077 1024 sE so S 001 System None V7400 V7777 768 None specific used for various parameters V36000 V37777 purposes DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 DL260 Memory
579. th zeros The example to the right fills zeros for OUTD slave numbers 2 7 which do not exist in V37736 our example system C740 SET On the last rung in the example program above we set a special relay contact C740 This particular contact indicates to the CPU the ladder program has finished specifying a remote I O system At that moment the CPU begins remote O communications Be sure to include this contact after any Remote I O setup program Remote l O Now we can verify the remote I O link and DirectSOFT32 Test Program setup program operation A simple quick X60 Y40 check can be done with one rung of ladder oun shown to the right It connects the first A input of the remote base with the first output After placing the PLC in RUN mode we can go to the remote base and activate its first input Then its first output should turn on 52 go os AD cT oO BO Oo Nc DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 4 23 Network Connections to MODBUS and DirectNet Configuring Port 2 This section describes how to configure the CPU s built in networking ports for either For DirectNet MODBUS or DirectNET This will allow you to connect the DL205 PLC system aire ae me 2 directly to MODBUS networks using the RTU protocol or to other devices on a ae cal soa 00 DirectNET network MODBUS hosts system on the network must be
580. that C5 is closed true DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 C5 DEC 8 9 3185 V1400 Decrement the value in V1400 by 1 V1400 8 9 3 4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes F STR gt NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ENT D E Cc B E A A SHFT 5 A gt gt A A ENT NOTE Use a pulsed contact closure to INC DEC the value in V memory once per closure DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Add Binary Add Binary is a 16 bit instruction that adds ADDB the unsigned 2 s complement binary value xT xI TI in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with ___ ADDB an unsigned 2 s complement binary value Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 Aaaa which is either a V memory location or a 16 bit constant The result can be up to 32 bits unsigned 2 s complement and resides in the accumulator Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Constant K 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a car
581. the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400 ia LDD I V1400 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 1 Accumulator 100 0 C 0 1 0 V1421 and V1420 ADDBD V1420 Acc 1 0 0 O C A 1 1 The binary value in the accumulator is added with the value in V1420 and V1421 OUTD V1500 v1501 V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 Z H and V1501 oc os Handheld Programmer Keystrokes k Z oO B g 2 STR gt 1 ENT CD L D D B E A A 5 i SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 1 4 o o ENT A D D B D B E c A SHET If i 3 3 1 3 gt 1 4 2 o ENT GX D B F A A Our SHFT 3 gt 4 5 o ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Subtract Binary SUBB X x Y Y Subtract Binary is a 16 bit instruction that subtracts the unsigned 2 s complement binary value Aaaa which is either a V Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions 20 0 A Se memory location or a 16 bit 2 s ___ SUBB complement binary value from the binary Aaaa value in the accumulator The result resides in the accumul
582. the accumulator to V1500 9 gt Handheld Programmer Keystrokes es gt x2 B ENT 52 str gt 1 23 L D B E A A e SHFT gt ENT 30 ANDST 3 1 4 0 0 2 E Ss U B B D B E e A SHFT ast SHFT isa 1 1 3 E 1 4 2 0 ENT GX B F A A our HT gt Ja 5 0 o a DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Subtract Binary Subtract Binary Double is a 32 bit Double instruction that subtracts the unsigned 2 s SUBBD complement binary value Aaaa which is xTxIxTY either two consecutive V memory SUBBD locations or a 32 bit unsigned 2 s Aaaa 230 240 250 1 260 complement binary constant from the binary value in the accumulator The result resides in the accumulator Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa Vmemory Vv All See p 3 53 Pointer P All See p 3 53 Constant K O0 FFFFFFFF Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In th
583. the copied to V2010 accumulator to V2010 and V2011 v2011 v2010 l 10 am 5 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes opm lt B GE str gt 1 a CD L D D c A A A Sc SHFT ll AnosT 3 a gt e 0 0 gr pee 09 B N SHFT 4 8 TMR ENT GX D Cc A B A our SHET 3 gt 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Binary Coded The Binary Coded Decimal instruction Decimal converts a binary value in the accumulator BCD to the equivalent BCD value The result resides in the accumulator BCD Y YY Y 230 240 250 1 260 In the following example when X1 is on the binary HEX value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The binary value in the accumulator is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD instruction The BCD value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction DirectSOFT32 V2001 v2000 fa LDD 0jo 0 0 6 F 7 1 1 V2000 Binary Value Load the
584. the high byte of the low word of the accumulator The unused accumula bits are set to zero Acc 9 0 0 0 V1500 OUTM A aaa Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory All V mem See p 3 53 Pointer P All V mem See p 3 53 In the following example when X1 is on the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the upper 8 bits of the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Most instruction DirectSOFT32 LD V1400 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Outs S bit of the lower 16 bi of v1500 the accumulator to V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Ph gt 3 1 ENT SHET asta LA Ea Ea Wo Mo e UT SHET Er gt 1 F 5 A 0 A 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Acc 9 3 The unused accumulato bits are set to zero ba opojojo 9 3 EA 9 0 V1500 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn 5 70 Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Pop The Pop instruction moves the value from POP the first level of the accumulator stack 32 O POP bits to the accumulator and shifts each Y IVY Y Y 230 240 250 1 260
585. the input controlling the Set Bit of Word instruction to remain on Reset Bit of Word The Reset Bit of Word instruction resets RSTB or turns off a bit in a V memory location ai xig To Once the bit is reset it is not necessary for A aaa bb the input to remain on rst 230 240 250 1 260 Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa bb aaa bb Vmemory B All See p 3 52 BCD 0 to 15 All See p 3 53 BCD 0 to 15 Pointer PB All See p 3 52 BCD All See p 3 53 BCD In the following example when X1 turns on bit 1 in V1400 is set to the on state DirectSOFT32 z B1400 1 SET Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 1 ENT SET SHFT B gt Vv 1 4 0 0 gt K 1 ENT In the following example when X2 turns on bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state DirectSOFT32 e V1400 1 RST Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR gt 2 ENT RST SHFT B gt Vv 1 4 0 0 gt K 1 ENT 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 ES Standard RLL Instructions Boolean Instructions Pause The Pause instruction disables the PAUSE output update on a range of outputs The ladder program will continue to run and AERARMEA update the i
586. the row labeled Total power required from the row labeled Available Base Power Place the difference in the row labeled Remaining Power Available If Total Power Required is greater than the power available from the base the power budget will be exceeded It will be unsafe to use this configuration and you will need to restructure your I O configuration WARNING It is extremely important to calculate the power budget If you exceed the power budget the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration a Local Expansion I O e ara Use local expansion when you need more I O points a greater power budget than the local CPU base provides or when placing an l O base at a location away from the CPU base but within the expansion cable limits Each local expansion base requires the D2 CM controller module in the CPU slot The local CPU base requires the D2 EM expansion module as well as each expansion base All bases in the system must be the new 1 bases These bases have a connector on the right side of the base to which the D2 EM expansion module attaches All local and local expansion I O points are updated on every CPU scan Use DirectSOFT32 PLC Configure I O menu option to view the local expansion system automatic I O addressing configuration This menu also allows manual addresses t
587. this and generate an inverted output Or you may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere such as in the field device It is important to choose the correct value of R pull up In order to do so you need to know the nominal input current to the field device I input when the input is energized If this value is not known it can be calculated as shown a typical value is 15 mA Then use input and the voltage of the external supply to compute R pull up Then calculate the power Ppui up in watts in order to size Rout up properly V input turn on l input R input 2 a V supply 0 7 Ri p V supply pull up Rinput pull up __ input pullup Of course the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as shown below is to use a DC sourcing output module The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1 5 V ON state saturation but this is not a problem with low current solid state loads PLC DC Sourcing Output DC pwr 4 Common y Field Device R input d Output sourcing Input otaa sinking Y Supply P Ground ra J DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 P DC pwr O Ower R pull up Field Device sourcing sinking Output Input R input a hi i QM 37 B sinking ag e Supply ye Ji o y O Common t Ground 86 T 2 suo 6 ES Installation Wiring and Specifications 5A 2c 5 9 Z ood O
588. ting Expansion bases 3 and 4 V7747 Location contains a 10ms counter This location increments once every 10ms V7750 Reserved V7751 Fault Message Error Code stores the 4 digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is executed If you ve used ASCII messages DL240 only then the data label DLBL reference number for that message is stored here V7752 I O configuration Error stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current configuration V7753 I O Configuration Error stores the correct module ID code V7754 I O Configuration Error identifies the base and slot number V7755 Error code stores the fatal error code V7756 Error code stores the major error code V7757 Error code stores the minor error code V7763 V7764 Module Error stores the slot number and error code where an I O error occurs V7765 Scan stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation System Description of Contents V memory V7766 Contains the number of seconds on the clock 00 to 59 V7767 Contains the number of minutes on the clock 00 to 59 V7770 Contains the number of hours on the clock 00 to 23 V7771 Contains the day of the week Mon Tue etc V7772 Contains the day of the month 1st 2n
589. tion and use of your equipment The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment safety part of the planning process You should examine every aspect of the system to determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety If you are not familiar with PLC system installation practices or your company does not have established installation guidelines you should obtain additional information from the following sources e NEMA The National Electrical Manufacturers Association located in Washington D C publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems You can order these publications directly from NEMA Some of these include ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems ICS 3 Industrial Systems ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems e NEC The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of various types of electrical equipment Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library e Local and State Agencies many local governments and state governments have additional requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook Check with your local Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system safety At a minimum yo
590. tion outputs the value 3544 which resides in the first level of the accumulator stack to V1525 DirectSOFT32 Bone onstan X1 LD 3 5 4 4 sh K3544 A Th l Load the accumulator with Bi pie oso ator the value 3544 a Acc 2 9 9 0 3 5 4414 HEX LDA Octal rae 025 23 Load The HEX equivalent to The unused accumulator octal 25 into the lower 16 bits bits are set to zero of the accumulator This is the e offset for the Out Indexed Ace 0 ojojojjojoj1 5 instruction which determines the final destination address A Octal Octal Octal OUTX vlifslofol 215 vl1 s 2 5 V1500 Accumulator Stack The hex 15 converts 00003544 Copy the value in the first to 25 octal which is 3 5 4 4 Level 1 level of the stack to the added to the base Level2 X X X X X X X X offset address 1525 address of V1500 to yield V1525 V1500 25 the final destination Level3 X X X X X X X X Level4 X X X X X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level5 X X X X X X X X B Level6 X X X X X X X X gt ENT STR 1 Level7 X X X X X X X X 10 L D D F E E Level8 X X X X X X X X Cc rS SHFT inpst 3 gt PREV 3 5 4 4 ENT opm ears L D A c F g5 SHFT anpst 3 o gt
591. tion uses the same flag lireciSOFT32 Display Pl LDR 1 R15 0 Load the real number 15 0 into the accumulator 1 5 decimal 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 Accumulator 1 0 41 2 0 0 0 0 0 DNR 1 5 Acc 3 F C o po o 0 0 DIVR R10 0 V1401 V1400 Divide the accumulator contents 3 FR Cc o po 0j 0 0 Hex number by the real number 10 0 842 11842 141842 1842 1184211842118 4214 8 421 OUTD Acc o o 111l1l1i1l1lo ololo olol ololo ololo ololo ololo ojolo o V1400 111 A LJ Copy the result in the accumulator to V1400 and V1401 Sign Bit xpanent 8 bits Mantissa 23 bits 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 127 1 1 x 2 exp 0 1 1 binary 1 5 decimal 127 127 0 Implies 2 exp 0 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn NOTE The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32 bit IEEE format You must use DirectSOFT32 for this feature DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l T2 ES 25 C5 po fut oD SE ap Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Increment INC X x Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 Decrement DEC x x Y iv 230 240 250 1 260
592. tion will be set to 0 See example on the next page Note If the number used to specify the order contains duplicate numbers the most significant duplicate number is valid The result resides in the accumulator See example on the next page Step 3 Insert the SFLDGT instruction There are a maximum of 8 digits that can P A a be shuffled The bit positions in the first level of the accumulator stack defines the a digits to be shuffled They correspond to rari a the bit positions in the accumulator that define the order the digits will be shuffled 128 AAA The digits are shuffled and the result Specified order accumulator resides in the accumulator Bit Positions 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BCEFODA 9 Result accumulator DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions In the following example when X1 is on The value in the first level of the accumulator stack will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator Example A shows how the shuffle digits works when 0 or 9 F is not used when specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled Also there are no duplicate numbers in the specified order Example B shows how the shuffle digits works when a 0 or 9 F is used when specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed the bit positions in the first stack location that h
593. tions SUBF x x xX v 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT32 Display that subtracts the BCD value Aaaa which is a range of discrete bits from the in the accumulator specified range Kbbb can be 1 to 32 consecutive bits The result resides in the BCD value accumulator The SUBF K bbb Aaaa Operand Data Type DL260 Range A aaa bbb Inputs X 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 3777 Stage Bits S 0 1777 Timer Bits T 0 377 Counter Bits CT 0 377 Special Relays SP 0 137 320 717 Global I O GX GY 0 3777 Constant K 1 32 Discrete Bit Flags Description SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag In the following example when X6 is on the value formed by discrete locations X0 X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The value formed by discrete location CO C3 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator using the Subtract Format
594. to 38 4K baud Extended MODBUS Instructions 9 DirectNET slave Communication Port RS485 support MODBUS RTU slave easily connect DirectSOFT32 handhelds operator interfaces any DirectNet master K sequence DirectNET Master Slave MODBUS RTU Master Slave easily connect DirectSOFT32 handhelds operator interfaces any DirectNet Ne or MODBUS master or slave pwr EJ EJ run Port 1 LJ BAT IE E cru pwr IZ E run 6P6C Phone Jack Batt E El cru DL230 RS232C 9600 baud CPU Communication Port DL240 ag K sequence CPU TERM easily connect O cm DirectSOFT handhelds O cm operator interfaces etc A cha Port 2 cha c at 6P6C Phone Jack RS232C up to 19 2K baud PORT 1 Communication Port K sequence DirectNET Slave co PORT2 easily connect A arn DirectSOFT handhelds operator interfaces or any DirectNet master DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation Ea Port 1 The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL230 and DL240 CPUs are fixed Specifications e 6 Pin female modular RJ12 phone jack type connector Y Y xXx x e K sequence protocol slave only 230 240 250 1 260 e RS232C 9600 baud e Connect to DirectSOFT32 D2 HPP DV 1000
595. to a pre defined V memory address location Then the PRINTV instruction may be used to write the pre coded ASCII string out of port 2 American European and Asian Time Date stamps are supported Additionally if a DL260 PLC is a master on a network the Network Write instruction WX can be used to write embedded ASCII data to an HMI or slave device directly from V memory via a supported communications protocol using port 2 H2 ECOM or D2 DCM Managing the The following instructions can be helpful in managing the ASCII strings within the ASCII Strings CPUs V memory ASCII Find AFIND Finds where a specific portion of the ASCII string is located in continuous V memory addresses Forward and reverse searches are supported ASCII Extract AEX Extracts a specific portion usually some data value from the ASCII find location or other known ASCII data location Compare V memory CMPV This instruction is used to compare two blocks of V memory addresses and is usually used to detect a change in an ASCII string Compared data types must be of the same format i e BCD ASCII etc Swap Bytes SWAPB usually used to swap V memory bytes on ASCII data that was written directly to V memory from an external HMI or similar master device via a communications protocol The AIN and AEX instructions have a built in byte swap feature 5 as yo co 20 O 53 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instruction
596. to assign manual I O address In automatic configuration the addresses are assigned on 8 point boundaries Manual configuration however assumes that all modules are at least 16 points so you can only assign addresses that are a multiple of 20 octal For example X30 and Y50 are not valid addresses You can still use 8 point modules but 16 addresses will be assigned and the upper eight addresses will be unused WARNING If you manually configure an I O slot the I O addressing for the other modules may change This is because the DL250 1 and DL260 CPUs do not allow you to assign duplicate I O addresses You must always correct any I O configuration errors before you place the CPU in RUN mode Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 45 Removing a After a manual configuration the system will automatically retain the new l O Manual addresses through a power cycle You can remove overwrite any manual Configuration configuration changes by changing all of the manually configured addresses back to automatic Power On I O The DL205 CPUs can also be set to automatically check the I O configuration on Configuration power up By selecting this feature you can detect any changes that may have Check occurred while the power was disconnected For example if someone places an output modul
597. to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed DirectSOFT32 X1 K3 GTS M p ted END SBR K3 X20 Y5 I out x21 Y10 I out RT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B STR 2 1 ENT G T S D SAFI 6 MLR RST 3 ENT E N D SHFT a B A ENT SHFT Piet SHFT B i POAN gt PP 4 ENT l C A str SHFT gt 5 ENT GX F our gt 5 aa l C B sra SHFT 3 gt i ENT GX B A OUT gt 1 0 ENT R T SHFT orn mer ENT a ae ES 25 G5 po fut CD Sc 0 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Instruction Set 5 185 Program Control Instructions Master Line Set The Master Line Set instruction allows the MLS program to control sections of ladder logic by forming a new power rail controlled by Lee the main left power rail The main left rail is ee always master line 0 When a MLS K1 instruction is used a new power rail is created at level 1 Master Line Sets and Master Line Resets can be used to nest power rails up to seven levels deep Note that unlike stages in RLLPLUS the logic within the master control relays is still scanned and updated even th
598. truction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to V1500 using the Out instruction x1 LDA Octal Hexadecimal 1 025 2 5 0 0 14 5 Load The HEX equivalent to The unused accumulator octal 25 into the lower 16 bits are set to zero bits of the accumulator HA acc 9 oJo o jo o 1 5 LDX A VISIO HEX Value in 1st Octal stack location Octal Accumulator Stack M he off h k Lead the accurate wih v 1 4 10 1 5 V 1 4 3 5 Levelt O 0 0 00 0 1 5 the address to be offset Levl2 X X X X X X X X The unused accumulator bits are set to zero E ee Revel doi XOX K ERA A OUT Level 4 X X X XX X X X V1500 Acc po o fofo 2 3 4 5 Level5 X X X X X X X X The value in V1435 Copy the value in the lower is 2345 Bevel A X E E A OK 16 bits of the accumulator Level7 X X X X X X X X to V1500 2 3 4 5 Level8 X X X X X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes v1500 B re str gt 1 ENT oO L D A Cc F 33 SHFT anpst 3 0 gt 2 5 ENT O gt L D x B E B A Co oy ANDST 3 SET gt 1 4 1 0 ENT Sc GX B F A A a our gt PREV PREV PREV i A ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL
599. truction is not executed when the Goto instruction is enabled Up to 128 Goto instructions and 64 LBL instructions can be used in the program LBL K aaa Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa aaa Constant K 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 1 FFFF In the following example when C7 is on all the program logic between the GOTO and the corresponding LBL instruction designated with the same constant Kaaa value will be skipped The instructions being skipped will not be executed by the CPU DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes C7 K mm gt ser C A f ent Sarg SHEN c 6 ere wun eme z j 5 ENT E gt 1 ENT X1 2 aa out gt pere oo Jen SHET ANDST 8 1 ANDST 2 F 5 ENT LBL K5 tra gt F A ENT Bur gt gt en X5 Y2 our 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l T2 a 25 o5 ope oD SE 47 For Next FOR NEXT X V Y Y 230 240 250 1 260 Instruction Set Program Control Instructions The For and Next instructions are used to execute a section of ladder logic between the For and Next instruction a specified numbers of times When the For instruction is enabled the program will loop the spec
600. tructions Interrupt The Interrupt instruction allows a section INT of ladder logic to be placed outside the xTITITI main body of the program and executed INT O aaa when needed Interrupts can be called 230 240 250 1 260 from the program or by external interrupts via the counter interface module D2 CTRINT which provides 4 interrupts The software interrupt uses interrupt 00 which means the hardware interrupt 0 and the software interrupt cannot be used together Typically interrupts will be used in an application where a fast response to an input is needed or a program section needs to execute faster than the normal CPU scan The interrupt label and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement in the program When the interrupt routine is called from the interrupt module or software interrupt the CPU will complete execution of the instruction it is currently processing in ladder logic then execute the designated interrupt routine Interrupt module interrupts are labeled in octal to correspond with the hardware input signal X1 will initiate interrupt INT1 There is only one software interrupt and it is labeled INT 0 The program execution will continue from where it was before the interrupt occurred once the interrupt is serviced The software interrupt is setup by programming the interrupt time in V7634 The valid range is 3 999 ms The value must be a BCD value The interru
601. ts that are set to 1 in the accumulator The SUM x X Y 7 HEX result resides in the accumulator 230 240 250 1 260 DirectSOFT Display In the following example when X1 is on the value formed by discrete locations X10 X17 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction The number of bits in the accumulator set to 1 is counted using the Sum instruction The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON LDF X10 j I K8 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Load the value represented by discrete locations X10 X17 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc op op opopoyojojojofjojojojo o ojojpo ojojojojojopo 1 1 0 O0 1j0 1 1 0jojojojjojojojs5 SUM Acc Sum the number of bits in the accumulator set to 1 OUT 0j0joj5 V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes B sra gt 1 ENT L D F B A SHFT anpst 3 5 gt 1 o gt a ENT S U M SHFT 267 SHFT sa I orst gt E
602. tus Bit Map This table provides a listing of the individual Stage control bits associated with each V memory address MSB DL230 DL240 DL250 1 DL260 Stage S Control Bits LSB 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Pados 017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V41000 037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V41001 057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V41002 077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V41003 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V41004 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V41005 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V41006 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V41007 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41010 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41011 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41012
603. u should follow these regulations Using the techniques listed below will further help reduce the risk of safety problems e Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PLC control program e Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1 Division 2 groups A B C and D or non hazardous locations only WARNING Explosion Hazard e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1 Division 2 e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Installation Wiring and Specifications Ea Orderly System The first level of protection can be Shutdown provided with the PLC control program by identifying machine problems gt Analyze your application and identify any rd shutdown sequences that must be 5 performed Typical problems are jammed or missing parts empty bins RE a etc that do not pose a risk of personal oe injury or equipment damage apni eS Detect ou WARNING The control program must Y Z not be the only form of prateciion for any vs Lo problems that may result in a risk of aa personal injury or equipment damage RST nz AAA j l Retract Se Arm 29 O System Power By using electromechanical devices such as master control relays a
604. ue in the accumulator is less than the instruction value SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value NOTE The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in V2010 and V2011 using the CMPD instruction The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison In this example if the value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction SP60 will turn on energizing C30 AE a v2001 V2000 pp 4 5j2lell7 2 9l9 2000 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator Acc Compared CMPD with v2010 6 7 3 9 p5 0 2 6 Compare the value in the accumulator with the value in V2010 and V2011 v2011 v2010 SP60 C30 i a l Handheld Programmer Keystrokes de B Q STR 2 1 ENT 25 L D D Cc A A A 32 SHFT anpst 3 3 gt 2 0 0 one EN CD Cc M P D Cc A B A gE SHFT a SHFT J ors
605. ulator Next we load the starting address of the source table using the LDA instruction LDA Sa Then we load the data into the j C accumulator to be ORed with the table In Goror optel 3000 16 HEX the ORMOV command we specify the accumulator This is the M table beginning table destination V3100 T Handheld Programmer Keystrokes K8888 str gt 40 Jen 8088 Hex Into the lower a L D 3 ER C a 16 bits of the accumulator ANDST 3 2 ORMOV ser lb mer ge e ae 0 ENT C AE E lhe te A ES Oing is contents with the accumulator as it is written or SHET I Masri sr la gt Pe A A ENT The example to the right shows a table of V3000 V3100 two words at V3000 and logicall XORs it ERE XORMOV FoToTo with K3333 The copy of the table at K3333 V3100 shows the result of the XOR AI gt a operation for each word The ladder program example for the XORMOV is similar to the one above for the ORMOV Just use the XORMOV instruction On the handheld programmer you must use the SHFT key and spell XORMOV explicitly DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02
606. ult 1006 pulse train output and input filter for X3 when D2 CTRINT is installed V7640 PID Loop Table Beginning address V400 640 V1400 V7340 V10000 V35740 V7641 Number of Loops Enabled 1 16 V7642 Error Code V memory Error Location for Loop Table V7643 V7647 Reserved V7650 Port 2 End code setting Setting AS5A Nonprocedure communications start V7651 Port 2 Data format Non procedure communications format setting V7652 Port 2 Format Type setting Non procedure communications type code setting V7653 Port 2 Terminate code setting Non procedure communications Termination code setting V7654 Port 2 Store v mem address Non procedure communication data store V Memory address V7655 Port 2 Setup area O 7 Comm protocol flag 0 8 15 Comm time out response delay time flag 1 V7656 Port 2 Setup area 0 15 Communication flag2 flag 3 V7657 Port 2 Setup completion code V7660 V7717 Set up Information Locations reserved for set up information used with future options V7720 V7722 V7720 V7721 V7722 Locations for DV 1000 operator interface parameters Titled Timer preset value pointer Title Counter preset value pointer HiByte Titled Timer preset block size LoByte Titled Counter preset block size V7740 Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup V7741 Output Hold or reset setting Expansion bases 1 and 2 V7742 Output Hold or reset set
607. unction code 16 to write to multiple registers Only one Network instruction Ax RX MWX MRX can be enabled in one scan Thatis the reason for the interlock bits For using many network instructions on the same port look at using the Shift Register instruction Port 2 busy bit Instruction interlock bit MUY SP116 2100 Port Number Slave Address Function Code 06 Preset Single Register Start Slave Memory Address 40001 Start Master Memory Address 2000 Number of Elements n a Modbus Data type 584 984 Mode Exception Response Buffer 400 Instruction interlock bit 2100 SET al T2 ES 25 S5 gega oD SE ap DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 211 ASCII Instructions ASCII Instructions DL260 The DL260 CPU supports several instructions and methods that allow ASCII strings to be read into and written from the PLC communications ports Specifically port 2 on the DL260 can be used for either reading or writing raw ASCII strings but cannot be used for both on the same CPU The DL260 can also decipher ASCII embedded within a supported protocol K Sequence DirectNet Modbus Ethernet via the CPU ports H2 ECOM or D2 DCM module ASCII character tables and descriptions can be found at www asciitable com XIXIX Iy 230 240 250 1 260 Reading ASCII There are several methods that the DL260 can use to read ASCII input strings Input Strings 1 ASC
608. unications port number on the Port and Slave network master DL250 1 260 and the f address of the slave station This instruction can address up to 90 MODBUS L slave address BCD slaves or 90 DirectNET slaves The CPU bottom port BCD format of the word is shown to the right The F1 in the upper byte indicates the Internal port hex use of the bottom port of the DL250 1 260 CPU port number 2 The lower byte o LD contains the slave address number in KF101 BCD 01 to 90 Step 2 The second Load LD instruction 1 2 8 BCD Load Number of determines the number of bytes which will Bytes to Transfer be transferred between the master and slave in the subsequent WX or RX ia instruction The value to be loaded is in of bytes to transfer BCD format decimal from 1 to 128 bytes LD K128 The number of bytes specified also depends on the type of data you want to obtain For example the DL205 Input points can be accessed by V memory locations or as X input locations However if you only want XO X27 you ll have to use the X input data type because the V memory locations can only be accessed in 2 byte increments The following table shows the byte ranges for the various types of DirectLOGIC products DL 205 405 Memory Bits per unit Bytes co V memory 16 2 as T C current value 16 2 aD Inputs X SP 8 1 53 Outputs 8 1 GO Y C Stage T C bits Scrat
609. ur Each time contact XO transitions from off to on the counter increments by one If X1 comes on the counter is reset to zero When the counter reaches the preset of 10 3 counts K of 10 counter status contact CT3 turns on When CT3 turns on output DE Y12 turns on 2 og Counter Current Just like the timers the counter current XO CNT cig 82 Values values are also automatically stored in V K10 22 V Data Type memory For example V1000 holds the x4 oe current value for Counter CTO V1001 a holds the current value for Counter CT1 etc These are 4 digit BCD values v1003 Ki Y12 The l i E g gt OUT primary reason for this is programming flexibility The example V1003 K3 Y13 shows how you can use relational gt OUT contacts to monitor the counter values v1003 K5 1003 K8 Y14 gt lt OUT Word Memory Word memory is referred to as V memory X0 LD V Data Type variable and is a 16 bit location K1345 normally used to manipulate data numbers store data numbers etc ST Some information is automatically stored V1400 in V memory For example the timer current values are stored in V memory The example shows how a four digit BCD constant is loaded into the accumulator and then stored in a V memory location Word Locations 16 bits qd d1 dd 1 dida d 1 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02
610. ure below we have two groups of eight circles Counting in octal we have 20 items meaning 2 groups of eight plus O individuals Don t say twenty say two zero octal This makes a clear distinction between number systems Decimal 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Octal 123 4 5 6 7 10 11 1213 1415 1617 20 After counting PLC resources it s time to access PLC resources there s a difference The CPU instruction set accesses resources of the PLC using octal addresses Octal addresses are the same as octal quantities except they start counting at zero The number zero is significant to a computer so we don t skip it Our circles are in an array of square X 0 123 4567 containers to the right To access a resource our PLC instruction will address X its location using the octal references 1X shown If these were counters CT14 would access the black circle location 2X DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Ea CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc ne S Os OG 50 ab ok el0 No gt as 0 V Memory Binary Coded Decimal Numbers Hexadecimal Numbers Variable memory called V memory stores data for the ladder program and for configuration settings V memory locations and V memory addresses are the same thing and are numbered in octal For example V2073 is a valid location while V1983 is not valid 9 and 8 are not
611. urrent value from Timer T10 T10 8 decimal 484 Mode 1 Find Timer Current Values in the table 8 3001 2 Convert T10 into decimal 8 3 Add the MODBUS starting address for the mode 3001 Timer Current Values V 256 VO V377 0 255 3001 30001 Input Reg Example 4 C54 Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay PLC Addr Dec Start Address Mode 584 984 Mode C54 C54 44 decimal 1 Find Control Relays in the table 44 3072 1 13117 2 Convert C54 into decimal 44 3 Add the starting address for the range 3072 4 Add the MODBUS address for the mode 1 Cc 5e Ho os AD ec oO BO Oo Nc Control Relays C 2048 CO 3777 3072 5119 1 1 Coil Determining the Addressing the memory types for DirectNET slaves is very easy Use the ordinary DirectNET Address native address of the slave device itself To access a slave PLC s memory address APPEAR V2000 via DirectNET for example the network master will request V2000 from the 230 240 250 1 260 Slave DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration 431 Network Master Operation xIxIlYvlIY This section describes how the DL250 1 and DL260 can communicate on a MODBUS 230 240 250 1 260 Or DirectNET network as a master For MODBUS networks it uses the MODBUS RTU protocol which must be interpreted by all the slaves on the network Both MODB
612. us bit and the the counter status bit turns on and the current value are not specified in the counter continues to count up to a counter Scion maximum count of 9999 The maximum value will be held until the counter is reset 230 240 250 1 260 Preset Instruction Specifications Counter Reference CTaaa Specifies the counter number Preset Value Bbbb Constant value K or a V memory location Pointer P for DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 Current Values Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT memory locations The V memory location is the counter location 1000 For example the counter current value for CT3 resides in V memory location V1003 Discrete Status Bit The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory location It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value For example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb Counters CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 V memory for v preset values 1400 7377 1400 7377 2000 2377 2000 3777 10000 17777 10000 37777 2000 3777 1400 7377 1400 7377 Pointers P 10000 17777 10000 37777 preset only Constants K preset only 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 ie fe aah CT
613. use DirectSOFT32 for entering real numbers using the LDR Load Real instruction The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees Since transcendental functions operate only on real numbers we do a LDR load real 45 The trig functions operate only in radians so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command After using the SINR Sine Real instruction we use an OUTD Out Double instruction to move the result from the accumulator to V memory The result is 32 bits wide requiring the Out Double to move it Accumulator contents DirectSOFT32 Display viewed as real number a LDR Load the real number 45 into R45 he accumulator 45 000000 RADR Convert the degrees into radians leaving the result in the 0 7358981 accumulator SINR Take the sine of the number in he accumulator which is in 0 7071 067 radians OUTD Copy the value in the accumulator to V2000 0 7071067 2000 and V2001 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 1 37 Number Conversion Instructions ASCII to HEX The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a ATH table of ASCII values to a specified table of JATH AEAF HEX values ASCII values are two digits yana and their HEX equivalents are one digit eee ee This means an ASCII table of four V memory locations would only require two V memor
614. ut output or other memory type status needs to be modified There are two basic types of forcing available with the DL205 CPUs Note DirectNet protocol does not support bit operations e Forcing from a peripheral not a permanent force good only for one scan e Bit Override DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 holds the I O point or other bit in the current state Valid bits are X Y C T CT and S These memory types are discussed in more detail later in this chapter Regular Forcing This type of forcing can temporarily change the status of a discrete bit For example you may want to force an input on even though it is really off This allows you to change the point status that was stored in the image register This value will be valid until the image register location is written to during the next scan This is primarily useful during testing situations when you need to force a bit on to trigger another event DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 EZ CPU Specifications and Operation 47 Cc no 5 Os OG 50 ab ok 18 No gt a aS 0 Bit Override OFF CPU Bus Communication Update Clock Special Relays and Special Registers Bit Override DL240 DL250 1 and DL260 Bit override can be enabled on a point by point basis by using AUX 59 from the Handheld Programmer or by a menu option from within DirectSOFT32 Bit override basically disables any changes to the discrete point by the CPU For exampl
615. valid octal digits Each V memory location is one data word wide meaning 16 bits For configuration registers our manuals will show each bit of a V memory word The least significant bit LSB will be on the right and the most significant bit MSB on the left We use the word significant referring to the relative binary weighting of the bits V memory address V memory data octal MSB binary LSB V2017 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 V memory data is 16 bit binary but we rarely program the data registers one bit at a time We use instructions or viewing tools that let us work with binary decimal octal and hexadecimal numbers All these are converted and stored as binary for us A frequently asked question is How do tell if a number is binary octal BCD or hex The answer is that we usually cannot tell by looking at the data but it does not really matter What matters is the source or mechanism which writes data into a V memory location and the thing which later reads it must both use the same data type i e octal hex binary or whatever The V memory location is a storage box that s all It does not convert or move the data on its own Since humans naturally count in decimal we prefer to enter and view PLC data in decimal as well via operator interfaces However computers are more efficient in using pure binary numbers A compromise solut
616. value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Acc opopojyoyojojojojofjojojoyo ojyojojpop1 1 o 1f1 1 1Jo 1 1 1 O O O 1 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 21 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 00 1 5 24 2 6 4 7 6 8g 4 1 5 7 8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 319 94 2 2 16 8 7 38 4 20 5 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4 4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4 4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2 8 1 9 4 17 6 3 1 8 4 2 6 3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6 6 2 216 8 4 4 8 BCD 16384 8192 2048 1024 512 256 64 32 16 1 28529 Convert the binary value in BCD Equivalent Value the accumulator to the BCD equivalent value 8 4211 8 4 2 1 8 4 21 8 4 2 1 8a 42 1 8 4 2 1 8 42 1 8 4 21 Acc 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 OUTD V2010 Copy the BCD value in the ololo 2ls 5 2 9 The BCD value accumulator to V2010 and V2011 copied to v2011 v2010 V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ora gt ENT SHFT anos s WPa gt We Neo fo Ieo ENT SHFT P c Pa is a ENT Sur SFT P 3 gt le lo WPa Woo E 5 aS so Ey 2 3 O 5 0 mn DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Number Conversion Instructions Inver
617. value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero In the following example when X1 is on the value in V2000 will be loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are copied to V2010 using the Out instruction DirectSOFT32 LD V2000 accumulator Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 0j0jojoj 8 9 3J5 Acc OUT v2010 v2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to v2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E gt ENT SHET ANDST gt c 3 ds A 6 ENT oe gt SAE ano ll 2 A 0 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 5 aS so co 26 O 5 0 mn Standard RLL Instructions Accumulator Stack Load Out Double The Out Double instruction is a 32 bit OUTD instruction that copies the value in the Ji v ivilv accumulator to two consecutive V memory locations at a specified starting location OUTD 230 240 250 1 260 Aaaa Aaaa Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa V memory V All See page 3 50 All See page 3 51 All See page 3 52 All See page 3 53 Pointer
618. ve numerical order however the numerical rotary selection determines the X and Y addressing order The CPU will recognize the local and expansion l O on power up Do not duplicate numerial selections e The TERM termination switch on the two endmost D2 EMs must be in the ON position The other D2 EMs in between should be in the OFF position e Use the D2 EXCBL 1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2 EMs together Either of the RJ45 ports labelled A and B on the D2 EM can be used to connect one base to another Cc e Ho os AD ec oO BO Oo Nc DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration KE Expansion Base The bit settings in V memory registers V7741 and V7742 determine the expansion Output Hold Option bases outputs response to a communications failure The CPU will exit the RUN mode to the STOP mode when an expansion base communications failure occurs If the Output Hold bitis ON the outputs on the corresponding module will hold their last state when a communication error occurs lf OFF default the outputs on the module unit will turn off in response to an error The setting does not have to be the same for all the modules on an expansion base The selection of the output mode will depend on your application You must consider the consequences of turning off all the devices in one or all expansion bases at the same time vs letting the system run steady state while unresponsive to input c
619. vel Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level 0 N ona A wo DY on Doak OMN N Da A OMN Accumulator Stack x x x x x x ojo xj x x x x x ojo x xj x x x x o x xj x x x x o X X X X XxX x N x xj x x x x x x x x x x o Accumulator Stack X x x x x x Oo N 0 0 9 X x x x x x xj jo x x x x x x x o x x x x x x xX x x x x gt x X XxX xX x x x x u x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Xx x x x x o Accumulator Stack X XXX X X x Xx Xx x x x x xX lt x x x x x x x x x xX x x x x x gt x x x Xx x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x DYN WWWWWWWV WWWWWWWV Standard RLL Instructions Y Accumulator Stack Load Using Pointers Many of the DL205 series instructions will allow Vmemory pointers as a operand Pointers can be useful in ladder logic programming but can be difficult to understand or implement in your application if you do not have prior experience with pointers commonly known as indirect addressing Pointers allow instructions to obtain data from Vmemory locations referenced by the pointer value NOTE In the DL205 V memory addressing is in octal However the value in the pointer location which will ref
620. view General CPU Features DL230 CPU Features DL240 CPU Features DS a IAS The CPU is the heart of the control rin E E an system Almost all system operations are controlled by the CPU so it is important DL260 A Feny that it is set up and installed correctly This chapter provides the information en needed to understand e the differences between the different models of CPUs e the steps required to setup and 020 install the CPU eo PORT2 The DL230 DL240 DL250 1 and D2 260 are modular CPUs which can be installed in 3 4 6 or 9 slot bases All I O modules in the DL205 family will work with any of the CPUs The DL205 CPUs offer a wide range of processing power and program instructions All offer RLL and Stage program instructions See Chapter 5 They also provide extensive internal diagnostics that can be monitored from the application program or from an operator interface The DL230 has 2 4K words of memory comprised of 2 0K of ladder memory and approximately 400 words of V memory data registers It has 90 different instructions available for programming and supports a maximum of 256 I O points Program storage is in the EEPROM which is installed at the factory In addition to the EEPROM there is also RAM on the CPU which will store system parameters V memory and other data which is not in the application program The DL230 provides one built in RS232C communicatio
621. visor o s ojo 1 o poo 1 v1400 visor os o o 1 o o o 0 v1400 v1402 9 9 9 9 2 v1402 9 9 9 9 2 a visos 3 lo 74 3 Destinatio visos 3 o7 l4 3 Destination Mm vu lalala 9 9 9 9 v1500 viaa alaehi 4 o 5 o o v1500 8 vi405 1 o 1 o 5 vi4o5 1 o 1 o 5 22 v1i406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 v1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 Os seba SP56 OFF Guna SCI lac SPS6 ON a until end of scan 5 0 or next instruction 020 A that uses SP56 Es DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 l ze ES 25 C5 po fut CD SE dp Source to Table STT X X xX v 230 240 250 1 260 Standard RLL Instructions Table Instructions The Source To Table instruction moves a value from a V memory location into a V memory table and increments a table pointer by 1 When the table pointer STT reaches the end of the table it resets to 1 wage The first V memory location in the table contains the table pointer which indicates the next location in the table to store a value The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Source To Table function Step 1 Load the length of the table number of V memory locations into the first level of the accumulator stack This parameter must be a HEX value 0 to FF Step
622. wer Input Input Module Output Module Auxiliary Input Module Output Module 24VDC Inputs Com Outputs Com Supply Inputs Com Outputs Com A ry I T Ty 1 1 y 7 1 Y O ao Loads Load 200 Input Loads Load Supply Supply Supply DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 2 16 Installation Wiring and Specifications Sinking Sourcing Before going further in the study of wiring strategies you must have a solid Concepts understanding of sinking and sourcing concepts Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output circuit discussions It is the goal of this section to make these concepts easy to understand further ensuring your success in installation First the following short definitions are provided followed by practical applications Sinking provides a path to supply ground Sourcing provides a path to supply source First you will notice these are only associated with DC circuits and not AC because of the reference to and polarities Therefore sinking and sourcing terminology DN only applies to DC input and output circuits Input and output points that are sinking E0 or sourcing only can conduct current in only one direction This means it is possible z9 to connect the external supply and field device to the I O point with current trying to ce flow in the wrong direction and the circuit wi
623. with the first rung of the See ra A ladder program evaluating it from left to palillo Force M right and from top to bottom It continues ______ rung by rung until it encounters the END Gell nus Communication coil instruction At that point a new image Y for the outputs is complete Update Clock Special Relays Y x0 x1 YO e Solve the Application Program AA OUT Co y Solve PID equations DL250 C100 y AD K10 Write Outputs Y 3 P Gur Write Outputs to Specialty I O Y END Diagnostics The internal control relays C the stages S and the variable memory V are also updated in this segment You may recall the CPU may have obtained and stored forcing information when it serviced the peripheral devices If any I O points or memory data have been forced the output image register also contains this information J a e Lol D o e suonyeoosds Ndo ae NOTE If an output point was used in the application program the results of the program solution will overwrite any forcing information that was stored For example if YO was forced on by the programming device and a rung containing YO was evaluated such that YO should be turned off then the output image register will show that YO should be off Of course you can force output points that are not used in the application program In this case the point remains forced because there is no solution that results from the application program executio
624. within a single scan If the instruction executes on multiple consecutive scans it will be difficult to know the actual contents of either table at any particular time So remember to swap just on a single scan Operand Data Type DL260 Range aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 53 The example to the right shows a table of V3000 V3100 two words at V3000 We will swap its contents with another table of two words at LaSer SWAP ALBrCID 3100 by using the Swap instruction The required ladder program is given below 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 The example program below uses a PD contact triggers for one scan for off to on transition First we load the length of the tables two words into the accumulator Then we load the address of the first table V3000 into the accumulator using the LDA instruction converting the octal address to hex Note that it does not matter which table we declare first because the swap results will be the same DirectSOFT32 Display X0 LD Load the constant value 2 Jp Hex into the lower 16 bits 11 K2 of the accumulator LDA Convert octal 3000 to HEX and load the value into the O 3000 accumulator This is the table beginning SWAP Swap the contents of the able in the previous V 3100 instruction with the one at Handheld Programmer Keystrokes P D A str SHFT ov 3 gt o e L D C
625. wo input timer accumulating timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds The timer discrete status bit T6 will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds Notice in this example the timer times for 1 second stops for one second then resumes timing The timer will reset when C10 turns on turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0 DirectSOFT Timing Diagram x1 Seconds 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Le 8 TMRA T6 X1 K30 TA C10 C10 T6 Y10 T6 Ci t 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0 OUT urren vas 1 10 Seconds Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes cont B D A STR gt 1 ENT 3 0 ENT Cc B A Ty G STR gt SHFT A i 5 ENT STA gt SHFT R 6 ENT N A G GX B A Tur SHFT gt 6 gt our gt 1 o ENE Accumulator Timer Example Using In the following example a single input timer is used with a preset of 4 5 seconds Comparative contacts are used to energized Y3 Y4 and Y5 at one second intervals Comparative respectively The comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset Contacts Direct
626. wo ways that most host software conventions allow you to MODBUS Address specify a PLC memory location These are e By specifying the MODBUS data type and address e By specifying a MODBUS address only Cc 5e Ho 05 mko cT oo BO Oo Nc DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 System Design and Configuration EZA If Your Host Software Many host software packages allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and the Requires the Data MODBUS address that corresponds to the PLC memory location This is the easiest Type and Address method but not all packages allow you to do it this way The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PLC data you are using The PLC memory types are split into two categories for this purpose e Discrete X SP Y C S T CT contacts e Word V Timer current value Counter current value In either case you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the appropriate MODBUS address if required The table below shows the exact equation used for each group of data DL250 1 Memory Type QTY PLC Range MODBUS MODBUS Dec Octal Address Range Data Type Decimal For Discrete Data Types Convert PLC Addr to Dec Start of Range Data Type Inputs X X0 X777 2048 2560 Input 5 5 2 Special Relays SP SPO SP137 3072 3167 Input SP320 SP717 3280 3535 12 Outputs Y Y777 2048 2560 Coil 128 YO Control Re
627. x Use termination Network resistors at both ends of RS 422 network wiring matching the impedance rating of the cable between 100 and 500 ohms RXD RXD ASCII TXDs Slave TXD Device Signal GND 9 TXO Termination 10 TXD Resistor at ED 13 RXD both ends of The recommended cable 6 RXD network for RS422 is Belden 11 RTS 9729 or equivalent q 12 RTS PORT2 14 CTS 15 CTS Master 7 0V A RS 232 RS 232 signals are used for shorter distances 15 meters max and limited to Network communications between two devices 6 Port 2 Pin Descriptions DL250 1 ree ee 1 5V 5VDC i 1 1 2 TXD2 _ Transmit Data RS232C GND Signal GND O 9 0 3 RXD2 Receive Data RS232C RXD e gt 4 RTS2 Ready to Send RS 232C i l TXD o 5 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 232C i 6 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 L we RxD O o 2 7 0V Logic Ground CTS a e o 8 0V Logic Ground RTS o 9 TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 o RTS es 0 10 TXD2 Transmit Data RS 422 CTS O 15 11 RTS2 Request to Send RS 422 v A Send RS 422 2 ASCII A RTS PORT 2 13 RXD2 Receive Data RS 422 o2 Slave Bae f f Master 14 CTS2 Clear to Send RS422 92 Device n each 5 15 CTS2 Clear to Send RS 422 Su CTS 25 device 0 Dm HO oe DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions In This Chapter I
628. y locations for the equivalent HEX table The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions Listed below are the steps necessary to program an ASCII to HEX table function The example on the following page shows a program for the ASCII to HEX table function Step 1 Load the number of V memory locations for the ASCII table into the first level of the accumulator stack Step 2 Load the starting V memory location for the ASCII table into the accumulator This parameter must be a HEX value Step 3 Specify the starting V memory location Vaaa for the HEX table in the ATH instruction Helpful Hint For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range aaa aaa Vmemory V All See p 3 52 All See p 3 53 In the example on the following page when X1 is ON the constant K4 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the accumulator stack when the next Load instruction is executed The starting location for the ASCII table V1400 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction The starting location for the HEX table V1600 is specified in the ASCII to HEX instruction The table bel
629. y registers to higher numbered V memory registers Reverse does the search from higher numbered V memory registers to lower numbered V memory registers Found Index Value specifies whether the Begining or the End byte of the ASCII string found will be loaded into the Found Index register Found Index specifies the V memory register where the Found Index Value will be stored A value of FFFF will result if the desired string is not located in the memory registers specified A value of EEEE will result if there is a conflict in the AFIND search parameters specified NOTE Quotation marks are not required around the Search String item Quotes are valid characters that the AFIND can search for Search for String up to 128 characters C NI 10 oc Base Address All V memory os See page 3 53 gt oO 9 Total Number of Bytes All V memory Os See page 3 53 a or K1 128 DN Search Starting Index All V memory See page 3 53 or K0 127 Found Index All V memory See page 3 53 DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 AFIND Search Example Standard RLL Instructions 5 21 F ASCII Instructions Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid In the following example the AFIND instruction is used to search for the day portion of Friday in the ASCII
630. y the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to Mm v2010 Y 30 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes nN Ss xO B ENT 52 str gt 1 2d L D Cc A A A SHFT ENT 5J ANDST _ 3 gt 2 0 0 0 ar m D V Cc A A G SHFT 73 s aio gt 2 o 0 6 ENT GX V Cc A B A OUT gt SHET AND 2 0 1 0 ENT DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions Math Instructions Divide Double Divide Double is a 32 bit instruction that DIVD divides the BCD value in the accumulator xIlxIivlv by a BCD value Aaaa which must be obtained from two consecutive V memory DIVD 230 240 25071 280 locations You cannot use a constant as Aaaa the parameter in the box The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location Operand Data Type DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa Vmemory Vv All V mem See p 3 52 All V mem See p 3 53 Pointer P Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON BCD number was encountered NOTE Status flags are valid o
631. your Y Solve PID Equations DL250 application program solutions Y You can use the mode switch to select Run Write Outputs Mode operation DL240 DL250 1 and Y DL260 Or with the mode switch in TERM Write Outputs to Specialty 1 O position you can use a programming Y device such as the Handheld Diagnostics Programmer to place the CPU in Run Mode You can also edit the program during Run Mode The Run Mode Edits are not bumpless Instead the CPU maintains the outputs in their last state while it accepts the new program information If an error is found in the new program then the CPU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode WARNING Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the application should make changes to the program Changes during Run Mode become effective immediately Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 CPU Specifications and Operation EZ Read Inputs The CPU reads the status of all inputs then stores it in the image register Input image register locations are designated with an X followed by a memory location Image register data is used by the CPU when it solves the application program Of course an input may change after the CPU has read the inputs Generally the CPU scan time is measured in milliseconds I
632. ype DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250 1 Range DL260 Range A aaa aaa aaa aaa Inputs X 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Outputs Y 0 177 0 177 0 777 0 1777 Control Relays Cc 0 377 0 377 0 1777 0 3777 Stage S 0 377 0 777 0 1777 0 1777 Timer E 0 77 0 177 0 377 0 377 Counter CT 0 77 0 177 0 177 0 377 Special Relay SP 0 117 540 577 0 137 540 617 0 137 540 717 0 137 540 717 Global GX 0 3777 Global GY 0 3777 In the following Or example when input X1 or X2 is on output Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x1 xo str gt 1 ENT OUT OR gt 2 ENT X2 out gt 5 ENT In the following Or Not example when input X1 is on or X2 is off output Y5 will energize DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes x1 Y5 stR gt 1 ENT OUT o Z orn gt 2 ENT e x2 a O 1 out gt 5 ENT _ o JJ am 5 w O oO dp DL205 User Manual 3rd Ed 06 02 Standard RLL Instructions 5 13 Boolean Instructions Or Bit of Word The Or Bit of Word instruction logically ORB ors a normally open contact in parallel ae a aes with another contact in a rung Status of the contact will be the same state as the Se tae i bit referenced in the associated mem

DL205 User Manual Volume 1 of 2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents